SI2001E1

Document Sample
SI2001E1 Powered By Docstoc
					                                    SPECIAL PROVISIONS
                ROUTE 35 OVER THE MANASQUAN RIVER BRIDGE REHABILITATION
             FROM NORTH OF ASHLEY AVENUE TO NORTH OF WILL‟S HOLE THOROFARE
                                         BRIDGE
                                  CONTRACT NO. 015009070
                                 PAVING AND STRUCTURES
                           BRIELLE BOROUGH, MONMOUTH COUNTY
                     POINT PLEASANT BEACH BOROUGH, OCEAN COUNTY

                                 AUTHORIZATION OF CONTRACT
     The Contract for this Project is authorized by the provisions of Title 27 of the Revised Statutes of New Jersey
and supplements thereto, and Title 23 of the United States Code - Highways.

                                    SPECIFICATIONS TO BE USED
     The 2001 U.S. Customary English Standard Specifications for Road and Bridge Construction, of the New
Jersey Department of Transportation as amended herein will govern the construction of this Project and the
execution of the Contract.
     These Special Provisions consist of the following:

          Pages 1 to 285 inclusive for General, Road, and Bridge Provisions.

      State of New Jersey Equal Employment Opportunity for Contracts Funded by Wholly State Funds, pages 1 to 4
inclusive, dated April 2003.
      Payroll Requirements for 100 Percent State Projects, dated December 1986, revised September, 1992.
      Americans with Disabilities Act for 100 Percent State Funded Contracts, page 1, dated August 1993.
      Equal Employment Opportunity Special Provisions Construction Contracts Funded by Wholly State Funds,
pages 1 to 10 inclusive, dated April 2003.
      Small Business Enterprise Utilization Attachment for 100% State Funded Contracts, pages 1 to 6 inclusive,
dated March 2004.
      Minority/Female Outreach and Training Program for Wholly State Funded Projects attachment, dated
September 7, 1999.
      The project work has areas of asbestos identified for removal, as shown on the plans. Project specific
requirements for removal, handling, and disposal are attached to these special provisions as Appendix A – Asbestos
Removal, consisting of 12 pages, dated March 30, 2006.
      The project work has areas of lead contaminated soil designated for removal, as shown on the plans. Project
specific requirements for removal, handling, and disposal are included in these Special Provisions. Lead
Contaminated Soil items are shown in Section 201.
      The project work has areas of lead contaminated paint removal, as shown on the plans. Project specific
requirements for removal, handling, and disposal are part of these provisions Section 514 – Painting Existing
Bridges.
      The Contractor shall pay the minimum wage rates determined by the New Jersey Department of Labor.
      State wage rates may be obtained from the New Jersey Department of Labor (Telephone: 609-292-2259) or by
accessing the Department of Labor‟s web site at http://www.nj.gov/labor/lsse/lspubcon.html The State wage rates
in effect at the time of award will be made a part of this Contract, pursuant to Chapter 150, Laws of 1963 (NJSA
34:11-56.25, et seq.).
      In the event it is found that any employee of the Contractor or any subcontractor covered by the Contract, has
been paid a rate of wages less than the minimum wage required to be paid by the Contract, the State may terminate
the Contractor‟s or subcontractor‟s right to proceed with the Work, or such part of the Work, as to which there has
been a failure to pay required wages and to prosecute the Work to completion or otherwise. The Contractor and its
sureties shall be liable to the State for any excess costs occasioned thereby.




Route 35 over Manasquan River Bridge Rehabilitation
Monmouth and Ocean Counties                                                                                   Page 1
                          DIVISION 100 - GENERAL PROVISIONS
                              SECTION 101 - GENERAL INFORMATION
101.01 General.
        THE FOLLOWING IS ADDED:

      Pursuant to NJSA 27:1B-21.6 and USC (United States Code) Section 115, the Commissioner intends to enter
into an advanced construction contract for the advancement of the Project. Although the advanced construction
contract will pledge funds anticipated to be appropriated for the Project by the Legislature, payment of the moneys
pledged is subject to the availability of funds in the fiscal year (FY) in which the funds are to be appropriated. Only
amounts appropriated by law may be expended.
      The Commissioner intends to proceed expeditiously with the Project. However, there is no assurance that the
Annual Appropriations Act will contain an appropriation or that the Federal Government will approve or provide
federal funding for the Project. The Legislature has no legal obligation to make such an appropriation. Failure by
the Legislature to appropriate funds or failure by the Federal Government to approve or provide federal funding
sufficient to advance the Project will not constitute a default under, or breach of, any contract entered into by the
State for the construction of the Project. However, if the State terminates the Contract or suspends work under the
Contract because the Legislature has failed to appropriate or the Federal Government has failed to provide or
approve sufficient funding to advance the Project, the parties to the Contract will retain their rights pursuant to the
suspension of work and termination of Contract Provisions of the Project specifications; except as indicated below.
      The Contractor shall not expend or cause to be expended any sum in excess of the amount allocated in the
current fiscal year's Capital Program (as specified below). The Department will notify the Contractor when each
level of additional funding has been appropriated by the Legislature or approved or provided by the Federal
Government. Any expenditure by the contractor which exceeds the amount actually appropriated or exceeds the
amount of approved federal funding is at the Contractor's risk and the Contractor waives any right to recover any
sum in excess of that appropriated amount or the amount approved or provided by the Federal Government even if
the State terminates or suspends work under the Contract because the Legislature has failed to appropriate or the
Federal Government has not provided or approved sufficient funds to advance the Project.
      The approved 2007 Capital Program has an item with $ 20.0 million for the construction of the Project.
      It is anticipated that $ 10.45 million dollars in additional funds will be provided during State FY 2008.
      It should be noted that the Federal FY begins October 1 of the previous calendar year and that the State FY
begins July 1 of the previous calendar each year.

      Pursuant to NJSA 27:1B-21.6, the Commissioner intends to enter into a multi-year contract for the
advancement of the Project. Although the multi-year contract will pledge funds anticipated to be appropriated for
the Project by the Legislature, payment of the moneys pledged is subject to the availability of funds in the fiscal year
(FY) in which the funds are to be appropriated. Only amounts appropriated by law may be expended.
      The Commissioner intends to proceed expeditiously with the Project. However, there is no assurance that the
Annual Appropriations Act will contain an appropriation for the Project. The Legislature has no legal obligation to
make such an appropriation. Failure by the Legislature to appropriate funds sufficient to advance the Project will
not constitute a default under, or breach of, any contract entered into by the State for the construction of the Project.
However, if the State terminates the Contract or suspends work under the Contract because the Legislature has failed
to appropriate sufficient funding to advance the Project, the parties to the Contract will retain their rights pursuant to
the suspension of work and termination of Contract Provisions of the Project specifications; except as indicated
below.
      The Contractor shall not expend or cause to be expended any sum in excess of the amount allocated in the
current fiscal year's Capital Program (as specified below). The Department will notify the Contractor when each
level of additional funding has been appropriated by the Legislature. Any expenditure by the Contractor that
exceeds the amount actually appropriated is at the Contractor's risk and the Contractor waives any right to recover
any sum in excess of that appropriated amount even if the State terminates or suspends work under the Contract
because the Legislature has failed to appropriate sufficient funds to advance the Project.
      The approved 2007 Capital Program has an item with $ 20.0 million for the construction of the Project.
      It is anticipated that $ 10.45 million dollars in additional funds will be provided during State FY 2008.



Route 35 over Manasquan River Bridge Rehabilitation
Monmouth and Ocean Counties                                                                                         Page 2
      It is further anticipated that the balance of the funds necessary to complete the Project will be provided during
State FY 2008.
      It should be noted that the State FY begins July 1 of the previous calendar year.

101.03 Terms.
          THE FIRST SENTENCE IS CHANGED TO:
     When the following terms are used in the Contract Documents, the intent and meaning shall be strictly
construed as follows:

          THE FOLLOWING TERMS ARE ADDED:

ADDITIONAL COMPENSATION. A monetary payment(s), sought by the Contractor, premised upon (1.) an
   adjustment or modification to the Contract pay item(s) for particular work or (2.) any or all forms of
   compensation over and above that which is specifically provided under the various individual Contract Pay
   Items or Contract payment provisions.

COMPLETION OF THE CONTRACT. The event termed “Completion of the Contract”, under the Specifications
   and the Contractual Liability Act NJSA 59:13-1 et seq., shall be deemed to have occurred as of the date the
   Contractor accepts or accepts with reservation of specific claims, in writing in accord with forms supplied by
   the Department, the Final Certificate issued by the Department or the 31st day after issuance of said Final
   Certificate by the Department, whichever event may be the first to occur.

CLAIM. The Contractor has reason to believe it is entitled to additional compensation and/or an extension of
    contract time, in accordance with and subject to the Contract Documents and the provisions of the Contractual
    Liability Act, N.J.S.A. 59:13-1 et seq., arising out of or relating to the happening of an event, thing or
    occurrence or an act or failure to act by the Engineer. A claim accrues when it arises, meaning when a
    situation or occurrence takes place or comes about which has or possesses the potential to support or become
    the basis for additional compensation and/or an extension of time.

DISPUTE (AS TO A CLAIM). A disagreement between the Department and the Contractor with regard to the
    Work or Contract Documents arising out of a claim by the Contractor for additional compensation or an
    extension of time.

FINAL CERTIFICATE. It is the final payment document that sets forth the total amount payable to the Contractor,
    including therein an itemization of said amount segregated as to Pay Item quantities, Extra Work, and any
    other basis for payment; it also includes therein any retainage to be released and all deductions made or to be
    made from prior payments as required pursuant to the provisions of the Contract Documents, which may result
    in either a Final Payment to the Contractor or a Credit (payment) due the Department.

NON-BINDING MEDIATION. The fourth and final step in the Department‟s Contractual Claim Resolution Process
   for claims arising under the Contract utilizing a non-binding mediation forum wherein an independent
   mediator is engaged in an attempt to resolve a claim presented by a Contractor.

PARCEL. Property to be acquired for transportation purposes, described by metes and bounds.

SECRETARY, DEPARTMENT CLAIMS COMMITTEE. The individual employed by the Department who
    gathers information and provides administrative assistance to the members of the Department Claims
    Committee. This individual is the conduit between the Department Claims Committee members and the
    Contractor. Contact by the Contractor regarding any issue involving the Claims Committee or Mediation shall
    be through the Secretary.

          THE FOLLOWING TERMS ARE CHANGED:

          THE THIRD ITEM LISTED UNDER THE TERM “COMPLETION” IS CHANGED TO:




Route 35 over Manasquan River Bridge Rehabilitation
Monmouth and Ocean Counties                                                                                      Page 3
          3.   the Contractor has satisfactorily executed and delivered to the Engineer all documents, which is to
               include the federal form FHWA-47 “Contractor‟s Statement of Materials and Labor” according to
               23CFR 635, for Federal Funded Projects, certifications, and proofs of compliance required by the
               Contract Documents, it being understood that the satisfactory execution and delivery of said
               documents, certificates, and proofs of compliance is a requirement of the Contract.

DEPARTMENT CLAIMS COMMITTEE. A contractual body available to review and resolve claims that arise
   under the Contract. The Committee consists of three voting members with the Director of Design Services as
   the chairperson, one member is the Department‟s Chief Financial Office, and one member is selected from the
   other directors within Capital Program Management. Additional non-voting members are a Deputy Attorney
   General, the Secretary of the Department Claims Committee, and a member of the Federal Highway
   Administration (for federally funded projects).

DESIGN UNIT. The term “Design Unit” means the Department‟s consultant engineering firm, the in-house design
    unit(s), or both that prepared the Contract Documents for a project. The design unit(s) for any particular
    project shall be as designated by letter to the awarded Contractor.

EXTREME WEATHER CONDITIONS. When, solely as a result of adverse weather, the Contractor is not able to
   work, the Contractor is entitled to claim that progress of the Work has been affected by extreme weather
   conditions and may seek an extension of Contract Time consistent with the provisions of Subsection 108.11.
HOT MIX ASPHALT (HMA) PAVEMENT. The combination of base course, intermediate course, and surface
   course of hot mix asphalt.

ON-DUTY POLICE. The term “on-duty” with regard to municipal police shall mean that the work of providing
    traffic safety services shall be an extension of regular employment for, and sanctioned by, the municipality,
    even if it is on an overtime pay rate basis. The municipal police, while so working, shall be covered by the
    municipality‟s liability insurance coverage; and must have successfully completed a traffic safety program
    approved by the Department.

PAVEMENT STRUCTURE. The combination of surface, intermediate and base courses, and when specified, a
   subbase course, placed on a subgrade to support the traffic load and distribute it to the roadbed (see Figure
   101-1). These various courses are defined as follows:
        1. Surface Course. One or more layers of specified material of designed thickness at the top of the
            pavement structure.
        2. Intermediate Course. One or more layers of specified material of designed thickness placed on the
            base course.
        3. Base Course. One or more layers of specified material of designed thickness placed on the subgrade
            or subbase.
        4. Subbase. One or more layers of specified material of designed thickness placed on the subgrade.

PLANS. The approved plans, profiles, typical sections, cross-sections, approved working drawings, and
   supplemental drawings, or exact reproductions thereof, which show the location, character, dimensions,
   quantities, and details of the Work to be done. This includes the latest version of all Standard Construction
   Details in effect at the time of Advertisement. Certified working drawings are not plans and not part of the
   Contract Documents.

PROPOSAL: The term “Proposal” means the offer of a Bidder, properly signed and guaranteed, to perform the
   Work for the prices quoted therein.

PROPOSAL FORM: The term “Proposal form” means the Department approved proposal form produced from the
   Expedite software downloaded from the Department‟s Bid Express web site at http://www.bidx.com, prepared
   and submitted for the Work.

REGIONAL DISPUTE BOARD. A three-member Board, comprised of one member from the Division of Project
    Management, one member from the Bureau of Construction Engineering, and the Regional Construction
    Engineer (Chairperson), that is available under the terms of the Contract to review Disputes which have not
    been resolved by the Resident Engineer.


Route 35 over Manasquan River Bridge Rehabilitation
Monmouth and Ocean Counties                                                                                 Page 4
REMEDIATE. The term “remediate” means the process that is approved by the New Jersey Department of
   Environmental Protection to address all regulated discharges.

SPECIFICATIONS. The compilation of provisions and requirements for the performance of prescribed work
    contained in the Standard Specifications, as supplemented by the Supplemental Specifications and Special
    Provisions, and modified by Addenda which, before the receipt of bids, are transmitted to prospective Bidders.
         1. Standard Specifications.           The term “Standard Specifications” means the 2001 Standard
               Specifications for Road and Bridge Construction of the New Jersey Department of Transportation,
               which has been approved for general application and repetitive use.
         2. Supplemental Specifications. Approved additions and revisions to the Standard Specifications.
         3. Special Provisions. Revisions to the Standard and Supplemental Specifications applicable to an
              individual project.
         4. Electrical Materials Specifications. Approved standards for electrical materials, equipment, and
              installations that are in addition to the above specifications.

SUBSTANTIAL COMPLETION. The term “Substantial Completion” means the point at which the performance of
   all Work on the Project has been completed except landscaping items (including the planting of trees, shrubs,
   vines, ground covers, and seedlings), final cleanup, and repair of unacceptable work, and provided the
   Engineer has solely determined that:
        1. the Project is safe and convenient for use by the public, and
        2. failure to complete the Work and repairs excepted above does not result in the deterioration of other
             completed Work; and provided further, that the value of landscaping work remaining to be
             performed, repairs, and cleanup is less than two percent of the Total Adjusted Contract Price.

          THE TERM “SUBSTANTIAL COMPLETION” IS CHANGED TO:

SUBSTANTIAL COMPLETION. The term “Substantial Completion” means the point at which the performance of
   all Work on the Project has been completed except final cleanup and repair of unacceptable Work, and
   provided the Engineer has solely determined that:
        1. the Project is safe and convenient for use by the public, and
        2. failure to complete the Work and repairs excepted above does not result in the deterioration of other
             completed Work; and provided further that the value of repairs and cleanup is less than two percent
             of the Total Adjusted Contract Price.

          THE FOLLOWING TERMS ARE DELETED:

ADDENDA

COMPUTER DISK

CLAIMS REVIEW BOARD

DISPUTE

101.04 Inquiries Regarding the Project.
         THE FOLLOWING IS ADDED:

     Inquiries regarding the various types of work of this Contract shall be directed to the following representatives
of the Department having offices at P.O. Box 600, Trenton, New Jersey 08625, or such other individuals as may
hereafter be designated:
     1. Before Award of the Contract. All inquiries shall be directed to the Bureau of Quality Assurance at
           P.O. Box 600, Trenton, New Jersey 08625.

                Telephone: 609-530-3810 (Eric Hewitson)

                Fax: 609-530-3853




Route 35 over Manasquan River Bridge Rehabilitation
Monmouth and Ocean Counties                                                                                     Page 5
          All inquiries shall include the following:
                a. Name of the company;
                b. Telephone number, fax number, and contact person; and
                c. Specifics of the inquiry, including anticipated impacts.

          The Department will investigate the information provided in the inquiry and then respond through an
          addendum only if determined to be necessary.
     2.   After Award of the Contract. All inquiries shall be directed to the Resident Engineer through the
          following Regional Construction Office:

                Central
                Mr. Thomas J. Dowd, Regional Construction Engineer
                100 Daniels Way
                Freehold, NJ 07728
                Telephone: 732-308-4074

              SECTION 102 - BIDDING REQUIREMENTS AND CONDITIONS
102.01 Prequalification of Prospective Bidders.
        THE ENTIRE SUBSECTION TEXT IS CHANGED TO:

     Bids will be received only from Bidders who meet all of the following requirements:
     1. Before the delivery of the bid, have been prequalified according to Regulations Covering the
          Classification of Prospective Bidders issued according to NJSA 27:7-35.1 et seq.
     2. At the time of delivery of bid, have effective prequalification ratings of not less than the amounts of its
          bid.
     3. At the time of delivery of bid, the Bidder has disclosed ownership as required by NJSA 52:25-24.2.
     4. If the bidder is a corporation not incorporated in the State, it is authorized to do business in the State as
          required by NJSA 14A:15-2 et seq.
     5. The bidder shall also be in compliance with P.L. 2005, c.51.
     6. The bidder must have a valid business registration with the Division of Revenue in the New Jersey
          Department of Treasury as required by NJSA 52:32-44 (P.L. 2001, c.134).
     7. For wholly State-funded contracts, at the time of bid, bidders must have a valid current registration with
          the New Jersey Department of Labor, Division of Wage and Hour Compliance, pursuant to the “Public
          Works Contractor Registration Act,” NJSA 34:11-56.48 et seq. (P.L. 2003, c. 91.).

102.02 Disqualification of Prequalified Prospective Bidders.
        THE CONTENT OF THIS SUBSECTION HAS BEEN DELETED AND IT IS INTENTIONALLY
             LEFT BLANK TO MAINTAIN SUBSEQUENT NUMBERING

102.03 Contents of the Proposal.
        THE SUBSECTION HEADING AND ENTIRE TEXT ARE CHANGED TO:

102.03 Bidder Registration and Downloading of the Bid Documents; Contents of the Bid.

      Electronic bidding information is available on Bid Express at www.bidx.com. Registration and a subscription
fee are required to access the bid documents and plans. The bidder shall download the Expedite bidding software by
navigating to State and clicking the “Utilities Tab”. Before running the electronic bidding program, the Bidder shall
read the on-line help documentation for the Expedite Bidding Software.
      All bid documents with the exception of the Power of Attorney for the Proposal Bond shall be downloaded
from the Bid Express web site. A bid shall consist of the downloaded and properly completed documents plus the
Power of Attorney for the Proposal Bond which shall all be submitted to the Department on or before the time for
the opening of bids.
      The Proposal Form states the location and description of the Project, shows the estimate of the various
quantities and kinds of work to be performed, includes a schedule of Pay Items for which bid prices are invited, and




Route 35 over Manasquan River Bridge Rehabilitation
Monmouth and Ocean Counties                                                                                    Page 6
the date and time for the opening of bids. The Special Provisions state the number of days or date by which the
Project must be completed.
      The Bidder shall submit both a paper bid which is produced using the Expedite software as well as an
electronic copy. No alteration to that software is permitted. The paper bid submitted to the Department will be
reviewed and evaluated by the Department and serve as the basis for the award and subsequent Contract. In case of
discrepancies between the paper bid and the electronic copy, the paper bid shall govern.

102.06 Examination of Contract Documents and Site of Project.
        THE ENTIRE SUBSECTION IS CHANGED TO:

      The Bidder shall examine carefully the site of the proposed Project, the Contract Documents, and other
information before submitting a Proposal. The Contract Documents are not to be construed as an averred
representation or warranty of the existing conditions. In the event the Bidder‟s examination reveals that the site
conditions are inconsistent with the Contract Documents or there are discrepancies, errors, omissions or patent
ambiguities within the Contract Documents, the Bidder shall immediately notify the Department as provided in
Subsection 101.04. Bidders shall make such independent investigation and examination as necessary to satisfy the
Bidder as to the conditions to be encountered in the performance of the Work and the type of equipment and
operations required to perform the Work. The Bidder shall investigate, with respect to possible local material
sources, the quality and quantity of material available and the type and extent of processing that may be required to
produce material conforming to the requirements of the Contract Documents. The submission of a Proposal shall be
considered prima facie evidence that the Bidder has made such independent investigation and examination,
including the information provided below, and is fully aware of the requirements of the Contract Documents,
including all restrictions. Further, the Bidder warrants that the proposed contract prices in the Proposal include all
costs to complete the Work.
      The Bidders must provide written notice to the Regional Construction Engineer as listed in the Special
Provisions Subsection 101.04, at least 24 hours in advance of any investigation at the site, and insure any staff at the
site have two forms of identification and the site authorization form received with the purchase of the Contract
Documents.
      What is specified below is not a part of the Contract and is made available for information only. The
Department makes no representation, warranty or guarantee, expressed or implied, by making available such
information. It is also the Bidder‟s responsibility to access such information.
      1. Investigation of Subsurface and Surface Conditions.
                 The records of the Department‟s subsurface investigation, including, but not limited to, boring logs
           and Geotechnical Engineering Design Reports, may be inspected at or ordered through the Department‟s
           plan file room, 1035 Parkway Avenue, P.O. Box 600, Trenton, New Jersey 08625. This investigation,
           while considered by the Department to be sufficient for design purposes, may not be a sufficient
           substitute for the Bidder‟s own investigation, interpretation, or judgement in preparing a Proposal for
           construction purposes. The Bidder shall not rely on any estimates and quantities included in these
           investigations. The conditions indicated by such investigations or records thereof, and as shown by the
           cross-sections in the Plans, may not be representative of those existing throughout such areas, or that
           materials other than, or in proportions different from those indicated, may be encountered.
                 The soil and rock descriptions shown on the boring logs are determined by a visual inspection of
           samples from the various explorations unless otherwise noted. These samples may be available for
           nondestructive examination. The observed water levels and other water conditions indicated on the
           boring logs are as recorded at the time of the exploration. These levels and other conditions may vary
           considerably, with time, according to the prevailing climate, rainfall, and other factors. If a generalized
           soil profile is described in the text it is intended to convey trends in subsurface conditions. The
           boundaries between strata are approximate and idealized and have been developed by interpretations of
           widely spaced explorations and samples.
                 The Bidder is charged with knowledge of the State‟s physical geography, and in performing its site
           investigation shall be fully aware of the following publications and such others as may be listed in the
           Special Provisions:
           a. Bulletin 50, Geologic Series, “The Geology of New Jersey” by H. Kummel, out of print, available
                 generally as library reference material.
           b. Geologic Maps of New Jersey, available through NJDEP.



Route 35 over Manasquan River Bridge Rehabilitation
Monmouth and Ocean Counties                                                                                       Page 7
          c.   Engineering Soils Survey of New Jersey, available through the Bureau of Research, College of
               Engineering, Rutgers University, New Brunswick, New Jersey 08903.
          d. Soil Surveys of Individual Counties prepared by the US Department of Agriculture, Soil
               Conservation Service, in cooperation with the New Jersey Agricultural Experiment Station and
               Cook College, Rutgers University, available through local Soil Conservation District Offices.
          Additional Publications to refer to are as follows:
          e.
         THE FOLLOWING IS ADDED:

     Pavement core record will be provided in the Special Provision for the Contractor‟s information only. This
investigation, while considered by the Department to be sufficient for design purposes, may not be a sufficient
substitute for the Bidder‟s own investigation, interpretation, or judgment in preparing a Proposal. The conditions
indicated by such investigation may not be representative of those existing throughout such areas, or those materials
other than, or in proportions different from those indicated, may be encountered. The Bidder shall not solely rely on
any information included in this investigation.




Route 35 over Manasquan River Bridge Rehabilitation
Monmouth and Ocean Counties                                                                                    Page 8
                          NEW JERSEY DEPARTMENT OF TRANSPORTATION
                                   PAVEMENT CORE RECORD
     PROJECT/ROUTE & SECTION: ___________________________________________________________

     DRILLER: _____________________________________________________________________________

     INSPECTOR: ___________________________________________________________________________

     COUNTY/TOWNSHIP: ___________________________________________________________________

     DATE STARTED: _____________                                    DATE COMPLETED: __________________



CORE NUMBER                         1                     2                 3                    4                    5

ROUTE

DIRECTION
(N, E, S, W)
MILE POST
(MP or Station)
LANE NO.
(Left to Right)
SHOULDER
(Inside or Outside)
CORE DIAMETER
(Inches)
TOTAL CORE DEPTH
(Inches)

CORE DRILLED TO

SURFACE TYPE
(AC/PC)
AC THICKNESS
(Inches)
PC THICKNESS
(Inches)
         * Lane 1 is the left lane in the direction of travel.

           The pavement information shown herein was obtained for State design and estimate purposes. It is made
     available to the authorized users only that they may have access to the same information available to the State. It is
     presented in good faith, but is not intended as a substitute for investigations, interpretation or judgment of such
     authorized users.




     Route 35 over Manasquan River Bridge Rehabilitation
     Monmouth and Ocean Counties                                                                                     Page 9
     2.    Utility Agreements. In addition to what is provided under Subsection 105.09, the Utility agreements,
           modifications, and orders relating to the Project may be inspected at or ordered through the Department‟s
           plan file room, 1035 Parkway Avenue, P.O. Box 600, Trenton, New Jersey 08625. Existing information
           and proposed construction documents shall be obtained through the utility owners for their respective
           work.
     3.    Existing Plans and As-builts. As-built plans of Department owned facilities may be inspected at the
           Department‟s plan file room or copies ordered upon written request through the Engineering Documents
           Unit, New Jersey Department of Transportation, 1035 Parkway Avenue, P.O. Box 600, Trenton, New
           Jersey 08625. Contour maps may be available for some Projects and the Bidders may inspect such maps
           or obtain copies for their use upon written request to the Engineering Documents Unit. Plans of
           Municipal owned or County owned facilities shall be obtained through the Municipality or County. Any
           information obtained from the existing documents shall be verified by the Bidder in regards to its
           application for bidding and completing the Project. A list of existing structures within the Project will be
           provided on the Plans. The existing plans and as-builts used in the development of Contract Documents
           will be listed in the Special Provisions.
           Existing Plans and As-builts used are as follows:
           a.
     4.    Permits. In addition to the permit information provided in the Contract Documents, the full permits
           relating to the Project may be inspected at or ordered through the Department‟s plan file room, 1035
           Parkway Avenue, P.O. Box 600, Trenton, New Jersey 08625.

102.07 Preparation of Proposal.
        THE ENTIRE SUBSECTION TEXT IS CHANGED TO:

      The Bidder shall submit a Proposal Form, the Proposal Form shall include all addenda which shall also be
downloaded from the Department Bid Express web site. The Bidder shall specify a price in figures for each Pay
Item. For lump sum items, the price shall appear solely in the box provided for the lump sum item under the column
designated as “Amounts.” For unit price items the per unit price shall appear under the column designated “Unit
Price” in the appropriate box, and the product of the respective unit price and the approximate quantity for that item
shall appear under the column designated “Amounts.” The Total Contract Price is the sum of all figures shown in
the column designated “Amounts” and shall appear at the location provided therefor. When the Bidder intends to
bid zero ($0.00) for a Pay Item, a “0” shall appear in the “Unit Price” and “Amounts” columns for unit price items
or in the “Amounts” column for lump sum items.
      When the Proposal Form contains alternate items, the Bidder shall only provide the unit price and amount for
the lowest priced alternate item. When alternate items in the Proposal Form have a lump sum pay quantity, the
Bidder shall only provide the amount for the lowest priced alternate item. The alternate item for which a price has
been provided shall be constructed. When the Proposal Form contains alternate groups of items, the Bidder shall
only provide the unit price and amount for each item within the lowest priced alternate group. The alternate group
of items for which a price has been provided shall be constructed.
      The only entries permitted in the Proposal Form produced using the Expedite software will be the unit or lump
sum prices for items that must be bid. The Expedite software will perform all extensions of the unit or lump sum
prices, calculate the total bid amounts, and print a completed Proposal Form.
      The Proposal Form printed from the Expedite software shall be printed on 8 ½” x 11” white papers and shall
include all revisions to the proposal included in issued addendum. Bids will be accepted only if submitted on the
Proposal Form generated and printed from Expedite software.
      The Bidder shall check its bid prior to submission using the Expedite software. The Bidder shall select “tools”
and then select “check bid” and assure there are no errors prior to printing the electronic bid. After final printing, the
Bidder may make changes to the bid by indicating the changes in ink and initialing prior to submitting the bid. In the
event of a discrepancy between the electronic copy and the paper bid, the paper bid will govern.
      The paper bid must be signed in ink by the Bidder. If the Bidder is an individual, the Bidder‟s name and post
office address must be shown; by a partnership, the name and post office address of each partnership member must
be shown; as a joint venture, the name and post office address of each member or officer of the firms represented by
the joint venture must be shown; by a corporation, the name of the corporation and the business address of its
corporate offices must be shown. For bids submitted by Joint Ventures the bidder shall select “tools” from the
Expedite menu and mark the electronic bid as “Joint Bid.”



Route 35 over Manasquan River Bridge Rehabilitation
Monmouth and Ocean Counties                                                                                       Page 10
102.09 Delivery of Proposals.
        THE ENTIRE SUBSECTION TEXT IS CHANGED TO:

     Once the Bidder has completed the bid and made all desired changes, the paper bid with original signatures and
an electronic copy on a CD-R shall be submitted to the Department. Deliver each bid in one envelope, with the
addenda acknowledgements attached, containing the following:
     (1) Signed paper bid
     (2) Proposal Bond and Power of Attorney
     (3) Updated Financial Statement form DC-74B
     (4) Wholly State funded contracts, proof of the registration as specified in Subsection 102.01
     (5) Wholly State funded contracts, the Certification and Disclosure form (P.L. 2005, c.51)
     (6) Electronic copy in a protective case
     (7) Other related documents as specified, including the Demolition/Asbestos attachments
     The specified SBE or DBE/ESBE attachments may be included in the bid envelope. Clearly indicate its
contents on the envelope, including the bidder‟s name and the DP number of the electronic bid. The bid shall be
mailed or hand carried to the Department at the address and in care of the official in whose office the bids are to be
received. Bids must be received before or at the time and at the place specified in the Advertisement. Bids will not
be accepted after the receipt of bids has been declared closed by the Presiding Officer.
     When the Bidder submits bids for two or more Projects, a single Updated Financial Statement, submitted in a
separate envelope, is acceptable instead of a separate statement for each Project.

102.10 Proposal Bond.
        THE FIRST PARAGRAPH IS CHANGED TO:

     The Proposal Bond guarantees execution of the Contract by the bidder receiving the award.
     The bid, when submitted, shall be accompanied by a Proposal Bond satisfactory to the Department, on the
form furnished by the Department, for a sum of 50 percent of the Total Contract Price. Proposal bonds which do not
comply in all respects with the provisions of N.J.A.C. 16:44-5.1 (d), including no reinsurance, will not be accepted.

102.13 Acknowledgment of Revisions.
        THE SUBSECTION HEADING AND ENTIRE TEXT ARE CHANGED TO:

102.13 Revisions During Bidding.
      Any written, graphic, or electronic information to clarify, correct, or change the Contract Documents or
bidding notices will be issued only as Addenda (or “Addendum” can be used interchangeably) before the opening of
bids that clarify, correct, or change the Contract Documents. The Department will not send addenda to individual
prospective bidders, but will only post addenda on the Department Bid Express web site. No addenda shall be posted
less than 24 hours before the time set for the receipt of bids, with the exception of addenda postponing the bid
opening date and time.
      When Addenda are posted on the Department Bid Express web site, acknowledgment thereof must be made by
the Bidder. Attach each acknowledgement to the Bid envelope. If all acknowledgments have not been attached, the
bid envelope will be returned to the Bidder unopened. It is the obligation of the bidder to check the Department Bid
Express web site for addenda.

102.15 Irregular Proposals.
         THE ENTIRE SUBSECTION TEXT IS CHANGED TO:

     Proposals will be considered irregular and will be rejected by the Department if they are determined to contain
a material defect.

102.16 Disqualification of Bidders.
        THE ENTIRE SUBSECTION TEXT IS CHANGED TO:

     The Department will disqualify a bidder and reject a bid submitted by that bidder if the bidder is determined by
the Department to lack responsibility. Factors demonstrating a lack of responsibility shall include but not be limited
to:



Route 35 over Manasquan River Bridge Rehabilitation
Monmouth and Ocean Counties                                                                                    Page 11
     1.  Evidence of collusion among bidders.
     2.  Uncompleted work, which in the opinion of the Department, might hinder or prevent completion of
         additional work if awarded.
     3. Failure to satisfy the pre-award requirements of the Disadvantaged Business Enterprise or Emerging Small
         Business Enterprise (DBE or ESBE) as specified in the Special Provisions for federally funded contracts.
     4. Failure to satisfy the pre-award requirements of the Small Business Enterprise (SBE) as specified in the
         Special Provisions for wholly State funded contracts.
     5. The bid is materially unbalanced.
     6. Lack of competency or lack of adequate machinery, plant, or other equipment.
     7. Unsatisfactory performance on previous or current contracts.
     8. Questionable moral integrity as determined by the Attorney General of New Jersey or the Department.
     9. Any other outward actions or lack of action that demonstrates the Bidder is not responsible.
     10. Disqualification, suspension, or debarment of an individual, firm, partnership, corporation, or any
         combination as required by NJSA 16:44-8.1

        THE FOLLOWING SUBSECTION IS ADDED:
102.17 Rejection of All Bids.

     The Department may reject all bids when it is advisable to do so in the interest of the State or public.



                 SECTION 103 - AWARD AND EXECUTION OF CONTRACT
103.05 Performance Bond and Payment Bond.
        THE FOLLOWING IS ADDED TO THE FOURTH PARAGRAPH:

Reinsurance is prohibited pursuant to NJAC 16:44-6.1(b)6.

103.06 Execution and Approval of Contract.
        THE HEADING AND THE ENTIRE SUBSECTION IS CHANGED TO:

103.06 Execution of the Contract.

      The successful Bidder shall properly and duly execute a Contract in accord with Contract Documents and
return same, together with the Performance Bond and Payment Bond, within ten State Business Days of the date of
Award or Conditional Award. The successful bidder shall also provide the Department, within the same ten State
Business Day period, proof of a valid business registration with the Division of Revenue in the New Jersey
Department of Treasury. The Contract will not be entered into by the Department unless the Bidder first provides
proof of a valid business registration in compliance with N.J.S.A. 52:32-44 (P.L. 2001, c134 ). For FHWA funded
projects, the successful bidder shall also provide proof of valid, current registration with the New Jersey Department
of Labor, Division of Wage and Hour Compliance as required by “Public Works Contractor Registration Act,”
N.J.S.A. 34:11-56.48 et seq. (P.L. 2003, c. 91). If said Contract is not executed by the Commissioner within 45
State Business Days following receipt from the Bidder of the executed Contract and Performance Bond and
Payment Bond, the Bidder may within its discretion withdraw its bid without penalty; where the Bidder chooses not
to withdraw prior to the Commisioner executing said Contract, the Bidder shall be deemed to have waived any claim
for Additional Compensation or for an extension of time. The Contract shall not become effective until it has been
fully executed by all parties.

        THE FOLLOWING SUBSECTION IS ADDED:
103.08 Contract Documents.

      After Award, the successful bidder may request the number of sets of Plans specified below, without charge.
One copy of Special Provisions and Addenda is furnished, without charge, with each set of the Plans. Additional
sets or additional copies are available to subscribers through www.bidx.com as specified in Subsection 102.03.




Route 35 over Manasquan River Bridge Rehabilitation
Monmouth and Ocean Counties                                                                                     Page 12
                                    Table of Plans Furnished Without Charge

                                  Amount of Contract
                                                                        Sets of Plans
                          For More Than     To and Including
                            $          0        $ 500,000                      1
                                 500,000          1,000,000                    2
                               1,000,000          5,000,000                    3
                               5,000,000         10,000,000                    4
                              10,000,000                  --                   5

                                   SECTION 104 - SCOPE OF WORK
104.01 Intent.
         THE FIRST PARAGRAPH IS CHANGED TO:

      The intent of the Contract Documents is to describe a functionally complete and aesthetically acceptable
Project to be constructed and completed by the Contractor in every detail according to the Contract Documents.
Any work that may be reasonably inferred from the Contract Documents as being required to produce the intended
result shall be supplied whether or not specifically called for. The Contractor is responsible to provide such
elements to complete the Work under the pay items of the Contract for no Additional Compensation as provided
under Subsection 109.02. However, as specified in the respective Subsections, adjustments may be allowed when
the Department determines there is a discrepancy, error, omission, or latent ambiguity. It is understood that only the
best construction practice is to prevail and only materials and workmanship of the first quality are to be used.

104.05 Increased or Decreased Quantities.

          THE FOLLOWING IS ADDED:

    Those Pay Items listed below shall be considered as major Pay Items even though their Contract value may not
be more than ten percent of the Total Contract Price:
    PRESSURE INJECTION, CONCRETE CRACKS
    REPAIR OF CONCRETE DECK, TYPE B
    REPAIR OF CONCRETE DECK, TYPE C
    CONCRETE REPAIRS, TYPE D
    CONCRETE REPAIRS, TYPE E
    REPLACE RIVETS WITH HIGH STRENGTH BOLTS
    REPAIR OF STRUCTURAL STEEL
    FENDER PILE SPLICE
    CONTROL HOUSE REPAIRS DUE TO WATER LEAKAGE
    CLEANING, IF AND WHERE DIRECTED
    RACEWAY CONDUCTORS, TERMINATIONS, AND BOXES


104.07 Changes in Character of Work.
        THE FIRST PARAGRAPH UP TO AND INCLUDING THE FIRST SENTENCE OF ITEM 1 IS
            CHANGED TO:

     If an ordered alteration in the Work pursuant to Subsection 104.02 materially changes the character of the work
of a Pay Item, and if the change substantially increases or decreases the actual unit cost of such changed item as
compared to the actual or estimated actual cost of performing the work of said item according to the Contract
Documents originally applicable thereto, in the absence of a supplementary agreement or unprotested Change Order
specifying the compensation payable, an adjustment in compensation therefore will be made according to the
following:
     1. The basis of such adjustment in compensation will be the difference between the actual unit cost to
           perform the work of said item or portion thereof involved in the alteration as originally planned and the




Route 35 over Manasquan River Bridge Rehabilitation
Monmouth and Ocean Counties                                                                                   Page 13
         actual unit cost of performing the work of said item or portion thereof involved in the alteration, as
         changed.
104.11 Value Engineering
     4. Conditions.
        THE LAST TWO PARAGRAPHS ARE CHANGED TO:

                The proposal shall not change the Contract‟s original design criteria, merely eliminate work, be
           based on an unknown factor, or delay the Project.

                All proposals for changes to bridges and structures shall conform to the current AASHTO Standard
           Specifications for Highway Bridges as modified by the NJDOT Design Manual for Bridges and
           Structures.


                                 SECTION 105 - CONTROL OF WORK
105.03 Plans and Specifications.
        THE ENTIRE TEXT IS CHANGED TO:

     The Contract Documents are essential parts of the Contract, and a requirement occurring in one is as binding as
though occurring in all. All components are complementary and describe and provide for the general completion of
the Project. The Contractor shall keep one set of Plans, Special Provisions, Addenda, Standard Specifications,
Supplemental Specifications, and Standard Details available on the Project site at all times.
     In case of discrepancy, calculated dimensions will govern over scaled dimensions; Plans will govern over
Specifications; Contract Documents will govern over Working Drawings, Right-of-Way Plans will govern over
Plans when setting monuments; Special Provisions will govern over Supplemental Specifications; and Supplemental
Specifications will govern over Standard Specifications.
     The Contractor shall not take advantage of any apparent discrepancy, error, omission, or patent ambiguity in
the Contract Documents. In the event the Contractor discovers any discrepancy, error, omission; or patent
ambiguity in the Contract Documents, or if there is any doubt or question as to the intent or meaning of the Contract
Documents, the Contractor shall immediately notify the Resident Engineer in writing with sufficient detail. The
Department will promptly make, in writing, such corrections and interpretations as deemed necessary. The
Contractor shall not be relieved of the obligation of completing an item of Work because of any discrepancy, error,
omission, or patent ambiguity, and shall complete the Work as directed with adjustments as specified in Section 104.
The Contractor shall not commence with any changes to the Work as provided under the Contract Documents
without written authorization from the Department.

105.04 Working Drawings.
        THE SECOND SENTENCE OF THE THIRD PARAGRAPH IS CHANGED TO:

     Those provisions shall not apply to the review and approval of the design for proprietary walls, noise barriers,
temporary sheeting, sheeting left in place, temporary structures, cofferdams, erection plans, traffic control/staging
plans and precast concrete culverts or any other items where conceptual plans were included in the Contract
Documents and the Contractor is required to complete the final design plans.

          THE FOLLOWING IS ADDED TO THE ELEVENTH PARAGRAPH:

      The design unit(s) shall be as designated for each Contract by letter from the Department.

          THE FOLLOWING IS ADDED TO THE END OF THE SEVENTEENTH PARAGRAPH:


23.      Exodermic Deck System
24.      Steel Grid Flooring
25.      Traffic and Barrier Gates
27.      Fender System Repairs


Route 35 over Manasquan River Bridge Rehabilitation
Monmouth and Ocean Counties                                                                                   Page 14
28.        Finger Joints
29.        Conduit and Wiring System
30.        Bridge Control System
31.        Electrical Service Automatic Transfer Switch
32.        Direct Drive Diesel and Temporary Span Motor Assembly

THE FOLLOWING IS ADDED TO THE END OF THE EIGHTEENTH PARAGRAPH:

9.         Demolition and Erection Plans
10.        Temporary Shielding Design and Details
11.        Temporary Jacking System for Approach Spans Bearing Replacement
12.        Cleaning and Painting Containment/Shielding Design and Details

     The Contractor is cautioned that certain materials required for contract items may have an unusually long lead
time for approval and/or procurement. The preparation of working drawings and other necessary approvals for these
items, if required, shall be expedited so that the construction may proceed as planned. The Contractor shall account
for the required lead times in the preparation of his original baseline progress schedule in accordance with
Subsection 108.04. Materials with unusually long lead time may include, but are not limited to:
     Warning Gates and Barrier Gates
     Specialized concrete mix designs
     Exodermic deck panels
     Open Grid deck Panels
     Bridge Control Console and Cabinets
     DC Drive Cabinets and SCR Drive Cabinets
     Structural Steel for Barrier Gate and Warning Gate platforms

THE FOLLOWING IS ADDED:
         Project Sequencing and Advanced Materials Acquisition – The contractor is alerted to two key items of
work that shall be completed prior to the end of the first winter outage of the bascule span, that is prior to March 1,
2007 – these work items are the installation of the two advance warning gates and two barrier gates and all four
platforms for the barrier gates and warning gates and all the necessary electrical work for the full operation of the
four gates to be completed prior to the opening of the span for normal operation on March 1, 2007. As such the
contractor is required to begin the necessary work for submittals of RFI‟s, shop and working drawings, catalog cuts,
manufacturer data, necessary designs and calculations, etc., – for the gates and components and platforms and
components as necessary, for the Engineer‟s approval, upon AWARD of the contract, no later than three working
days after Award. The Designer‟s Construction Schedule has been prepared with the assumption that this necessary
preparatory work for advance material acquisition will begin by September 5, 2006, contingent upon Award of the
Contract on August 31, 2006. Appropriate adjustments to these dates will be made depending upon the actual
Award date of the contract.


105.07 Coordination of Contract Documents.
        THE SUBSECTION HEADING AND TEXT ARE CHANGED TO:

105.07 Purchase of Contract Documents.
        THE CONTENT OF THIS SUBSECTION HAS BEEN DELETED AND IT IS INTENTIONALLY
            LEFT BLANK TO MAINTAIN SUBSEQUENT NUMBERING

105.09 Cooperation with Utilities.
        THE ENTIRE TEXT IS CHANGED TO:

      A.    General. It is understood and agreed that the Contractor has considered in its Proposal all of the
            permanent and temporary utility facilities in their present, new, or relocated positions to the extent
            required by the Contract Documents and as revealed by its own investigations; is aware that utility
            service demands, adverse field conditions and emergencies may affect the Utility‟s ability to comply with
            the proposed schedules for utility work; is cognizant of the limited ability of the Department to control


Route 35 over Manasquan River Bridge Rehabilitation
Monmouth and Ocean Counties                                                                                     Page 15
         the actions of the Utility(s), and has made allowances in its Proposal that it is not entitled to any
         Additional Compensation by reasons of delays, inconvenience or damage sustained by the Contractor due
         to any interference from utility facilities or the operation of moving or installing them. Similarly, the
         Contractor is deemed to understand that only limited extensions of time may be granted as specified in
         Subsection 108.11.
               The Contractor shall notify, in writing, the Utility(s) involved of the nature and scope of the Project,
         and of its operations that may affect their facilities or property. The notice shall include an inquiry for all
         information required to determine the location of the existing utility facilities and the Contractor shall
         also provide the portion of the approved Preliminary Schedule relative to that respective Utility. Two
         copies of such notices and the Utility‟s responses shall be sent to the Resident Engineer prior to the start
         of Construction Operations. The Contractor shall also attend a Utility preconstruction conference prior to
         the start of Construction Operations.
               The Contractor shall provide each Utility the portion of the approved Baseline CPM Schedule
         related to the respective Utility and any approved updates or revisions that affect that Utility.
               Information on the Utility(s), including the work to be performed by the Utility(s) on the Project,
         will be provided in the Special Provisions.

             The corporations, companies, agencies, or municipalities owning or controlling the utilities, and the
         name, title, address, and telephone number of their local representative are as listed below:

         Gas
         New Jersey Natural Gas
         1415 Wyckoff Road
         Wall, NJ 07719
         Attn: Mr. Mark Kurilla
         Tel: (973) 919-8158
         Fax: (973) 919-7854

         Electric
         Jersey Central Power and Light
         Electric Delivery
         1 River Center
         Building 3
         331 Newman Springs Road
         Red Bank, NJ 07701
         Attn: Mr. William Uellner
         Tel.: (973) 212-4216
         Fax: (973) 695-5585

         Sewer / Water
         Brielle Municipal Authority – Water & Sewer
         601 Union Lane
         Brielle, NJ 08730
         Attn: Mr. William Burkhardt
         Tel: (732) 528-6600

         Brielle Borough Engineer – Water & Sewer
         Mr. Alan Hilla, Jr.
         c/o Birdsall Engineering, Inc.
         611 Industrial Way West
         Eatontown, NJ 07724
         Tel: (732) 380-1700 Ext. 1216
         Fax: (732) 380-1701

         Borough of Point Pleasant Beach – Water & Sewer
         416 New Jersey Avenue


Route 35 over Manasquan River Bridge Rehabilitation
Monmouth and Ocean Counties                                                                                     Page 16
         Point Pleasant, NJ 08742
         Attn: Mr. Robert Meany; Mr. Michael Gardner; Ms. Christine Riehl
         Tel: (732) 899-0705
         Tel: (732) 899-3306
         Tel: (732) 892-8770
         Fax: (732) 899-8970

         Cable Television
         Comcast Communications
         751 Brick Boulevard
         Brick, NJ 08723
         Attn: Mr. Andrew Cortes
         Tel: (732) 299-2971
         Fax: (732) 920-6017

         Cablevision of Monmouth
         1501 18th Avenue
         Wall, NJ 07719
         Attn: Mr. Paul Kostyz
         Tel: (732) 681-8222 Ext. 3285

         Telephone
         Verizon-NJ, Inc.
         900 Clinton Avenue, 1st Floor
         Irvington, NJ 07111
         Attn: Mr. Frank Antisell
         (To be copied on all correspondence)
         Tel.: 973-649-4058
         Fax: 973-484-8748

         Verizon-NJ, Inc.
         5100 Belmar Boulevard
         Farmingdale, NJ 07727
         Attn: Mr. Warren Ryllo
         Tel: (732) 751-8725



         Nextel Communications, Inc.
         210 Malapardis Road, Floor 1
         Cedar Knolls, NJ 07927
         Mr. Scott Hawkins
         Tel.: 973-631-7551

         Railroad
         New Jersey Transit
         1 Penn Plaza East
         2nd Floor
         Newark, NJ 07105
         Attn: Mr. Charles Johnson
         Tel: (973) 879-7132

               Bidders are advised to verify the above information as its accuracy and completeness is not
         guaranteed by the Department.




Route 35 over Manasquan River Bridge Rehabilitation
Monmouth and Ocean Counties                                                                        Page 17
                   The Contractor is advised that the design for this Contract did not identify any anticipated utility
           conflicts. However, this Contract does require the Contractor to perform underground excavation and/or
           the driving of guide rail posts and is reminded to call the State‟s One Call System as specified in Subpart
           C., to verify that a conflict does not exist.



      Jersey Central Power and Light Electric Delivery – Service Connection to Bridge:
      Electrical service outages during the rehabilitation of the bridge are to be requested by the Contractor. The
Contractor shall provide written notice to Jersey Central Power and Light (JCPL) four (4) weeks before the
anticipated outage is required.

     The anticipated sequence of operations following such notice is as follows:
         1. Contractor provides written notice to (JCPL) prior to outage. (Duration - 4 weeks)
         2. (JCPL) shuts off electrical service feeding the Route 35 Bridge over the Manasquan River. (Duration
              – 2 weeks)
         3. Contractor completes work on bridge requiring shutdown of electrical service.
         4. Contractor provides written notice to (JCPL) to restore power. (Duration - 4 weeks)
         5. (JCPL) turns on electrical service feeding the Route 35 Bridge over the Manasquan River. (Duration –
              2 weeks)

     The Contractor may perform other work at the site and cannot interfere with the electrical service, until the
outage has taken place. No extension in time will be considered for delays if, in the opinion of the Engineer, the
Contractor has interfered with the electrical service work or is otherwise responsible for such delays.

      Jersey Central Power and Light Electric Delivery – Utility Pole Relocation:
      Three utility poles in the vicinity of Route 35 and Euclid Avenue are to be relocated behind proposed guiderail.
The Contractor shall provide written notice to Jersey Central Power and Light (JCPL) eight (8) weeks prior to the
anticipated pole relocation is to occur. JCPL requires one (1) week to complete the relocations.

     Verizon-NJ Phone Service – Service Connection to Bridge:
     Phone service outages during the rehabilitation of the bridge are to be requested by the Contractor. The
Contractor shall provide written notice to Verizon-NJ four (4) weeks before the anticipated outage is required.

     The anticipated sequence of operations following such notice is as follows:

          1.   Contractor provides written notice to Verizon-NJ prior to outage. (Duration - 4 weeks)
          2.   Verizon-NJ, Inc shuts off phone service to the Route 35 Bridge over the Manasquan River.
          3.   Contractor completes work on bridge requiring shutdown of phone service.
          4.   Contractor provides written notice to Verizon-NJ to restore power. (Duration - 4 weeks)
          5.   Verizon-NJ restores phone service to the Route 35 Bridge over the Manasquan River. (Duration - 2
               weeks)

      The Contractor may perform other work at the site and cannot interfere with the phone service. No extension
in time will be considered for delays if, in the opinion of the Engineer, the Contractor has interfered with the phone
service work or is otherwise responsible for such delays.

      New Jersey Natural Gas – Work in Proximity to Proposed Bulkhead:
      New Jersey Natural Gas has an existing 8 inch gas distribution main in the vicinity of the proposed bulkhead
adjacent to the northern abutment of the Manasquan River Bridge. The Utility does not anticipate impacts to their
main, however, they require their staff to be present when the Contractor is to perform bulkhead construction within
10 feet of the main. The utility requires 10 working days notification prior to commencing work. No extension in
time will be considered for delays if, in the opinion of the Engineer, the Contractor has interfered with the gas main
or is otherwise responsible for such delays.




Route 35 over Manasquan River Bridge Rehabilitation
Monmouth and Ocean Counties                                                                                     Page 18
    B.   Existing Facilities. The Contractor shall not proceed with any excavation operations until it has
         determined the exact location of the existing utility facilities within the Project from examination of the
         Contract Documents and information provided in Subsection 102.06, through inquiries to the respective
         Utility(s), and through its own subsurface site investigations, including test pits. Test Pits shall be as
         specified in Subsection 207.04. The Contractor shall notify the Resident Engineer as specified in
         Subsection 105.03 if their examinations determine any conflicts to completing the Work.
               The Contractor shall notify the Resident Engineer at least 10 State Business Days in advance of the
         excavation of any test pits, or other subsurface investigations. Bidders shall notify the Department in
         advance as specified in Subsection 102.06.
               Electrical installations, including Intelligent Transportation Systems (ITS) facilities as specified in
         Section 706, of the Department constructed either before or as part of the Contract shall be considered a
         Utility, and all provisions of this Subsection and Division 700 shall be applicable.
               Examination of Department documents available on existing electrical installations shall be as
         specified in Subsection 102.06. The Contractor may request markout for the fiber optic network of the
         Department ITS facilities. Markout will be provided within ten Working Days after the completed,
         written Traffic Operations Markout Form is received by the Traffic Operations location specified in the
         Special Provisions in this Subsection. The Contractor shall copy the Resident Engineer on the written
         request and shall maintain the markout until all operations in the vicinity of the ITS facilities are
         completed.

    C.   Regulations. The Contractor shall also comply with all other State and Federal rules, and regulations
         applicable to work on or in the proximity of utilities. Specific attention is made to:
              1. The State‟s Underground Facility Protection Act. The Contractor shall notify the State‟s One
                    Call System (1-800-272-1000) and identify itself as the State‟s Contractor and specify the
                    route and contract number of the Project before performing Work on the Project.
              2. High voltage line requirements according to NJSA 34:6-47.1 to 47.9, 29 CFR 1926.550, and
                    the Utility Accommodation Policy, NJSA 16:25. The Contractor shall obtain written approval
                    from the Department of Labor, Office of Safety Compliance, and the respective Utility(s) if
                    required, for any operations that do not provide the minimum clearances under these
                    regulations. The Contractor shall be responsible for any proposed power outage or de-
                    energization associated with their operations. A copy of the approvals shall be submitted to
                    the Resident Engineer at least 5 State Business Days in advance of starting those operations.

    D.   Notices. The Contractor shall make a written request to the Resident Engineer at least 10 State Business
         Days in advance of the notice requirements provided in the Special Provisions for the Department to
         notify Utility(s) to proceed with the Utility(s) utility work. The Contractor shall be cognizant that where
         joint use poles or duct banks are used, the time frames for work performed by each user are cumulative.
         The Contractor shall guarantee the site availability for utility operations. The Department will notify the
         Utility(s) to proceed if in the Department‟s opinion the site will be available for a particular item of utility
         work. The Contractor shall permit the Utility(s) or their agents access to their facilities at all times and
         shall cooperate with them in performing their work.
               The Contractor shall cooperate with the Utility(s) concerned and shall notify them, through the
         Resident Engineer, not less than 10 State Business Days in advance of the time it proposes to construct
         any utility item or perform any work that may endanger or affect their facilities. The Contractor shall
         have the contractual obligation of coordinating its activities with those of the Utility(s). The Utility(s)
         shall be given the opportunity to inspect the actual material to be installed as well as the installation.
               The Contractor shall provide 72 hour advance notice to the Resident Engineer of any meetings
         scheduled with Utility(s) and provide the Resident Engineer with a copy of any correspondence with the
         Utility(s).
               The Contractor shall make separate written notifications, with a copy to the Resident Engineer, a
         minimum of 4 State Business Days prior to when work may impact or be adjacent to Department
         electrical installations. For ITS facilities, notification shall be to the Bureau of Traffic Operations at the
         location and telephone number provided in the Special Provisions. For all other electrical installations,
         notification shall be made to the Regional Bureau of Electrical Maintenance at the location and telephone
         number provided in the Special Provisions. No Department-owned installation shall be accessed,



Route 35 over Manasquan River Bridge Rehabilitation
Monmouth and Ocean Counties                                                                                      Page 19
         modified, removed, or disturbed in any manner, without first making such notifications and attending a
         meeting with the Department if requested.

              Bureau of Electrical Maintenance, Central Region
              100 Daniels Way
              Freehold, NJ 07728
              Telephone: 732-308-4086
              Bureau of Traffic Operations, South Region (TOCS)
              1 Executive Campus-Route 70 West
              Cherry Hill, NJ 08002-4123
              856-486-6650

    E.   Damages. The Contractor shall protect, support, and secure all in-place utility facilities so as to avoid
         damage to them and any interruption of service. The Contractor shall not temporarily move existing or
         completed utility facilities without the Utility(s) written consent, and the facilities shall be as safe and
         permanent at completion as they were before the Contractor‟s involvement. In the event the Contractor
         damages a utility facility, including property service connections, the Contractor shall notify the Utility(s)
         immediately. The Utility(s) may complete the repairs or allow the Contractor to complete the repairs,
         with the Contractor responsible for any applicable time and expense. Repairs to Department electrical
         installations shall be as specified in Subsection 105.19 and the additional requirements for the fiber optic
         network of the Department ITS facilities as specified in this Subsection. The fiber optic network includes
         the conduit/cable, junction boxes/cabinets, and hubs.
               Within two hours of any damage by the Contractor to the fiber optic network, the Contractor shall
         notify the Resident Engineer, in writing with a copy to the Traffic Operations contact specified in the
         Special Provisions, that the Contractor shall complete the repairs within 48 hours and have the repairs
         underway within 12 hours after the damage has occurred. If the written notice has not been received from
         the Contractor within two hours and/or the commencement of the repairs has not started within 12 hours,
         the Department may undertake and complete the repairs. The cost of repairs made by the Department for
         damages that are determined by the Resident Engineer to be the Contractor‟s responsibility shall be
         deducted from subsequent estimates. If the Contractor does not complete the repairs within 48 hrs,
         damages for lost services will be assessed to the Contractor at a minimum of $1000 per hour, or increased
         based on costs calculated by the Department, and deducted from subsequent estimates.


                Should the Contractor, for its own convenience, cause the Utility(s) to incur costs not covered by the
         utility agreement, or delay the Utility(s), or incur costs without prior written approval of the Resident
         Engineer, the Contractor shall be responsible for these costs and delays. The Contractor shall pay the
         Utility(s) within 30 days of the Utility(s) request for cost reimbursement of any repairs and other incurred
         costs. If payment has not been made within 30 days, the Department may reimburse the Utility(s) for the
         Contractor generated costs and deduct these expenses from partial or final payment due the Contractor.

    F.   Railroads. In addition to the foregoing provisions, the following specific provisions relate to railroads
         only:
         1. Railroad Traffic and Property. Where the Project includes work across, over, under, or adjacent
               to railroad tracks or railroad ROW, the Contractor shall safeguard the traffic, tracks, and
               appurtenances, and other property of the railroad that may be affected by its Work. The Contractor
               shall comply with the regulations of the railroad relating to its Work, shall keep tracks clear of
               obstructions, and shall provide barricades, warning signs, lights, or other safety devices as required
               by the railroad. Payment for such safety devices will be made as specified in Section 617. Prior to
               the commencement of any work within the railroad ROW or on railroad facilities, the Contractor
               shall obtain the railroad‟s written approval of access, the method of construction, and the schedule
               of the Work. The Contractor shall provide a copy of the submittal and approval to the Resident
               Engineer.
                   Estimated railroad train schedules will be provided in the Special Provisions.
                   The safety and continuity of railroad operations shall be the first priority when working in
               proximity to the railroad. Railroad approval does not release the Contractor from responsibility or


Route 35 over Manasquan River Bridge Rehabilitation
Monmouth and Ocean Counties                                                                                    Page 20
               liability for any damage that the railroad may suffer, or for which the Contractor may be held liable,
               by the acts of the Contractor.
                    Fouling of railroad facilities‟ track, power lines, and signal systems occurs when the railroad
               parameters for normal operations are jeopardized because obstructions are in close proximity to the
               facilities. The Contractor shall obtain from the railroad its fouling parameters for the work site and
               observe the railroad‟s regulations concerning fouling. Construction equipment or material shall not
               be stored or operated within the fouling distance of the railroad facilities without written permission
               of the railroad, with a copy to the Resident Engineer.
                    The railroad may assign inspectors, engineers, or flagmen during the time the Contractor is
               engaged in work on railroad property for the general supervision of construction operations, to
               ensure adherence to the Contract Documents and applicable railroad requirements, and to ensure the
               use of approved construction methods.
                    If materials are to be hauled across the tracks of any railroad, the Contract Documents will
               provide for any new crossings required or for the use of any existing crossings. If the Contractor
               elects to use crossings other than those designated, it shall obtain written approval from the railroad
               with a copy of the approval to the Resident Engineer at least 10 State Business Days in advance.

               Location                                        Speed           Number Per Day         Time
               Point Pleasant Beach Station / Broadway         40 mph          45                     24 hrs/day

          2.        Railroad Insurance.      The applicable insurance provisions are as specified in Subsection
               107.23.

105.10 Cooperation Between Contractors.

THE FOLLOWING IS ADDED AFTER THE LAST PARAGRAPH:

      New Jersey Department of Transportation‟s Route 70 Bridge over the Manasquan River Project is tentatively
scheduled for construction from December 2005 through September 2010. This is a major bridge replacement
project. The bridge is located west of the Route 35 Bridge over the Manasquan River. The Route 70 Bridge
replacement is anticipated to be performed off-line with all four existing lanes open throughout construction.
However there will be periods when the Route 70 mainline traffic may be impacted due to temporary lane closures.
The State‟s Contractor for the Route 35 Project over the Manasquan River shall coordinate with the State‟s Resident
Engineers for both Route 35 over the Manasquan River and Route 70 over the Manasquan River with regard to any
full closure of Route 70, if any.

105.11 Construction Stakes, Lines, and Grades.
     A. For Projects with Construction Layout as a Pay Item.
         THE FIFTH PARAGRAPH IS CHANGED TO:

                The Contractor shall complete all utility work layouts required after approval of the insurance
          certificates as specified in Subsection 107.23 and the Safety and Health Program as specified in
          Subsection 107.10. The Contractor shall notify the Utility(s) as specified in Subsection 105.09.

105.15 Field Office.
     1. Construction Field Offices.
              a      Type A.
        THE FIRST PARAGRAPH IS CHANGED TO:

                           Type A field office shall be of weatherproof construction located adjacent to the
                     Contractor‟s field office having a floor area of not less than 576 square feet and a ceiling
                     height of not less than 7½ feet, and having partitions and doors providing three communicating
                     rooms, one with a floor area of not less than 288 square feet and two with a floor area of not
                     less than 144 square feet each.

         PART (1) IS CHANGED TO:


Route 35 over Manasquan River Bridge Rehabilitation
Monmouth and Ocean Counties                                                                                   Page 21
             (1)   6 multi-line touch-tone telephones and 3 telephone lines for use with the telephones installed
                   as directed and operational in the Field Office and other facilities specified.
             (a)   1 dedicated, operational telephone line(s) for Fax machines (s) and (3) dedicated, operational
                   telephone line(s) for microcomputer system(s) modem use installed as directed in the Field
                   Offices specified.
             (b)   6 portable hand held cellular phone(s). The cellular telephone plan shall provide for the
                   anticipated usage of approximately 300 minutes per telephone per month. Each of the cellular
                   phones shall have as a minimum the following features:
             1)    Home rate with no roaming charges within the entire state
             2)    832 Channel Compatible
             3)    Mute Function
             4)    Back Light Display with Battery Saver
             5)    Signal Strength Indicator
             6)    Individual Call Length Timer
             7)    Full Lock Function
             8)    30 Memory Number Feature
             9)    Low Battery Warning
             10)   70 Minute Continuous Use
             11)   12 hour Standby Mode
             12)   Alphanumeric Display
             13)   Transmission Power 0.6 Watt
             14)   Passive Repeating Antenna for Vehicle
             15)   Spare high capacity Battery Pack
             16)   Home Charging Station
             17)   Cigarette lighter power adapter /charger
             18)   AC charging station
             19)   Hands-Free headset
             20)   Two Way Radio Capability
             (c)   2 pager units. The number should be an exchange local to the Project. The units shall have the
                   following features:
             1)    Lighted Alphanumeric Display
             2)    Tone and Vibrator Alert
             3)    High Sensitivity
             4)    Message Storage
             5)    Statewide Coverage
             6)    Exchange Local to Project
             7)    LCD Readout
             (d)   1 telephone answering machine or Voice Mail Service

        PART (17)
        THE FIRST SENTENCE OF THE FIRST PARAGRAPH IS CHANGED TO:

                        (17) A microcomputer system compatible with the Department‟s “ACES” system,
                             whether purchased new or previously used.

        THE FIFTH PARAGRAPH IS CHANGED TO:

                                   The microcomputer system (including the hard drive containing the project
                             data), manuals, instructions, software, and literature shall be removed and retained
                             by the Contractor when no longer required as determined by the Resident Engineer,
                             except for the data cartridges and data diskettes, and the hard drive containing the
                             project data, which will become the property of the State.

        THE FOLLOWING ARE ADDED TO PART (17)



Route 35 over Manasquan River Bridge Rehabilitation
Monmouth and Ocean Counties                                                                               Page 22
                       The microcomputer system shall include the following:
                       (a) 3 base computer system(s) having at minimum:
                                1) Pentium IV Processor at 3.5 GHz or faster, Intel processor with Hyper
                                     Threading technology, with 1024 MB RAM, 512 MB Video RAM,
                                     mouse, mouse pad, 200 Gigabyte hard drive or larger (must be designated
                                     as drive C:), one DVD (+/-) Writer Drive, one CD-R Recordable Drive,
                                     and one 3½-inch, 1.44 MB floppy diskette drive with multi-media card
                                     reader installed as the “A” drive. System must be USB 2.0 compactable.
                                2) 56K baud data/fax modem. (e.g., 3Com U.S. Robotics 56K Fax modem,
                                     3Com U.S. Robotics Courier V.Everything/V.34 - 56K ITU / x2
                                     Technology, or Hayes Accura 56K).
                                3) One wireless network card for each base computer system specified,
                                     when more than one base computer is specified.
                                4) One wireless Ethernet Hub Switch with appropriate number of ports and
                                     cables (e.g. Lynksys) and a print server.
                                5) One dedicated telephone line per computer to be used in conjunction with
                                     each of the microcomputer modem.
                                6) One high-speed broad band connection with a minimum speed of 3
                                     Megabytes per second (mbps) with dynamic IP address per field office
                                     (DSL, Cable, etc.) for the duration of the project.
                                7) 19 inch or larger Flat Screen LCD monitor with tilt/swivel capabilities.
                                8) 250 Megabyte or larger Zip Drive internal or external with backup
                                     software for MS-Windows and DOS, and fifteen corresponding formatted
                                     data cartridges corresponding to the tape drive size (e.g., Iomega Zip
                                     Drive or equivalent).
                                9) 10 USB 1 GB Flash/Stick/Jump Memory Drives. (e.g. SanDisk Cruzer
                                     Micro 1 Gigabyte).
                                10) One Flatbed USB version 2.0 or greater Color Scanner. (e.g. H.P. or
                                     Cannon)
                                11) Uninterruptible power supply (UPS) - OMNI 1000 or approved equal
                                     (e.g., APC-1000 - American Power Corporation).
                                12) Surge protector for the entire computer workstation to be used in
                                     conjunction with the UPS (e.g., Zero Surge Power, Inc. - Point of Use -
                                     2R-15 amp/120 volts).
                                13) Static mat, floor type, 4 by 5 feet or larger with grounding capabilities.
                                14) Computer workstation, printer stand, and/or table having both appropriate
                                     surface and chair height.
                                15) Five boxes of 3½-inch floppy diskettes that match the drive density of the
                                     1.44 MB floppy diskette drive (ten per box).
                                16) 150 CD-R 700 MB (or larger) recordable CD‟s compatible to the CD
                                     drive and 100 recordable DVD‟s.
                                17) One floppy diskette holder (holds 50, 3½-inch floppy diskettes), and dust
                                     covers for the microcomputer, monitor, keyboard, and printer.
                                18) Two head cleaner kit for 3½-inch floppy diskette drive.
                                19) One can of compressed air and screen cleaning solution every other
                                     month of the duration of the project.
                       (b) One base printer having at minimum:
                                1) Color laser printer having HP PCL 5 emulation, with a minimum of 192
                                      Megabytes of expanded memory, appropriate printer cable, and legal size
                                      paper tray (e.g., HP Color LaserJet 2500N or TN).
                                2) One set of appropriate printer toner cartridges every other month for the
                                      duration of the construction project.
                                3) One ten-ream carton of 8½" X 11" size paper (500 sheets per ream,
                                      weight: 2.2 ounces per square yard, color: white, grain: long, for laser
                                      printers and copiers) every two months for the duration of the
                                      construction project.


Route 35 over Manasquan River Bridge Rehabilitation
Monmouth and Ocean Counties                                                                            Page 23
                                    4)    One ten-ream carton of legal size paper (500 sheets per ream, weight: 2.2
                                          ounces per square yard, color: white, grain: long, for laser printers and
                                          copiers) every three months for the duration of the construction project.
                                    5) 11 inch by 17 inch copy size capability and One ten-ream carton of 11" X
                                          17" size paper (500 sheets per ream, weight: 2.2 ounces per square yard,
                                          color: white, grain: long, for laser printers and copiers) every four months
                                          for the duration of the construction project.
                         (c) One software package, on CD-ROM with documentation, including:
                                    1) Microsoft Windows, latest version with future upgrades for the duration
                                          of the entire project.
                                    2) Microsoft Office Professional latest version. Software package should
                                          contain the following: word processor, spreadsheet, and database.
                                    3) Norton‟s System Works for Windows, latest version, or compatible
                                          software package with future upgrades and latest virus patches.
                                    4) Anti-Virus software, latest version with monthly updates for the duration
                                          of the entire project (e.g., McAfee Anti Virus, Dr. Solomon‟s, or
                                          Norton‟s Anti Virus).
                                    5) Visio Professional Graphics Software for Windows, latest version.
                                    6) One Primavera Project Planner for the Enterprise (P3E) or equivalent
                                          software, latest version with software updates for the duration of the
                                          entire project.
                         (d) 2 base printer(s) for Primavera having at minimum:
                                    1) Color Inkjet printer of current technology, with appropriate printer cable.
                                    2) Ink cartridge replacements, one of each color, every other month for the
                                          duration of the construction project.
                                    3) One 10-ream carton of 8½ X 11 inches size paper (500 sheets per ream,
                                          weight: 22 ounces per square yard, color: white, grain: long, for laser
                                          printers and copiers) every three months for the duration of the
                                          construction project.
                         (e) 1 Primavera Project Planner (P3) or equivalent software, latest version.
               To be approved as a Substitute or "Or Equal", the software must be completely compatible with the
         Department database that contains the Capital Program Management's design process schedule and
         budget, as well as the construction scheduling from design through construction. The software shall be
         compatible with the hierarchy of the coding and able to import and export data within the Department‟s
         Capital Program Management's database without distortion of any coding or relationships contained in
         the database.
               The Contractor shall only utilize equivalent or compatible software for a project, which has received
         written approval from the Department in accordance with the most current NJDOT Capital Program
         Management Construction Scheduling Standard Coding and Procedures for Designers and Contractors
         Manual. The approved equivalent/compatible software utilized shall not vary throughout the construction
         phase.


        THE FOLLOWING IS ADDED:

                         (18) 1 TV/VCR (Video Cassette Recorder) Combo with: 4-head VCR, crystal-clear-
                               slow-motion, still frame, and frame advance, and index search.
                         (19) 1 DVD Palmcorder with 50 Rewritable discs with cases and labels, two spare
                               rechargeable batteries, carrying case, AC power adapter/charger, cigarette lighter
                               power adapter, and lightweight tripod.
                          (20) Six (6) of each: hard hats (Orange in color, reflectorized) and safety vests (Orange
                               in color, reflectorized, 360 high-visibility that meet ANSI/ISEA standards for
                               Class 3 garments). It should be noted that safety vests are to be replaced as needed
                               for the duration of the project.
                          (21) Six (6) sets: ear protection and eye protection, to be replaced as needed for the
                               duration of the project


Route 35 over Manasquan River Bridge Rehabilitation
Monmouth and Ocean Counties                                                                                   Page 24
                          (22) Six (6) sets: rain gear with reflective sheeting
                          (23) Concrete testing equipment to include: Concrete receptacle (wheel barrow), square
                               tipped shovel, concrete scoop, slump cone & base set (rod, slump cone, base and
                               funnel), tamping rod (12 inches long, 3/8-inch diameter with hemispherical ends),
                               tamping rod (24 inches long, 5/8-inch diameter with hemispherical ends), 12-inch
                               ruler, Forney air meter (complete set) or equivalent, two concrete thermometers,
                               sponge, long-handled round scrub brush, rubber or rawhide mallet (2.25 lb. +/- 0.50
                               lb.), pointed trowel, five-gallon plastic bucket, concrete cylinder curing items in
                               accordance with this project‟s applicable governing Specifications.
                          (24) Two (2) electronic Smart levels (4 or 6 feet long)
                          (25) Two (2) measuring wheels, with English measuring units (in feet)
                          (26) Two (2) 50-foot cloth tape measures
                          (27) One (1) 100-foot steel tape measure
                          (28) Ten (10) six-foot folding wood rules
                          (29) Two (2) asphalt thermometers
                          (30) One (1) digital infrared thermometer



105.19 Maintenance During Construction.
       THE THIRD PARAGRAPH IS CHANGED TO:

     Any damage to the Roadway due to the Contractor‟s operations shall be repaired at no Additional
Compensation, except as specified in Subsection 107.22. The Contractor shall complete within 24 hours specific
repairs directed by the Department, except where the requirements are specified by a Subsection. Nothing in this
Subsection shall be construed to limit or change the risks assumed by the Contractor as specified in
Subsection 107.22.

          THE SIXTH PARAGRAPH IS CHANGED TO:

      The Department may direct the Contractor to construct Bituminous Concrete Patch as specified in Section 402
to maintain sections of traveled way and shoulders in a smooth riding condition at all times including seasonal
shutdowns. Payment for Bituminous Concrete Patch will be made as specified in Section 402 except for those areas
that are damaged or created by the Contractor‟s operations.

105.22 Substantial Completion.
        THE THIRD SENTENCE OF THE FIRST PARAGRAPH IS CHANGED TO:

If the Engineer determines that the Work is substantially complete, the Engineer will then prepare a letter which
states the date of Substantial Completion and establishes a reasonable time within which the Contractor shall
perform the final cleanup, and repair unacceptable Work, which time may be prior to Contract Time as modified.

                            SECTION 106 – CONTROL OF MATERIAL
106.03 Materials, Inspections, Tests, and Samples.
        THE SUBSECTION HEADING IS CHANGED TO:
106.03 Materials, Inspections, Tests, Samples and Certified Training.

     B.    Sampling and Field Testing of Soil Aggregates.
          THIS SIXTH PARAGRAPH IS CHANGED TO:
                Sampling and testing of aggregates by the Department that meet the Specifications and are used in
           the Work will be performed without cost to the Contractor.

          THE FOLLOWING SUBPART IS ADDED:




Route 35 over Manasquan River Bridge Rehabilitation
Monmouth and Ocean Counties                                                                                Page 25
     D.   Sharing of Pay-Adjustments for Portland Cement Concrete. Positive and negative pay-adjustments,
          as defined in Subsection 914.02, Subpart E, are awarded to encourage high quality construction and,
          when necessary, to recoup the anticipated extra costs to the Department resulting from poor quality
          construction. The manner in which positive and negative pay-adjustments are to be shared by the prime
          Contractor and Subcontractors or Producers is to be negotiated by the affected parties. A letter signed by
          both parties, stating that an agreement has been reached between the parties shall be provided to the
          Engineer before commencement of Work. Nothing contained herein shall create right of action either in
          law or equity against the Department.

106.06 Materials Field Laboratory
        THE FOLLOWING IS ADDED AFTER THE FIRST PARAGRAPH:

     The Contractor shall annually pay all fees necessary to procure and maintain a Uniform Code Type Four Fire
Permit according to regulations of the New Jersey Department of Community Affairs. Additional information
concerning the permit fees and processing of the application may be obtained by contacting the Bureau of Materials.
     1. Laboratory.
          b.
         THE FOLLOWING IS ADDED:

               (19) Hands-Free headset

           z.
          THE FIRST SENTENCE OF SUBPART Z. IS CHANGED TO:

               Equipment and test apparatus conforming to that listed in AASHTO T 310 when the Pay Item
               “Nuclear Density Gauge” appears in the Proposal.

          SUBPART (1) IS CHANGED TO:

               (1) Conformance to AASHTO T 310,

           aa
          THE ENTIRE PART AA TEXT IS CHANGED TO:

               aa    Microcomputer workstation hardware and software requirements as indicated.              The
                     microcomputer system shall include the following:
                          (1) One base computer system(s) having at minimum:
                                   a) Pentium IV Processor at 3.5 GHz or faster, Intel processor with Hyper
                                        Threading technology, with 1024 MB RAM, 512 MB Video RAM,
                                        mouse, mouse pad, 200 Gigabyte hard drive or larger (must be designated
                                        as drive C:), one DVD (+/-) Writer Drive, one CD-R Recordable Drive,
                                        and one 3½-inch, 1.44 MB floppy diskette drive with multi-media card
                                        reader installed as the “A” drive. System must be USB 2.0 compactable.
                                   b) 56K baud data/fax modem. (e.g., 3Com U.S. Robotics 56K Fax modem,
                                        3Com U.S. Robotics Courier V.Everything/V.34 - 56K ITU / x2
                                        Technology, or Hayes Accura 56K).
                                   c) One wireless network card for each base computer system specified,
                                        when more than one base computer is specified.
                                   d) One wireless Ethernet Hub Switch with appropriate number of ports and
                                        cables (e.g. Lynksys) and a print server.
                                   e) One dedicated telephone line per computer to be used in conjunction with
                                        each of the microcomputer modem.
                                   f) One high-speed broad band connection with a minimum speed of 3
                                        Megabytes per second (mbps) with dynamic IP address per field office
                                        (DSL, Cable, etc.) for the duration of the project.
                                   g) 19 inch or larger Flat Screen LCD monitor with tilt/swivel capabilities.


Route 35 over Manasquan River Bridge Rehabilitation
Monmouth and Ocean Counties                                                                                 Page 26
                                 h) 250 Megabyte or larger Zip Drive internal or external with backup
                                    software for MS-Windows and DOS, and fifteen corresponding formatted
                                    data cartridges corresponding to the tape drive size (e.g., Iomega Zip
                                    Drive or equivalent).
                                i) 10 USB 1 GB Flash/Stick/Jump Memory Drives. (e.g. SanDisk Cruzer
                                    Micro 1 Gigabyte).
                                j) One Flatbed USB version 2.0 or greater Color Scanner. (e.g. H.P. or
                                    Cannon)
                                k) Uninterruptible power supply (UPS) - OMNI 1000 or approved equal
                                    (e.g., APC-1000 - American Power Corporation).
                                l) Surge protector for the entire computer workstation to be used in
                                    conjunction with the UPS (e.g., Zero Surge Power, Inc. - Point of Use -
                                    2R-15 amp/120 volts).
                                m) Static mat, floor type, 4 by 5 feet or larger with grounding capabilities.
                                n) Computer workstation, printer stand, and/or table having both appropriate
                                    surface and chair height.
                                o) Five boxes of 3½-inch floppy diskettes that match the drive density of the
                                    1.44 MB floppy diskette drive (ten per box).
                                p) 150 CD-R 700 MB (or larger) recordable CD‟s compatible to the CD
                                    drive and 100 recordable DVD‟s.
                                q) One floppy diskette holder (holds 50, 3½-inch floppy diskettes), and dust
                                    covers for the microcomputer, monitor, keyboard, and printer.
                                r) Two head cleaner kit for 3½-inch floppy diskette drive.
                                s) One can of compressed air and screen cleaning solution every other
                                    month of the duration of the project.
                       (2) One base printer having at minimum:
                                a) Color laser printer having HP PCL 5 emulation, with a minimum of 192
                                     Megabytes of expanded memory, appropriate printer cable, and legal size
                                     paper tray (e.g., HP Color LaserJet 2500N or TN).
                                b) One set of appropriate printer toner cartridges every other month for the
                                     duration of the construction project.
                                c) One ten-ream carton of 8½" X 11" size paper (500 sheets per ream,
                                     weight: 2.2 ounces per square yard, color: white, grain: long, for laser
                                     printers and copiers) every two months for the duration of the
                                     construction project.
                                d) One ten-ream carton of legal size paper (500 sheets per ream, weight: 2.2
                                     ounces per square yard, color: white, grain: long, for laser printers and
                                     copiers) every three months for the duration of the construction project.
                       (3) One software package, on CD-ROM with documentation, including:
                                a) Microsoft Windows, latest version with future upgrades for the duration
                                     of the entire project.
                                b) Microsoft Office Professional latest version. Software package should
                                     contain the following: word processor, spreadsheet, and database.
                                c) Norton‟s System Works for Windows, latest version, or compatible
                                     software package with future upgrades and latest virus patches.
                                d) Anti-Virus software, latest version with monthly updates for the duration
                                     of the entire project (e.g., McAfee Anti Virus, Dr. Solomon‟s, or
                                     Norton‟s Anti Virus).
                                e) Visio Professional Graphics Software for Windows, latest version.

                        Hardware and software shall be acceptable to the Regional Construction and Resident
                  Engineers before purchase/installation. All software shall be compatible with the computer‟s
                  operating system.
                        The microcomputer system, whether purchased new or previously used, shall be installed
                  in the materials field laboratory.



Route 35 over Manasquan River Bridge Rehabilitation
Monmouth and Ocean Counties                                                                            Page 27
                          At the time of installation, the Contractor shall ensure that the system is fully operational
                     and meets all Department requirements. All software listed above shall be installed by the
                     Contractor and maintained in the materials field laboratory. The Contractor shall configure the
                     software to operate with the hardware provided. Any accessories for the microcomputer shall
                     be compatible with the microcomputer.
                          The Contractor will not be permitted to use this microcomputer system at any time. It is
                     being supplied solely for the Department‟s use.
                          The Contractor shall forward all manuals, instructions, software, and literature received
                     with the microcomputer system to the Resident Engineer. The Contractor is responsible for
                     maintaining the microcomputer system in good working condition. Any part of the
                     microcomputer system that becomes inoperable or defective, during the duration of the
                     construction project, shall be replaced by the Contractor within 48 hours.
                          The microcomputer system (including the hard drive containing the project data),
                     manuals, instructions, software, and literature shall be removed and retained by the Contractor
                     when no longer required as determined by the Resident Engineer, except for the data cartridges
                     and data diskettes, and the hard drive containing the project data, which will become the
                     property of the State.

          THE LAST SEVEN PARAGRAPHS ARE CHANGED TO:

      Setting up the materials field laboratory shall consist of furnishing the laboratory and enclosure complete with
furniture, equipment, electricity, water, heating, air-conditioning, installation and activation of telephone lines,
telephone sets (touch tone and cellular), pager units, sanitary facilities, and lavatory supplies.
      Maintenance of the materials field laboratory, for the time required, shall consist of maintaining the furniture,
equipment, and utilities which includes the cost of telephone fixed monthly service charges, cellular phone fixed
monthly service charges for the plan specified and pager services, providing lavatory supplies, janitorial and waste
disposal services weekly, restocking of the first aid box, and snow removal services. Maintenance of the materials
field laboratory shall also include monthly rent.
      Payment for nuclear density gauge will be made by the number of units supplied.
      Payment for setting up the materials field laboratory will be made by the number of units.
      Payment for the maintenance of the materials field laboratory will be made for each month or fraction thereof
that the materials field laboratory is required, except that payment will not be made for any month or fraction thereof
in which the Contractor is assessed liquidated damages according to Subsection 108.16.
      Payment will be made under:
            Pay Item                                                                                 Pay Unit
            NUCLEAR DENSITY GAUGE                                                                    UNIT
            MATERIALS FIELD LABORATORY SET-UP                                                        UNIT
            MATERIALS FIELD LABORATORY MAINTENANCE                                                   MONTH
      Payment for telephone service will be made according to Subsection 105.15.

106.09 Storage and Handling of Materials.
        THE ENTIRE TEXT IS CHANGED TO:

      Materials shall be stored to ensure the preservation of their quality and fitness. Stored materials, even though
approved before storage, may again be inspected before their use on the Project. Stored materials shall be located so
as to facilitate their prompt inspection. With the approval of the Department, portions of the ROW may be used for
storage purposes and for the placing of the Contractor‟s plant and equipment, but any additional space must be
provided by the Contractor at the Contractor‟s expense. Equipment and materials shall be placed behind barriers or
crash cushions, or stored more than 30 feet from the traveled way. The barriers and crash cushions must be
approved before installation. Furnishing, placing, and removing the barriers and crash cushions shall be at no
Additional Compensation. No materials shall be stored within restricted areas noted on the plans. No materials
shall be stored within 10 feet, plus the extended boom length of the largest crane on site, of overhead high voltage
power lines. The high voltage power line is defined as an aerial power line having a voltage differential in excess of
750 volts between any pairs of conductors or between any conductor and ground. The Contractor shall be
responsible for any power outage or de-energization associated with the Contractor‟s activity in the vicinity of the
power lines. Private property shall not be used for storage purposes without written permission of the owner or


Route 35 over Manasquan River Bridge Rehabilitation
Monmouth and Ocean Counties                                                                                    Page 28
lessee, and any other approvals, including those as specified in Subsection 107.05. Copies of such written
permission shall be furnished to the Resident Engineer before storage. Storage sites shall be restored to their
original condition at no Additional Compensation.

106.13 Fuel Price Adjustment.
        THE FIFTH PARAGRAPH IS CHANGED TO:

   The monthly fuel price index will be posted every month on the Department‟s web site:
www.state.nj.us/transportation/eng/CCEPM/PriceIndex.shtm.

           THE FIRST SENTENCE OF THE SIXTH PARAGRAPH IS CHANGED TO:

     The basic fuel price index will be the previous month‟s fuel price index before receipt of bids.

           THE EIGHTH PARAGRAPH IS DELETED:

          SECTION 107 - LEGAL RELATIONS AND RESPONSIBILITY TO PUBLIC
107.01 Legal Jurisdiction.
        THE ENTIRE SUBSECTION IS CHANGED TO:

     1.    Applicable Law. This Contract shall be construed and shall be governed according to the Constitution
           and laws of this State.
     2.    Sovereign Immunity. The State by entering into this Contract does not waive its Sovereign Immunity,
           except as provided by the New Jersey Contractual Liability Act, NJSA 59:13-1 et seq. The rights or
           benefits provided the Contractor in this Contract which exceed those provided under the Act are
           contractual in nature and shall not be deemed to expand the waiver of Sovereign Immunity as set forth in
           that Act.
     3.    Litigation of Claims by Contractor. The Contractual Claims Resolution Process is not an
           administrative procedure but is contractual in nature, intended to review properly filed and documented
           claims. Pursuant to N.J.C.A. 16:45-1.3, exhaustion of the Claims Resolution Process as set forth under
           the Specifications is not a prerequisite to the filing of a legal action against the Department or State. The
           Contractor, however, must fully comply with all of the terms and conditions of the Contractual Liability
           Act, N.J.S.A. 59:13-1 et seq. prior to commencing a legal action. Therefore, where a Contractor brings a
           legal action, arising out of a Contract, against the Department or State or any officials or employees,
           thereof, arising out of or related, directly or indirectly, to a claim pending against the Department; the
           Contractual Claims Resolution Process, at any step, shall terminate as to that claim(s) or related claims
           being litigated, no matter which level of review the claim may be at when the legal action is filed.
           Furthermore, once the Contractor files a legal action any claim(s), related to that legal action will no
           longer qualify to be reviewed by the Claims Committee or to have the same claim(s) resolved under the
           Non-Binding Mediation Procedure or at any other Level of review. Such claim(s) will, thereafter, be
           resolved under the legal action subject to the provisions of the Contractual Liability Act, N.J.S.A. 59:13-1
           et seq. unless and until the legal action is dismissed with or without prejudice. The Contractor may
           submit to the Department for processing through the various steps of the Contractual Claims Resolution
           Process any claims that are unrelated to the pending litigation subject to the terms of the Specifications
           and the Contractual Liability Act N.J.S.A. 59:13-1 et seq.
     4.    Completion of the Contract. The Completion of the Contract shall control as to any issue that may arise
           regarding the particular point in time when a Contractor may be barred from recovering against the State
           as provided under N.J.S.A. 59:13-5 et seq. The Contractual Claims Resolution Process and the various
           steps thereof may continue beyond the Completion of the Contract; however, the Contractual Claims
           Resolution Process will not in any manner, expressed or implied, extend any statute of limitation that may
           apply as to a claim. The Contractor by entering into the Contract with the Department agrees no further
           notice to the Contractor regarding the provisions stated in this Section are required. The Contractor also
           agrees to be responsible for compliance with all statutes of limitation and compliance with the various
           provisions of the Contractual Liability Act, N.J.S.A. 59:13-1 et seq.



Route 35 over Manasquan River Bridge Rehabilitation
Monmouth and Ocean Counties                                                                                     Page 29
     5.   Subcontractor(s). Pursuant to Subsection 108.02, the Department will not process or review any claims
          submitted by a subcontractor(s) or supplier(s) at any tier. All claims submitted by the Contractor must be
          an obligation or liability of the Contractor and cannot be merely a pass through of a claim by a
          subcontractor or by a supplier.

107.02 Notice of Potential Claim and the Administrative Process for the Resolution of Contract Disputes.
        THE HEADING AND THE ENTIRE SUBSECTION IS CHANGED TO:
107.02 Notice of Claim and the Contractual Claim Resolution Process.

     1.   Notice.
          a. Obligations. The various notice provisions set forth in this Contract are contractual obligations
                assumed by the Contractor by the act of executing the Contract. The Contractor shall be responsible
                to notify the Department in writing within the time frame as may be mandated in an applicable
                Subsection of the Specifications as well as within 90 days of any situation or occurrence which may
                potentially result in or be the basis of a belief that additional compensation or an extension of time is
                due from the State, except where permission to file a “late notice of claim” has been obtained by the
                Contractor from the Superior Court in accordance with N.J.S.A. 59:13-6. The Department is not
                authorized to expand, reduce or waive either the contractual or statutory time limitations within
                which a notice of claim is to be filed with the Department. Any required notice shall be given only
                on the Contractual Notice Form provided by the Department. Submission of a Contractual Notice
                Form is required in order to comply with the notice requirements of the New Jersey Contractual
                Liability Act, N.J.S.A. 59:13-5 et seq., provided such notices are given within the time limits
                established by that Act. The Contractor, by executing the Contract, agrees that the only evidence of
                compliance with the notice provisions of the Contractual Liability Act, N.J.S.A. 59:13-5 et seq., and
                the Specifications shall be the filing of a fully completed (except that the amount of the claim need
                not be stated when unknown) Contractual Notice Form with the Department, and that no other
                documents sent or delivered to the Department or any of its officers or employees shall satisfy the
                statutory and/or contractual notice requirements.
          b. Time. The Contractor, by the act of executing the Contract, acknowledges that it will be forever
                barred from recovering against the State if it fails to give timely notice in accordance with N.J.S.A.
                59:13-5 et seq., on the Contractual Notice Form required under this Subsection of any happening of
                an event, thing, or occurrence or of an act or failure to act, by the Department and that the
                Contractor is solely responsible for complying with the various notice requirements and the
                timeliness of a claim as set forth under the Contractual Liability Act, N.J.S.A. 59:13-5 et seq. and
                the Specifications.
          c. Notice Form. The Contractual Notice Form shall be completed in its entirety for each and every
                claim and shall be signed by an authorized representative of the Contractor. Any Contractual Notice
                Form filed which does not provide all of the minimum information listed in this Subsection will be
                considered incomplete for the purpose of processing the claim under the Contractual Claim
                Resolution Process and no formal discussions or meetings concerning a claim filed on an
                incomplete Form will take place. A Contractual Notice Form which identifies the amount of the
                claim as being unknown may be considered by the Department as only satisfying the notice
                requirements as set forth under the Contractual Liability Act, N.J.S.A. 59:13-5 et seq., as long as the
                notice of claim is timely filed and provides all of the other minimum information on or attached to a
                properly executed Contractual Notice Form. However, for any claim requesting Additional
                Compensation, it shall not be sufficient to begin the Claim Resolution Process until the exact
                amount is provided according to 3.j. below. The Contractor‟s act of executing the Contract shall be
                construed to be an acknowledgment by the Contractor that it understands that the processing of a
                claim by the Department at any step of the Contractual Claims Resolution Process shall not
                constitute a waiver by the State of any defense that a claim was filed out of time and is thereby
                barred under the terms of the Contractual Liability Act or of any defense that there is no merit to the
                “claim being asserted by the Contractor”.
     2.   Steps of Review. The Contractual Claim Resolution Process is sequential in nature and is composed of
          the following steps:
                Step I:    Review by the Resident Engineer;
                Step II: Review by the Regional Dispute Board;


Route 35 over Manasquan River Bridge Rehabilitation
Monmouth and Ocean Counties                                                                                      Page 30
              Step III: Review by the Department Claims Committee;
              Step IV: Non-Binding Mediation.
         Processing through the steps is subject to the following conditions:
         a. No claim will be accorded a particular level of review unless and until the claim has been reviewed
              at the preceding step. Additionally, there will be no further review of the claim, unless and until the
              Contractor provides, in writing, that the decision of a review step within the specified timeframe is
              unacceptable and further requests that the claim be forwarded to the next step. Absent the written
              submittal of this information the claim will be considered withdrawn from the Contractual Claim
              Resolution Process. If at any step in the process, a claim is resolved, the Contractor must sign an
              unconditional release, furnished by the Department, as to any and all matters arising from the claim.
         b. In order to begin the Contractual Claim Resolution Process the Contractor must state in writing that
              all documentation in support of the claim, as required under this Subsection, has been provided to
              the Department as part of or attached to the contractually required Contractual Notice Form and that
              the Contractor has requested that the review process, as outlined above, begin. The Resident
              Engineer will take no formal action until this notification is received and the Resident Engineer
              independently determines that the Contractor has in fact satisfied the requirements of this
              Subsection. If the documentation submitted by the Contractor is determined to be incomplete, the
              Resident Engineer will notify the Contractor that the review process cannot begin and include a list
              of missing components required to start the process. When the additional material is submitted, the
              Contractor is required to again notify the Resident Engineer in writing that all documentation in
              support of the claim has been provided and the Contractual Claim Resolution Process should begin.
              The Contractor shall be limited to the documentation provided to the Resident Engineer at the
              beginning of Step I, in support of a claim, throughout all steps of the Claim Resolution Process. The
              submission of additional information by the Contractor at any step beyond Step I, shall be cause for
              the claim to revert back to Step I for review at each and every Step. The Resident Engineer will
              provide written notice to the Contractor when Step I was begun.
         c. When the value of the claim submitted by the Contractor is $20,000 or less, the Step II review will
              be the final step in the Contractual Claim Resolution Process. In such a case, the decision of the
              Regional Dispute Board will be final and there will be no further contractual review.
         d. Where there has been a determination, at both Step I and Step II, that the specifications do not
              provide a contractual basis for the resolution of the claim submitted by the Contractor or that the
              Notice of Claim was filed late without obtaining permission of the Superior Court, the Department
              reserves the right to conclude the Contractual Claim Resolution Process at the end of the Step II
              review. In such instance, the Secretary of the Department Claims Committee will provide the
              Contractor with the reason(s) for the no further review determination and rejection of the claim.
              However, where the Claims Committee does review a claim, there shall not be deemed a waiver by
              the Department of any defense that the Notice was filed late or that there does not exists a
              contractual basis for resolution.
    3.   Information Required. As a minimum, all of the following information must accompany each claim
         and be incorporated into or attached to the contractually required Contractual Notice Form:
         a. A detailed factual statement of the claim providing all necessary dates, locations, and items of work
              affected by the claim.
         b. The date on which facts arose that gave rise to the claim.
         c. A copy of any notice given to the Department pursuant to any other Subsection of the Contract
              which relates to the matter giving rise to the claim.
         d. The name, function, and activity of each State individual, official, or employee involved in or
              knowledgeable about the claim.
         e. The specific provisions of the Contract which support or mitigate against the claim and a statement
              of the reasons why such provisions support or mitigate against the claim.
         f.   If the claim relates to a decision of the Department which the Contract leaves to the Department's
              discretion or as to which the Contract provides that the Department's decision is final, the Contractor
              shall set out in detail all facts supporting its contention that the decision of the Department was
              fraudulent, arbitrary or capricious.
         g. The identification of any documents and the substance of any oral communications relating to such
              claim attaching same to the Form.



Route 35 over Manasquan River Bridge Rehabilitation
Monmouth and Ocean Counties                                                                                  Page 31
         h.   A statement as to whether the additional compensation or extension of contract time sought is based
              on the operation of the provisions of the Contract or an alleged breach of contract.
         i.   If an extension of contract time is sought, the specific days sought and the basis for such claim,
              supported by the Contractor‟s approved baseline progress schedule and updates, as well as a
              fragment, which will include a time impact evaluation, depicting the delay according to Subsection
              108.04.
         j.   If additional compensation is sought, the exact amount sought and a breakdown of that amount into
              the following categories:
              (1) Direct Labor
              (2) Direct Materials
              (3) Direct Overhead as specified in Subsections 109.03 and 109.04.
              (4) Subcontractor's Work
              (5) Other categories as specified by the Contractor.
              (6) The basis and manner of the Contractor‟s calculations of the additional compensation claimed.
              The Department will not determine liability separate and apart from damages. The Contractual
         Claims Resolution Process shall not be bifurcated. The Department shall review liability and damage
         valuation issues at the same time.
    4.   The Procedures for the Process.
         a. Step I, Resident Engineer Review. The Resident Engineer will render a written decision regarding
              the claim presented within 30 State Business Days of the Resident Engineer‟s determination that the
              information provided by the Contractor on the Contractual Notice Form in support of the claim
              satisfied the requirements to begin Step I. This time limit may be extended by mutual agreement of
              the parties. Within 15 State Business Days of the receipt of the decision by the Resident Engineer,
              the Contractor shall either accept or reject the decision in writing; or upon failure to complete this,
              the claim will be considered withdrawn from the Contractual Claim Resolution Process and there
              will be no further review of the claim. If the Contractor accepts the decision, such acceptance shall
              include execution of an unconditional release furnished by the Department effective upon payment.
         b. Step II, Regional Dispute Board Review. If the Contractor provides a written rejection of the
              Resident Engineer‟s decision and a request to forward the claim to Step II, the Resident Engineer
              will forward the claim and supporting information previously submitted by the Contractor to the
              Regional Dispute Board within five State Business Days. The Regional Dispute Board will schedule
              and hold a meeting to review the claim with the Contractor within 30 State Business Days of receipt
              of the said claim information from the Resident Engineer. This time limit may be extended by
              mutual agreement of the parties. The Regional Dispute Board will issue a written decision
              regarding the claim within 20 State Business Days of the meeting.
                    Within 15 State Business Days of receipt of the Regional Dispute Board decision, the
              Contractor shall either accept or reject it in writing; or upon failure to complete this, the claim will
              be considered withdrawn and the Contractual Claim Resolution Process shall be considered to be
              concluded for that particular claim. If the Contractor accepts the decision, such acceptance shall
              include execution of an unconditional release furnished by the Department effective upon payment.
                    The Director, Construction Services and Materials, may request an informal meeting with the
              Contractor to discuss the then pending claim(s) after the Step II decision has been issued and sent to
              the Contractor, but prior to the matter being reviewed at the next step, subject to the mutual consent
              of the Contractor and the Department.
         c. Step III, Claims Committee Review. A written request for a Step III review of the claim is to be
              made to the Secretary of the Department Claims Committee, P.O. Box 600, Trenton, New Jersey
              08625-0600 with a copy to the Director, Construction Services & Materials. The Contractor may
              request that the Department Claims Committee immediately review claims, which are unresolved
              after review by the Regional Dispute Board,, when the following conditions are met:
              1. A claim or the combination of claims exceed $250,000; or
              2. It is mutually agreed to by the Contractor and the Department.
                    However, when a project becomes 75 percent complete by contract time or dollar amount,
              which ever first occurs, claims that are unresolved at Step II will be reviewed at a single session of
              the Department Claims Committee after the Completion of the Work.
                    Additionally, the Contractor may request at the time of issuance of the Final Certificate that all
              unresolved claims, with the exception of the exclusionary cases as provided for in this Subsection,


Route 35 over Manasquan River Bridge Rehabilitation
Monmouth and Ocean Counties                                                                                   Page 32
              that have gone through the Steps I and II of the Contractual Claim Resolution Process, and which
              have not been presented at Step III of the Contractual Claim Resolution Process, be reviewed by the
              Department Claims Committee as provided for in this Subsection. The Contractor's written request
              must accompany its exceptions to the Final Certificate, with a copy sent to the Secretary of the
              Department Claims Committee and shall be made no later than 30 State Business Days after the
              issuance of the Final Certificate.
                    The Secretary of the Department Claims Committee will schedule a Claims Committee
              meeting with representatives of the Contractor and the Region, to be held within 45 State Business
              Days of the receipt of the claim information. This time limit may be extended by mutual agreement
              of the parties. The Department Claims Committee will notify the Contractor in writing of its
              decision on the claim(s) within 45 State Business Days of the meeting, stipulating the terms of any
              resolution of the claims. If the Department Claims Committee determines after review of the claims
              that no resolution and no further payment is warranted, it shall notify the Contractor in writing of its
              decision. Within 15 State Business Days of the receipt of the Department Claims Committee
              decision, the Contractor shall either accept or reject it in writing, or upon failure to complete this,
              the claim will be considered withdrawn and the Contractual Claim Resolution Process shall be
              considered to be concluded for that particular claim. If the Contractor accepts the decision, such
              acceptance shall include execution of an unconditional release furnished by the Department
              effective upon payment. If the Contractor rejects the decision, there will be no further review of the
              claim unless the Contractor submits a written request for the utilization of Non-Binding Mediation.
         d.   Step IV, Non-Binding Mediation.
              (1) Conditions. The Contractor may request at any time during the Project, but no later than 30
                    State Business Days after issuance of the Final Certificate, that any claim unresolved by the
                    Department Claims Committee be elevated to Step IV. The request must be in writing to the
                    Secretary, Department Claims Committee, P.O. Box 600, Trenton, New Jersey 08625-0600.
                    No claim will be elevated to Step IV unless all of the following conditions are satisfied:
                    (a.) The claim has been reviewed by the Department Claims Committee.
                    (b.) The Contractor has escrowed its bid preparation documents as required under Subsection
                         103.06 and the documents are still being held in escrow.
                    (c.) The Contractor has entered into a Non-Evidential agreement to the effect that any
                         statement or information provided during the Non-Binding Mediation proceedings shall
                         not be evidential in any legal proceeding unless obtained by other discoverable means.
                    (d.) The Contractor has entered into a cost sharing agreement to equally share the cost of
                         using Non-Binding Mediation in accord with Department issued forms.
                    (e.) The utilization of Non-Binding Mediation has been mutually agreed to by the Department
                         and the Contractor; and
                    (f.) Prior to the commencement of the Non-Binding Mediation the parties shall confer with
                         one another for the purpose of resolving the format of presenting the claim summary,
                         supporting information, opening statements, and responses.
                         Failure by the Contractor to request Non-Binding Mediation within the required time
                    period shall constitute a waiver by the Contractor of any utilization of the Non-Binding
                    Mediation Step.
              (2) Forms. Where the Contractor requests that Non-Binding Mediation be conducted, the
                    Department will forward to the Contractor the required Non–Evidential and cost sharing
                    agreement forms which shall be executed by the Contractor and returned to the Department
                    within ten State Business Days. The failure by the Contractor to return the fully executed
                    Non-Evidential and cost sharing agreements to the Department within the ten-day period shall
                    constitute a waiver by the Contractor of the availability of Step IV.
              (3) Mediator. The Department will select the Mediator to be utilized for the Non-Binding
                    Mediation from a list of candidates submitted by the Contractor. The Contractor shall submit
                    the names of six proposed Mediators, along with a biographical background listing the
                    experience and qualifications of each candidate. Candidates may be from the same
                    employment category or disciplines, such as construction, mediation, partnering facilitation,
                    consulting engineer, attorney, judiciary (retired), accountant, architect, etc.
                         A candidate may have been used for mediation purposes for this Project or another
                    project but shall not have any other relationships with either the Department or the Contractor


Route 35 over Manasquan River Bridge Rehabilitation
Monmouth and Ocean Counties                                                                                   Page 33
                    for a period of two years preceding the request for Step IV. If the Department determines that
                    none of the candidates submitted are acceptable, the Department will request and the
                    Contractor shall submit four additional Mediator candidates. The Contractor shall submit this
                    additional list within five State Business Days of the receipt of the written request. Upon
                    mutual agreement, the Mediator can be an individual proposed by the Department.
                (4) Escrow Documents. Once the Contractor has fully executed the required Non-Evidential and
                    cost sharing agreements, its escrowed bid documents will be released upon request of the
                    Department Claims Committee Chairperson solely for the exclusive use of the Mediator, the
                    Department‟s selected Negotiator(s), the Department Regional Representative(s) and the
                    Contractor Representative(s) participating in the Mediation session. These documents will be
                    used by the Department as part of the Contractual Claims Resolution Process only to resolve
                    the pending claims except it may seek such documents through the discovery process in the
                    event mediation is not successful and litigation ensues.
                (5) Meeting. The Secretary of the Department Claims Committee will schedule a meeting for the
                    Non-Binding Mediation of the submitted claims to be held within 30 State Business Days of
                    the return of the executed Non-Evidential and cost sharing agreements. The meeting time limit
                    may be extended by mutual agreement of the parties. The Secretary of the Department Claims
                    Committee will issue the recommendations of the Department‟s Negotiator to the
                    Commissioner for action within 15 State Business Days of the Non Binding Mediation session.
                    The Commissioner, or their designee, will accept, reject, or modify the recommendation of the
                    Department Negotiator and notify the Contractor of the decision within 15 State Business
                    Days.
                (6) Decision. The Contractor shall accept or reject the decision within 15 State Business Days of
                    notification of the Commissioner's decision. If the Contractor accepts the decision of the
                    Commissioner, or their designee, such acceptance shall be in writing and include execution of
                    an unconditional release furnished by the Department effective upon payment. If the
                    Contractor fails to accept or reject the Commissioner‟s decision within 15 State Business Days,
                    the decision of the Commissioner will be withdrawn and the Contractual Claims Resolution
                    Process shall be deemed concluded as to that particular claim under review.
                          After submission of the recommendation to the Commissioner, the bid documents
                    released from escrow will be returned to the escrow agent for continued escrow in the
                    designated repository

107.10 Sanitary Health and Safety Provisions.
     THE FOLLOWING IS ADDED AT THE END OF THE SECTION:
        The Contractor shall address the following items of work in accordance with these Special Provisions:
        1. Asbestos abatement related to removal/encapsulation of window caulking, and associated demolition
            of asbestos containing wallboard.
        2. Removal, temporary storage (if required and approved by the Resident Engineer), and disposal of lead-
            contaminated soil.
        3. Lead based paint removal and disposal.

     The Contractor shall also submit a separate Lead Health and Safety Plan as required in Subsection 514.13

107.11 Public Convenience and Safety.
      THE FOLLOWING IS ADDED AT THE END OF THE SECTION:
      The Contractor is cautioned that there is a significant amount of bicycle traffic utilizing the bridge, not only in
the peak summer months, but also throughout the year. Additionally there is a motorized wheelchair-bound
individual that traverses the bridge several times a week. As such, the Contractor is to exercise extreme caution in
maintaining the safety of the afore-mentioned public while they utilize the bridge and/or roadway sidewalks within
the limits of the project.

107.13 Construction over or Adjacent to Navigable Waters.
     THE FOLLOWING IS ADDED:
     The Department has obtained permission from the US Coast Guard (USCG) to limit operation of the bridge
during construction for a total of the three winters (2006-07, 2007-08, 2008-09), beginning November 1 and ending


Route 35 over Manasquan River Bridge Rehabilitation
Monmouth and Ocean Counties                                                                                      Page 34
March 1, each construction year. The anticipated closure of the bridge operations will be limited to six (6) days
each week, (i.e Monday through Saturday) for the entire 24 hours each day. The specific restrictions are as follows:
            Period of Restricted Openings: November 1 to March 1 (years of 2006, 2007, 2008, and 2009)
                1. Openings on Sundays only, as scheduled at 9:00 AM, 11:00 AM, 1:00 PM, and 3:00 PM
                2. Double leaf openings (whole bridge) from November 1 to December 15 (end date can be shifted
                      if needed)
                3. Single leaf openings (half the bridge) from December 16 to March 1
                4. Special openings for Atlantic City Boat Show – both leaves (out and in) – dates to be defined
                      [typically out during the last week of January and returning in the second week of February]
                5. Special openings for New York City Boat Show – both leaves (out and in) – dates to be defined
                      [typically out the third week of December and returning in the second week of January]
            Accommodations for Boats arriving on days other than Sunday, or as needed:
                1. Boat slips will be available at the Brielle Marine Basin (5 slips available that can accommodate
                      boats up to 60 feet long)
                2. The Contractor will provide vessels with the temporary use of boat slips in accordance with
                      Section 624.
      A 4-hour notification will be required by the boaters requesting bridge openings, on these Sundays. During
this period (November 1 through March 1) the Contractor shall be held responsible for the operation of the bascule
span. The navigational channel shall remain open to vessels less than thirty (30) feet tall to pass through
unrestricted at all times, but need not open to taller vessels requiring an opening except on these Sundays.
      The specific opening dates and times for the Atlantic City and New York City Boat Shows shall be coordinated
with Richard King of Garden State Yacht Sales at 732-892-4222.
      The Contractor may be allowed to request closure of the bridge (to navigational traffic requiring openings)
only during the period noted above, however the channel closures must be coordinated and approved by the U. S.
Coast Guard, Fifth Coast Guard District, Portsmouth, Virginia. Boat traffic that needs to pass under the bascule
span, NOT requiring a bridge opening shall NOT be obstructed from passing through, as a result of ANY Contractor
operation. The Contractor shall submit his plan and schedule of operation for approval at least 30 days prior to
commencement of work in the waterway. Two copies of such information shall be submitted concurrently to the
Resident Engineer, the Commander (obr), Fifth Coast Guard District, 431 Crawford Street, Portsmouth, Virginia
23704-5004. The information shall include a sketch of the waterway; the bridge; the location of any restrictions that
will be placed in the waterway such as barges, anchors, and anchor lines; the location and height above mean high
water and detailed description of any scaffolding, or netting; detailed description indicating the placement, type and
dimension of any cofferdams if used, with the method of screening silt from dewatering operations; and a project set
of dates and length of time each operation will take. The schedule should also include the hours of operation and
whether or not the equipment will be removed at night. No deviation from the approved plan and schedule of
operation may be made unless the modification has previously been submitted and approved by the Coast Guard.
The Contractor shall comply with all provisions of the Navigation Rules International – Inland, available from the
Superintendent of Documents, U.S. Government Printing Office, Washington, D.C. The Contractor shall submit to
the Resident Engineer a copy of all correspondence between the Coast Guard and himself.
      During the progress of work, while the channel is in operation, should any material, machinery, or equipment
be lost, dumped, thrown overboard, sunk or misplaced which may be dangerous to or obstruct navigation, immediate
notice shall be given to the Coast Guard and the object removed with the utmost dispatch. Until removal can be
effected, the objects shall be properly marked in order to protect navigation. Notice to the Coast Guard shall give a
description and location of any such object and the action taken or being taken to protect navigation.
      Except as noted above, at no time during the work will the waterway be closed to navigation without prior
approval from the Coast Guard. While the channel is in operation, all restrictions placed on the waterway shall be
able to clear the channel within one hour‟s notice. Floating work equipment (barges, etc.) must be moved out of the
navigable channel during darkness after work hours. No existing bridge navigation lights shall be impaired or
blocked during darkness or periods of reduced visibility.
      Except as shown on the plans, no dredging, excavation, filling, rip-rap, or other work affecting the bottom,
shall be done in conjunction with this work. It shall be the responsibility of the Contractor to insure that channel
depths are not affected by the work. Should it be suspected that the channel depths may have been impaired or that
an obstruction may exist from the work, the Contractor shall, upon request of the Coast Guard or Corps of
Engineers, provide the necessary equipment and personnel to undertake a survey to determine the presence of an
obstruction, objects, or silting that may have occurred during construction. The cost of this work shall be borne by
the Contractor.


Route 35 over Manasquan River Bridge Rehabilitation
Monmouth and Ocean Counties                                                                                   Page 35
      The construction of falsework, cofferdams, or other obstructions, if required, shall be in accordance with plans
submitted to and approved by the Commander, Fifth Coast Guard District, prior to construction of the bridge. All
work shall be so conducted that the free navigation of the waterway is not unreasonably interfered with and the
present navigable depths are not impaired. Timely notice of any and all events that may affect navigation shall be
given to the District Commander during construction of the bridge. The channel or channels through the structure
shall be promptly cleared of all obstructions placed therein or caused by the construction of the bridge to the
satisfaction of the District Commander, when in the judgment of the District Commander the construction work has
reached a point where such action should be taken, but in no case later than 90 days after the bridge has been opened
to traffic.
      Spillage of oil and hazardous substances is specifically prohibited by Section 311 of the Federal Water
Pollution Control Act, and amended in 1972. Measures including proper maintenance of construction equipment;
arrangement of the fuel handling areas so as to permit spills to be contained before reaching a waterway; instructing
personnel not to dispose of oil or other such materials into drains or into a waterway directly, as well as other
procedures should be planned to prevent spillage. If any oil or other hazardous material is spilled into the waterway,
the U.S. Coast Guard shall be notified immediately at 800-424-8802. A supply of hay, straw or other absorbent
shall be retained so that it may be rapidly deployed to soak up any possible spillage, pending Coast Guard arrival on
the scene. Use of emulsifiers or chemical dispersants is a violation of federal law and is prohibited.
      During the period that the channel is in operation, placement of construction equipment in the navigational
channel shall be done so as to provide a minimum horizontal clearance of 25 feet. All construction equipment
placed in the waterway during periods of darkness or reduced visibility shall be lighted in accordance with the
provision as outlined in the Navigation Rules International-Inland COMDTINST M16672.2D and as directed by the
Coast Guard or the Resident Engineer. All anchor lines (if used) must be marked by anchor buoys, which preferably
should be lighted. Floating work equipment must be moved out of navigable channel during darkness after work
hours. Anchors, anchor lines, and buoys shall be so located as not to hazard transits of the waterway and so they
will not infringe on the navigational channel. Floating equipment shall have a radiotelephone capable of operation
from its main control station in accordance with Part 26 of Title 33, Code of Federal Regulations and shall be
monitored during all periods the floating equipment is on station.
      If during the periods of construction, permanent lighting cannot be maintained operable, the fenders of each
pier shall be marked with a battery or power operated quick flashing white light of not less than 60 flashes per
minute and visible for a range of 2,000 yards on 90% of the nights of the year. Generally, a lamp of 20-candle
power will meet these requirements. If necessary to obtain coverage required, a light or lights on the upstream and
downstream sides shall be installed. The piers shall be so marked until the construction has been completed and
permanent navigational lighting has been reinstalled and determined to be operating satisfactorily. Written approval
from the Coast Guard of temporary lighting during periods of construction is required.
      Compliance with the requirements stated herein does not relieve the Contractor of the obligation or
responsibility for compliance with the provisions of any other law or regulation as may be under the jurisdiction of
the State of New Jersey, or any other federal, state or local authority having cognizance of any aspect of the location,
construction or maintenance of said bridge.
      Time restrictions for the navigational traffic shutdown shall be strictly adhered to. Any request for a minor
extension (not to exceed one week) of the closure dates stated above shall be forwarded in a timely manner to the
Coast Guard Bridge Administration Office for approval. However, this approval by the USCG and/or NJDOT is not
guaranteed. It is advised that the Coast Guard may levy monetary civil penalties for violations of bridge regulations
and statutes. Should the Contractor fail to comply with any of the aforementioned requirements and should the
Federal Government be required to take action for the protection of navigation, the Government reserves the right to
recover costs for any such action from the Contractor.
      The office of the Bridge Administrator, Fifth Coast Guard District, shall be notified immediately upon
completion of the project.
      No dredging will be permitted in the waterway, anywhere under any of the bridge spans, for any reason
whatsoever.
      The Contractor is cautioned that several fishing boats and large charter vessels, owned and operated by a
marina nearby (Bogan‟s Basin) use the waterway, all year round, and generally under Span 3 (from the north) and
may not necessarily require bridge openings. These boats and vessels are docked in the immediate vicinity of the
bridge along the east and west sides adjacent to Bridge Piers 2N, 3N, and 4N. A typical representative schedule of
the fishing boats and charter vessels is provided herewith for the Contractor‟s information only, as supplied to the
designer by the marina owner. These schedules are not guaranteed by the State or its representatives and it is the
Contractor‟s sole responsibility to verify this information and coordinate the with the marina owners. The


Route 35 over Manasquan River Bridge Rehabilitation
Monmouth and Ocean Counties                                                                                     Page 36
Contractor shall take all appropriate precautions to keep the waterway under Span 3N totally unobstructed during
the entire construction period, so as not to impede normal boating operations in any way.
            Departure from Marina                           Arrival at Marina
                 7:30 AM                                         4:00 PM
                 8:00 AM                                         12:00 PM
                 2:00 PM                                         6:30 PM
                 7:30 AM                                         3:00 PM
                 7:30 PM                                         4:00 AM
                 6:00 AM                                         2:00 PM
                 7:00 AM                                         3:00 PM
                 8:00 AM                                         4:00 PM
                 6:00 PM                                         4:00 PM
                 8:00 PM                                         6:00 PM
                 1:00 AM                                         7:00 PM
                 5:00 AM                                         5:00 PM

     The above schedule is NOT all inclusive and is meant to only alert the Contractor of the busy nature of the
marina that essentially operates nearly 24 hours a day. The heaviest season is the beginning of May through the end
of November. The basin‟s entire fleet operates on a daily schedule December through April.
     See Section 108.16 for liquidated damages. For bridge operations and maintenance during construction, see
Section 536.

107.22 Risks Assumed by the Contractor.
        SUBPART 1 IS CHANGED TO:

     1.   Risks of Loss or Damage to the Permanent Construction. Until Acceptance, and within the limits of
          the Project‟s work, the Contractor shall bear the risk of all loss or damage to all permanent construction
          and temporary construction performed under this Contract and to materials, whether or not it has received
          payment for such construction or materials under Subsection 109.05, 109.06, or 109.07, except payment
          will be made to the Contractor for the repair or replacement of any permanent element of the construction
          which has not been accepted by the Department, if the element of the work damaged is completed to the
          stage of serving its intended function and is subsequently damaged by accident by public traffic. In order
          to receive payment, the Contractor must supply satisfactory evidence that such damage was caused by a
          public traffic accident which was not caused by vandalism or by the equipment of the Contractor or any
          of its subcontractors or suppliers. Satisfactory evidence shall generally be limited to: accident reports
          filed with the Division of Motor Vehicles, police agencies or insurance companies; statements by reliable,
          unbiased eye witnesses; identification of the vehicle involved in the accident. Physical evidence that the
          damage was caused by a motor vehicle (such as tire marks or broken headlight glass) will not be
          sufficient unless it can be clearly shown that the damage was not caused by the Contractor‟s vehicles or
          by vandalism. The Contractor shall take every precaution, as allowed by the Contract against injury or
          damage to any part of the construction or to materials by the action of the elements, the traveling public,
          vandalism, or from any other cause, whether arising from the execution or the non-execution of the work.
          The Contractor shall promptly repair, replace, and make good any such damage or loss without cost to the
          Department. The Contractor shall not bear such risk of loss or damage, which arises from acts of war or
          floods, tidal waves, earthquakes, cyclones, tornadoes, hurricanes, or other cataclysmic natural
          phenomenon unless such loss or damage is covered by insurance.

107.23 Insurance.
     6. Railroad Insurance.
              Insurance coverage shall be procured and maintained for the following railroad(s):

                     when applicable include THE PERCENTAGE OF PROJECT COST WITHIN RAILROAD
          ROW

               It is estimated that 10 percent of the Project cost is located within or adjacent to the railroad right-
          of-way.


Route 35 over Manasquan River Bridge Rehabilitation
Monmouth and Ocean Counties                                                                                    Page 37
107.28 Environmental Protection.
THE FOLLOWING IS ADDED AT THE END OF THE SECTION:

                The following time restrictions shall be complied with during the entire duration of the construction
          of the project:
                     No in-water work will be allowed between January 1 through June 30 – work includes
                          installation of riprap channel protection around the two piers as designated in the plans,
                          fender repairs and installation of the northern bulkhead repairs.
                     No bridge demolition or roadway excavation/demolition work at the southern end of the
                          bridge will be allowed between April 1 to September 30 within the buffer zone for night
                          heron roosting as indicated on the plans – specifically deck demolition, railing removal,
                          sidewalk demolition, excavation of the existing approach pavement, guide rail removal,
                          contaminated soil removal under the south end span, cleaning and painting activities,
                          bearing jacking work - any of these activities that occur inside of the buffer zone shall be
                          scheduled outside of the time restrictions. The construction schedule for the staging of the
                          work has considered these restrictions.

                        SECTION 108 – PROSECUTION AND PROGRESS
108.02 Subcontracting.
     Specialty Items are as listed below:
     Span Balancing – (initial, intermediate ones [one each after Stage I, Stage II, Stage III, and Stage IV] and
Final).
     Remove Asbestos walls in machinery room.

          Above ground highway lighting items.
          Above and below bridge deck lighting items.
          Electrical wire items.


                                                                     THE FOLLOWING IS ADDED TO
               THE END OF THE FIFTH PARAGRAPH:

The Contractor shall also attach to that form (application for subcontracting form) proof of the Subcontractor‟s
valid, current registration with the New Jersey Department of Labor, Division of Wage and Hour Compliance as
required by “Public Works Contractor Registration Act,” N.J.S.A. 34:11-56.48 et seq. (P.L. 2003, c. 91). Pursuant
to P.L. 2003, c. 91, the Department will not consent to the proposed subcontracting, and the Subcontractor shall not
perform any work under the Contract, unless the Contractor first provides the required proof of the Subcontractor‟s
valid, current registration with the New Jersey Department of Labor, Division of Wage and Hour Compliance as
required by “Public Works Contractor Registration Act.” The Contractor shall ensure full compliance with the
Public Works Contractor Registration requirements by their Subcontractors.

108.03 Commencement of Work.
        THE THIRD SENTENCE OF THE FIRST PARAGRAPH IS CHANGED TO:

Construction operations shall not begin until the Contractor has supplied, and the Engineer has accepted, the
preliminary schedule and other certifications, forms, schedules, and any other information required by the Contract
Documents, and until the Contractor has established a field office as required by Subsection 105.15.

108.04 Progress Schedule and Prosecution of the Work.
        THE ENTIRE SUBSECTION IS CHANGED TO:

     In scheduling and executing the Work, the following shall be complied with:
     1. Progress Schedules. The progress schedule shall conform to and incorporate the following
           requirements:


Route 35 over Manasquan River Bridge Rehabilitation
Monmouth and Ocean Counties                                                                                   Page 38
         a.   General.
              (1) The work shall be monitored by a detailed CPM schedule. The CPM schedule shall be
                  developed utilizing the most current NJDOT Capital Program Management Construction
                  Scheduling Standard Coding and Procedures for Designers and Contractors Manual and the
                  NJDOT Primavera template project containing the latest standard coding. The manual and
                  template are available from the Bureau of Quality Management Services.
                        The CPM schedule shall consist of diagrams and accompanying mathematical analyses.
                  The scheduling of submittals, procurement, construction, and all else necessary to complete the
                  Work as described in the Contract Documents, is the responsibility of the Contractor. The
                  requirement for the CPM schedule is included to ensure adequate planning and execution of
                  the Work and to assist the Department in appraising the reasonableness of the proposed
                  schedule, as well as its compliance with Contract requirements.
                        The CPM schedule is the Contractor‟s committed plan to complete all work within the
                  allotted time. The Contractor assumes full responsibility for the prosecution of the Work as
                  shown. The CPM schedule shall be based on and derived from detailed schedules used to
                  complete all Contract activities.
              (2) No claim for extension of time due to extra work or any other type of delay will be considered
                  unless the baseline schedule has been approved and monthly updates are current and submitted
                  within the time limits stated.
              (3) No claim for additional compensation as specified in Subsection 109.04 will be considered
                  unless the baseline schedule has been approved and monthly updates are current and submitted
                  within the time limits stated.
              (4) The CPM preliminary, baseline, and updated schedules shall be submitted in electronic format
                  on a floppy diskette or compact disk, in addition to the required number of copies specified in
                  b. (1) and b. (2) below.
              (5) Once the CPM baseline schedule has been approved, the Contractor shall not deviate therefrom
                  without first notifying the Engineer in writing and schedule is updated in accordance with 1.h.
                  and 1.i. below.
         b.   Submittals. The CPM schedule shall consist of the following two distinct initial submittals:
              (1) Preliminary Schedule. No later than 10 State Business Days after execution of the Contract,
                  the Contractor shall submit to the Engineer for review and approval or rejection and return a
                  preliminary schedule. The Contractor shall submit six copies of:
              (a) A CPM time-scaled diagram defining the Contractor‟s planned activities during the first 90
                  Calendar Days. For projects with a construction cost over $ 40 million, a CPM time-scaled
                  diagram defining the Contractor‟s planned activities during the first 120 Calendar Days.
              (b) A summary network for the remainder of the Contract time. The preliminary schedule shall
                  indicate all milestone activities expected to be completed or partially completed before
                  submission and approval of the CPM baseline schedule as specified in b. (2) below.
              I   All multiple shifts per day and anticipated production rates shall be detailed in the Contractor‟s
                  narrative accompanying the preliminary schedule.
              (d) The Work shall not begin until the preliminary schedule has been approved. Five State
                  Business Days will be required for review and approval or rejection and return of the
                  preliminary schedule.
              (2) Baseline CPM Schedule. In accordance with the time frames listed below, the Contractor
                  shall submit six copies of the Baseline CPM Schedule documents depicting the Contractor‟s
                  work plan for the entire Contract.

                                                       Time Frame After Approval of
                       Project Construction Cost    Preliminary Schedule for Submission
                               ($ million)             of the Baseline CPM Schedule
                                                            (State Business Days)
                                  <5                                 10
                                5 - 15                               15
                                15 – 40                              20
                                 > 40                                30



Route 35 over Manasquan River Bridge Rehabilitation
Monmouth and Ocean Counties                                                                                 Page 39
                         The Contractor shall submit to the Engineer for review and approval or rejection and
                  return:
              (a) Computer generated tabular schedule and logic reports in accordance with 1.e. below.
              (b) Time-scaled computer generated Layout Output in conformance with 1.f. below.
              I   A written narrative explaining the schedule and the Contractor‟s general approach for
                  achieving Substantial Completion and the date of Completion as specified in Subsection
                  108.10 of these Special Provisions. Multiple shifts per day and anticipated production rates
                  shall be detailed in the Contractor‟s narrative accompanying the Baseline CPM Schedule.
              (d) Electronic version as specified in 1.a. (4) above.
         c.   CPM Schedule Requirements for the Baseline and Updates.
              (1) The CPM schedule and updates shall contain the following:
              (a) The order in which the Contractor proposes to prosecute the Work; the starting dates of the
                  various work stages, operations, and principal items of work including procurement of
                  materials and plant, and the contemplated dates for completing the same.
              (b) List dates for all required submissions.
              I   A clear outline of the intended maintenance of traffic.
              (d) The locations and timeframes for the installation of temporary and permanent soil erosion and
                  sediment control measures to be installed.
              (e) All unusual requirements specific to the project included in the Contract Documents or as
                  deemed appropriate for the project.
              (f) Special consideration to sensitive areas such as wetlands, floodplains, waterways, and
                  parklands to ensure that appropriate staging and seasonal constraints are considered in order to
                  maximize the effectiveness of the soil erosion and sediment controls.
              (g) The time frames when work is restricted in sensitive areas as reflected in present and future
                  permits as anticipated or known.
              (h) Updates to reflect permit conditions if changed.
              (i) Include a detailed, step-by-step outline of any clean-up operations regarding contaminated
                  material.
              (j) The work of the Contractor, subcontractors, suppliers, the Department, permitting agencies,
                  utility companies, and all others that affect progress shall be shown and identified on the
                  schedule by responsibility codes.
              (k) Procurement activities shall be shown, including plans, permits, materials, individual working
                  drawings, fabrication, and delivery of the material. Twenty State Business Days will be
                  required for review and certification or rejection and return of fabrication working drawings.
                  Thirty State Business Days will be required for review and approval or rejection and return of
                  working drawings for items that were included as conceptual and the Contractor is required to
                  complete final design plans. The time frames set forth in this paragraph are provided for
                  scheduling purposes only. The Department reserves the right to enlarge such time periods for
                  review by a reasonable amount of time where circumstances necessitate, within the sole
                  discretion of the Engineer.
              (l) Traffic staging, delivery of Department – furnished labor/equipment, project phasing, right-of-
                  way availability dates, and any other requirements specified in Divisions 200 through 900 shall
                  be shown.
              (m) The CPM schedule shall contain sufficient activities to adequately depict the Work, and will be
                  subject to the review and approval of the Engineer.
              (n) The logic and activity time durations established by the Contractor shall be consistent with the
                  Contract Documents and be reflective of proper coordination between trades.
              (2) The CPM schedule shall operate as follows:
              (a) The CPM schedule shall be of the precedence type.
              (b) One activity for each discrete component part of each Pay Item scheduled in the Proposal. The
                  Engineer may allow grouping of similar Pay Items into one activity. No work activity shall
                  have a duration greater than 30 Calendar Days, except as approved by the Engineer. The
                  activities shall be consistent with the Work Breakdown Structure (WBS), and shall also
                  include discrete component parts of the Contractor‟s submittal preparation, Department



Route 35 over Manasquan River Bridge Rehabilitation
Monmouth and Ocean Counties                                                                                Page 40
                   approval, procurement, and construction work activities with sufficient detail such that all the
                   relationships with all direct and non-direct parties to the Work are shown.
              I    The system shall be based upon network diagrams and accompanying mathematical
                   tabulations as described hereinafter. Diagrams shall show the order and interdependence of
                   activities and the sequence and quantities in which work is to be accomplished. The basic
                   concept of network scheduling shall be followed to show how the start of a given activity is
                   dependent on the completion of preceding activities and how its completion may affect the
                   start of subsequent activities. The critical path shall be distinguished from other paths on the
                   network.
              (d) The completion date of the CPM schedule shall be the date of Completion specified in
                   Subsection 108.10 of these Special Provisions, except as specified in Subsection 108.04
                   subpart 5, which shall be input as a Finish Milestone with a Late Finish Constraint. All
                   Intermediate Milestones required in the Contract shall be shown in proper logical sequence and
                   input as a “Start-no-Earlier-Than” constraint for entrance into an area or start activity or a
                   “Finish-no-Later-Than” constraint date for completions.
              (e) Activities shall be described such that the Work is readily identifiable for assessment of start
                   and completion, as well as intermediate status. Descriptions shall utilize activity codes for
                   physical locations at each stage such as distance-markers, structures, and elevations where
                   possible to define the Work. Activity descriptions of “Start,” “Continue,” “Completion,” “X
                   percent,” “Y percent,” “Z percent” or similar nonspecific descriptions will not be allowed.
              (f) The CPM schedule shall be calculated in Working Days. The Working Day to calendar date
                   correlation shall be based upon the Contractors proposed work week with adequate allowance
                   for weekends, legal holidays and any special requirements of the Contract. Activities shall
                   indicate the calendar being used. Durations for activities shall not be less than one workday.
                   Multiple shifts per day and anticipated production rates shall be detailed in the Contractor‟s
                   narrative accompanying the baseline schedule and subsequent updates.
              (g) Constraint dates are permitted only on milestone activities, unless otherwise approved by the
                   Engineer.
              (h) All activities with the exception of the Project Start Milestone and Project Completion
                   Milestone shall have predecessors and successors. The start of an activity shall have a Start-to-
                   Start or Finish-to-Start relationship with preceding activities. The completion of an activity
                   shall have a Finish-to-Start or Finish-to-Finish relationship with a succeeding activity. Start-
                   to-Finish relationships are not acceptable.
              (i) CPM schedules, which have been resource leveled, are permissible, provided the effects of
                   leveling are incorporated in the schedule using “Start-no-Earlier-Than” date constraints.
         d.   Computer Program Requirements. The computer program requirements shall be the same as that
              specified in Subsection 105.15 subpart 1.e. of these Special Provisions.
         e.   Tabular Reports.
              (1) CPM schedule reports shall be provided for the following sort orders:
              (a) Total float, then early start for activities with float less than 20 days.
              (b) Grouped by responsibility, then by early start.
              I    Grouped by WBS, area, then sorted by early start.
              (2) The minimum activity information required for each of the above reports in (1), shall include
                   the following:
              (a) A unique activity ID for each activity.
              (b) A description of the Work represented by the activity.
              I    Location code identification.
              (d) Work responsibility code identification.
              (e) Original activity duration and remaining activity duration in Working Days.
              (f) Early and late, start and finish dates calculated according to CPM principles.
              (g) Total float.
              (h) Historical (actual) dates for activities completed or underway shall replace the appropriate
                   calculated dates.
              (i) Stages.
              (j) Calendar used for each activity.
         f.   CPM Time-Scaled Layout Output.


Route 35 over Manasquan River Bridge Rehabilitation
Monmouth and Ocean Counties                                                                                 Page 41
              (1) The network displayed on the schedule diagram shall depict the exact detail of the CPM
                    schedule reports.
              (2) The network diagram shall be of the precedence type and drawn by using early dates.
              (3) The layout output shall be time-scaled. The length of the activity representation shall be
                    proportional to the activity duration.
              (4) The activity display shall include the:
              (a) Activity description.
              (b) Activity identification.
              I     Activity original duration and remaining duration.
              (d) Activities coded by area, responsibility, and WBS.
              (e) Activity total float.
              (f) Activities early start dates.
              (g) Activities finish dates.
              (5) The activities, which are displayed on the network diagram, shall be grouped by WBS and
                    sorted by area. The title of these components shall appear on the left-hand side of the plot.
              (6) The critical path shall be identified on the plot.
              (7) Vertical lines indicating the start and the end of each month shall be shown.
              (8) The data date shall be indicated on the plot in the activity display and in the title at the top or
                    bottom of the plot.
              (9) Completed activities shall be indicated on the plot.
              (10) The Contract title shall be displayed on the plot.
              (11) A legend shall be provided which indicates the various symbols used and their meanings.
              (12) Milestone Activity shall be indicated by a prominent symbol.
              (13) Different line types shall indicate the critical path and completed Milestone and activities.
         g.   Review and Approval. The Engineer will review a submitted preliminary schedule for approval or
              rejection within five State Business Days of receipt and will thereafter return same to the party
              having submitted it. There will, in turn, be allotted ten State Business Days for review and approval
              or rejection by the Engineer of the submitted baseline schedule, which will thereafter be returned to
              the party having submitted it. The Engineer will review revised preliminary or revised baseline
              submittals within five State Business Days of receipt. The time periods set forth in this paragraph
              are provided for scheduling purposes only. The Department reserves the right to enlarge such time
              periods for review by a reasonable amount of time where circumstances necessitate, within the sole
              discretion of the Engineer.
         h.   Updating and Revisions.
              (1) Within ten State Business Days after review by the Engineer, all preliminary and baseline
                    schedules that are not approved shall be revised and resubmitted by the Contractor until the
                    Engineer‟s approval is received.
              (2) The Contractor shall update the CPM schedule monthly whether or not the Engineer has
                    accepted the schedule, to reflect actual activity progress. The update shall include the
                    historical record of actual start and actual finish dates for activities in progress, or completed,
                    and the remaining duration based on the amount of workdays required to complete the activity.
              (3) Monthly progress meetings shall be held. The updated CPM schedule shall be the basis for the
                    monthly progress review meetings. Activity progress shall be prepared in advance of the
                    meeting. At this meeting, attended by the Engineer, all progress during the calendar month
                    shall be presented and reviewed for incorporation into the schedule by the Contractor. Within
                    a period of ten State Business Days from the date of this progress meeting, the Contractor shall
                    submit the schedule update to the Engineer with the agreed upon changes.
              (4) The monthly schedule update submission shall consist of three copies of electronic format on
                    floppy diskettes or compact disks and three copies of the following:
              (a) Updated CPM schedule reports (see Item e. above).
              (b) Layout output. (See item f. above).
              I     CPM progress narrative.
                          The CPM progress narrative report submitted as part of the update analysis shall include,
                    but not be limited to, the:
              1. Description of schedule status.
              2. Discussion of current and anticipated delaying problem areas and their estimated impact.


Route 35 over Manasquan River Bridge Rehabilitation
Monmouth and Ocean Counties                                                                                    Page 42
              3.     Schedule slippage, pay revisions, and/or progress along the critical path in terms of days ahead
                     or behind the allowable dates, and if the Work is behind schedule, progress along other paths
                     with negative float. This shall be in addition to and not a substitute for requirements in
                     Subsection 108.11.
               4. Logic changes and an explanation of the revisions. Revisions to activities not worked on
                     during the period, including changes in duration, or revisions to activity relationships are to be
                     considered logic revisions. Out-of-sequence activities are not acceptable and shall be
                     corrected in logic revisions prior to submission to the Department.
               (5) When, in the Engineer‟s opinion, the CPM schedule fails to reflect the Contractor‟s actual plan
                     and method of operation, or the Contractor‟s completion date as indicated by the CPM is more
                     than one month behind the Contract completion date, the Engineer may require the Contractor
                     to submit for review within ten State Business Days, a recovery plan for completion of the
                     remaining work within the Contract completion date. A recovery plan shall include, but not be
                     limited to, a revised CPM schedule and additional manpower and equipment that shall be
                     utilized to complete the project by the date of Completion.
               (6) When the Contractor adds activities that are not Extra Work Items to the CPM schedule, they
                     shall be added in a method that completion dates of any succeeding baseline activities are not
                     affected. All revisions shall be submitted to the Engineer for approval before incorporation
                     into the CPM schedule.
               (7) The Engineer shall have the right, within its sole discretion, to prepare its own update(s) or
                     revision(s) to the baseline schedule in the event of a dispute between the parties regarding the
                     appropriateness of the submitted revision(s) or updates to the baseline schedule or by reason of
                     a failure on the part of the Contractor to prepare same, which update(s) or revision(s) may
                     reflect what the Engineer has determined to be the actual status of the project progress, actual
                     sequencing of the Work and appropriate scheduling logic required under this Subsection. The
                     Engineer may thereupon rely on its own revision(s) or update(s) of the baseline schedule in the
                     administration of the project, review of claims and/or the imposition of liquidated damages.
         i.    Changes and Delays. To ensure that the CPM schedule continues to accurately reflect the
               Contractor‟s plan for the Work and that it incorporates the impact of all changes and delays as soon
               as the Work scope can be defined, the Contractor shall use the following procedure to incorporate
               changes and delays.
                     When Extra Work or a change is proposed or claimed, the Contractor shall submit a Time
               Impact Evaluation form. Each Time Impact Evaluation must identify in a CPM fragnet sketch,
               additional work required as a result of the proposal and its interrelationship to the CPM schedule.
               Each change or delay shall be represented by adding a new activity or activities. These activities
               shall be clearly identified. This sketch shall show all activities, logic revisions, duration changes,
               and new activities with all the predecessors and successors. The Time Impact Evaluation form shall
               also include any associated cost changes for performing the Work in question. Upon the Engineer‟s
               approval of the Time Impact Evaluation, the Contractor shall incorporate the fragnet‟s illustrating
               the influence of changes and delays into the baseline schedule and the working schedule in the next
               schedule update. An extension of time may only be considered when the Time Impacted scheduled
               completion date exceeds the date of Completion. For cases where the Contractor is behind
               schedule, an extension will be granted for only the amount of time that the Department is
               responsible as supported by a Time Impact Evaluation. In the event of a dispute, the Engineer may
               prepare an update, which is believed to be the true impact on the project. No additional
               compensation will be paid to the Contractor for preparing these revisions. Any request for
               extension of time shall be verified by CPM analysis and shall be in accordance with Subsection
               108.11. Compensation for additional expense to the Contractor and allowance of additional time for
               completion of the Work shall be as set forth in a Construction Order in accordance with Subsections
               108.11 and 109.03.
    2.   Staging. The Contractor shall schedule the Work using such procedures and staging as may be specified
         in the Contract Documents. Work designated as part of separate stages may be performed simultaneously
         where provided by the Contract Documents or where approved.
               When the Contract Documents provide for staging or specific procedures, the Contractor may
         present, for written approval of the Engineer, a detailed, written alternate staging plan or procedure which
         incorporates the requirements of the Department. If the Contractor proposes an alternate-staging plan,


Route 35 over Manasquan River Bridge Rehabilitation
Monmouth and Ocean Counties                                                                                    Page 43
         two CPM schedules shall be submitted, one based on the original staging and one based on the
         Contractor‟s alternate staging. As a condition of the Engineer‟s reviewing of the alternate staging plan or
         procedure, the Contractor agrees that it is not entitled to additional Contract Time or compensation
         arising from possible delays to construction due to the time spent in reviewing the Contractor‟s staging
         plan or procedure, regardless of whether the Department accepts or rejects it. The Engineer will review
         and approve or reject and or return, with comments, the staging plan within ten State Business Days. If
         such staging plan or alternate procedure is approved in writing, the Contractor shall then finalize the
         progress schedule consistent with the alternate approved staging.
    3.   Prosecution of the Work.
         a. At or prior to the preconstruction conference, the Contractor shall furnish the name and location of
               the solid waste facilities to be utilized as well as the fee structure of each of the facilities. Failure to
               provide such information shall make the Contractor ineligible for adjusted compensation as
               provided for in Subsection 104.07.
         b. The Contractor shall provide sufficient materials, equipment, and labor to guarantee the Completion
               of the Project in accordance with the Contract Documents and within the time set forth under
               Subsection 108.10.
         c. The Contractor shall supply the Engineer with a weekly work schedule indicating the Contractor‟s
               planned work, the subcontractor‟s planned work, the dates when materials and submissions are to be
               delivered, and a forecast of lane closings.
         d. The Contractor shall notify the Engineer, in writing, prior to discontinuing work for any reason and
               at least 24 hours in advance of resuming operations.
         e. The Contractor shall arrange and prosecute the Work so that each successive construction operation
               at each location shall follow the preceding operation as closely as the requirements of the various
               types of construction permit.
         f.    Underground structures for traffic signals, except for pressure detector installations shall be
               constructed prior to completion of the intersecting road.
         g. Work which closes or alters the use of existing roadways shall not be undertaken until adequate
               provisions, conforming to the requirements of Section 617, have been made by the Contractor and
               approved.
         h. The Engineer may revise stage construction and maintenance of traffic, if deemed necessary, by the
               Engineer due to unforeseen circumstances that may arise during construction.
         i.    When possible, the construction of subsurface structures adjacent to traffic shall be performed while
               traffic is being diverted from such areas. If traffic must be maintained in such areas, the Work shall
               be done expeditiously in stages, as approved, and with minimum interference with traffic.
         j.    Subsurface structure excavation adjacent to traffic shall not remain open overnight unless
               adequately protected by approved safety devices.
         k. The Contractor shall proceed with the Work of demolition of the various buildings that are
               identified with a demolition number as and when they become available for demolition. If any of
               the buildings to be demolished is not available for demolition at the time the Contractor begins work
               on the Project, the Contractor shall temporarily defer its work in the vicinity of the building and
               complete the Work when the building is made available for demolition.
         l.    Operations adjacent to traffic shall be confined to only one side of the traffic at any one time unless
               otherwise specified in the Contract Documents.
         m. Concrete curbs constructed adjacent to flexible base and surface courses shall be completed, cured,
               and backfilled before the flexible base and surface courses are constructed.
         n. Bituminous paving operations shall be staged to progress up to the bottom of the surface course.
               The top layer of the bituminous concrete surface course for the full width of the traveled way,
               shoulder, and auxiliary lanes shall be paved as a single stage of construction and as the final paving
               operation.
    4.   Acceleration and Default. If, in the opinion of the Engineer, the Contractor falls behind its baseline
         schedule, and cannot complete the Work within the time prescribed under Subsection 108.10, as modified
         pursuant to Subsection 108.11, the Contractor shall take such steps as may be necessary to improve its
         progress. The Engineer may require the Contractor to increase the number of shifts, begin overtime
         operations, work extra days including weekends and holidays, or supplement its construction plant and to
         submit for approval such supplementary schedule or schedules, as may be deemed necessary to
         demonstrate the manner in which the agreed rate of progress shall be regained, all at no cost to the State.


Route 35 over Manasquan River Bridge Rehabilitation
Monmouth and Ocean Counties                                                                                        Page 44
                Failure of the Contractor to comply with the requirements of the Engineer under this Subheading is
          grounds for the determination that the Contractor is not prosecuting the Work with such diligence as to
          ensure Completion within the time specified. Upon such determination, the Engineer may terminate the
          Contractor‟s right to proceed with the Work or any separate part thereof in accordance with Subsection
          108.17.
     5.   Intent, Responsibility, and Time. Scheduling of construction shall be the responsibility of the
          Contractor. The Contractor‟s shall determine the most feasible order of work commensurate with the
          Contractor‟s abilities and the Contract Documents. The CPM schedule will be used for determining
          extensions or reductions of Contract Time pursuant to Subsection 108.11.
                It is not intended that the Engineer, by approving the CPM schedule, agrees that it is reasonable in
          any or all respects or that following the CPM schedule can result in timely completion of the Project. The
          progress schedule is not a part of the Contract.
                If, in the preparation of the CPM schedule, the Contractor reflects a completion date different than
          that specified under Subsection 108.10, this in no way voids the date set therein. The date as specified in
          that Subsection governs. Where the CPM schedule reflects a completion date earlier than that specified
          as the Contract Time, the Engineer may approve such schedule with the Contractor specifically
          understanding that no claim for additional Contract Time or compensation shall be brought against the
          State as the result of failure to complete the Work by the earlier date shown on the CPM schedule.
     6.         Payment. Payment for the accepted progress schedule will be made on a lump sum basis for the
          costs for schedule preparation, maintenance, updating, facilities, personnel, computer hardware and
          software requirements, schedule submittals and reproduction as specified. Twenty-five percent of the
          lump sum bid will be paid upon approval of the baseline submission, and the balance paid on approval of
          updates at a prorated sum based upon the number of anticipated updates to be submitted during the
          Contract Time.
                Payment will be made under:
                       Pay Item                                                                   Pay Unit
                       PROGRESS SCHEDULE                                                          LUMP SUM

108.05 Mobilization.
        THE ENTIRE SUBSECTION IS CHANGED TO:

     Mobilization shall consist of the preparatory work and operations necessary for the movement of personnel,
equipment, supplies, and incidentals to the Project site, and other work performed or costs incurred prior to
beginning Work.
     Payment for mobilization will be made on a lump sum basis regardless of the fact that the Contractor may
have, for any reason, shut down its work on the Project or moved equipment away from the Project and back again.
     Payment will be made in accordance with the following schedule:
     1. When five percent of the Work is completed and the Baseline Progress Schedule is approved by the
           Engineer, 25 percent of the lump sum bid for mobilization or 2.5 percent of the Total Contract Price,
           whichever is less, will be paid.
     2. When ten percent of the Work is completed and all required CPM Progress Schedule Updates are
           approved by the Engineer, 50 percent of the lump sum bid for mobilization or five percent of the Total
           Contract Price, whichever is less, will be paid.
     3. When 15 percent of the Work is completed and all required CPM Progress Schedule Updates are
           approved by the Engineer, 75 percent of the lump sum bid for mobilization or 7.5 percent of the Total
           Contract Price, whichever is less, will be paid.
     4. When 20 percent of the Work is completed and all required CPM Progress Schedule Updates are
           approved by the Engineer, 100 percent of the lump sum bid for mobilization or ten percent of the Total
           Contract Price, whichever is less, will be paid.
     5. When all Work on the Project is complete, payment for the lump sum bid for mobilization in excess of
           ten percent of the Total Contract Price will be made.
     6. The percentage of Work completed shall be the total of payments earned compared to the Total Contract
           Price. The total of payments earned excludes the amount paid for this item and the amount paid for
           materials furnished but not incorporated into the Work in accordance with Subsection 109.06, as shown
           on the monthly estimates of the approximate quantities of Work performed, prepared in accordance with
           Subsection 109.05.


Route 35 over Manasquan River Bridge Rehabilitation
Monmouth and Ocean Counties                                                                                  Page 45
     7.   No payment will be made for mobilization until a Baseline Schedule is approved, except when all Work
          on the Project is complete, then 50 percent of the lump sum bid for mobilization will be paid and no
          further payment(s) will be made for the lump sum bid for mobilization.
                Payment will be made under:
                     Pay Item                                                                     Pay Unit
                     MOBILIZATION                                                                 LUMP SUM
     When mobilization is not a Pay Item, all costs for the Work shall be included in the prices bid for various Pay
Items scheduled in the Proposal.


108.06 Limitations of Operations.

          THE FIRST SENTENCE OF THE FIRST PARAGRAPH IS DELETED AND THE FOLLOWING IS
             INSERTED IN ITS PLACE:

      The Contractor shall conduct the work at all times in such a manner and such sequence that shall ensure the
least interference with vehicular as well as marine traffic. The Contractor shall be aware that there is a Noise
Ordinance in Brielle Borough that restricts construction work noise at night. Night work is expected in Pre-Stage I,
Stage IIB and IIIB and may occur in other stages. Brielle Borough and Point Pleasant Beach Borough are aware of
the required work and have agreed to cooperate with the Department and Contractor to complete this work. To
coordinate this night time work with Brielle Borough, the Contractor shall contact the Brielle Police Department at
732.528.5050. To coordinate night-time work with Point Pleasant Beach Borough, the Contractor shall contact the
Point Pleasant Beach Police Department at 732.892.0500.

108.08 Working Site.

THE FOLLOWING IS ADDED AT THE END OF THE SECOND PARAGRAPH:
     At the Resident Engineer‟s discretion and prior permission, ONLY areas of the deck designated to be
demolished within the Stage construction regions may be allowed for TEMPORARY storage of certain items, if in
the Resident‟s opinion, these are construed as being necessary for a particular construction operation that is to be
done within time constraints imposed by the contract documents.
     NJDOT or its representatives make no guarantee as to the capacity of the existing structure for use as access to
the construction or support for construction equipment. The Contractor should, at his own expense perform all
necessary stress analyses to determine the structures capacity, prior to imposing any construction loads.
     The Contractor is cautioned that there is a busy marina in the immediate vicinity of the bridge site at the north
end (Bogan‟s Basin), which operates several large charter vessels throughout the year. Several of these large charter
boats are docked in the very close vicinity at the northeast and northwest corners. The area under and adjacent to
the north end span is occupied by numerous private vehicles parked under the bridge and adjacent to the work site.
Any Contractor operations shall take extreme care and caution to prevent any type of potential conflicts with either
the vessels or vehicles or personnel or public utilizing any of these afore-mentioned areas. The work in this area
impacting vehicular and fishing vessel parking may only be performed between November 1 and November 30, of
each construction year. Details of work items and associated timing restrictions in Spans 1, 2, and 3 are listed in
Section 108.12. Coordination with the owners of Bogan‟s basin is required prior to any activities impacting the
parking areas, boat docking facilities and any obstructions to the sailing path of their boats in the three northern end
spans (Spans 1, 2, and 3).
Contact information: Bogan‟s Basin            William H. Bogan, Sr.       Phone 732–528-3377
                                                                                   732–892-3377
                                              Captain Sharon Bogan        Phone 732–528-8673
                                              Captain Tony Bogan          Phone 732–528-8673

108.09 Unusual Site Conditions.

THE FOLLOWING IS ADDED AT THE END OF THE SECTION:
     The existing deck concrete strength is unknown and assumed to be 3000 psi. This information is being
provided for informational purposes only and in no way guarantees or represents the actual concrete strength that
may be encountered along the length of and across the width of the bridge and sidewalks. There shall be no claims


Route 35 over Manasquan River Bridge Rehabilitation
Monmouth and Ocean Counties                                                                                     Page 46
for time extension or any additional compensation for removal of the deck concrete owing to any variation in the
existing concrete strength, regardless of the amount of variation, from these values known to the designer.

All work under the Contract shall be performed and completed in accordance with the following schedule:

          Platforms and Gates for the Barrier Gates and Traffic Gates, both north bound and south bound shall be
                           completed and fully operational prior to March 1, 2007.

          Stage 1:         All work required for the completion of Pre-Stage 1, Stage 1, and shifting of traffic into
                           the Stage 2 lane configuration shall be completed prior to June 14, 2007.

          Stage 2:         All work required for the completion of Stage 2 and shifting of traffic into the Stage 3
                           lane configuration shall be completed prior to December 26, 2007.

          Stage 3:         All work required for the completion of Stage 3 and shifting of traffic into the Stage 4
                           lane configuration shall be completed prior to September 30, 2008.

          Stage 4:         All work required for the completion of Stage 4 and shifting of traffic into the standard
                           operating lane configuration shall be completed prior to April 30, 2009.

          Final:           All work on the project shall be completed prior to June 30, 2009.

          If the Contractor fails to complete fully, entirely and in conformity with the provisions of the Contract, the
Project and each and every part and appurtenance thereof, within the time stated above, or any portion for which a
completion date is stipulated within such further time as may have been granted in accordance with the provisions of
the Contract, then the Contractor shall and hereby agrees to pay the Department for each and every calendar day that
he is in default on time to complete such portion of the work for which a completion date is stipulated or to complete
the entire Project, the following amount:

          Platforms and Gates Operational     Three Thousand, Two Hundred Dollars ($3,200.00) per calendar day.

          Stage 1:         Three Thousand, Two Hundred Dollars ($3,200.00) per calendar day.

          Stage 2:         Three Thousand, Two Hundred Dollars ($3,200.00) per calendar day.

          Stage 3:         Three Thousand, Two Hundred Dollars ($3,200.00) per calendar day.

          Stage 4:         Two Thousand, Three Hundred Dollars ($2,300.00) per calendar day.

          Final:           One Thousand, Nine Hundred Dollars ($1,900.00) per calendar day.

Which said amount per calendar day is agreed upon by the parties hereto to be liquidated damages and not a penalty.

108.10 Time of Completion.
     A. All work required for Substantial Completion of the Project shall be completed on or before April 30,
         2009.

     B.    The entire Work of the Project shall be completed on or before June 30, 2009.


108.11 Extensions and Reductions of Contract Time.
        THE ENTIRE TEXT IS CHANGED TO:

     A.    Basis for Adjustment. Extensions or reductions to the Contract Time may be provided by Construction
           Order, however, such extensions or reductions will be allowed only to the extent that the increase or
           decrease in the Work or delays of the types indicated below affect the Critical Path of the current


Route 35 over Manasquan River Bridge Rehabilitation
Monmouth and Ocean Counties                                                                                     Page 47
         approved Progress Schedule update and the Completion of the Work and/or Substantial Completion Dates
         provided in Subsection 108.10. However, when the Finish Milestone(s) for the Substantial Completion
         Date or Completion of the Work Date identified on the current approved schedule is a date or dates prior
         in time to the dates specified in the Contract, the Department will consider the time between the dates
         projected in the schedule and that in the Contract as constituting float in the schedule which shall offset
         the amount of allowable delay contributable to the actions of the Department, third parties, or the
         Contractor, or caused by a combination of those factors, and other factors beyond the control of the
         Contractor as determined by the Department which ever first occurs.
               An extension will also provide only for those Working Days adversely impacted where operations
         were on an approved schedule, including all shifts of Work. No extension can be requested unless all
         submittals and approvals have been completed as specified in Subsection 108.04.
               The Contractor may be granted an extension of Contract Time and not be assessed liquidated
         damages for any portion of the delay beyond the Completion of the Work and/or Substantial Completion
         Dates as specified in Subsection 108.10 caused by reasons beyond the control and without the fault or
         negligence of the Contractor, and subject to all due diligence by the Contractor to avoid and mitigate the
         delay. Reasons may include, but are not restricted to, those provided for in the Specifications and the
         following:
              1. acts of civil or military authorities, terrorism, war, or riot;
              2. fire;
              3. floods, tidal waves, earthquakes, cyclones, tornadoes, hurricanes, sustained severe winds
                    exceeding 75 mph, or other cataclysmic natural phenomenon (except on working day contracts);
              4. Extreme Weather Conditions (subject to Item 1 of subpart B) (except on working day contracts);
              5. epidemics or quarantine restrictions;
              6. strikes or labor disputes beyond the control of the Contractor that prevent work on the
                    construction operations that are critical to the completion of the Project;
              7. shortages of materials (subject to Item 2 of subpart B) or freight embargoes;
              8. acts of the State in its sovereign capacity;
              9. court orders or injunctions;
              10. discovery of Regulated Hazardous Waste;
              11. acts by others consistent with Subsections 105.10 and 107.09;
              12. failure of the Engineer to furnish interpretations of the Contract Documents (subject to Item 3 of
                    subpart B).
               Unless specifically provided for in the Specifications or where the delay is caused by the negligence,
         bad faith, active interference, or other tortuous conduct of the Department or its employees, the
         Contractor shall not make any claim for damages or Additional Compensation for any delay, and agrees
         that any such delay shall be fully compensated for by an extension of Contract Time if granted. In such a
         case where the delay is shown by the Contractor to have been caused by such tortuous conduct of the
         Department or its employees, the Contractor‟s remedy for Additional Compensation shall be as specified
         in Subsection 109.04. Negligence of consultants, other contractors, Utility(s), other public entities or any
         other person or entity, shall not be imputed to the Department. The Contractor shall not be entitled to
         Additional Compensation or an extension of Contract Time for any delay contemplated or that which
         should have been contemplated by the Contractor at the time the Contract was awarded.
               Extensions of Contract Time will not be granted due to delays caused by, or in any way related to,
         the financial condition of the Contractor, subcontractors, sub-subcontractors, material, personnel,
         fabricators, or suppliers. The Contractor and its surety assume full responsibility for ensuring that the
         financial condition of any of the above does not delay completion of the Contract.
               If the Work required is reduced or altered so that the time required for Completion is reduced, the
         Department may reduce the Contract Time as specified in Subsection 108.10. The Engineer will evaluate
         the facts and the extent of the reduction. The Department‟s findings thereon will be final and conclusive.
               The Contractor or surety is not relieved of liability for liquidated damages for any period of delay in
         completion in excess of that expressly provided for in this Subsection.

    B.   Requests for Extensions. Request for extension of Contract Time will not be evaluated or granted
         unless they meet the provisions of A. above and the Contractor has notified the Resident Engineer in
         writing of the causes of delay within 15 State Business Days from the beginning of any such delay on
         forms provided by the Department. The effect of the delay on the Progress Schedule shall be documented


Route 35 over Manasquan River Bridge Rehabilitation
Monmouth and Ocean Counties                                                                                   Page 48
          by the Contractor as specified in Subsection 108.04. The Department will evaluate the facts and the
          extent of the delay, and the Department‟s findings will be final and conclusive. Request for extensions
          shall also be based on the following:
               1.      If the Contractor submits daily documentation of such conditions, Extensions of Contract Time
                      for Extreme Weather Conditions may be granted according to the following:
                      a.            The specified completion dates anticipate that the number of total Working Days
                              available for Construction Operations, subject to the requirements of the Contract
                              Documents, during the period of April through November inclusive is at least 145 for
                              road and bridge work.
                      b.            The specified completion dates anticipate that the number of total Working Days
                              available for Construction Operations, subject to the requirements of the Contract
                              Documents, during the four month winter period of December through March inclusive
                              is 20 for road work and 40 for bridge work. These anticipated days for construction
                              operations are assumed days per winter period each, with a total of three (3) such winter
                              periods within the entire project schedule.
                      c.            When the actual number of Working Days available for Construction Operations is
                              less than the anticipated number provided for in the Special Provisions, an extension of
                              one day for each day less may be allowed.
               2.      Extensions of Contract Time will not be granted for a delay caused by a shortage of materials
                     unless the Contractor furnishes the following:
                      a.            Documentary proof that it has diligently made every effort to obtain such materials
                              from all known sources within reasonable distance from the Work.
                      b.            Proof that the inability to obtain such materials when originally planned, could not
                              be compensated for by revising the sequence of the Contractor‟s operations. The term
                              “shortage of materials” applies only to raw and fabricated materials, articles, parts, or
                              equipment which are standard items and does not apply to materials, parts, articles, or
                              equipment which are processed, made, constructed, fabricated, or manufactured to meet
                              the specific requirements of the Contract. Only the physical shortage of materials and
                              not the cost of materials will be considered.
                3. Extensions of Contract Time will not be granted for failure of the Engineer to furnish
                     interpretations of the Contract Documents unless such request for an interpretation of the
                     Contract Documents is reasonable and made in good faith, and the failure to respond was
                     palpably unwarranted and was furnished more than 20 State Business Days after the written
                     request was received by the Resident Engineer.
               4.      Extension of Contract Time for utility work delays will only be granted when the Utility does
                     not complete their work within an additional 30% of the estimated durations for the Utility as
                     specified in Subsection 105.09. A day for day extension will be allowed for each day extended
                     beyond the 30% time that the Critical Path is affected.

108.12 Right-Of-Way Delays.
        THE TITLE OF THIS SUBSECTION IS CHANGED TO:

108.12 Right-Of-Way Information and Delays.

         THE FOLLOWING IS ADDED:

      The Contractor shall obtain from the Engineer all information regarding ROW Parcels and Easements acquired
for the Project as well as the nature and type of title acquired. The Contractor shall make periodic requests for
updates to this information during the course of the Contract.
      The Contractor shall not enter an Easement until the Resident Engineer provides written notice to the property
owner. The Contractor shall provide written notice to the Resident Engineer, 30 calendar days prior to entering a
particular Easement or right, which is lesser than a fee interest. The Contractor shall make no claim for delays by
reason that entry upon an Easement or right which is lesser than a fee interest is conditioned upon notice or is
limited in duration; the Contractor is required to schedule accordingly and take such limitations into account when
planning performance of the Work.



Route 35 over Manasquan River Bridge Rehabilitation
Monmouth and Ocean Counties                                                                                     Page 49
      Temporary Easements and/or temporary construction rights will in most cases contain a limitation as to the
length of time that they are extant. The Contractor shall schedule the Work pursuant to Subsection 108.04 so as to
accommodate the particular time limitations of an Easement or right which is lesser than a fee interest as reflected
on the R.O.W. plans. The Contractor shall provide a written request to the Engineer that the Department procure an
extension from the owner of a particular temporary easement or right, which is lesser than a fee simple interest, so as
to enable the Contractor to continue occupancy of or re-enter same in the future, beyond the initial time period set
forth in the respective property description prior to the expiration thereof.
      Where the Contractor fails to complete the work within an area of a temporary easement or right lesser than a
fee interest during the time allowed under the property description, by reason of the Contractor‟s own fault; the
Contractor shall reimburse the State for the sum payable to the owner of the underlying fee interest for the extended
period of occupancy use. The Resident Engineer may deduct an amount equal to such payments from the monthly
estimate of the Work performed after providing 30 day written notice to the Contractor of such action, including a
breakdown of the costs sought or to be sought by reason of the delay in timely vacating a temporary easement or
right lesser than a fee interest.
      Painting operations in Spans 1, 2, and 3 shall preferably be performed between November 1 and November 30,
with coordination and prior approval of the Engineer and marina owners. However, as long as the minimum
required vertical Underclearance in Span 1 (16 feet minimum, approximately 18 feet existing) is maintained, and
approved, proper protection and containment are provided, painting in Span 1 outside of November MAY be
allowed during the month of October, or December through March. The same restrictions apply to painting in Spans
2 and 3, except that 26 feet vertical underclearance (at high tide) shall be maintained under Span 3. No barges or
any other equipment may be placed in the waterway in Spans 2 or 3 that would restrict movement of any of the
marina vessels.

     The following is a list of all rights-of-way that have not been secured and their approximate anticipated dates
of availability:
                                        Properties and Vacation/Availability Dates

     Demolition and/ or Parcel No.           Approximate Baseline Station             Offset/Direction         Date

THE FOLLOWING IS ADDED AT THE END OF THE SECTION:

      Based on information provided by the marina owners at the north end of the bridge, and to minimize impacts to
their routine activities, the following timing restrictions apply to these following specific work items. These
restrictions have been taken into account in the designer‟s construction schedule;
1.        Removal and disposal of the contaminated soil and slope protection work at the northern end under Span 1,
      as shown in the plans – November 1 to November 30.
2.        Construction of the new bulkhead in front of the existing northern bulkhead, Span 2 – November 1 to
      November 30. However these two items MAY NOT BE SCHEDULED IN THE SAME PERIOD, so as to not
      impact the parking area underneath Span 1.

108.16 Failure to Complete on Time.
        THE SUBSECTION HEADING AND TEXT ARE CHANGED TO:

108.16 Liquidated Damages and Incentive Payments For Early Completion.
     A. Liquidated Damages. The Contractor and the Department recognize that delay in Completion results in
         damages to the State in terms of the effect of the delay on the use of the Project, upon the public
         convenience and economic development of the State, and also results in additional costs to the State for
         engineering, inspection, and administration of the Contract. Because it is difficult or impossible to
         accurately estimate the damages incurred; therefore, the parties agree that if the Contractor fails to
         complete the Contract within the time stated in these Special Provisions, or within such further time as
         may have been granted in according to the provisions of the Contract, the Contractor shall pay the State
         liquidated damages according to those provided in the Special Provisions. Such liquidated damages shall
         be paid for each and every day, as hereinafter defined, that the Contractor is in default to complete the
         Contract.
                   Liquidated damages shall be as follows:



Route 35 over Manasquan River Bridge Rehabilitation
Monmouth and Ocean Counties                                                                                    Page 50
                1.    For each Calendar Day that the Contractor fails to complete the Work as specified in Subpart A
                      of Subsection 108.10 of these Special Provisions, for Substantial Completion, the Contractor
                      shall pay liquidated damages consisting of Road User Costs and Construction Engineering Costs
                      to the State in the amount of $4,800.
                 2. For each Calendar Day that the Contractor fails to complete the Work as specified in Subpart A
                      of Subsection 108.10 of these Special Provisions, for work related to Navigational channel
                      closure and overruns of the specified navigational channel closure period, the Contractor shall
                      pay liquidated damages consisting of Road User Costs and Construction Engineering Costs to
                      the State in the amount of $4,800 and civil penalty imposed by the U.S. Coast Guard, in the
                      amount of $15,000 per day in the year 2006, $20,000 per day in 2007, and $25,000 per day in
                      2008 and beyond. For each occurrence that the Contractor fails to provide scheduled bridge
                      openings on Sundays, for the period between November 1 through March 1, each season
                      throughout the construction duration, as described under Section 107.13, the Contractor shall
                      pay liquidated damages consisting of Road User Costs and Consulting Engineering Costs to the
                      State in the amount of $4,800 and USCG civil penalties in the amount of $15,000 per day in
                      2006, $20,000 per day in 2007, and $25,000 per day in 2008 and beyond, and also $5,400 per
                      every offense for mobilizing the State‟s forces and equipment.
                 3. For each Calendar Day that the Contractor fails to complete the entire Work of the Project as
                      specified in Subpart B of Subsection 108.10 of these Special Provisions, for Completion of the
                      Work, the Contractor shall pay liquidated damages consisting of Construction Engineering
                      Costs to the State in the amount of $3,100, provided that the Work as specified for Substantial
                      Completion is actually completed.
                 The Department will recover all liquidated damages specified above by deducting the amount
            thereof from any monies due or that may become due the Contractor, or from the Contractor or from its
            surety on this or any other contract being performed for the Department.

       B.   Incentive Payment for Early Completion. As provided for in the Special Provisions.

                No Incentive Payment for Early Completion is specified for this project

108.19 Lane Occupancy Charges.
        THE SECOND PARAGRAPH IS CHANGED TO:

      Except as specifically excluded in the Special Provisions, a Lane Occupancy Charge will be collected by
deducting the appropriate charge, calculated according to this Subsection, from the monthly estimate, whenever a
lane or lanes are not promptly made available to the traveling public during the lane closure limits for the following
reasons: equipment breakdowns; non-extreme weather related causes; late start of work; shortage of labor, materials,
fuel, machinery or equipment or by reason of the Contractor‟s negligence or fault or that of its workers, employees,
subcontractors or suppliers. This charge will be collected for that period of time each lane is unavailable to the
traveling public beyond the lane closure limits. This charge will be calculated by multiplying the length of time of
the delayed opening, in minutes, by the rate of $10 per minute per lane, unless otherwise set forth in the Special
Provisions.

           THE THIRD PARAGRAPH IS CHANGED TO:
       The total amount of the Lane Occupancy Charge collected from a Contractor shall not exceed $10,000.00 per
day.

            THE FOURTH PARAGRAPH IS CHANGED TO:

      The Resident Engineer will keep record of each occurrence as well as the cumulative amount of time that a
lane is kept closed beyond the lane closure limits. After each occurrence the Contractor will be notified. For every
three such occurrences, one day will be deducted from the Substantial Completion date or days. For every 60
minutes of lane closures recorded beyond the lane closure limits, one additional day will be deducted from the
Substantial Completion date or days. The Substantial Completion date or days will be re-established. The
Contractor will be notified of such action, and the Contractor shall not make any claim against the Department as a
result of such action. The Resident Engineer also reserves the right to suspend all Work until the next allowable


Route 35 over Manasquan River Bridge Rehabilitation
Monmouth and Ocean Counties                                                                                   Page 51
lane closure time period, where the Contractor exceeds the lane closure limits. Before deduction of any charge from
a monthly estimate for occupancy of a lane beyond the allowable lane closure hours, the Department will provide
the Contractor with a statement of the charges to be collected and the supporting calculations.

         THE FOLLOWING IS ADDED:

     The rate or rates to be applied in the calculation of a Lane Occupancy Charge shall be in accordance with the
following:

     Description                                                  Rate per Minute
     Overrun of “One Lane Maintained” Time Limits -                 $10/minute


         THE FOLLOWING NEW SUBSECTION IS ADDED:
108.20 ITS Occupancy Charges.


                       SECTION 109 – MEASUREMENT AND PAYMENT
109.01 Measurement of Quantities.
        THE 25TH TYPE 2 PAY ITEM IS CHANGED TO:

          Type 2 Pay Items                                                 Charge per Unit of Measure

          SAWCUT GROOVED DECK SURFACE                                      $0.06 PER SQUARE FOOT

109.02 Scope of Payment.
        THE SECOND PARAGRAPH IS CHANGED TO:

     The “Basis of Payment” clause in the Specifications relating to any Pay Item in the proposal encompasses all
compensation for Work to complete that Pay Item and no other Pay Item. All elements of the Work related to that
Pay Item will not be measured or paid for under any other Pay Item in the Contract Documents unless it is stated in
the “Basis of Payment” clause for that Pay Item that a portion of the Work will be paid for under another Section or
Subsection of the Specifications.

109.03 Force Account Payment.
        THE FIRST, SECOND, THIRD, AND FOURTH PARAGRAPH ARE CHANGED TO:

      When the Department has directed the Contractor to do Work on a Force Account basis it will be compensated
as specified in this Subsection.
      The total direct costs for labor, materials, equipment, bonds, insurance, and tax as provided below, together
with applicable markups constitute full compensation for all direct and indirect costs (including overhead and
profit), and are deemed to include all items of expense not specifically designated. Any adjustments to Performance
Bond and Payment Bond will be made as specified in Subsection 103.05. Force Account payments will be adjusted
for those costs incurred determined to be the fault of the Contractor. The Force Account payment will be further
adjusted where the Contractor‟s prices in its Proposal for any affected original items of work did not properly
include all the costs to complete the affected work as originally provided in the Contract Documents.
      When Work that is paid on a Force Account basis is performed by forces other than the Contractor‟s
organization, the Contractor shall reach an agreement with such other forces as to the distribution of payments made
by the State for such Work, with a copy of all such completely executed agreements to the Resident Engineer.
Additional payment will not be made for any reason due to the performance of the Work by a subcontractor or other
forces, or for costs outside that covered by the agreement.
      It is understood that a Contractor‟s remedy for Additional Compensation for Extra Work or for any other
reason as specified in these Specifications, when an action is brought before the Superior Court as specified in the
Contractual Liability Act, NJSA 59:12-1 et seq., shall not exceed the amount that would be specified in these
provisions had a Force Account been carried out. However, damages sought by the Contractor in a court proceeding



Route 35 over Manasquan River Bridge Rehabilitation
Monmouth and Ocean Counties                                                                                  Page 52
shall be limited to actual additional costs incurred by the Contractor resulting directly from the Extra Work or by
other reason specifically permitted under the terms of the Specifications as specified in the Contractual Liability Act.
As a condition predicate to seeking Additional Compensation under the claims process or in the Superior Court, the
Contractor shall have the burden of proof to demonstrate compliance with the requirements of this Subsection and
other applicable Subsections, and shall have kept all records required under this Subsection even if the Department
has not directed that the Contractor do such Work on a Force Account basis.

     Force Account payment will be limited to the following:
     1. Labor.
          THE FIRST PARAGRAPH IS CHANGED TO:

                 For all necessary direct labor and foremen in direct charge of the specific operations, whether the
           employer is the Contractor, subcontractor, or another, the Contractor shall receive the rate of wage (or
           scale) actually paid as shown in its certified payrolls for each and every hour that said labor and foremen
           are actually engaged in such Work.
                 For specific extraordinary operations the Department may allow supervising or other special type
           employees to be considered direct labor, but only that time in direct labor or direct charge to complete the
           specific construction operations.

     2.    Bond, Insurance, and Tax.
           THE ENTIRE TEXT IS CHANGED TO:

                 For bond premiums; property damage, liability, and workers compensation insurance premiums;
           unemployment insurance contributions; and social security taxes on the Force Account work, the
           Contractor shall receive the actual incremental cost thereof, necessarily and directly resulting from the
           Force Account work. For payment, the Contractor shall furnish satisfactory evidence of the rate or rates
           paid for such bond, insurance, and tax.
                 Payment for Performance Bond and Payment Bond adjustments will be as specified in Subsection
           103.05.

     4.    Equipment and Plant.
               a. Contractor Owned Equipment and Plant.
                        THE SECOND AND THIRD PARAGRAPH ARE CHANGED TO:

                           The Blue Book will be used in the following manner:
                           (1) The estimated “rental” hourly rate will be determined by dividing the monthly rate
                                by 176 and then applying a 20% reduction factor. The weekly, hourly, and daily
                                rates will not be used.
                           (2) The estimated operating costs per hour will be the Blue Book rates.
                           (3) The number of hours to be paid for will be the number of hours that the equipment
                                or plant is actually used on a specific Force Account activity each day, as presented
                                in Daily Equipment Work Sheets, received from the Contractor and verified by the
                                Department.
                           (4) The current revisions will be used in establishing rates. The current revision
                                applicable to specific Force Account work is as of the first day of work performed
                                on that Force Account work and that rate applies throughout the next six months of
                                the period the Force Account work is being performed. The rates will be adjusted
                                for each six-month period thereafter.
                           (5) Area adjustment will not be made. Equipment life adjustment will be made in
                                according to the rate adjustment tables.
                           (6) Overtime shall be charged at the same rate indicated in Item (1) and (2) above.
                           (7) Idle time for equipment will not be paid for, except where the equipment has been
                                held on the Project site on a standby basis at the request of the Engineer and, but for
                                this request, would have left the Project site. Such payment will be made at one-
                                half the rate established in Item (1) above and will be limited to the total hours
                                worked for any Force Account activity on that particular day.


Route 35 over Manasquan River Bridge Rehabilitation
Monmouth and Ocean Counties                                                                                     Page 53
                       (8) The rates established above include the cost of fuel, oil, lubrication, supplies, small
                           tools, necessary attachments, repairs, overhaul and maintenance of any kind,
                           depreciation, storage, overhead, profits, insurance, all costs (including labor and
                           equipment) of moving equipment or plant to, on, and away from the site, and all
                           incidentals.
                       (9) Operator costs will be paid only as provided in Subheading 1 above.

                       All equipment shall, in the opinion of the Department, be in good operating condition.
                  The State will not provide payment of any type for equipment that is determined to be
                  unsuitable by the Department for the Force Account Work or that is inoperable during periods
                  of breakdown or repair. Equipment used by the Contractor shall be specifically described and
                  be of suitable size and suitable capacity required for the work to be performed. In the event
                  the Contractor elects to use equipment of a higher rental value than that suitable for the Work,
                  payment will be made at the rate applicable to the suitable equipment. The equipment actually
                  used and the suitable equipment paid for will be made a part of the record for Force Account
                  work. If there is a differential in the rate of pay of the operator of oversize or higher rate
                  equipment, the rate paid for the operator will be that for the suitable equipment.

             b. Rented Equipment and Plant.
                     THE ENTIRE TEXT IS CHANGED TO:

                        In the event that the Contractor does not own a specific type of equipment or plant and
                  must obtain it by rental, the Contractor shall inform the Resident Engineer of the need to rent
                  the equipment and of the rental rate for that equipment prior to using it on the Work. The
                  Contractor will be paid the actual rental for the equipment as specified in the rental agreements
                  for the time that the equipment is actually used to accomplish the Work, provided that rate is
                  reasonable, plus the cost of moving the equipment to, on, and away from the Project site. The
                  Contractor shall provide the Resident Engineer a copy of the fully executed rental agreement,
                  and a paid receipt or canceled check for the rental expense incurred.
                        If the rental agreement does not cover operating costs, the Contractor shall be entitled to
                  the rate established in Subheading 4.a. above for each hour that piece of rental equipment is
                  actually operational.
                        The State will not provide payment of any cost incurred due to equipment that is
                  determined to be unsuitable by the Department for the Force Account Work or that is
                  inoperable during periods of breakdown or repair.

    5.   Profit.
         THE ENTIRE TEXT IS CHANGED TO:

             Profit shall be computed at ten percent of the following:
             a. Total material cost excluding transportation, shipping & handling.
             b. Total direct labor cost (actual hours worked multiplied by the regular hourly rate).
             c. Total fringe benefits on total direct labor cost as computed above.

    6.   Overhead.
         THE ENTIRE TEXT IS CHANGED TO:

             Any and all overhead for the Contractor is defined to include the following:
             a. All salaries and expenses of executive officers, supervising officers, or supervising employees,
                 except as provided for under Subheading 1 above;
             b. All clerical or stenographic employees;
             c. All charges for minor equipment, such as small tools, including shovels, picks, axes, saws,
                 bars, sledges, lanterns, jacks, cables, pails, wrenches, and other miscellaneous supplies and
                 services; and
             d. All drafting room accessories such as paper, tracing cloth, and blueprinting.



Route 35 over Manasquan River Bridge Rehabilitation
Monmouth and Ocean Counties                                                                                Page 54
              Any and all overhead costs of the Contractor for Force Account work shall be computed at 15
          percent of the following:
               a. Total material cost excluding transportation, shipping & handling.
               b. Total direct labor cost (actual hours worked multiplied by the regular hourly rate), except for
                    the direct labor cost of any supervisory or special employees allowed under Subheading 1.
                    above.
               c. Specific extraordinary overhead expenses, required specifically for the Force Account, may be
                    allowed if approved by the Department prior to incurring any cost. In such instances, the
                    Contractor will be paid only the reasonable costs of such extraordinary overhead expenses.
               d. Total fringe benefits on total direct labor cost as computed above.
               The Contractor will be allowed an additional five percent for overhead on the total amount of all
          work performed by the subcontractors.

                    THE FOLLOWING IS ADDED:

     8.   Responsibility.
               Where work is performed under a Force Account, responsibility of such work shall remain that of
          the Contractor. The Department will determine if the Work is eligible for payment.

109.04 Payment for Contractor’s Expenses During Delays.
        THE FIRST PARAGRAPH IS CHANGED TO:

      When the Department has approved an adjustment for Additional Compensation due to a delay, the Contractor
will be paid its expenses during that period of delay by Change Order in the following manner:

     2.   Bond, Insurance, and Tax.
          THE ENTIRE TEXT IS CHANGED TO:

              For bond premiums; property damage, liability, and, workers compensation insurance premiums;
          unemployment insurance contributions; and social security taxes during the period of delay, the
          Contractor is to receive the actual incremental cost thereof, necessarily and directly resulting from the
          delay. For payment, the Contractor shall furnish satisfactory evidence of the rate or rates paid for such
          bond, insurance, and tax.
               Payment for Performance Bond and Payment Bond adjustments will be as provided in Subsection
          103.05.
     3.   Equipment.
          THE FIRST PARAGRAPH IS CHANGED TO:

                For any idle machinery or special equipment other than small tools which must remain on the Project
          site, with approval of the Department, during delays of specific operations, the Contractor is to receive
          compensation at one-half the rate calculated pursuant to Subheading 4 of the fifth paragraph of
          Subsection 109.03. Should the Department determine that it is not necessary for machinery or equipment
          to remain on the Project during delays, the Contractor is to receive transportation costs to remove the
          machinery or equipment and return it to the Project at the end of the delay period.

     4.   Miscellaneous.
          THE SUBPART HEADING IS CHANGED TO:
     4.   Overhead.

     6.   Records.
          THE SECOND AND THIRD PARAGRAPHS ARE CHANGED TO:

               The Department‟s records will be compared with completed daily reports furnished by the
          Contractor and any necessary adjustments will be made. When these daily reports are agreed upon and
          signed by both parties, said reports become the basis of payment for the expenses incurred, but do not
          preclude subsequent adjustment based on a later audit by the Department.


Route 35 over Manasquan River Bridge Rehabilitation
Monmouth and Ocean Counties                                                                                 Page 55
                 The Contractor‟s cost records pertaining to expenses under this Subsection shall be open to
           inspection or audit by the Department during the life of the Contract and for a period of not less than
           three years after Acceptance thereof, and the Contractor shall retain such records for that period. Where
           payment for equipment or labor is based on the cost thereof to forces other than the Contractor, the
           Contractor shall make every reasonable effort to ensure that the cost records of such other forces are open
           to inspection and audit by the Department on the same terms and conditions as the cost records of the
           Contractor. Payment for such cost may be deleted if the records of such third parties are not made
           available to the Department. If an audit is to be commenced more than 60 days after Acceptance, the
           Contractor is to be provided with a reasonable notice of the time when such audit is to begin. In case all
           or a part of such records are not made so available, the Contractor understands and agrees that any items
           not supported by reason of such unavailability of the records will not be allowed, or if payment therefore
           has already been made, the Contractor shall refund to the Department the amount so disallowed.

109.05 Partial Payments.
        SUBPART 1 OF THE SECOND PARAGRAPH IS CHANGED TO:

     1.    Each subcontractor or supplier has been paid any amount due from any previous progress payment and
           shall be paid any amount due from the current progress payment and no retainage is being withheld from
           any subcontractor on federally funded projects; or

          THE SEVENTH PARAGRAPH IS CHANGED TO:

      From the total amounts ascertained as payable, excluding subcontracted work on federally funded projects, an
amount equivalent to two percent of the amount due on the total adjusted Contract price will be deducted and
retained pending Substantial Completion. Any amounts paid to the Contractor in the form of incentive payments for
early Completion and positive pay adjustments will not be included in the adjusted Contract price when calculating
retainage.

109.06 Materials Payments.
        THE SUBSECTION HEADING IS CHANGED TO:
109.06 Materials Payments and Storage.

          THE FIRST PARAGRAPH IS CHANGED TO:

      The monthly estimates and payments made on account thereof may also include, when authorized by the
Department, an amount equal to the actual cost of materials furnished but not incorporated into the Work, provided,
however, that such amount does not exceed 85 percent of the Contract price for the Pay Item into which the material
is to be incorporated, and the quantity allowed does not exceed the corresponding quantity estimated in the Contract
Documents. Advance payment will only be for that portion of the price in the Proposal related to the materials and
any costs for storage at the facility of manufacture. Any taxes levied by any government against the materials shall
be borne by the Contractor. Before including payments for such materials in an estimate, the Department must be
satisfied that:
      1. The materials have been properly stored and protected along or upon the Project site or have been stored
            and protected at locations owned or leased by the Contractor or the Department within the State, except
            that structural steel, prestressed concrete beams, and other large items not suitable for storage on or near
            the site, may be stored outside the State with the approval of the Department; and
      2. The materials have been inspected and appear to be acceptable based upon available supplier‟s
            certification and/or materials test reports; and
      3. The Contractor has provided the Resident Engineer with an paid invoice or paid bill of sale for the
            materials and a fully executed Department form “Release of Liens for Materials Stored for Incorporation
            in Department of Transportation Project” including the transfer of ownership to the Department; and
      4. The materials are clearly identified in large letters as being without encumbrances and for use solely on
            the Project, and if stored on property not belonging to the State or at the facility of manufacture, are
            fenced in with access limited to the State and the Contractor; and
      5. When such materials are stored in a leased area, the lease is made out to the Contractor and provides that
            it shall be canceled only with the written permission of the Department.



Route 35 over Manasquan River Bridge Rehabilitation
Monmouth and Ocean Counties                                                                                     Page 56
          THE FOURTH PARAGRAPH IS DELETED:

109.07 Payment Following Substantial Completion.
        SUBPART 1 OF THE FIRST PARAGRAPH IS CHANGED TO:

     1.    Each subcontractor or supplier has been promptly paid any amount due from any previous progress
           payment and shall be paid any amount due from the current progress payment, including all retainage
           withheld from the subcontractor or supplier, within 14 days of the receipt by the Contractor of payment
           from the Department; or

          THE FOURTH PARAGRAPH IS CHANGED TO:

      In the first estimate following Substantial Completion, the Department will reduce retainage to one percent of the
total adjusted Contract price excluding subcontracted work on federally funded projects, unless it has been determined
by the Commissioner that the public interest requires the withholding of additional retainage. If retainage is held in
cash withholdings, the reduction is to be accomplished by payment under the next partial payment. If retainage is held
in bonds, the Department will authorize a reduction in the escrow account.

          THE LAST PARAGRAPH IS CHANGED TO:

     All monies retained subsequent to the first estimate following Substantial Completion may be released as
specified in Subsection 109.11.

109.09 Payment Following Acceptance.
        THE ENTIRE SUBSECTION IS CHANGED TO:

     All Partial payments by monthly estimate will be processed prior to acceptance. Final payment will be made
as specified in Subsection 109.11.

109.10 As-Built Quantities.
        THE FIRST AND SECOND SENTENCE OF THE SECOND PARAGRAPH ARE CHANGED TO:

     The Resident Engineer may from time to time, before Substantial Completion, prepare as-built quantities and
incorporate these quantities into monthly estimate certificates through an appropriate Field Order or Change Order.
Such interim as-built quantities are subject to recalculation in completion of the Final Certificate.

          THE THIRD PARAGRAPH IS DELETED.

109.11 Final Payment and Claims.
        THE ENTIRE SUBSECTION IS CHANGED TO:

      1. Final Certificate. All prior estimates and payments made by the Department are subject to correction in
         the Final Certificate, which will be completed as follows:
             a. After Acceptance is completed as specified in Subsection 105.23 and the As-Built quantities
                  finalized, the Department will make an estimate of the total amount of Work done under the
                  Contract, and prepare and issue the Final Certificate to the Contractor.
             b. Within 30 State Business Days after said Final Certificate has been issued to the Contractor, the
                  Contractor shall submit to the Department either a written acceptance of the Final Certificate
                  without exception together with an executed release in the form provided with the Final
                  Certificate or a written acceptance of the Final Certificate with a reservation of specific claims,
                  but otherwise releasing all claims not specifically reserved, by executing a conditional release in
                  the form provided with the Final Certificate. The Contractor‟s failure to submit any written
                  acceptance or acceptance with reservation within said 30 days will be construed by the
                  Department as an acceptance by the Contractor of the Final Certificate without exception or
                  reservation of Claims.



Route 35 over Manasquan River Bridge Rehabilitation
Monmouth and Ocean Counties                                                                                     Page 57
             c.   Upon receipt of the Contractor‟s written acceptance of the Final Certificate with unconditional
                  or conditional release, or when the Contractor fails to provide any written acceptance of the
                  Final Certificate within 30 State Business Days of issuance, the Department will pay the entire
                  sum due thereunder as provided by the New Jersey Prompt Payment Act NJSA 52:32-32 et seq.,
                  provided the Final Certificate indicates a payment is due the Contractor. However, where the
                  Final Certificate indicates a Credit (payment) is due the Department, the Contractor shall remit
                  said Credit (payment) to the Department in the amount set forth in the Final Certificate.
              d. If the Contractor fails to remit the Credit (payment) due the Department, as indicated on the
                  Final Certificate, within 30 State Business Days of issuance of the Final Certificate, the
                  Department may pursue all legal means available to recover the amount due the State, including
                  but not limited to, deducting the amount from payment due the Contractor on this or other
                  Department Contracts or from retainage and/or the sale of bonds held in lieu of retainage for the
                  Contract or for other Contracts, even where the credit is being contested by the Contractor.
               Neither the failure of the Contractor to accept the tendered Final Payment nor the failure of the
        Contractor to remit the credit (payment) due the Department shall affect when the “Completion of the
        Contract” shall be deemed to have occurred for any reason. Where there is a remaining monetary balance
        due to the Contractor by the Department, Final Payment will be made after the “Completion of the
        Contract”. Retainage shall be released to the Contractor upon completion of the contract unless a credit
        (payment) is due to the Department, which shall be deducted or adjusted in accord with the
        Specifications.
     2. Conditions for Claims. Conditional acceptance of the Final Certificate will be permitted only where all
         of the following are met:
               a. When the Contractor submits a Release conditioned with exception or reservation, the release
                    shall state the specific monetary amounts and category of the claims being reserved. The
                    Contractor acknowledges, by the act of executing the contract, that the failure to state specific
                    monetary amounts and specific categories shall result in a waiver of such claims lacking as to
                    amounts or specific categories thereof. The Contractor may reserve only those claims properly
                    filed with the Department pursuant to Subsection 107.02 and not previously resolved. The
                    Contractor waives all claims for which the required notice has not been filed with the
                    Department.
               b. The Contractor further understands and agrees, by the act of executing the Contract that neither
                    the procedures established under this Subsection nor the review of claims by the Department
                    pursuant hereto shall in any way modify the requirements applicable to the filing of a
                    Contractual Notice Form or the filing of a suit pursuant to the provisions of N.J.S.A. 59:13-1 et
                    seq. .
               c. If the Contractor conditions its acceptance of the Final Certificate by reserving particular
                    claims, the Contractor shall at the same time state in writing whether it would like to submit its
                    reserved claims for review by the Department Claims Committee. Only those claims properly
                    reserved, as provided for in Subsection 107.02, and which are unresolved after completing
                    Steps I and II of the Contractual Claim Resolution Process for the resolution of contract
                    claims, are eligible for review by the Department Claims Committee to the extent provided in
                    that Subsection. If the Contractor states that it does not want Department Claims Committee
                    review of the reserved claims or if it fails to request Department Claims Committee review of
                    reserved claims when it conditions its acceptance of the Final Certificate or if it files suit in a
                    court of law regarding those claims, the Contractor shall be deemed to have waived any ability
                    to have its reserved claims reviewed by the Department Claims Committee.
               d. If the Contractor requests review of its reserved claims when it conditions its acceptance of the
                    Final Certificate, it shall send at the same time a copy of its request for review to the Secretary
                    of the Department Claims Committee, PO Box 600, Trenton, NJ 08625-0600. Department
                    Claims Committee review will then take place according to Subsection 107.02.
               e. At the election of the Contractor upon completion of the Contract, claims that are unresolved
                    after review by the Department Claims Committee may be submitted to Non-Binding
                    Mediation according to Subsection 107.02.
               f.   Interest shall neither be paid nor shall it accrue upon the amount of any additional
                    compensation paid in resolution or settlement of a claim resolved through the various steps of
                    the Contractual Claims Resolution Process.


Route 35 over Manasquan River Bridge Rehabilitation
Monmouth and Ocean Counties                                                                                    Page 58
                                  DIVISION 200 – EARTHWORK
                                     SECTION 201 – CLEARING SITE
201.01 Description.

     THE FIRST PARAGRAPH IS DELETED AND REPLACED WITH THE FOLLOWING:

      This work shall consist of clearing of the site; removal of bridges, footings, and other structures; removal of
pipe, inlets, and manholes; removal of sidewalks, driveways, curbs, gutters, fences, riprap and concrete pylons; also
included are trees and shrubs at the toe of slope at the southwest bridge corner, at the beginning of the South
Abutment Construction Access Driveway, as directed by the Engineer, relocation of utility lines in conflict; removal
of existing electrical and mechanical material and equipment; removal of electrical materials, salvaging of removed,
above-ground electrical material; removal and resetting of existing traffic signs; removal of two existing traffic
signal poles and foundations; and demolition of building components, except for items which are to be removed
according to the work of other Sections.

201.03 Clearing Site.
     THE LAST SENTENCE IS DELETED AND REPLACED WITH THE FOLLOWING:

     Street, road and traffic signs shall be removed and shall be reset at the exact locations or where shown on the
plans and in the manner acceptable to the public authorities having jurisdiction thereof.

201.04 Removal of Bridges, Culverts, and Other Structures.
           THE FOLLOWING IS ADDED:
      The work to be performed under this Contract includes removal and disposal of reinforced concrete bridge
decks, steel grid deck, purlins and stringers, bearings, sidewalks, curbs, parapets, deck joints, railings, fencing, guide
rails, scuppers, downspouts and piping, timber members from fender system, warning gates, barrier gates, and
miscellaneous control house components, as shown on the Plans and as directed by the Engineer. This work shall
also include removal and proper disposal of all mechanical and electrical equipment from bascule span being
replaced or eliminated.
     The equipment listed below is permitted subject to the following applicable restrictions:
     1. Pneumatic or Electric Equivalent Hand Operated Hammers.
          a. Up to 90-pound hammers exclusive of the bit may be used for deck removal not closer than 6 inches
                to structural members. This hammer may also be used for removal of barriers, sidewalks, curbs, and
                parapets not closer than 6 inches from structural members. Only chisel point bits will be permitted.
                Structural members are defined as girders, floorbeams, stringers, diaphragms, or cross frames.
          b. Up to 30-pound hammers exclusive of bit may be used for removal of concrete within 6 inches of
                structural members.
     2. Saw Cutters.
          a. Vermeer concrete cutters or cutting saws may be used to cut within 6 inches adjacent to structural
                members.
          b. If water is used in conjunction with cutting operations, shielding beneath the operation shall prevent
                water leakage. Water shall be disposed by an approved method. The disposal method shall be
                submitted by the Contractor for approval by the Engineer.
     3. Hydraulic Breakers. Hydraulic breakers, such as, but not limited to, Tramac or other ram-hoe type
          breakers, are permitted for removal of substructure concrete. For deck concrete removal, such equipment
          is permitted subject to the following restrictions:
          a. The girders shall be analyzed to determine if induced stresses may be harmful.
          b. The centerline and limits of the top flange of girders shall be delineated before starting the
                equipment operation.
          c. The equipment shall not be used directly over the top of girders nor in overhang areas. Concrete
                removal in these areas shall be performed by jackhammers.
          d. Pulling and twisting of the reinforcement steel is prohibited.




Route 35 over Manasquan River Bridge Rehabilitation
Monmouth and Ocean Counties                                                                                       Page 59
          e.     Any damage to existing reinforcement, shear studs, structural steel, or any other structural
                 components that are to remain shall be repaired at no cost to the State.
      4. Hydraulic Splitters. Hydraulic splitters such as Darda hydraulic splitters are permitted subject to
            approval.
      5. Other Equipment. Equipment not specifically approved in this Section may be used only with written
            approval.
      The sequence of removal shall be coordinated with the operations of the utility company to protect and
maintain its facilities.
      During removal operations, the Contractor shall take all necessary precautions so as not to damage the
structural members scheduled to remain. All damage done to the existing structural members scheduled to remain
shall be repaired. The repair procedure shall be as follows:
      1. Steel Stringers, Floorbeams, Cross Frames, and Diaphragms.
            a. Repair procedures to tensile components shall conform to ASTM A 6/A 6M and the following:
                 (1) Gouges up to 120 mils shall be removed by grinding flush in the direction of principal stress.
                 (2) Gouges deeper than 120 mils shall be removed first by grinding; then, weld metal shall be
                         deposited and ground flush with the surface of the metal in the direction of principal stress.
                         Welding shall be done using low hydrogen electrodes conforming to current AWS
                         Specifications A5.1 and A5.5. The electrodes shall be protected from moisture during storage.
                 (3) Kinks and deformations shall be repaired by flame straightening or a combination of flame
                         straightening and jacking. Flame straightening shall be done by personnel approved by the
                         Department with a minimum of three years of prior documented experience.
            b. Repair procedures to compression components shall conform to the following:
                 (1) Where more than five percent of the cross-sectional area of the member is damaged due to
                         removal operations, the Contractor shall submit a repair procedure for approval.
                 (2) Kinks and deformations shall be repaired as outlined in 2.a (3) above.
      Existing top flanges of beams exposed by removal operations shall be cleaned and painted with a prime coat of
paint according to Subsection 514.07, Subpart B.
           THE FOLLOWING IS ADDED:

     Special protective systems for the removal of bridges, culverts, and other structures shall be as follows:
     1. Temporary Shielding. Temporary shielding for demolition and new construction shall include
          furnishing, installing, and removing a structural framing and barrier system. The system shall be
          supported from girders to provide an adequate and substantial temporary shielding system to protect
          vehicular, pedestrian, and railroad traffic from falling construction materials or other objects. The barrier
          system shall remain in place during the time that construction work is performed and until the work is
          completed and accepted.
                For deck replacement or new deck work, the temporary shielding shall seal the underside of deck
          and extend outside of the fascia stringers to enclose the soffits and parapets.
                For parapet removal and replacement or new parapet construction, an outrigging type of temporary
          shielding, which encloses the soffit and parapet, shall be used.
                The Contractor shall submit for approval detailed working drawings showing all elements of the
          temporary shielding system, including bonding and grounding over electrified rail lines, design
          calculations, and the sequence of operations thereof, signed and sealed by a Professional Engineer
          licensed in the State. Should the Contractor‟s operation or construction staging require it to install and
          remove the shielding more than once, no additional payment will be made.
                The traffic lanes and pedestrian areas below the areas where temporary shielding is being installed
          shall be closed, in accordance with the requirements of Section 617.
                The temporary shielding shall be designed to withstand a load of at least 0.8 psi or greater if heavier
          loads are anticipated and shall prevent small particles and dust from falling through.
                Bolted connections or welding between temporary shielding and bottom flanges of the beams shall
          not be permitted. Any materials dropped on the temporary shielding shall not be allowed to accumulate
          and shall be removed promptly.
                The selection of sizes, materials, their arrangements, and details shall be the Contractor‟s option and
          responsibility, but subject to approval by the Engineer.




Route 35 over Manasquan River Bridge Rehabilitation
Monmouth and Ocean Counties                                                                                    Page 60
                In no case shall the temporary shielding reduce the existing vertical underclearance of the bridges to
          less than 14 feet – 9 inches, over roadways (except as noted in the next paragraph). If any existing
          vertical underclearance is less than these values, it shall be maintained without any further reduction.
                Under all the existing spans that span over the waterway the existing vertical underclearance shall
          be maintained without exception, particularly under the bascule span and the three spans north of the
          bascule span (spans 3, 4, and 5). Under the northern most span (Span 1), there is an access road for the
          adjacent marina, and the area under this span is also utilized as a parking lot for the tourists/fishermen
          that access the charter boat from the marina. Existing clearance to the superstructure, and existing access
          and parking areas shall be maintained here throughout the construction, with shielding in place.
                The Contractor shall obtain the Engineer‟s approval of the method, design, and details of the
          temporary shielding system that the Contractor intends to use for the protection of traffic. No
          construction work shall be performed above traffic before such approval.
                All necessary efforts must be taken to prevent debris from falling into the waterway. Any debris
          falling into the waterway shall immediately be removed at the Contractor‟s expense. If found to be
          required, in areas other than covered by the pay limits identified on the plans, the cost of providing
          temporary shielding such as tarpaulin or an approved equal, shall be included in the item “Clearing Site,
          Bridge”.
                All electrical and mechanical components shall be protected from falling construction
          materials/objects throughout construction.

201.06 Removal of Sidewalks, Driveways, Curbs, and Gutters.
THE TITLE IS DELETED AND REPLACED WITH THE FOLLOWING:

201.06 Removal of Sidewalks, Driveways, Curbs, Pylons, and Gutters.
THE FIRST SENTENCE IS DELETED AND REPLACED WITH THE FOLLOWING:
     Concrete sidewalks, driveways, vertical curbs, sloping curbs, barrier curbs, pylons, and gutters, designated for
removal, shall be disposed of according to Subsection 201.10.

201.09 Demolition of Buildings.
        THE FIRST ITEM OF THE FIRST PARAGRAPH IS DELETED.

201.09 Demolition of Buildings.
        THE FOLLOWING IS ADDED:

    6.   Asbestos Removal.
          Removal of caulk and wallboard containing asbestos in the bridge control towers is required. A full
          specification is included as Appendix A to these Special Provisions.

          THE FOLLOWING IS ADDED:

201.10 Disposal of Materials and Debris.
      The Resident Engineer will be immediately notified of any oil spill. The spill will be contained and removed
immediately utilizing an Oil Emergency Spill Kit. The Contractor will furnish two complete kits. The kits shall be
maintained in an accessible, secure location on the project site at all times as directed by the Engineer. Soiled, used
or otherwise damaged items of the kits will be replaced. Disposal of kit items and spill material will be according to
Subsection 202.13. Each kit will contain the following items:

(1) 55 Gallon 16 Gauge Drum, SPE. Approximately 53 gallons.
(60) 20” x 16” Oil-Only Absorbent Pads
(10) 5” x 10‟ Oil-Only Absorbent Booms
(10) 3” x 10‟ Oil-Only Absorbent Booms
(20) Temporary Disposal Bags and Ties
(1) Emergency Response Guide Book
(1) Instruction Manual
(1) Wheeled container to accommodate the above items



Route 35 over Manasquan River Bridge Rehabilitation
Monmouth and Ocean Counties                                                                                    Page 61
Disposal of Contaminated Soil and Disposal of Contaminated Soil, Hazardous. This work shall include the
loading and off-site transport, and disposal of Contaminated Soil and Contaminated Soil, Hazardous (also known as
Regulated Waste and Regulated Waste, Hazardous) designated by the Engineer as excess, unusable or unsuitable
material to the project. The disposal, recycling or treatment of Contaminated Soil and Contaminated Soil,
Hazardous shall be in accordance with these specifications, the Material Handling Plan, Federal and State laws,
rules, and regulations and local laws, and the waste management plan of the district of origin. The references to
Contaminated Soil hereinafter shall mean Contaminated Soil and Contaminated Soil, Hazardous as appropriate.

Construction Requirements. The Contractor shall provide all labor, equipment and materials needed to load,
transport and dispose/recycle of Contaminated Soil in a manner protective of human health and the environment.
All work in and with Contaminated Soil shall be performed in accordance with Subsection 202.04 Management of
Contaminated Soil and applicable Federal, State and Local regulations.

Transport and Disposal of Contaminated Soil. The Contractor shall provide all personnel, material and
equipment needed to transport and dispose/recycle all Contaminated Soil generated on the project in accordance
with Federal and State laws, rules, and regulations and local laws, the waste management plan of the district of
origin.
      The Contractor shall be solely responsible for locating and contracting with appropriate hauler(s) and disposal
facility(ies) for the Contaminated Soil directed to be removed in accordance with Federal and State laws, rules and
regulations and local laws. The Contractor shall prepare and submit all documentation to obtain all Federal, State or
local approvals and fees necessary for disposing of Contaminated Soil. The Contractor shall ensure that the waste
disposal facility(ies) proposed for receipt of the material is (are) properly permitted to accept the classification of
Contaminated Soil.
      The Contractor shall submit to the Engineer, results of waste sampling and analysis, waste facility applications
and acceptance documentation, and fee payment requirements at least two weeks prior to planned removal of
Contaminated Soil. The Contractor shall submit to the Engineer a bill of lading (for ID-27 waste) or a hazardous
waste manifest (for hazardous waste) for each truckload of Contaminated Soil removed from the site. The bill of
landing and/or waste manifest form shall present the following information:
1.        Transport subcontractor name, address, permit number and phone number.
2.        Type and quantity of waste removed.
3.        Weight of vehicle with weigh slip.
4.        Recycling or disposal facility name, address, permit number, and telephone number.
5.        Date removed from site.
6.        Signature of transport vehicle operator.
7.        Waste manifest number.

      A representative of the Engineer will sign all waste manifests and/or bill of lading as the generator of the
waste. The Contractor shall submit to the Engineer a copy of all waste manifests of Contaminated Soil by the end of
the day that the truck leaves the site.
      All vehicles leaving the site with Contaminated Soil shall be inspected by the Contractor to ensure that no
excess soil adheres to the wheels or under carriage of the vehicles, and securely covered and equipped to prevent
leakage of water. In the event of leakage of soil or water to the public roads, the Contractor shall immediately clean
the road to restore it to the original condition and immediately notify the Engineer.
      The licensed hauler shall transport the Contaminated Soil to the disposal/recycling facility with no
unauthorized stops in between, except as required by regulatory authority. The hauler shall use appropriate vehicles
and operating practices to prevent spillage from occurring during transport. Contaminated Soil shall not be
transported over public roads if they contain free liquid or are sufficiently wet to be potentially flowable during
transport.
      The Contractor shall obtain appropriate documentation of disposal facility acceptance of the Contaminated Soil
and provide a copy of the documentation, including the weight ticket slips, to the Engineer and the County of origin
within ten working days of waste acceptance at the disposal facility.
      Should any problems arise regarding the facility chosen to accept the Contaminated Soil for off-site
management that would require the return of waste, or should such facility have violated any environmental
regulation which may result in any regulatory enforcement action, the Contractor shall immediately notify the
Engineer in writing of such a situation. The Contractor shall propose an alternate disposal facility, and obtain the
written approval of the Engineer for off-site management at such facility.


Route 35 over Manasquan River Bridge Rehabilitation
Monmouth and Ocean Counties                                                                                    Page 62
      The disposal of all Contaminated Soil shall be in accordance with the Material Handling Plan, Federal and
State laws, rules and regulations and local laws and the waste management plan of the district of origin.
      The NJDOT will provide the Contractor with a USEPA Hazardous Waste Identification Number for the project
containing Hazardous Waste.

201.11 Method of Measurement.
        THE FOLLOWING IS ADDED:

     Excavation or the use of any type of sheeting that is required for the removal of the structure, or when such
sheeting is to remain for planned new construction that is at the same location of the removal, will not be measured.
Payment shall be included in the bid price for “Clearing Site, Bridge (Str. No. 1506-152)”.

      Disposal of Contaminated Soil, which includes the off-site transport and the disposal/recycling of
contaminated soil, classified as non-hazardous waste shall be measured by the ton. This will be verified by using
certified weigh tickets.
      Disposal of Contaminated Soil, Hazardous, which includes the off-site transport and the disposal of
Contaminated Soil, classified as hazardous waste shall be measured by the ton. This will be verified by using
certified weigh tickets.
      Post Excavation Soil Sampling and Analysis will be measured by the unit. Each unit will include all costs
associated with planning, collecting, analyzing, and processing individual waste characterization samples as needed
by regulatory authority and/or disposal/recycling facility to classify Contaminated Soils and obtain regulatory and/or
facility approval for acceptance.
      Oil Emergency Spill kit shall be measured as unit.



201.12 Basis of Payment.
        THE FOLLOWING IS ADDED:

Basis of Payment.
     Payment will be made under:
          Pay Item                                                                                 Pay Unit
          DISPOSING OF CONTAMINATED SOIL, HAZARDOUS                                                TON
          OIL-ONLY EMERGENCY SPILL KIT, UP TO 53 GALLONS                                           UNIT

      Separate payment will not be made for mobilizing, preparing periodic reports, or planning special handling and
placement of Contaminated Soil in a manner protective of human health and the environment. All costs associated
with labor, equipment, and materials needed for special handling and placement of Contaminated Soil shall be
included in the applicable excavation pay items.
      No extra payment will be made for replenishment Oil Emergency Spill Kit items after use or for disposal of
spilled materials. Separate payment will not be made for the cleanup of spilled materials.

          THE SECOND PARAGRAPH IS CHANGED TO:

      Payment for the Pay Item “Clearing Site” in excess of $250,000 will not be made until Completion.
          THE FOLLOWING IS ADDED AFTER THE THIRD PARAGRAPH:
      A river bottom survey shall be conducted by the Contractor prior to and after construction. This survey shall
be conducted and certified by a PE diver, utilizing a permanent point on the bridge, and showing the streambed
along the bridge fascias and longitudinal centerline, with soundings on a 10-foot grid and at each substructure unit,
soundings shall extend to 150 feet from each fascia. The soundings shall include the existing bulkhead along the
northern shore within these limits and within the berths, along the length of the bulkhead, to adequately cover the
marina property. The survey report shall be submitted to the Resident Engineer to keep on file. Payment for this
survey shall be incidental and included under the lump sum item, Clearing Site, Bridge.
      Payment for the Pay Item “Clearing Site, Bridge (Str. No. 1506-152)” in excess of $1,000,000 will not be made
until Substantial Completion.
      Thirty percent of the Bid Price (or $300,000, whichever is less) upon acceptance of Stage I demolition


Route 35 over Manasquan River Bridge Rehabilitation
Monmouth and Ocean Counties                                                                                   Page 63
     Thirty five percent of the Bid Price (or $350,000, whichever is less) upon acceptance of Stage II demolition
     Thirty five percent of the Bid Price (or $350,000, whichever is less) upon acceptance of Stage III demolition



                            SECTION 202 – ROADWAY EXCAVATION
202.02 Classification.
     D. Roadway Excavation, Regulated Waste.              Based on the preliminary analysis the classification of
         regulated waste is Contaminated Soil.

202.04 Excavation.
        THE FOLLOWING IS ADDED:

1.   Management of Contaminated Soil
           Preliminary analysis has identified areas of contaminated soil within and adjacent to planned excavation
     areas. Excavation in areas containing one or more contaminants exceeding New Jersey Department of
     Environmental Protection (NJDEP) soil cleanup criteria, as identified in the construction documents, as
     directed by the Engineer, or as determined by the Contractor and approved by the Engineer, shall be performed
     in accordance with applicable Federal and State law, rules and regulations; The Contractor‟s Site Specific
     Health and Safety Plan (HASP); the specifications and the direction of the Engineer.

     a.    Requirements and Methods for Excavation and Management of Contaminated Soil
           Description. The work shall include the excavation, handling, stockpiling, sampling, and analysis for
     disposal, reuse on-site and disposal, recycling or treatment of Contaminated Soil except as provided for in
     Subsection 202.13. The disposal of Contaminated Soil shall comply with the plan, specifications, Federal,
     State and local law, rules, and regulations, the waste management plan of the district of origin, and Subsection
     202.13. The term „Contaminated Soil‟ as used shall mean Contaminated Soil and Contaminated Soil,
     Hazardous as appropriate.
           Construction Requirements. The Contractor shall provide all personnel, materials and equipment needed
     to undertake excavation as required to complete the work in a safe manner that is protective of human health
     and the environment. Excavation of Contaminated Soil shall be performed with equipment of suitable size and
     compatible with site conditions. All equipment shall comply with and shall be operated in accordance with all
     applicable regulations. Excavation of Contaminated Soil shall be to the limits shown on the plans and no
     further, unless directed by the Engineer.
           The Contractor shall handle all excavated material in a manner that protects site personnel, the public,
     and the environment in accordance with all applicable federal, state, and local laws and regulations. Prior to
     any excavation of Contaminated Soil the Contractor shall develop a Site-Specific Health and Safety Plan
     (HASP) in accordance with 29 CFR 1910, 29 CFR 1926 and the Site Specific Health and Safety Requirements
     specified herein.
           Environmental Sampling and Testing. The Contractor shall provide all personnel, materials, and
     equipment needed to properly characterize excavated Contaminated Soil material as required for
     disposal/recycling facility approval. The Contractor shall submit as part of the Material Handling Plan
     described herein, a sampling analysis section for characterizing the Contaminated Soil for off-site disposal in
     accordance with applicable Federal, State and Local laws, rules and regulations: or according to the disposal
     facility accepting the waste.
           The Contractor shall submit as part of the sampling and analysis section, the name, address and telephone
     number of the contact for the Contractor‟s proposed environmental laboratory and the name and experience of
     the proposed environmental sampling technician. The use of a proposed environmental laboratory and
     proposed environmental sampling technician are subject to review and acceptance by the Engineer.
           The Contractor shall provide all personnel, equipment and ancillary services required to collect, transport
     and analyze environmental samples required for proper characterization of the material. All sampling, testing,
     and inspections conducted in areas containing potential Contaminated Soil shall be performed in accordance
     with the site-specific HASP in Subsection 202.04.
           All sampling, testing, and data management procedures shall comply with current versions of the NJDEP
     Field Sampling Procedures Manual, NJDEP Technical Requirements for Site Remediation, NJDEP


Route 35 over Manasquan River Bridge Rehabilitation
Monmouth and Ocean Counties                                                                                   Page 64
    Management of Excavated Soils Guidelines, Appendix 1 of the NJDEP Waste Classification Form and EPA
    requirements.
          Where required by the Contractor‟s disposal facility, the Contractor shall collect and analyze for
    additional parameters necessary for off-site disposal.
          Stockpiling Contaminated Soil. The Contractor shall provide all personnel, materials and equipment
    needed to properly store (and dewater, if necessary) Contaminated Soil in temporary stockpiles. If needed, any
    temporary stockpile(s) shall be located at area(s) within the project limits selected by the Contractor and
    approved by the Resident Engineer. Contaminated Soil, not suitable for construction activities and/or reuse,
    shall not be stockpiled for more than 180 days. Contaminated Soil subsequently classified as hazardous shall
    be properly stage and removed within 90 days of excavation.
          Stockpiles shall only be placed on dry areas on a layer of minimum 10mils thick PVC sheeting or similar,
    as approved by the Engineer and contained with hay bales or silt fence placed continuously at the perimeter of
    the stockpile(s). All joints in the underlying PVC sheeting shall overlap with a minimum of 12 inches at the
    ends. Stockpile shall be constructed so that heights shall not exceed 15 feet, nor with sideslopes steeper than
    one vertical and two horizontal. The Contractor shall segregate material of differing types and degrees of
    contamination so as to prevent cross-contamination of uncontaminated material.
          The Contractor shall provide protection for the Contaminated Soil stockpile to prevent the run-on of
      tormwater, migration of contaminants, dusting, erosion, and unauthorized contact. Stockpiles shall be
    covered with PVC sheeting of the same thickness. The sheeting shall be secured in place with tie downs
    and/or heavy objects such as concrete blocks at the end of each workday and during adverse weather
    conditions. All joints in the cover shall have a minimum 300 millimeters overlap and securing materials shall
    be placed along the joints such that the cover will not be opened by wind action.
          The Contractor shall be responsible for the proper protection and maintenance for the Contaminated Soil
    stockpile and embankment until completion of the work and acceptance by the Engineer. The Contractor shall
    maintain the sheeting as needed to repair damage and replace displaced cover sheeting. At the direction of the
    Engineer, the Contractor shall remedy any observed deficiencies in the cover and sediment barrier surrounding
    the temporary stockpile or embankment as soon as practicable, including but not limited to the removal and
    disposal of accumulated sediments behind the sediment barrier, to maintain satisfactory protection, and as
    otherwise needed to prevent contamination migration or exposure.
          Drainage shall be controlled with hay bales, placed continuously at the perimeter of the stockpile(s), PVC
    cover and silt fence such that run-on and run-off from the Contaminated Soil stockpile(s) are mitigated.
    Decant from the dewatering of sediments shall be in accordance with the Pollution Prevention and Control
    Plan (described herein Subsection 212.06).
          Soil/Sediment Usage Tracking Log. The Contractor shall monitor and record on Daily Soil/Sediment
    Tracking Logs the source location, type, quantity, and characteristics of Contaminated Soil excavated,
    stockpiled, and. The Contractor shall submit a Daily Soil/Sediment Tracking Log to the Engineer for each
    workday involving excavation, stockpiling, transport, and disposal of Contaminated Soil. The Daily Soil
    Tracking Log shall contain, at a minimum, the following information:

             (1)     Date,
             (2)     Location(s) of excavation and placement of material,
             (3)     Volume of Contaminated Soil removed, and
             (4)     Name(s) and signature(s) of the Contractor representative(s) responsible for preparing and
                   executing the Usage Tracking Log.

         Copies of Daily Soil/Sediment Tracking Logs shall be submitted to the Engineer on a weekly basis. The
    Engineer will not approve any progress payment invoice if the required Daily Soil/Sediment Tracking logs
    have not been submitted.

 2. Site-Specific Health And Safety Requirements
          Background Environmental Information. The documentation and environmental information provided by
    the NJDOT is for information purposes only. The Contractor is responsible for appropriate interpretation of
    the information. The Contractor shall perform a hazard assessment of each proposed work task and make an
    independent evaluation regarding the appropriate level of health and safety requirements.
          Description. This work shall consist of the Contractor preparing, submitting, and implementing a Site-
    Specific Health and Safety Plan (HASP) in accordance with all applicable health and safety requirements for


Route 35 over Manasquan River Bridge Rehabilitation
Monmouth and Ocean Counties                                                                                  Page 65
    work in and with contaminated soil, sediment, and water. The Engineer shall review all submittals for
    compliance with the health and safety requirements. Excavation shall not be commenced until the Engineer‟s
    review has been completed as evidenced by written comment and acceptance as to completeness and
    compliance with these specifications. The Engineer will not approve the plan. However, acceptance of the
    plan by the Engineer implies only that at the time of review, the Engineer was not aware of any reasons to
    object to the plan. The acceptance of the plan, by the Engineer, does not relieve the Contractor of any
    responsibilities under the contract.
          Construction Requirements. The Contractor shall employ a Certified Industrial Hygienist (CIH) or
    Certified Safety Professional (CSP) to develop and oversee implementation of the Contractor‟s HASP. The
    CIH/CSP shall prepare the HASP to protect the Contractor‟s employees, the subcontractor‟s employees,
    NJDOT employees and consultants, and the public from contamination present in the areas requiring
    excavation as designated on the construction plans. The HASP shall be prepared in accordance with all
    applicable local, state, and federal rules and regulations, including the health and safety requirements of OSHA
    29 CFR parts 1910 and 1926.
          The CIH/CSP shall review the site specific data and address the proposed activities to the level of detail
    as needed to ensure that site specific data, appropriate regulations, and a description of the site conditions are
    incorporated into the HASP. The Contractor shall comply with all the requirements of the accepted HASP
    during the excavation, handling, stockpiling, disposal, or recycling of Contaminated Soils.
          The HASP as needed shall describe workplace and emergency procedures to be followed so that this
    project may be constructed in a safe manner. The HASP shall govern all facets of the project constructed and
    encompass the activities of all persons who enter and/or work on the site. The HASP shall incorporate
    procedures that conform to all federal, state, and local regulations pertaining to employee working conditions
    where appropriate, National Institute for Occupational Safety and Health (NIOSH), Occupational Safety and
    Health Administration (OSHA), US Coast Guard, US Environmental Protection Agency (USEPA), and New
    Jersey Department of Environmental Protection (NJDEP).
          The HASP shall require that a health and safety designate monitor the working conditions during all
    excavation procedures and during the handling of Contaminated Soils to ensure conformance with the accepted
    HASP. The CIH/CSP shall evaluate the need for air monitoring during excavation and loading operations in
    Contaminated Soil. The air monitoring program shall, if deemed necessary by the CIH/CSP, be implemented
    by the CIH/CSP or an assigned designate suitably trained and approved by the CIH/CSP for the work required.
    The CIH/CSP shall include in the HASP applicable training and qualifications documentation for him/her self
    and each health and safety designate.
          The Contractor shall provide initial and annual training and medical monitoring for all Contractor
    employees scheduled to work in/with contaminated soil/water and per the Engineers request up to ten (10) state
    employees and/or their authorized representatives as per OSHA 29 CFR 1910. The initial training for state
    employees and/or their authorized representatives shall be provided one (1) month prior to any excavation.
          The Contractor shall deliver four (4) copies of the HASP and a listing of the health and safety personnel
    prior to clearing site to the Engineer for review and acceptance at least one month prior to beginning
    excavation. No work on the site shall be permitted until the HASP has been submitted, reviewed, and accepted
    by the Engineer. The Contractor shall be responsible for implementing the HASP submitted to and accepted
    by the Engineer. The Contractor shall deliver original logs and reports related to the HASP to the Engineer on
    a weekly basis.

 3. Material Handling Plan
          This work shall consist of developing and implementing a Materials Handling Plan (MHP) for Regulated
    Waste/Contaminated Soil encountered, moved, and disposed and/or recycled during construction. The MHP
    shall explain the Contractor‟s planned techniques to be used in managing Contaminated Soil so as to protect
    workers, the Resident Engineer and his representatives, visitors, the public and adjoining property owners
    against uncontrolled exposure to Contaminated Soil, plus to prevent uncontrolled release of Contaminated Soil
    to the environment.
          The Contractor shall prepare and submit for Engineer‟s approval a MHP prior to any excavation. The
    MHP shall detail standard operating procedures for excavation, stockpiling, transporting, sampling and
    analysis, measurement, transportation, and disposal of hazardous waste and Contaminated Soil. The
    Contractor shall make all necessary modifications to the MHP that result from comments given by the
    Engineer and the Department. The Contractor shall perform planning, administrative and control functions
    required in implementing the MHP. The MHP shall be in full compliance with the Specification. The


Route 35 over Manasquan River Bridge Rehabilitation
Monmouth and Ocean Counties                                                                                   Page 66
     Contractor shall implement the MHP in accordance with the contract documents.
           The Contractor shall not commence work activities governed by the MHP until the Engineer has given
     written acceptance of the MHP. The Contractor shall submit the MHP to the Engineer for review and
     acceptance at least one month prior to commencing excavation.
           The Contractor MHP shall include at a minimum: details of current certification, permits, insurance types
     and levels of coverage; qualifications of the transportation and receiving facilities; the types of equipment to be
     used in transporting Contaminated Soil; proposed route(s) to disposal facilities and weighing facilities; waste
     characterization forms, sampling logs and analyses reports; transport manifests; and waste disposal
     documentation forms from the receiving facility.
           The Contractor shall provide periodic reports documenting the excavation, stockpiling, sampling, off-site
     management and on-site placement of Contaminated Soil. The periodic reports shall be mailed to the Engineer
     by the tenth calendar day of each month. The periodic reports shall provide the location and date(s) of
     excavation, stockpiling, sampling, off-site management, and placement of Contaminated Soil. The periodic
     reports shall explain any changes to or differences with construction plans. The periodic reports shall also
     include dates of planned excavation, sampling, and disposal of Contaminated Soil for the coming months.
           The Contractor shall provide a final report documenting the Management of Contaminated Soil, including
     the location and date(s) of excavation, stockpiling, sampling, disposal/off-site management, and on-site
     placement of Contaminated Soil. The final report also shall include any plans depicting placement of
     Contaminated Soil. The Contractor shall deliver four paper copies and one digital copy of the final report to
     the Engineer within one-month of completing all Roadway Excavation, Regulated Waste and Disposal of
     Contaminated Soil.

202.09 Milling of HMA.
     2. Construction Requirements.
        THE FOLLOWING IS ADDED AFTER THE NINTH PARAGRAPH:

                Milled areas shall not be left unpaved for longer than 72 hours, unless approved by the Engineer.

202.14 Method of Measurement.
THE FOLLOWING IS ADDED

     Environmental Sampling Personnel, Management and Reporting (HASP and Remedial Action Workplan), will
include the development and implementation of the Material Handling Plan (MHP). Payment for preparation,
implementation, monitoring, and administration of the MHP, including supervision, documentation, and monitoring
performing during execution of excavation, handling, stockpiling and transport of Contaminated Soil, shall be
included in applicable excavation and disposal pay items.


202.15 Basis of Payment.
        THE FOLLOWING IS ADDED:

     Payment will be made under:
         Pay Item                                                                                             Pay Unit
         ENVIRONMENTAL SAMPLING PERSONNEL, MANAGEMENT AND REPORTING                                           HOURS

         THE FOLLOWING IS ADDED AFTER THE FOURTH PARAGRAPH.

    Separate payment will not be made for Sawcutting when used with the Pay Items “Joint Removal” or
“Removal of Concrete Base Course and Concrete Surface Courses”.

                                    SECTION 203 – EMBANKMENT
203.08 Control Fill Method.
     A. Control Strips.
         4. Procedure.
        THE LAST SENTENCE OF THE FOURTH PARAGRAPH IS CHANGED TO:



Route 35 over Manasquan River Bridge Rehabilitation
Monmouth and Ocean Counties                                                                                     Page 67
                Density of the control strip will be determined according to AASHTO T 191 or AASHTO T 310
                (Direct Transmission Method) except that only one method will be used throughout the Project.

     B.    Embankment Compaction.
          THE THIRD PARAGRAPH IS CHANGED TO:

                 The density of such inaccessible areas will be determined from the average of five randomly located
           measurements according to AASHTO T 191 or AASHTO T 310 (Direct Transmission Method) except
           that only one method will be used throughout the Project.

203.10 Density Control Method.
        THE LAST SENTENCE OF THE FIRST PARAGRAPH IS CHANGED TO:

The compacted density of embankments will be determined by taking the average of a minimum of five randomly
located measurements for each 1,000 cubic yards placed according to AASHTO T 191 or AASHTO T 310 (Direct
Transmission Method) except that only one method will be used throughout the Project.

203.13 Vertical Drain Method.
        SUBPART C. IS CHANGED TO:




                               SECTION 204 – BORROW EXCAVATION
204.03 Construction Requirements.
        THE THIRD SENTENCE OF THE SECOND PARAGRAPH IS CHANGED TO:

     A minimum of two field density tests will be taken according to AASHTO T 191 or AASHTO T 310 (Direct
Transmission Method) on each compacted layer at each substructure unit, except that only one of the referenced
methods will be used on the Project.

                 SECTION 207 – SUBSURFACE STRUCTURE EXCAVATION
207.03 Bedding Materials.
        SUBSECTION HEADING IS CHANGED TO:

207.03 Bedding and Backfill Materials.

          THE FOLLOWING IS ADDED:

     Controlled Low Strength Material (CLSM) shall conform to Subsection 919.22

207.04 Construction Requirements.
        THE FIRST PARAGRAPH IS CHANGED TO:

      Before excavating, existing subsurface structures which may be affected by or interfere with the proposed
construction shall be located. If directed, test pits shall be excavated to obtain the required information. Test pits or
portions of a test pit shall be dug by hand when in close proximity to utilities or when directed. Excavation beyond
that which is necessary to obtain the required information will not be measured for payment. Test pits shall be
backfilled according to Subsection 203.06.

     1.    Pipes and Culverts.
          THE FIRST PARAGRAPH IS CHANGED TO:




Route 35 over Manasquan River Bridge Rehabilitation
Monmouth and Ocean Counties                                                                                      Page 68
          The width of trench shall be at least 1 foot – 6 inches greater than the outside diameter of the pipe or
          culvert. When the material at the bottom of the excavation is rock or other hard material, it shall be
          removed within 6 inches for reinforced concrete culvert pipe and high density polyethylene (HDPE) pipe,
          and 1 foot for corrugated metal, steel, or aluminum alloy culvert pipe outside the bottom of the pipe or
          culvert and the space backfilled with suitable material.

207.05 Bedding for Pipes and Culverts.
        THE FIFTH PARAGRAPH IS CHANGED TO:

     Bedding for corrugated aluminum alloy culvert pipe and HDPE pipe shall be placed as specified for Class B
bedding.

207.06 Backfilling.
         A.         Pipes and Culverts.
        THE ENTIRE SUBPART A. IS CHANGED TO:

                 Backfill to a height of 2 feet above the top of pipes and culverts, except underdrains, corrugated
          aluminum alloy culvert pipe and HDPE pipe, shall be made with excavated material free from stones or
          rock fragments larger than 2 inches in any dimension. Below this level, the backfill shall be placed in layers
          not more than 6 inches thick, and each layer shall be compacted with flat-face mechanical tampers.
          Backfill shall be worked into the haunch area and compacted for all pipe.
                 For HDPE pipe, backfill to a height of 2 feet above the top of the pipe shall be made with excavated
          material free from class IV or class V materials according to ASTM D2321, with stones or rock
          fragments no larger than 1½ inch in any direction. Below this level, the backfill shall be placed
          symmetrically on each side of the pipe in layers not more than 6 inches thick with each layer compacted
          with flat-faced mechanical tampers for all pipe.
                 Backfill to a height of 2 feet above the top of corrugated aluminum alloy culvert pipe shall be made
          with a granular soil with the gradation as specified in Subsection 207.03. Below this level, the backfill
          shall be placed symmetrically on each side of the pipe in layers not more than 6 inches thick, and each
          layer shall be compacted with flat-faced mechanical tampers.
                 All backfill more than 2 feet above the top of pipes and culverts, except underdrains, shall be made
          with excavated material and compacted in 6 inches layers as follows:
                 1. By vibratory soil compactors, if the backfill material is predominately sand or sand and gravel.
                 2. By flat-faced mechanical tampers, if the backfill material is not predominantly sand or sand
                      and gravel.
                 3. Flat-faced mechanical tampers may be substituted for the vibratory soil compactors where the
                      shoring and bracing of trenches or other special conditions make the use of vibratory
                      compactors impractical.
                 4. Care shall be taken to avoid contact between the pipe and compaction equipment at all times.
                      All damaged pipes shall be removed and replaced at no additional cost to the State.
                 The Engineer may direct compaction to be according to Subsection 203.10 except that the frequency
          of measurements may increase. If a hydrohammer or hoe-pak is used for compacting the backfill over the
          pipe, a minimum of 4 feet of cover over the pipe shall be provided.
                 CLSM may be used as alternate backfill material when backfilling trenches for drainage pipe and
          utility conduit. Combining other backfill materials in the same trench as CLSM shall not be permitted.
          Mixing and placement of CLSM shall begin only when the ambient temperature is at least 30 F. During
          placement, the CLSM mixture shall have a temperature of at least 41 F and shall not be placed on frozen
          ground. The CLSM mixture shall be discharged directly from the truck into the trench to be filled with
          care taken to prevent the pipe from becoming displaced. After placement, the CLSM mixture shall be
          cured and protected to prevent damage from cold weather according to Subsection 405.14. CLSM shall
          not be used to replace pavement, base courses or drainage layers that form the structure of the roadway.
                 The special backfill in trenches for the underdrains shall be compacted by vibratory compactors.
          Earth backfill above the special backfill material shall be compacted as specified in Subsection 203.07.
                 Shoring, bracing, and sheathing shall be withdrawn as the backfilling proceeds. Compaction
          requirements shall not be compromised due to the removal of sheathing, shoring, trench boxes or other
          type of excavation support systems.


Route 35 over Manasquan River Bridge Rehabilitation
Monmouth and Ocean Counties                                                                                     Page 69
              In rock cuts, the backfill shall be either broken stone or washed gravel.


THE FOLLOWING SECTION IS ADDED:

              SECTION 212 – SOIL EROSION AND SEDIMENT CONTROL
212.06 Soil Erosion and Sediment Control Measures.
        THE FOLLOWING IS ADDED:

    K.   Concrete Washout Facility. Design concrete washout facility to fully contain all concrete washout
         needs of the Work. Concrete washout facility may be portable or a bermed basin that is lined with a
         single sheet of a minimum of 10-mil polyethylene sheeting that extends over the entire basin and berm to
         prevent escape of discharge. Place a secure, non-collapsing, non-water collecting cover over the concrete
         washout facility prior to inclement weather to prevent accumulation and overflow of precipitation.
         Submit a plan for concrete washout facility for approval to the Resident Engineer 10 days before first
         concrete pour. Provide concrete washout facility to prevent discharge from concrete trucks or equipment
         cleaning to inlets, surface or groundwater. Designate an area for the concrete washout facility that is no
         closer than 50 feet from environmentally sensitive areas such as waterbodies, wetlands, or other areas
         indicated on the plans. Use signs to designate concrete washout facilities. Ensure that the concrete
         washout facility complies with all Federal, State, and local laws, rules, and regulations. Ensure that the
         concrete washout facility is in place before delivery of concrete to the site.
               Ensure that concrete washout is limited to the designated areas. Contents of the concrete washout
         facility shall not exceed 50 % capacity of the facility. At or before the 50 % capacity is reached,
         discontinue pouring concrete until the facility is cleaned out. Remove hardened concrete and properly
         dispose or reuse it as specified in Subsection 202.12. Allow slurry to evaporate or remove from site and
         dispose of it as specified in Subsection 201.10.
               If a lined basin is used, immediately replace the liner if it gets damaged. Remove concrete washout
         facility when it is no longer needed. Restore the disturbed area to its original condition.

    L.   Oil-Only Emergency Spill Kit. Before start of construction operations of the Work, place on site at least
         2 oil-only emergency spill kits with each kit capable of cleaning up at least 50 gallons of spill. Ensure
         that each kit contains the items as provided in the Special Provisions:
          1. 10 oil-only absorbent booms (5-inch by 10-foot)
          2. 10 oil-only absorbent booms (3-inch by 10-foot)
          3. 60 absorbent mat-type pads (20-inch by 16-inch)
          4. 20 temporary disposal bags and ties
          5. 1 emergency response guide book
          6. 1 instruction manual
          7. 1 wheeled container for the above
          8. One 40 lb bag loose absorbent pellets

               If a spill occurs, immediately contain and clean up the spill. Notify the Resident Engineer as soon
         as circumstances permit. Stockpile the excavated contaminated soil separately. Dispose of cleaned up
         material and used kit material as specified in Subsection 201.10. Replenish kits as necessary to keep at
         least 2 complete kits on site at all times during construction operations.

212.09 Method of Measurement.
        THE FOLLOWING IS ADDED:

   Concrete washout Facility will not be measured, and payment will be made on a lump sum basis.
   Oil only emergency spill kit will be measured by the unit.

212.10 Basis of Payment.
        THE FOLLOWING PAY ITEMS ARE ADDED:



Route 35 over Manasquan River Bridge Rehabilitation
Monmouth and Ocean Counties                                                                                Page 70
         Pay Item                                     Pay Unit

         CONCRETE WASHOUT FACILITY                    LUMP SUM
         OIL ONLY EMERGENCY SPILL KIT                 UNIT
    .




Route 35 over Manasquan River Bridge Rehabilitation
Monmouth and Ocean Counties                                      Page 71
                                DIVISION 300 – BASE COURSES
         SECTION 301 – SOIL AGGREGATE BASE COURSE AND DENSE-GRADED
                             AGGREGATE BASE COURSE
301.05 Compaction.
        THE LAST SENTENCE OF THE FIRST PARAGRAPH IS CHANGED TO:

The in-place dry density of each compacted layer will be determined according to AASHTO T 191 or T 310 (Direct
Transmission Method) except that only one method will be used throughout the Project.

    2.    Compaction Acceptance Testing.
           THE THIRD SENTENCE OF THE LAST PARAGRAPH IS CHANGED TO:

           One density determination will be made at each of the selected locations using AASHTO T 191 or T 310
           (Direct Transmission Method) except that only one method will be used throughout the Project.
     3.    Waiving Standard Compaction Requirements.
          THE FOLLOWING IS ADDED AFTER THE FIRST PARAGRAPH:


301.08 Maintenance Under Traffic.
        THIS SUBSECTION IS CHANGED TO:

      When it is provided on the Plans that traffic is permitted to ride on the completed base course, the base course
shall be maintained smooth and uniform until covered by the following stage of construction.

                         SECTION 302 – ROAD-MIXED STABILIZATION
302.09 Compaction, Shaping, and Finishing.
    A. Compaction.
        THE LAST SENTENCE OF THE SECOND PARAGRAPH IS CHANGED TO:

           The in-place dry density of each compacted course will be determined according to AASHTO T 191 or T
           310 (Direct Transmission Method) except that only one method will be used throughout the Project.

                            SECTION 305 – CONCRETE BASE COURSE
305.05 Opening to Traffic.
        THIS SUBSECTION IS CHANGED TO:

     The opening to traffic shall be as specified in Subsection 405.20.




Route 35 over Manasquan River Bridge Rehabilitation
Monmouth and Ocean Counties                                                                                    Page 72
                            DIVISION 400 – SURFACE COURSES
                    SECTION 402 – BITUMINOUS SURFACE TREATMENT

                  SECTION 403 – HOT MIX ASPHALT FRICTION COURSE
403.01 Description.
        THE ENTIRE SUBSECTION TEXT IS CHANGED TO:

      This work includes the construction of Open Graded Friction Course (OGFC), and Modified Open Graded
Friction Course (MOGFC). The MOGFC shall contain polymer modified asphalt binder and stabilizing fibers.

403.02 Materials.
        THE ENTIRE SUBSECTION TEXT IS CHANGED TO:

     The materials and their use shall conform to Subsection 404.02 except as follows:
     1.   Aggregate for OGFC and MOGFC shall conform to Subsection 901.10; except that coarse aggregate
         shall be broken stone of gneiss, granite, quartzite, or trap rock. RAP will not be allowed.
     2.   Asphalt binder for OGFC shall be PG64-22 as specified in 904.01 and asphalt binder for MOGFC shall
         be PG76-22 as specified in 904.01.
     3.   For MOGFC, a stabilizing additive consisting of mineral fiber or cellulose fiber shall be added to the
         mix. The stabilizing additive shall conform to the requirements for stabilizing additives in AASHTO MP
         8. Only one type shall be used per mix design. If using mineral fibers, the dosage rate shall be 0.4
         percent by weight of total mix. If using cellulose fibers, the dosage rate shall be 0.3 percent by weight of
         total mix. The dosage rate may be increased, as necessary, to prevent draindown as measured by the
         Visual Draindown Asphalt Content in Section 990, NJDOT B-11. Control shall be provided for
         accurately proportioning the fibers into the mixture within +/- 10 percent of the required weight, and the
         equipment shall ensure uniform dispersion of the fibers. Fibers shall be stored in a dry location with a
         storage temperature not to exceed 120° F. The supplier of the cellulose or mineral fibers shall certify
         according to Subsection 106.04 that the material supplied complies with AASHTO MP 8. A technical
         representative from the additive supplier shall be on the site for the first full day of construction for
         technical assistance.

403.03 Composition and Preparation of Mixtures.
        THE ENTIRE SUBSECTION TEXT IS CHANGED TO:

      A job mix formula (JMF) for each mixture shall be submitted on forms supplied by the Department, which
shall include a statement naming the source of each component and a report showing the results meet the criteria
specified in Table 403-1.
      The JMF for each mixture shall establish the percentage of dry weight of aggregate passing each required sieve
size and an optimum percentage of asphalt binder based upon the weight of the total mix. The optimum asphalt
content for OGFC will be determined according to Section 990, NJDOT B-12. The optimum asphalt content for
MOGFC will be determined according to Section 990, NJDOT B-11. The JMF shall be within the design range
specified in Table 403-1.
      The Contractor shall prepare compacted test specimens for submittal to the Department Laboratory at least four
weeks prior to the initial production date. These specimens shall be prepared from material mixed according to the
final JMF, using 50 gyrations of the Superpave gyratory compactor according to AASHTO T 312. Two specimens
will be tested to verify that the final JMF produces a mixture that has a minimum air void content as specified in
Table 403-1. Percent air voids will be determined using AASHTO T 209 and either Section 990, NJDOT B-6 or
AASHTO TP 69.
      If required by the Regional Materials Engineer (RME), six specimens will be tested according to AASHTO T
283. For MOGFC, the freeze-thaw option will be utilized. The minimum tensile strength ratio (TSR) will be 80
percent. Should the ratio fall below this minimum, adjust the mixture so as to satisfy the minimum requirement.
Adjustments may include the use of anti-stripping agents.


Route 35 over Manasquan River Bridge Rehabilitation
Monmouth and Ocean Counties                                                                                  Page 73
      For MOGFC only, two test specimens will be tested for abrasion and impact resistance using a modified L.A.
Abrasion Test as per Section 990, NJDOT B-11, Section C.6. The maximum loss as calculated by this method shall
not be more than 30 percent.
      The JMF for each mixture shall be in effect until modification is approved.
      During production, one random acceptance sample will be taken from each lot of 300 tons to verify
composition. Air voids and draindown tests shall be conducted as directed by the Engineer.
      If the composition testing results are out of the production control tolerances specified in Table 403-2 for an
acceptance sample, the Contractor shall determine if a plant adjustment is needed and immediately run a quality
control sample. If the quality control sample is also out of the control tolerances in Table 403-2, corrective action
shall be taken immediately. Additional quality control samples shall be taken after the corrective action to ensure
that the mix is under control. If two consecutive acceptance samples are outside the tolerances specified in Table
403-2, production shall stop immediately. A plant correction shall be made prior to resuming production. Upon
restarting production, no mixture shall be transported to the project before the results of a quality control sample
from the mixture indicate that the mixture meets JMF tolerances. Any mixture produced at initial restarting that
does not meet tolerances will be rejected.
      Sampling will be performed according to Section 990, NJDOT B-2 or ASTM D 3665. Testing for composition
will be performed according to AASHTO T 164, AASHTO T 308, or Section 990, NJDOT B-5. Testing for
draindown will be performed according to Section 990, NJDOT B-11 or B-12

                                                Table 403-1
                                       Open Graded Friction Course
                          Job Mix Formula Design Ranges and Mixture Requirements

                                               Mixture Designations
                                      OGFC                MOGFC-1                MOGFC-2            MOGFC-3
          Sieve Sizes                                                % Passing
              ¾”                                             100                    100
              ½”                        100                 85-100                90-100                100
             3/8”                     85-100                35-60                  65-85              85-100
              #4                       20-40                10-25                  15-25               20-40
              #8                       5-10                  5-10                  5-10                 5-10
             #200                       2-4                  2-5                    2-4                 2-4

  Minimum asphalt binder               5.5%                  5.7%                 5.7%                 6.0%
  Min % Air Voids, design              15%                   20%                  18%                  18%
  Min lift Thickness, design            ¾”                   1 ¼”                  1”                   ¾”

Note 1: Aggregate % passing to be determined based on dry aggregate weight. Asphalt Binder content to be
        determined based on total weight of mix.

                                                 Table 403-2
                        Production Control Tolerances for OGFC and MOGFC Mixtures

            Production Control Tolerances                                 Sieve Sizes

                           6.0                                               1/2”
                           5.5                                               3/8”
                           5.5                                                #4
                           4.5                                                #8
                           2.0                                               #200

                          0.25                          Asphalt binder, % (AASHTO T 308 or T 164)
                          0.15                          Asphalt binder, % (Section 990, NJDOT B-5)



Route 35 over Manasquan River Bridge Rehabilitation
Monmouth and Ocean Counties                                                                                    Page 74
403.04 Equipment.
        THE ENTIRE SUBSECTION TEXT IS CHANGED TO:

      The equipment shall be as provided in section 404 except that OGFC and MOGFC mixes shall be transported
in clean vehicles with smooth dump beds that have been sprayed with a non-petroleum release agent. Truckloads of
mixture without the specified cover, or that contain lumps, crusting or segregation shall be rejected. The time
between the loading of the truck and lay down shall not exceed 90 minutes.

403.05 Construction Requirements.
        THE FIRST PARAGRAPH IS CHANGED TO:

     The construction requirements shall be as specified in Section 404 except as follows for OGFC and MOGFC:
     1.    Hand placing shall be avoided except where necessary.
     2.    Laying temperature for OGFC mix shall not be less than 225F; laying temperature for MOGFC shall be
          as per binder manufacturer‟s recommendations.
     3.    Ambient temperature shall be 60°F minimum.
     4.    Thickness for OGFC mix shall be ¾  ¼ inch; thickness for MOGFC shall conform to Table 403-1.
     5.    Temperature at discharge from the plant shall be maintained from 240F to 270F for OGFC;
          temperature at discharge from the plant for MOGFC shall be within the binder manufacturer‟s
          recommended mixing range.

403.07 Basis of Payment.
        THE FOLLOWING PAY ITEM IS ADDED:

          Pay Item                                                                                Pay Unit
          MODIFIED OPEN-GRADED FRICTION COURSE, MIXTURE MOGFC__                                   TON

         THE FOLLOWING PAY ITEM IS DELETED:

          Pay Item                                                                                Pay Unit
          DENSE-GRADED FRICTION COURSE, MIX__                                                     TON

                            SECTION 404 – HOT MIX ASPHALT (HMA)
404.02 Materials.
        THE FOLLOWING IS ADDED TO LIST OF MATERIALS IN THE SECOND PARAGRAPH:

          Polymerized                                                                                          Joint
          Adhesive…………………………………………………………………………..908.08

404.05 Plant Laboratory.
        ITEM 23. OF THE FIFTH PARAGRAPH IS CHANGED TO:

     23. Microcomputer and workstation requirements shall be according to Subsection 106.06.

404.06 Vehicles for Transporting HMA Mixtures.
        THE ENTIRE SUBSECTION IS CHANGED TO:

     The mixture shall be transported from the mixing plant to the Project in trucks equipped with tight, clean
bodies, which may be lightly coated with a soap or lime solution, or other such non-petroleum-based release agent.
Under no circumstance shall a petroleum-based product be used as a release agent.
     The trucks shall be permanently equipped with an airfoil that is capable at any speed or under any weather
conditions to deflect air over the tarp and to prevent air from going under the tarp. The airfoil will be affixed no
more than 2 feet in front of the tarp roll and be at least as high as the top of the tarp roll.
     Each truckload shall be covered immediately after loading at the plant with a waterproof tarpaulin of such size
to protect the mixture from the weather. The tarpaulin shall be able to withstand normal handling and placement



Route 35 over Manasquan River Bridge Rehabilitation
Monmouth and Ocean Counties                                                                                  Page 75
temperatures of up to 400 ºF without endangering the structural integrity and serviceability of the fabric. The
tarpaulin shall also comply with one of the following:
            1. A heavyweight tarpaulin to completely drape the load. The heavyweight tarpaulin shall have a
                 minimum weight of 18 oz./yd2 and shall be a minimum of 2 feet wider and 4 feet longer than the
                 truck body. The heavyweight tarpaulin shall securely meet or overlap the top of the tailgate and be
                 securely held in place so as to prevent air from lifting the tarp during transport.
            2. A tarpaulin equipped with side and back flaps sufficient to lap down outside along the sides and rear
                 of the truck bed a minimum of 12 inches. The tarpaulin shall be secured by tie downs at a
                 maximum of 5 feet spacing along the sides and rear of the truck.
      The truck bodies shall be insulated or heated as necessary, to ensure delivery of the mixture at the specified
temperature. Any truck that: causes excessive segregation of the mixture by its suspension or other contributing
factors; leaks; causes delays; does not have an airfoil; or does not have an approved tarpaulin shall be removed from
the work until such conditions are corrected and the truck is presented for inspection to the Engineer. The Engineer
may require that all vehicles for transporting HMA mixture to be used by the Contractor be made available for
inspection at the plant laboratory prior to any shipments of materials.

404.07 Materials Transfer Vehicle (MTV)
        THE ENTIRE SUBSECTION IS CHANGED TO:

      The MTV shall independently deliver mixtures from the hauling equipment to the paving equipment. A paver
hopper insert with a minimum capacity of 14 tons shall be installed in the hopper of conventional paving equipment
when an MTV is used.
      As a minimum, the MTV shall have a high capacity truck unloading system which will receive mixtures from
the hauling equipment; a storage system in the MTV with a minimum capacity of 15 tons of mixture; and a
discharge conveyor, with the ability to swivel, to deliver the mixture to the paving spreader while allowing the MTV
to operate from an adjacent lane. In addition, the paving operation must contain a remixing system to continuously
blend the mixture prior to placement. The remixing may be done by the MTV or in the paver hopper.
      The use of an MTV is not required on this project and may not be utilized without the consent approval from
the Resident Engineer and NJDOT Structural Evaluation Unit. Such request, including the worst case axle
configuration and weights for fully loaded and empty MTV, and the project limits, shall be made in writing and
faxed to (609) 530-4444.
      A materials transfer vehicle (MTV) is optional for the construction of the pavement. The following
structure(s) may be traversed by a loaded MTV:
           STRUCTURE NO.: no structures in the project limits have been approved              NAME:

404.08 HMA Paver.
        THE FIFTH AND SIXTH PARAGRAPHS ARE CHANGED TO:

      When wedge joint construction is required, HMA pavers shall be equipped with a sloped plate to produce a
wedge edge at longitudinal joints. The sloped plate shall meet the requirements of Subsection 404.17.1.B and shall
be attached to the paver screed extension.

           THE SEVENTH PARAGRAPH IS DELETED.

404.17 Spreading and Finishing.
        SUBPART 1. “LONGITUDINAL JOINTS” IS CHANGED TO:

      1.   Longitudinal Joints. All longitudinal joints shall be cleaned free from dust and coated before placing
           the HMA with a uniform application of a polymerized joint adhesive selected from the Department‟s
           approved products list. The polymerized joint adhesive material shall be applied at a slow rate to ensure
           an even coating thickness of an ⅛ of an inch over the entire joint face. For echelon paving the
           longitudinal joints need not be treated with the polymerized joint adhesive.
                 The paving shall be done with the spring loaded end plates of the paver in the “down” position.
           When constructing the first lane, care shall be exercised in rolling so as not to displace the line and grade
           of the edges of the HMA. The longitudinal joint in one layer shall offset that in the layer immediately
           below by approximately 6 inches. The joint in the surface course shall be offset from the lane lines by 6


Route 35 over Manasquan River Bridge Rehabilitation
Monmouth and Ocean Counties                                                                                     Page 76
          inches except for the centerline of a roadway in which the joint shall fall between the double yellow
          traffic stripe.
                 Paving, compaction and the supply of material shall proceed at a uniform rate with minimal or no
          stopping.
                 If a single paver does not spread the HMA material the entire width of the roadway, two pavers shall
          be used provided that the rate of production of HMA material can be maintained. The second unit shall
          follow within 300 feet of the first unit in echelon, so as not to permit cooling of the longitudinal joint
          between the two lanes. If echelon paving is to be utilized, the distance that the screed and end gate of the
          trailing paver shall extend over the uncompacted HMA layer behind the first paver shall be 1 inch or less.
          The inside end gate of the second paver must be set at the same level as the bottom of the screed plate of
          the first paver. Raking of the joint is not needed.
                 A wedge joint shall be constructed when traffic is to be maintained and lift thickness is greater than
          21/4 inches. A vertical edge joint will be permitted for lift thickness 2 1/4 inches or less when traffic has to
          be maintained. For lift thickness greater than 2 1/4 inches and traffic is not required to be maintained, a
          vertical edge shall be utilized.
                 Longitudinal joints shall be constructed utilizing one of the following methods:
                 A. Vertical Edge Joint. The paver shall be positioned so that in spreading, the HMA material
                        uniformly overlaps the edge of the lane previously placed by 1 to 2 inches and shall be left
                        sufficiently high to allow for compaction. In general, the height of the uncompacted HMA
                        above the compacted HMA shall be 1/4 inch for each 1 inch of compacted mix. The
                        overlapped HMA material being placed in the abutting lane shall be tightly crowded (bumped)
                        over the joint. Any material in excess of the 1 to 2 inch overlap shall be pulled away from the
                        joint and removed instead of broadcasting onto the new mat. When compacted, the new mat at
                        the joint shall be even or slightly higher (Maximum 1/8 of an inch) than the previously placed
                        adjoining mat. If the newly compacted mat results in a depression at the joint of 1/8 of an inch
                        or more lower than the previously placed adjacent HMA layer, all paving operations shall
                        cease until corrective action is taken by the Contractor to prevent reoccurrence. For all
                        longitudinal joints that do not meet this requirement, the Contractor shall saw joints according
                        to dimension guidelines of Subsection 404.19 and seal with an approved sealer.
                 B. Wedge Joint. The sloped plate of the paver shall produce a wedge edge having a face slope of
                        3H:1V. The plate shall be so constructed as to accommodate compacted layer thickness of 2 to
                        4 inches. The bottom of the sloped plate shall be mounted 1 inch above the existing surface.
                        The plate shall be interchangeable on either side of the screed. The Contractor shall maintain
                        the wedge configuration under traffic conditions.
                              All loose material shall be removed from the traveled way before opening to traffic. The
                        rolling operation of the adjoining lane shall proceed as indicated in subpart A above, except
                        that care shall be taken to keep coarse aggregate away from the point where the wedge meets
                        the surface of the previously placed lane.
                 To assure a true line, the paver shall closely follow lines or markings placed along the joint for
          alignment purposes. All longitudinal joints shall be constructed parallel to the centerlines within a
          tolerance of plus or minus 3 inches for every 100 linear feet. If this tolerance is not met, the mat shall be
          cut back to conform. The width and depth of overlapped material shall be kept uniform at all times.
          Overlapped material shall be luted back, pushing the material off of the cold HMA and onto the hot HMA
          mat directly over the joint. In no case shall excess material be broadcast across the new layer. All excess
          material shall be removed.

404.18 Compaction.
        THE FOURTH PARAGRAPH IS CHANGED TO:

      When compacting the longitudinal edge of the first lanes placed using the wedge joint, the breakdown roller
shall not extend more than 2 inches over the top of the sloped face of the wedge joint. The Contractor shall submit a
plan, to ensure material at the wedge edge is properly seated and loose material is removed, for the Resident
Engineer‟s approval prior to the commencement of paving operations.

         THE FOLLOWING IS ADDED AFTER THE FOURTH PARAGRAPH:



Route 35 over Manasquan River Bridge Rehabilitation
Monmouth and Ocean Counties                                                                                       Page 77
     Care shall be taken to prevent lateral displacement of the unconfined edge during the compaction operation.
The edge of the drums of vibratory or static wheel rollers shall extend over the free edge of the mat by at least 6
inches. When compacting the joint, while paving the adjacent lane, the roller shall be placed on the newly placed
HMA and overlap the joint by a distance of approximately 6 inches.

          THE FIFTH PARAGRAPH IS CHANGED TO:

     Alternate trips of the roller shall be terminated in stops approximately 2 feet from the preceding stop. When
paving in echelon, rollers compacting the mat behind the lead paver shall maintain approximately 6 inches of
uncompacted material adjacent to the second paver. After mix from the second paver is placed against the
uncompacted edge of the mat from the first paver, the rollers shall compact the HMA on both sides of the joint.

          THE FOLLOWING IS ADDED AFTER THE ELEVENTH PARAGRAPH:

     After compaction has been completed, the pavement shall be free of all visible defects such as segregation,
bleeding, ruts, ridges, roller marks, cracking, tearing, raveling, open or segregated transverse or longitudinal joints,
depressed or raised areas around manholes or raised areas around inlets in the Traveled Way or any other defects, as
determined by the Resident Engineer. All visible defects shall be repaired to the satisfaction of the Resident
Engineer at no additional cost to the State.
     At the discretion of the Resident Engineer where it is deemed to be impractical to repair such visible defects, a
payment reduction due to nonconformance will be applied according to Subsection 404.26.

               2.   Surface Course Rideability Requirements.


     For this Project, the no payment reduction provisions shall govern.

404.25 Method of Measurement.
        THE FOLLOWING IS ADDED AFTER THE SEVENTH PARAGRAPH:

     Polymerized joint adhesive will be measured by the linear foot.

          THE EIGHTH AND NINTH PARAGRAPHS ARE CHANGED TO:

     Sealing of Cracks in HMA surface course will be measured by the linear foot.
     Sawing and sealing joints in HMA overlays will be measured by the linear foot. Sawing joints in base or
intermediate course will be measured by the linear foot.

          THE THIRTEENTH PARAGRAPH IS CHANGED TO:

     The monthly asphalt price index will be the average of quotations from suppliers serving the area in which the
Project is located. The asphalt price index for North and South of Route I-195 will be posted every month on the
Department‟s web site: www.state.nj.us/transportation/eng/CCEPM/PriceIndex.shtm.

          THE FOURTEENTH PARAGRAPH IS CHANGED TO:

     The basic asphalt price index will be the previous month‟s asphalt price index before receipt of bids.

          THE LAST PARAGRAPH IS DELETED:

404.26 Basis of Payment.
        THE NINTH AND THIRTEENTH PAY ITEMS IN THE FIRST PARAGRAPH ARE CHANGED TO:

           SAWING JOINTS IN INTERMEDIATE OR BASE COURSE                                              LINEAR FOOT
           CORE SAMPLES, HOT MIX ASPHALT                                                             UNIT




Route 35 over Manasquan River Bridge Rehabilitation
Monmouth and Ocean Counties                                                                                     Page 78
         THE FOLLOWING NEW PAY ITEM IS ADDED:

          Pay Item                                                                              Pay Unit
          POLYMERIZED JOINT ADHESIVE                                                            LINEAR FOOT

         THE FOLLOWING PAY ITEM IS DELETED:

          SEALING OF CRACKS AND JOINTS IN HOT MIX ASPHALT SURFACE COURSE                        LINEAR FOOT
         THE LAST PARAGRAPH IS CHANGED TO:

    Separate payment will not be made for MTV, test strips, and quality control for compaction, including
comparison cores, and nuclear density testing. All costs thereof shall be included in the prices bid for Hot Mix
Asphalt Surface Course ___, Hot Mix Asphalt Intermediate Course ___, and Hot Mix Asphalt Base Course ___.

                        SECTION 405 – CONCRETE SURFACE COURSE
405.08 Mixing Concrete.
             a. Mixing on the Project in Truck Mixers.
        THIS FIRST SENTENCE IN THE FIFTEENTH PARAGRAPH IS CHANGED TO:

               Each batch shall be mixed not less than 50 revolutions at the rate of rotation designated as mixing
          speed.

             b. Transit Mixing.
         THE NINTH PARAGRAPH IS CHANGED TO:

                Mixing shall begin immediately following the complete charging of the drum and continue for not
          less than 50 revolutions of the drum at the mixing speed recommended by the manufacturer of the truck
          mixer. Upon completion of at least the minimum number of mixing revolutions at the plant, the speed of
          the drum shall be reduced to the agitation speed recommended by the manufacturer.

         THE LAST PARAGRAPH IS CHANGED TO:

               Transit mix concrete will be rejected for any of the following reasons:
               a. If the concrete is not discharged within the specified time limit after loading all ingredients
                    into the drum;
               b. If the indicator on the counter shows that the instrument has been turned off or tampered with;
               c. If the non-resettable total revolution counter shows more than 300 revolutions;
               d. If water has been added while the truck mixer is en route to the Project. Two-way telephone or
                    radio communication between the site of the placement of concrete and the batching plant shall
                    be provided.

                SECTION 406 – SUPERPAVE HOT MIX ASPHALT COURSES
406.12 Air Voids Acceptance Plan.
        THE FIRST SENTENCE OF THE FOURTH PARAGRAPH IS CHANGED TO:

      Each mixture in a given lot shall be compacted so that the combined percentage of material below 2.0 percent
air voids or above 8.0 percent air voids shall be no more than ten percent.

         THE SUBPART (2) IN THE FIFTH PARAGRAPH IS CHANGED TO:

             c. Compute Quality Index.
          QL = ( X - 2.0)/S and QU = (8.0 - X )/S, where “Q” is the quality index.

406.13 Surface Course Rideability Requirements.


Route 35 over Manasquan River Bridge Rehabilitation
Monmouth and Ocean Counties                                                                                Page 79
     For this Project, the no payment reduction provisions shall govern.




406.14 Thickness Requirements.
        THE FIRST SENTENCE OF THE SECOND PARAGRAPH IS CHANGED TO:

     Conformance to thickness requirements will be judged from the full depth cores taken for surface course air
voids determinations evaluated according to Section 990, NJDOT B-4.

         THE THIRD PARAGRAPH IS CHANGED TO:
     Acceptance will be based on total thickness and thickness of the surface course.

         THE FOLLOWING IS ADDED TO THE END OF THIS SUBSECTION:

     Evaluation of the surface course will be performed solely to determine whether a remove-and-replace or an
overlay condition exists, not for pay adjustment. To be judged acceptable, no more than 10.0 percent of the surface
course shall be of deficient thickness as calculated by the procedure below.
     Acceptance for surface course thickness will be based on the percentage of the lot estimated to fall below the
specified thickness as follows:

               f.   Compute the sample mean ( X ) and the standard deviation (S) of the N Test Results (X1, X2,...,
                    XN):
                     X   = X1 + X2 + ... + XN
                                    N

                     S     = [(X1 - X )2 + (X2 - X )2 + ... + (XN - X )2 / (N-1)]½

          If for any reason the number of available test results is different from N = 5 for initial testing or N = 10
          for retesting, tables for the appropriate sample size are to be used for Step (3).

               g. Compute Quality Index.
          QL = ( X – Tall)/S, where “Q” is the quality index and Tall is the minimum allowable thickness from the
          following table:

                    HMA Designation
          Nominal Maximum Aggregate Size of Mix            Minimum Allowable Compacted Lift Thickness (Tall)
                       9.5 MM                                               1.0 Inch
                      12.5 MM                                               1.25 Inches
                        19 MM                                               2.0 Inches

     (3) Compute Percent Defective.
        Using Table 914-5 for the appropriate sample size, determine the percentage of defective material (PD)
         falling below the allowable thickness associated with QL (lower limit).

     (4) Retest.
         If the initial series of N = 5 tests produces a percent defective value of PD  10, the Contractor may elect
         to take an additional set of N = 5 drilled cores at new random locations, as designated by the Engineer.
         The additional cores must be taken within 10 Working Days of the receipt of the initial core results. If
         the additional cores are not taken within the 10 Working Days, the initial core results (N = 5) will be used




Route 35 over Manasquan River Bridge Rehabilitation
Monmouth and Ocean Counties                                                                                   Page 80
          to determine acceptance. When additional cores are taken, Steps 1, 2, and 3 will be repeated using the
          combined data set of N = 10 test values to obtain the total PD estimate using Table 914-5.

               h. Removal and Replacement.
          If the surface course fails to meet the acceptance requirement the Department will require removal and
          replacement of the lot, or milling and overlaying, at the Contractor‟s expense. When either replacement
          or milling and overlaying are done, the new courses are subject to the same requirements as the initial
          construction.

406.15 Combined Pay Adjustment.
        THE ENTIRE SUBSECTION IS DELETED AND IS INTENTIONALLY LEFT BLANK:

406. 19 Basis of Payment.
         THE SECOND PARAGRAPH IS CHANGED TO:

     Pay Adjustments for air voids, rideablity, and thickness will be made according to Subsections 406.12, 406.13,
and 406.14, respectively.

         THE LAST PARAGRAPH IS CHANGED TO:

     Separate payment will not be made for MTV, test strips, and quality control for compaction, including
comparison cores, Separate payment will not be made for MTV, test strips, and quality control for compaction,
including comparison cores, and nuclear density testing. All costs thereof shall be included in the prices bid for
Superpave Hot Mix Asphalt __ __ __ Surface Course, Superpave Hot Mix Asphalt __ __ __ Intermediate Course,
and Superpave Hot Mix Asphalt __ __ __ Base Course.




Route 35 over Manasquan River Bridge Rehabilitation
Monmouth and Ocean Counties                                                                                 Page 81
                           DIVISION 500 – BRIDGES AND STRUCTURES
                                     SECTION 501 – CONCRETE STRUCTURES
501.01 Description.
        THE FOLLOWING IS ADDED AFTER THE FIRST PARAGRAPH:

      This work shall also consist of the construction of Portland cement concrete deck slabs, parapets and sidewalks
with the use of High Performance Concrete (HPC).

             THE SECOND THROUGH SIX PARAGRAPHS ARE DELETED.

501.02 Materials.
        THE FOLLOWING IS ADDED TO THE FIRST PARAGRAPHS MATERIAL LIST
         High Performance Concrete ................................................................................................................ 914.02

             THE FOLLOWING IS ADDED AFTER THE FIRST PARAGRAPH:

     The epoxy resin system that is to be used for the filling of concrete cracks by pressure injection shall be a two
component 100 percent solid moisture insensitive high-modulus high-strength epoxy resin adhesive. The following
products, or approved equal, may be used:
     1. Sikadur Hi-Mod LV, manufactured by Sika Corporation.
     2. Duralcrete, as manufactured by Dural International Corporation.
     3. Metaband HMLV, as manufactured by American Metaseal Company.
     4. Thermal-Chem Injection Resin Product No. 2, as manufactured by Thermal-Chem, Inc.
     5. Concressive 1380, as manufactured by Adhesive Engineering Co. of San Carlos, California.

             THE FOLLOWING IS ADDED:

      In the production of HPC, in order to achieve the desired resistance to chloride penetration, an appropriate
pozzalonic or other cementitious material; such as, silica fume, fly ash or ground granulated blast furnace slag shall
be provided in the mix design.
      Silica fume shall not be used as a sole material to achieve the desired resistance to chlorides. When used, silica
fume‟s content shall be limited to a maximum of 5 percent of the total cement content and a proportion of fly ash or
ground granulated blast furnace slag shall be included to obtain the resistance specified in 914.02 to chloride
penetration. The fly ash and ground granulated blast furnace slag limitations specified in 914.02 may be increased
in the fabrication of HPC.
      The maximum water cement ratio shall be maintained at 0.40. In the fabrication of HPC, the cement content
should not be increased for the purpose of achieving high early strength.

             THE FOURTH THROUGH SIX PARAGRAPHS ARE DELETED.

501.05 Working Drawings.
        THE SECOND, THIRD AND FOURTH ARAGRAPHS ARE DELETED.

501.07 Forms.
     7. Permanent Steel Bridge Deck Forms.
        THE FIRST SENTENCE OF THE SECOND PARAGRAPH IS CHANGED TO:

                     The use of permanent steel bridge deck forms shall conform to the following:

                 a. Design.
             THE SEVENTH PARAGRAPH IS CHANGED TO:




Route 35 over Manasquan River Bridge Rehabilitation
Monmouth and Ocean Counties                                                                                                                     Page 82
                     The spacing (pitch) of the ribs (flutes) shall match the spacing of the bottom main
               reinforcement steel, except on curved girder structures and in the areas of bridge decks with a flared
               rebar pattern. In these locations, the pitch of the flutes may be independent of the bottom main
               reinforcement spacing, and the forms may be dropped as necessary to achieve the minimum 1 inch
               concrete cover between the main reinforcement steel and the form. When the forms are dropped,
               additional dead load shall be accounted for in the design. Approval from the Engineer to drop the
               forms shall be obtained before construction of the deck begins.

             b. Construction.
         THE FOLLOWING IS ADDED AT THE END OF THE SECOND PARAGRAPH:

              Joints between the forms should be lapped in the direction of concrete placement.
501.11 Limitations of Placing.
        THE SECOND SENTENCE OF THE FIRST PARAGRAPH IS CHANGED TO:

In no case, during mixing and placement, shall the temperature of the concrete be less than 60 or more than 90
degrees F.

501.12 Placing Concrete.
     5. Deck Slabs.
        THE FOLLOWING IS ADDED AFTER THE FIRST PARAGRAPH:

              a. General Provisions. The following provisions shall be adhered to in all concrete deck slab
                 construction.
         THE 21 ST PARAGRAPH IS CHANGED TO:

                      When the concrete placing within any complete unit (i.e., for trusses, arches, continuous or
               cantilevered unit) is to be divided, the placing shall be made and finished in the numbered sequence
               shown, beginning with the lowest number. All sections having the same number shall be placed
               before sections of higher number. The sequence of placing for sections having the same number
               shall be optional. No deck section shall be placed until all previously placed concrete within the
               complete unit has cured for 72 hours. This requirement may be waived if the succeeding section(s)
               can be completed within four hours after the start of the initial placement of section(s) of any given
               unit for that day. A written request to waive this requirement shall be submitted to the Engineer for
               approval. This requirement may not be waived for deck slabs on prestressed concrete beams that are
               continuous for live load. The numbered sequence shown on the Plans shall be adhered to

         THE FOLLOWING IS ADDED:

               b.   High Performance Concrete (HPC) for Deck Slabs, Sidewalks, and Concrete Base for
                    Railings. HPC is defined as concrete that meets special performance and uniformity
                    requirements that cannot always be obtained by using conventional ingredients, normal mixing
                    procedures and typical curing practices. The furnishing of HPC shall conform to the
                    requirements of 914.02.
                     (1) The Contractor is advised that curing of the HPC deck slab shall be performed in
                          accordance with the provisions of Subsection 501.17. Upon completion of the 14 day
                          wet curing period, the HPC deck slab shall be further cured according to the provisions of
                          Subsection 405.14, Subpart 1.
                    (2) The finishing machine equipment shall be set up so that the HPC is placed only 6 to 8
                          feet ahead of the machine.

     15. Pumped Concrete.
         THE FOLLOWING IS ADDED:

               As per the provisions of 914.04, fresh mixed concrete shall be sampled according to the
          requirements of AASHTO T 141. Samples shall be taken at the discharge of the concrete pump. If the


Route 35 over Manasquan River Bridge Rehabilitation
Monmouth and Ocean Counties                                                                                  Page 83
         Engineer believes that this is not a feasible, the pump shall be calibrated to calculate slump and air
         entrainment losses. These losses shall be deducted from the values as sampled from the concrete truck.

    17. Slip-form Method of Parapet Construction.

    18. Corrosion Inhibitor Admixture.

    19. Pressure Injection.

    20. Pressure Injection.

THE FOLLOWING IS ADDED:

    21. Repair of Concrete. Repairs of concrete are classified according to the following types:
        a. Type D Repairs. Type D repairs shall consist of removing all loose and disintegrated concrete and
        existing repair materials to expose sound concrete and extending the removal into the sound concrete for
        a depth of not less than 1/4 inch and not more than 1 inch and placing of Class B concrete to the level of
        the adjacent existing concrete surface.

         b. Type E Repairs. Type E repairs shall consist of removing all deteriorated concrete and existing
         repair materials to a minimum depth of 1 inch below the existing reinforcing bars to sound concrete and
         extending the removal into the sound concrete for a depth of not less than 1/4 inch and not more than 1
         inch and placing of Class B concrete to the level of the existing concrete surface.

    22. Repairs of concrete shall conform to the following:
        a. Preparation. The limits of all repairs shall be as determined by the engineer in a survey prior to
        construction. The plan quantities may be changed, increased, or decreased due to this final survey or as
        directed by the engineer during the construction.

              b. Construction Procedures.
               Repair areas shall be saw cut to a 3/4 inch depth in a rectangular shape prior to the removal of
         deteriorated concrete in the designated areas.
               Temporary shielding shall be provided during removal and repair work (including but not limited to
         Type D and Type E substructure repairs) to be performed above the waterway to contain debris falling
         from the Contractor‟s operations.
               All loose and disintegrated concrete and existing repair materials shall be removed from the areas to
         be repaired in such a manner and to such an extent as to expose sound concrete. Sound concrete (beneath
         the disintegrated concrete) shall be removed for a depth of not less than 1/4 inch and not more than 1
         inch, and the remainder of the area and all exposed reinforcement shall be cleaned and roughened by
         sandblasting. The work shall be done in such a manner as not to damage the concrete that is to remain.
               Only pneumatic or hand tools shall be used in the removal of the disintegrated concrete and in
         preparing and shaping the areas to be repaired. The size of the hammers shall not exceed 30 pounds.
               Hand chipping methods shall be used to remove concrete adjacent to exposed reinforcing steel.
         Care shall be taken so as not to damage or debond the reinforcement steel, or shatter the concrete beyond
         the area to be repaired.
               For Type D repair, where the bond between existing concrete and reinforcement steel has been
         destroyed, or where more than half the diameter of the steel is exposed, the concrete adjacent to the bar
         shall be removed to a depth in accordance with a Type E repair. A minimum of 1 inch clearance around
         the bar will be required, except where adjacent bar mats make this impractical.
               For Type E repair all corroded reinforcing bars shall be cleaned by sandblasting, water blasting, or
         wire brushing. Where the existing reinforcing bars are replaced due to section loss (25 percent or more
         loss to the original cross-sectional area) or damage, or where they are connected with new reinforcing
         bars, the splicing methods described in Subsection 501.08 shall be used.
               Wherever necessary, forms shall be used to enable placement of concrete or quick-setting patch
         materials, and to match the repaired surface with the existing concrete surface.



Route 35 over Manasquan River Bridge Rehabilitation
Monmouth and Ocean Counties                                                                                 Page 84
                   If underwater patch materials are used for repairs, all operations shall conform to the manufacturer‟s
             recommendations.
                   Two copies of the manufacturer‟s technical data sheets shall be submitted at least 10 working days
             prior to the work.

501.15 Deck Slab Surface Texture Finish.
        THE FIRST PARAGRAPH AND SUBPART 1 ARE CHANGED TO:

     The surface of the deck slab shall be finished according to Subsection 405.13 except that Subpart G shall not
apply. The time between strike-off and application of deck slab surface texture finish in any location shall not
exceed one hour. All concrete bridge deck slabs shall be textured with a stiff, coarse broom and shall be saw cut
groove finished as follows:
           1.          Broom Finish. Immediately after finishing has been completed, the surface shall be given a
           texture with an approved stiff, coarse broom.
                The broom shall be operated in a longitudinal or transverse direction. Once begun, the direction of
           texturing shall not be changed. Transverse texturing shall be done from a work bridge.
                The broom finish shall be applied so as to prevent ridges or gouges from forming in the concrete
           surface. The broom shall be weighted and the contact area changed as required to produce a uniform
           texture. The broom shall be cleaned periodically to remove all hardened concrete particles. Texture
           resulting from the broom shall stop within 1 foot of curbs.

             3.     Saw Cut Grooved Surface.
            THE SECOND PARAGRAPH IS DELETED.

THE THIRD PARAGRAPH OF SUBPART 3 IS CHANGED TO THE FOLLOWING:
        Grooves shall be cut perpendicular or radial to the centerline of the traveled way. Radial grooving shall
        be conducted in partial-width passes. Each pass shall be limited to one lane width. Adjustment along the
        longitudinal axis of the bridge deck shall be made at no less than 12-foot intervals, yielding a uniformly
        grooved surface finish. Grooves shall be rectangular in shape and shall conform to the following
        dimensions:
                  Approach Spans – Width .................................................................................... 0.10 to 0.15 inch
                  Approach Spans – Depth .......................................................................................... ¼ to 3/8 inch



501.16 Concrete Deck Surface Requirements.
         B. Control Testing.
        THIS SUBPART IS CHANGED

            Deck slab surfaces shall be checked during placement to correct surface irregularities while the concrete
      is in workable condition.
            Such control testing shall be performed as follows:
            1.              After strike-off, the deck surface shall be checked with an aluminum straightedge having
                a minimum length of 10 feet, as provided by the Contractor. The Resident Engineer shall determine
                the specific conduct of the control testing, including the number and location of Straightedge checks.
                Surface variations shall be corrected before the concrete sets. Major deviations shall be corrected by
                the finishing machine or other strike-off, while minor deviations may be corrected by a straightedge
                or float. The addition of water to the surface of the concrete to assist in finishing operations will not
                be permitted.

            THE FIRST PARAGRAPH IN SUBPART C IS DELETED AND CHANGED TO:

      C.     Acceptance Testing. Conformance to the surface tolerance for concrete deck slabs will be determined in
             lots, each being equal to the length of deck in one span or continuous span. The longitudinal limits of the
             lot will be bounded by the expansion joints or fixed structural deck joints. The full length of the lot will
             be tested through any construction joints within the deck, whether these joints are required for the


Route 35 over Manasquan River Bridge Rehabilitation
Monmouth and Ocean Counties                                                                                                             Page 85
          placement sequence or caused by the Contractor‟s operations. Such lot quantity will be calculated using
          the specified nominal deck thickness and excludes the quantity of concrete placed in haunches, end dams,
          and diaphragms. For the second course of the two-course deck slab construction, such lot quantity will be
          calculated using the specified nominal thickness of the concrete overlay protective system.

501.17 Curing and Protecting Concrete.
             c. Curing Concrete Under Normal Conditions.
        THIS SUBPART IS CHANGED TO:

                Concrete decks, curbs, and tops of sidewalks for one-course deck slab construction shall be cured
          according to Subheading 4 of Subsection 405.14 with the exception that the minimum wet cure period
          shall not be less than fourteen calendar days. The burlap shall be kept continuously wet throughout this
          curing period. According to the provisions of Subheading 3 of Subsection 405.14, the wet burlap shall be
          covered with white polyethylene sheeting for the fourteen-day duration. The polyethylene sheeting shall
          be lapped at the joints and secured to the deck as tightly as possible

               The time between final finishing and application of the wet burlap shall not exceed 20 minutes in
          any location within the placement area.

               Other concrete structures and concrete surfaces to receive an epoxy coating, rubbed finish or to be
          covered with another material shall be cured according to Subheadings 2, 3, 4, and 5 of the sixth
          paragraph of Subsection 405.14.

501.25 Method of Measurement.
        THE EIGHTH PARAGRAPH IS DELETED.

THE FOLLOWING IS ADDED:
     Concrete repairs of the various types will be measured by the square foot along the face of the finished surface.
For Type D and E repairs where the same spall is located on two adjacent intersecting faces, the area of repair will
be measured for payment only on the face that has the largest area, and no payment will be made for the other face.

              d. Basis of Payment.
          THE 18TH 19TH PAY ITEM IS CHANGED TO:

          Pay Item                                                                                  Pay Unit
          SAWCUT GROOVED DECK SURFACE                                                               SQUARE FOOT

          THE FOLLOWING PAY ITEMS ARE ADDED:

          CONCRETE IN SUPERSTRUCTURE, DECK SLABS, HPC                                               CUBIC YARD
          CONCRETE IN SUPERSTRUCTURE, SIDEWALKS, HPC                                                CUBIC YARD
          CONCRETE IN SUPERSTRUCTURE, PARAPETS, HPC                                                 LINEAR FOOT
          CONCRETE REPAIRS, TYPE D                                                                  SQUARE FOOT
          CONCRETE REPAIRS, TYPE E                                                                  SQUARE FOOT


          THE 20TH PAY ITEM “REINFORCED CONCRETE BOX CULVERT, PRECAST” IS DELETED.

          THE FOLLOWING IS ADDED:

      In the construction of deck joint systems, no separate payment will be made for supplying and installation of
steel armoring that is to be placed on the roadway side of the header. Such cost shall be included in the bid price for
the Pay Item “Concrete in Substructures, Abutment Walls”.
      The Pay Item “Concrete in Superstructure, Sidewalks, HPC” will include payment for use of HPC for
sidewalks and concrete bridge railing supports.




Route 35 over Manasquan River Bridge Rehabilitation
Monmouth and Ocean Counties                                                                                    Page 86
      The quantities for Concrete Repairs, Type D and Type E are estimated and based on a limited visual field
inspection, and may differ in the field than estimated herein. Additional quantities to these items or a reduction to
these items may occur, if and where directed by the engineer. The price bid for these items shall include all
materials and labor necessary to complete the work.
      At concrete repair areas outlined as either Type D or Type E on the construction plans or at locations
designated, final payment for each outlined area will be made for only one of the repair types determined by the
final depth as measured in the field and in accordance with the construction details regardless of original designation
or preparatory work for another repair type.
      No separate payment will be made for the reinforcement steel, reinforcement steel couplers, coring and
grouting, temporary shielding and forms. The cost thereof will be included under the appropriate concrete repair
pay item.
      No separate payment will be made for saw cutting, removal of concrete to sound concrete as necessary for
repair, any necessary reinforcement steel to supplement or replace existing deteriorated reinforcement steel, drilling
and epoxy grouting holes for new reinforcement, concrete or quick-setting patch materials for repair, or methods to
protect the existing waterway from falling debris, materials, or equipment, the cost thereof shall be included in
appropriate concrete repair pay item.
          THE SUBSECTION NUMBER IS CHANGED:

                                 SECTION 503 – STEEL STRUCTURES
503.01 Description.
        THE FIRST PARAGRAPH IS CHANGED TO:


      This work shall consist of the furnishing, fabrication, erection, painting, and metalizing of bridges, structures,
furnishing of Structural Bearings and associated elements that include use of structural steel and miscellaneous
metals.

         THE FOLLOWING IS ADDED:

      The rehabilitation of Structure #1506-152, Route 35 over the Manasquan River Bridge will include the
following structural steel work as indicated on the plans:
      Furnishing, fabrication, erection, and painting of repair plates, structural shapes, repair angles in the approach
span end floorbeams, replacing lateral bracing gusset plates, strengthening struts, strengthening transverse box
member, shimming live load bearings, replacing pinion bearing stiffeners, repairing anchor span girder stiffeners,
replacement of all stringers in the bascule span (Span 6 from the North) and addition of new stringers in all the
approach and flanking spans (Spans 1 to 5 and 7 to 9) including the spans over the counterweight, installation of
shear studs on all existing stringers and floorbeams and new stringers or channel sections for shear transfer (on
interior floorbeams), installation of steel rails and steel supports at deck joints and resetting the rocker bearings at
Piers 1S and 2S, modification of existing structural steel supports to the existing water and sewer lines on the east
side in Spans 7, 8, and 9 for reuse of existing metallic hood, steel supports for lighting standard at the southeast
wingwall, and new platform framing for barrier gates and warning gates, as identified on the plans.
      Removal of existing deteriorated rivets and installation of high strength bolts, in the bascule and approach
spans.
      Temporary supports under the new platforms for barrier gates and warning gates.
      Girder Jacking (temporary jacking structures for rocker bearing resetting, at locations as identified on the
plans).
      Installation of bascule span and approach span railing.
      Installation of steel median in the bascule span.
      Installation of steel grid deck in bascule span.

      This work shall be performed within specific construction stages as shown on the Contract Plans. This work
shall include, drilling of holes, bolting, welding, forms, structural shapes, plates or material necessary to complete
the work as shown on the Contract Plans and specified herein. This work shall also include, but not limited to, shear
connectors, lightweight concrete fill in stringer lines as specified in Section 523, survey of the existing bascule span
and miscellaneous attachments to the stringers.



Route 35 over Manasquan River Bridge Rehabilitation
Monmouth and Ocean Counties                                                                                     Page 87
      The bascule span shall be maintained in an operable condition during construction. The span balance shall be
maintained during the grid deck replacement and shall be coordinated with Section 527.
      The work shall be performed in accordance with the current AASHTO‟s LRFD Bridge Design Specifications
and subsequent Interim Specifications; and as modified by the Contract documents.
      This work shall be performed within specific stages in accordance to the Contract documents. The Contractor
shall prepare a detailed Working Schedule for the removal and installation of the grid decks. The Schedule shall
include all anticipated tasks and the duration required for the specific tasks for this work. The Schedule shall be
detailed with the labor crew sizes, equipment requirements, and materials necessary to complete the work within
scheduled time period. The Schedule shall be coordinated with the working drawings. The Contractor shall monitor
the proposed schedule during the actual work and adjust the future work activities to complete the work within the
time constraints.
      This work shall also consist of installing of new steel grid flooring, and structural steel rolled beams, plates and
shapes as detailed on the plans, including temporary supports designed and detailed for loads as shown in the plans,
and temporary railing systems around the platforms, for supports for the new barrier gates and warning gates at
locations as indicated on the plans. This work shall be performed in Pre- Stage I of the construction stages, as
shown on the Contract Plans. This work shall include, drilling of holes, bolting, welding, forms, concrete fill within
the grating under the barrier gates and warning gates housing for pedestals, at locations within the platform, plates or
material necessary to complete the work as shown on the Contract Plans and specified herein.
      Working drawings shall be prepared by the Contractor for the Engineer‟s review and approval. The working
drawings shall provide complete details and procedures to complete the assembly and the installation of the grid
deck and stringers on the bascule span. Details and procedures shall include, but not be limited to, anticipated work
crew and equipment, temporary devices, equipment placement and safety platforms. The working drawings shall be
coordinated with the detailed working schedule.


503.02 Materials.

     A. Materials
        THE FOLLOWING IS ADDED:

     Vertical sheet metal form pans installed in the grid prior to galvanizing shall conform to the latest specification
for ASTM A1008 or A1011.

     Use galvanized steel, sheet metal conforming to ASTM A653 for the forms.

THE FOLLOWING IS ADDED:

     F. Steel Grid Flooring for Bascule Span Deck
           Steel grid flooring shall conform to AASHTO Standard Specifications for Highway Bridges, Division II,
     Section 12 except as modified by these Supplemental Specifications. The grid flooring shall conform to the
     requirements of ASTM A709 Grade 50. The steel grid flooring shall consist of main rolled bars, secondary
     cross bars and supplemental bars. The main bar shall be 5-3/16 inch deep and spaced at 4 inch centers between
     main bars. The secondary cross bars shall intersect and be perpendicular to the main bars, spaced at 4 inch
     centers between secondary cross bars. A single supplemental bar shall be parallel and evenly spaced between
     the main bars. Serrations shall be provided on the tops of the bars approximately 3/16 inch deep x 3/8 inch
     wide, spaced randomly. The open grid deck shall have edge bars as detailed on the Contract Plans. A 20
     gauge pan shall be provided as the form for the concrete fill at the stringer lines. The steel weight of this grid
     deck shall be approximately 24 pounds per square foot.
           The individual supplemental bars, cross bars and main bars of grid deck panels shall be welded at all
     intersections. The size and type of welds shall be as shown on the Contract Plans. Welding shall conform to
     the requirements of ANSI/AASHTO/AWS Bridge Welding Code D1.5 and subsequent AASHTO Interim
     Specifications. A welding procedure specification shall be submitted for all welds.
           Steel grid deck shall be painted in accordance with Section 503.15 of the Standard Specifications except
     as modified herein. A complete coating system of an inorganic zinc-rich primer, a high-build epoxy
     intermediate coat, and a urethane finish coat shall be selected from one of the approved coating systems under



Route 35 over Manasquan River Bridge Rehabilitation
Monmouth and Ocean Counties                                                                                       Page 88
    Section 912 of the Standard Specifications. Surfaces of steel that will be in contact with concrete shall be
    given a prime coat of zinc-rich primer only.
          Automatic end-welded studs shall be used as shear connectors as shown on the Contract Plans. They
    shall conform to Section 7 of the ANSI/AASHTO/AWS D1.5 Bridge Welding Code.

          Automatic end-welded studs shall be used as shear connectors as shown on the Contract Plans. They
    shall conform to Section 7 of the ANSI/AASHTO/AWS D1.5 Bridge Welding Code.
          Unless otherwise modified by the Supplemental Specifications, Portland cement concrete, mortar, and
    grout for bascule span steel grating shall conform to Section 914 of the Standard Specifications. Other
    materials shall conform to the following Subsections of the Standard Specifications:
          Air-Entraining Admixtures ....................................................................................................905.01
          Corrosion Inhibitor Admixtures ............................................................................................ 905.02
          Chemical Admixtures ............................................................................................................ 905.02
          Curing Materials .................................................................................................................... 905.03
          Reinforcement Steel for Structures ........................................................................................ 915.01
          Bolts and Bolting Materials ...................................................................................................917.01
          Permanent Steel Bridge Deck Forms ..................................................................................... 917.04
          Structural Steel ...................................................................................................................... 917.10
          Cement for the high early strength lightweight concrete shall be rapid set cement manufactured by CTS
    Manufacturing Company, Cypress, CA or approved equal. Materials shall be of recent manufacture (within
    one year) and uniform in composition and consistency.
          Lightweight coarse aggregate shall comply with the requirements of the Standard Specifications
    Subsection 901.12, Subpart (E) except as modified herein. Aggregate shall be in the 3/8” to 3/32” size
    designation in Table 1 of ASTM C330. A durability report shall be available showing that concrete made from
    the aggregate has a minimum durability factor of 90% when tested in accordance with the latest edition of
    ASTM C33. Natural or manufactured sand shall conform to ASTM C33.
          In the event that the scheduled concrete placement date may produce ambient conditions where it is
    desirable to control the concrete reactionary properties, or control of the concrete reactionary properties is
    otherwise warranted, the Contractor may add chemical admixtures, subject to the approval of the Engineer, as
    an integral part of the design mix. The use of the chemical admixtures shall conform to the requirements of
    Subsection 905.02 of the Standard Specifications. Additionally, chemical admixtures shall be used according
    to the manufacturer‟s product specifications. According to the requirements of the Standard Specifications
    Subpart B of Subsection 914.02, to facilitate verification of the concrete mix, mix designs that incorporate the
    chemical admixture shall be submitted for approval. The admixture quantity used shall be a dosage rate
    according to the manufacturer‟s product specificationsMaterials and construction operations not specifically
    covered in the Plans and in these Specifications shall be in accordance with Division II in the current
    AASHTO Standard Specifications for Highway Bridges.

    G. Steel Grid Flooring for Barrier and Warning Gate Supports.
          Steel grid flooring shall conform to AASHTO Standard Specifications for Highway Bridges, Division II,
    Section 12 except as modified by these Supplemental Specifications. The grid flooring shall conform to the
    requirements of ASTM A709 Grade 36. The steel grid flooring shall consist of main bearing bars, and
    secondary cross rods. The main bearing bars shall be 2-¼ inch deep by ¼ inch thick and spaced at 2-3/8 inch
    centers between the main bars. The secondary cross rods shall intersect and be perpendicular to the main bars,
    spaced at 2 inch centers between the secondary cross rods. Serrations shall be provided on top of the bars
    approximately 3/16 inch deep x 3/8 inch wide, spaced per Manufacturer‟s specifications. The open grid deck
    shall have edge bars as detailed on the Contract Plans. A 20 gauge pan shall be provided as the form for the
    concrete fill within limits as indicated on the contract plans. The steel weight of this grid deck shall be
    approximately 12 pounds per square foot. The section modulus per linear of width for grid deck shall be a
    minimum of 1.07 in3.
          The individual cross rods and main bearing bars of grid deck panels shall be welded at all intersections.
    The size and type of welds shall be as shown on the Working Drawings. Welding shall conform to the
    requirements of ANSI/AASHTO/AWS Bridge Welding Code D1.5 and subsequent AASHTO Interim
    Specifications.
       Steel grid deck shall be painted in accordance with Section 503.15 of the Standard Specifications except as
    modified herein. A complete coating system of an inorganic zinc-rich primer, a high-build epoxy intermediate


Route 35 over Manasquan River Bridge Rehabilitation
Monmouth and Ocean Counties                                                                                                                   Page 89
    coat, and a urethane finish coat shall be selected from one of the approved coating systems under Section 912
    of the Standard Specifications. Surfaces of steel that will be in contact with concrete shall be given a prime
    coat of zinc-rich primer only.
    Materials and construction operations not specifically covered in the Plans and in these Specifications shall be
    in accordance with Division II in the current AASHTO Standard Specifications for Highway Bridges.
    Inspection and testing shall conform to Section 6 of the ANSI/AASHTO/AWS D1.5 Bridge Welding Code as
    modified by Subsection 503.03 of the Standard Specifications.

503.03 Inspection and Testing.
         THE SUBPART 1 IS CHANGED TO:

    1.    Steel bridge bearings are considered to be main load carrying members.

         THE SUBPART 2 A IS CHANGED TO:

    2.        a.   Simple Steel Bridge Structures (SBr): Includes highway sign support structures, parts for bridges
                   (such as cross frames), unspliced rolled steel bridges, steel bridge bearings and HLMR bearing
                   assemblies.

THE SUBPART 4 c IS CHANGED TO:

    4.        c.   Fracture Control Plan. Steel bridge members or member components designated as Fracture
                   Critical Members (FCM‟s) shall conform to the provisions of the most current edition of the
                   AASHTO/AWS D1.5 Bridge Welding Code, Section 12 “AASHTO/AWS Fracture Control Plan
                   (FCP) for Non-Redundant Members”.

503.04 Working Drawings.

         THE FOLLOWING SUBSECTIONS ARE ADDED:

         D.        Girder Jacking for resetting rocker bearings.
                   Girder Jacking – The work associated with this pay item consists of providing temporary supports
                   for jacking the bridge spans, as designated on the plans, to remove the existing bearings and reset
                   them to the correct position, consistent with the ambient temperatures. Loads and design criteria for
                   temporary supports are shown on the plans. Temporary jacking support structures and design
                   calculations/details and procedures shall be submitted for review and approval of the Engineer, prior
                   to the start of construction for this item.

         E.        Temporary Supports, Barrier Gate, and Warning Gate Platforms. Temporary support details and
                   design calculations/details and procedures shall be submitted for review and approval prior to start
                   of construction for this item. Contractor‟s calculations shall clearly identify the Dead Loading and
                   Live Loading that the temporary system is being designed for, including any small construction
                   loads that may be temporarily imposed on the existing sidewalk, with prior approval of the
                   Engineer. Due regard to temporary and permanent loads as shown on the plans shall be considered
                   and appropriate measures to ensure the same are incorporated into temporary support design.

503.07 Shipping, Handling, and Erection.
         B. Erection.
        THE FOLLOWING IS ADDED TO THE FIRST LISTED ITEM 2.:

               The written plan shall be signed by a Professional Engineer licensed in the State of New Jersey.
          The Contractor‟s Professional Engineer and the State‟s Design Engineer shall attend the meeting.

         THE FOLLOWING IS ADDED TO THE FIRST LIST:




Route 35 over Manasquan River Bridge Rehabilitation
Monmouth and Ocean Counties                                                                                     Page 90
               4.   The Contractor‟s Professional Engineer shall inspect each phase of girder installation prior to
                    permitting vehicular or pedestrian traffic on or below the bridge.

503.08 Setting Shoes and Bearings.

        C. Setting Bearings:
THE ENTIRE SECTION IS DELETED AND REPLACED WITH THE FOLLOWING:

      Where indicated on the plans at Piers 1S and 2S, all the existing rocker bearings shall be reset to be
theoretically vertical at 70 degrees Fahrenheit, by removing the pins, rocker and masonry plates (the sole plate or top
casting is riveted to the girder bottom flange), relocating the masonry plate to it‟s new, corrected position, as well as
the existing rocker to it‟s new correct position to obtain a vertical alignment at 70 degrees.
      Within one month of award of the contract, the Contractor shall field measure the existing bearings at Piers 1S
and 2S, for their existing potion, at the ambient temperature. The extent of leaning of the rockers, as measured from
the vertical, the direction of leaning (whether contracted or expanded) and the temperature adjacent to each rocker,
weather conditions, time and date of measurements shall be recorded and submitted to the Engineer. For any
installation temperature other than 70 degrees, the position of the rockers shall be corrected to predict the vertical
position at 70 degrees, considering superstructure expansion/contraction rates for ambient temperatures. A sketch
shall be shown on the erection drawings prepared by the Contractor indicating proper inclination for setting the
bearings at various temperatures, at 10 degree intervals, from –30 degrees Fahrenheit to 110 degrees Fahrenheit.
      The Contract Plans require verification of the actual position for the bearings to be reset. The Contractor shall
compare predicted offset at 70 degrees from his measurement with the contract plan data for correlation of offsets to
be used for bearing alignment correction.
      All calculations and data shall be submitted to the Engineer for approval. The Contractor shall clearly mark on
his working drawings, the distance from the edge of the pier to the centerline of the relocated masonry plate and
positions of new anchor bolt sleeves.
      During construction, the existing masonry plates, rockers, pins, and sole plates (if directed by the Engineer)
shall be removed without damaging the girder flanges or any of the bearing components, end floorbeams,
connection plates, bracing members, or their connections. Existing bearings may be removed by following the
suggested procedure on the plans. If the Contractor suggests an alternative method, subject to all the limitations and
conditions stipulated on the plans, detailed calculations, removal procedures and drawings, all sealed and signed by
a NJ Licensed Professional Engineer , shall be submitted for the engineers approval before nay changes may be
accepted.
      The Contractor shall be responsible for ALL costs involved in bearing removal and resetting, whether he
follows the suggested resetting procedures or his approved alternate, irrespective of any and all work steps required
to complete the resetting, to the Engineer‟s approval.
      Suggested procedure, which is based on jacking when the deck is off within the Staged construction:
1) Jack the girder (outside ones only for Construction Stage II or III) and both interior girders (for Construction
     Stage I). Jack the two interior girders simultaneously. Secure the structure as indicated on the plans. Install
     structural grade timber shoring, in addition to the jacks. Details of timber shoring to be included in the working
     drawings for approval of the Engineer.
2) Remove the pier concrete to the limits shown on the Jacking Plans.
3) Cut the existing anchor bolts within the exposed portion of the concrete.
4) Temporarily secure the rocker assembly to the girder or otherwise support off of the pier top (in either case,
     working drawings shall provide method of temporary support), remove the masonry plate, remove the rocker
     assembly and remove the pin.
5) At all bearing resetting locations, the concrete that is removed to facilitate rocker removal shall be reconstructed
     with HPC concrete. If any existing rebars are damaged, supplemental rebars shall be installed to match existing
     rebars, as directed by the Engineer.

      Following the removal of the existing bearing assembly, the inside surface of the sole plate, upon which the pin
bears shall be closely examined by the Engineer. If directed by the Engineer, the sole plate shall be removed by
removing the rivets connecting it to the bottom flange and the inside surface shall be finished to meet ANSI surface
roughness requirements as defined in ANSI B46.1, Surface Roughness, Waviness and Lay, Part 1 (For Pins, ANSI
125). To account for this potential event, the Contractor shall submit his procedure and equipment proposed to meet
the required surface finish to the Engineer for approval prior to the start of the work.


Route 35 over Manasquan River Bridge Rehabilitation
Monmouth and Ocean Counties                                                                                      Page 91
     Following, anchor bolt replacement and pier top reconstruction, and the masonry plate and rocker
relocation/resetting, the sole plate shall be connected to the girder bottom flange using HS bolts. The bearing
components should have been cleaned, lubricated, and primed prior to reinstallation and should receive a full paint
system as per Section 514.
         The Contractor has the option of proposing a different method of removal and resetting the bearings,
provided ALL of the criteria and restrictions stated on the plans are strictly adhered with. In case of any proposed
changes, the Contractor shall submit his proposed procedure (Design, calculations, sketches and drawings), sealed
and signed by a NJ professional Engineer for the Engineer‟s approval, prior to beginning any of this work.


           D. Structural Bearings.
          THE FIRST SENTENCE IS CHANGED TO:

                This work shall consist of furnishing and installing structural bearing assemblies that are one or
           more of the following types: High Load Multi-Rotational (HLMR) bearings as defined in 503.02 or
           Seismic Isolation Bearings. As per the requirements of 105.04, Working Drawings, for the complete
           design of such structural bearing assemblies, shall be submitted. The designs shall conform to the
           provisions of the AASHTO LRFD Bridge Design Specifications and/or the AASHTO LRFD Bridge
           Construction Specifications and these Specifications.

503.09 High-Strength Bolts.

THE FOLLOWING IS ADDED AFTER THE FIRST PARAGRAPH:

      Where bolts are to be installed in existing rivet holes, the existing rivets shall be removed using suitable
pneumatic rivet chippers so as not to damage or enlarge the holes or cause harm to the adjacent steel. If necessary,
rivets shall be drilled out. Flame cutting shall not be used to remove rivet heads or rivets.
      New bolt holes are to be drilled. Burning of bolt holes is strictly prohibited. Upon drilling of a bolt hole or
removal of a rivet or bolt, the base metal around the hole shall be examined for surface irregularities and
deterioration. All oxidized material, nicks, burrs, steel peaks, and cusps that would interfere with the setting of bolt
heads, nuts, and washers shall be removed. Where irregularities to the surface of the hole prevent normal alignment
or insertion of the bolt without damage to the threads, the hole shall be reamed as required to facilitate proper
installation. Washers or larger diameter High Strength bolts shall then be used to provide, as a minimum, the
strength of an ASTM A325 bolt of the diameter used in the repair.
      Any damage to the structure during rivet or bolt removal operations shall be immediately repaired to the
satisfaction of the Engineer prior to the installation of any bolts at no cost to the State.
      If reaming produces an oblong hole in any material, the largest diameter of which is more than 3/16 inch larger
than the diameter of the removed rivet, increase the diameter of the new bolt by one size and ream the hole to fit the
larger bolt.
      Remove only one rivet at a time from any one member and replace it with a high strength bolt, unless
otherwise specified on the plans or authorized by the Engineer. The replacement bolts shall be properly tensioned
prior to the removal of a subsequent rivet.
      For rivet replacement, rivets shall be removed and replaced one at a time. In areas where groups of rivets
require replacement, the replacement shall be performed in a uniform pattern, so that the center of gravity of the
rivet group will be maintained. Rivets shall be replaced using a method that ensures the stability of the
superstructure and provides adequate strength for the self weight and imposed loads.
      A. Rivet Replacement Criteria. The Contractor shall visually inspect with the Engineer all rivets from
            within arm‟s reach. Hammer testing for loose rivets shall be performed on those rivets that do not appear
            to bear flush with the steel surface and on a minimum of 10% of all rivets. Prior to the visual inspection
            of the bridge, the structural steel shall be clean of all dirt, debris and any rust from the rivets in the area to
            be inspected. The Contractor shall replace all rivets identified by the Engineer based on the following
            criteria:
            1. All missing rivets.
            2. All sheared or broken rivets.




Route 35 over Manasquan River Bridge Rehabilitation
Monmouth and Ocean Counties                                                                                           Page 92
            3. All loose rivets. A rivet is loose if it can be felt to move when struck with a hammer on the side of
            the head in a direction approximately perpendicular to its longitudinal axis. Rivets shall be replaced if
            any vibration is felt from the hammer test.
            4. All headless rivets or those with rosette heads.
            5. All rivets when either head exhibits loss of metal equal to or exceeding 50% of the original head by
            volume.
            6. All rivets if either head has corroded to the point of loosing 50% or more of its lip or projection
            beyond the shank.
      In addition to the shipping requirements noted in Subsection 917.01 and the manufacturer‟s recommendations,
the following shall be adhered to:
      Bolts shall be protected from dirt and moisture at the job site. Only as many bolts as anticipated to be installed
and tightened during a work shift shall be taken from protected storage. Bolts not used shall be returned to protected
storage at the end of the shift. Bolts shall not be cleaned of lubricant that is present in as-delivered condition. This
lubricant condition on the bolts cannot to be modified, that is: never clean, strip or add additional lubrication to the
product.
      Methods and procedures of inspection and testing shall conform to Subsection 917.01. Deviations from the
Standard Specifications to conform to manufacturer‟s specifications, where different, will not be permitted without
approval of the Engineer.

503.15 Cleaning and Painting of Structural Steel.
THIS SUBSECTION IS CHANGED TO:

503.15 Cleaning, Painting, and Metalizing of Structural Steel.
          A. General.
          REPLACE THE SECOND PARAGRAPH WITH THE FOLLOWING:
            A complete coating system of an organic zinc primer, a high-build epoxy intermediate coat, an
intermediate stripe coat, and a urethane finish coat shall be selected from one of the approved coating systems under
Subsection 912.15. All new and/or replacement structural steel members or shapes that will be installed during the
project shall, at a minimum, be cleaned and primed in the shop.
            New and replacement steel to be shop metalized includes, but is not limited to, replacement roadway
stringers, replacement gusset plates, lateral bracing members, and repair plates/steel shapes in the bascule span.
Metalizing in the shop shall be performed as defined in Section 514.
            All shop metalizing shall be performed in an enclosure which provides the required atmospheric
conditions and shall prevent any exposure to inclement weather prior to the coating being completely cured.
            New and replacement steel to be shop painted includes, but is not limited to, replacement roadway
stringers and repair plates/steel shapes, new diaphragms, platform framing for barrier and warning gates, and steel
median barrier.
            The new 4 bar steel bridge railings and base plates, and steel median barrier on the bascule span and
connection plates, shall be treated with hot dip galvanizing and an organic paint system as specified in Subpart D of
this section.
           4.. PAINT APPLICATION.

          THE FOLLOWING IS ADDED AFTER THE FIRST SENTENCE OF PARAGRAPH f :

                Surfaces of steel that will be embedded in concrete shall be given a prime coat of paint only.

         5. Number of Coats and Film Thickness.
                THE FIRST TWO PARAGRAPHS ARE CHANGED TO:
                A minimum of three coats plus one brush-applied stripe coat shall be applied by either of the
                following methods:
                         a. prime, intermediate stripe coat, intermediate, and finish in shop; or
                         b. prime in shop, intermediate stripe coat, intermediate, and finish in field.

                  The dry film thickness of the paint at any point shall be within the following ranges:
                           For the prime coat .................................................................2.5 to 4 mils
                           For the intermediate stripe coat.............................................visual coverage


Route 35 over Manasquan River Bridge Rehabilitation
Monmouth and Ocean Counties                                                                                                    Page 93
                           For the intermediate coat ......................................................3.5 to 5 mils
                           For the finish coat .................................................................2 to 3 mils
                           For the three-coat system ......................................................8 to 12 mils

                  ADD THE FOLLOWING AFTER THE LAST PARAGRAPH:
                            The Intermediate Stripe Coat shall be applied by brush to all edges, corners, welds,
                  crevices, rivets, bolt threads, bolt heads, and other surface irregularities prior to application of the
                  full intermediate coating. Visual coverage of the coated surface is required.

             5.   Color.
                THE LAST PARAGRAPH IS CHANGED TO:
              The color for the intermediate stripe coat shall contrast the primer and the intermediate coat. The
         color for the intermediate coat shall be white or an approved color that contrasts with the prime and finish
         coats.

            6. Painting Galvanized Surfaces.
       THE FOLLOWING IS ADDED TO THIS SUBPART:

              The following steel components shall be galvanized and painted with a shop applied intermediate
         coat and a shop applied finish coat; all painting to be done at galvanizer‟s facility. Adhere to paint
         manufacturers recommended dry film thicknesses for each coat:

       Component                                              Finish Color

       4 Bar Steel Bridge Railing                             FED-STD-595B color chip No. 35190 (Lusterless Blue)
       Steel Bridge Railing Base Plates                       FED-STD-595B color chip No. 35190 (Lusterless Blue)
       Steel Median Barrier – Bascule Span                    FED-STD-595B color chip No. 35190 (Lusterless Blue)
       Steel Median Barrier Connection Plates                 FED-STD-595B color chip No. 35190 (Lusterless Blue)

              The process shall conform to Subsection 917.12 for galvanizing and follow the coating
         manufacturers written instructions for coating application requirements.
              The galvanizing application shall use the dry kettle process to eliminate flux inclusions on the
         surface of the galvanized material.
              Prior to galvanizing, the steel shall be immersed in a pre flux solution (zinc ammonium chloride).
         The pre flux tank must have a specific gravity of 1.09 to 1.1 and contain less than 0.4% iron.
              The galvanizing plant shall provide the following to the Engineer for review prior to scheduling a
         pre-construction meeting or any production work:
             Coating Materials: Submit product data sheets, material safety data sheets, and application
                instructions for the materials to be applied to the galvanizing. The finish coat shall have similar
                gloss and match the color of the finish material selected by the Contractor according to Section
                514.
             Verification samples: Submit two 3-inch by 6-inch samples of the factory applied coating systems.
                The samples shall be 100% galvanized, 75% painted with the primer, and 50% painted with the
                finish coating so that all coating layers are visible on the samples.
             Quality control records: Submit results of monitoring the temperature of the galvanizing bath.
                Include relevant specification criteria with the submittal.
             Quality control records: Submit test results documenting the hydrochloric acid percent of the
                pickling tanks is maintained between 10% and 14%. Demonstrate that the iron content is less than
                8% and the zinc content is less than 3%. Provide documentation of weekly titration testing
             Quality control records: Submit weekly test results for all chemicals and zinc used in the
                galvanizing process. Include applicable ASTM A123 criteria.
             Apply prime coat within 12 hours after galvanizing in a controlled environment meeting
                applicable environmental regulations and as recommended by the coating manufacturer.




Route 35 over Manasquan River Bridge Rehabilitation
Monmouth and Ocean Counties                                                                                                   Page 94
                 Apply finish coat in the same controlled environment as the intermediate adhering to paint
                  manufacturers intermediate recoat interval.
                 References: The galvanizer shall submit documentation of at least five years experience in the
                  successful completion of hot dip galvanizing followed by application of organic coatings at the
                  galvanizing shop. Submit a minimum of three end user client references with contact names,
                  telephone numbers, addresses, and a brief description of the work performed.

                The Contractor shall schedule a meeting to be attended by the Contractor, designer, Engineer,
          fabricator, and galvanizer. Agenda shall include: project schedule, scope of services, coordination
          between fabricator and galvanizer, finish of surfaces, application of coatings, submittals, and approvals.
                Prior to fabrication and final submittal of shop drawings to the Engineer, the fabricator shall submit
          drawings to the galvanizer for review of suitability of the components for galvanizing. Contractor will
          coordinate any required modifications.
                Acceptable products include the COLORGALV and PRIMERGALV systems by Duncan
          Galvanizing:

                 Duncan Galvanizing
                 69 Norman Street
                 Everett, MA 02149
                 telephone 617-389-8440
                 fax 617-389-2831

                 Equivalent systems will be evaluated and approved by the Engineer. Other suppliers include:

                 American Galvanizing Co Inc
                 PO Box 408
                 Folsom NJ 08037
                 609-567-2090

                 Voigt & Schweitzer
                 2520 East Hagert St
                 Philadelphia PA
                 215-739-8911


503.16 Steel Grid Flooring.
THE FOLLOWING IS ADDED AFTER THE FIRST PARAGRAPH:
     Steel grid panels shall be as manufactured by the following or approved equal:
     1. Interlocking Deck Systems International
           115 41st Street
           Pittsburgh, Pennsylvania 15201
           Contact: Chris Davis (412) 682.3041

     2.   Foster Fabricated Products
          1016 Greentree Road
          Pittsburgh, Pennsylvania 15220
          Contact: Mike Riley (412) 928.3452

     The Contractor is alerted that the work is to be performed in specific construction stages as shown on the
Contract Plans unless otherwise approved by the Engineer.
     The removal of the existing deck shall be performed so as not to interfere with the installation of the new
system. The Contractor‟s method for demolishing and removing the bridge items may be his/her choice, subject to
the approval of the Engineer. All material removed, except for items to be reinstalled, shall become the property of
the Contractor.
     Waterway users shall be protected at all stages of the construction process. The Contractor‟s operations shall
not interfere with free navigation, as per the requirements of Section 107 of the Standard and Supplemental


Route 35 over Manasquan River Bridge Rehabilitation
Monmouth and Ocean Counties                                                                                    Page 95
Specifications. Care shall be taken to avoid damaging existing structures or members to remain. Temporary
shielding shall be coordinated with the balancing of the lift span detailed in Section 527 of the Supplemental
Specifications. The Contractor shall be aware that the amount of weight that can be added to the bascule span is
limited. Therefore, the Contractor is expected to pay careful attention to the type and weight of the temporary
shielding used on the lift span.
      In the furnishing of deck panels, the Contractor shall submit to the Engineer a detailed plan of operations for
the removal of the existing open grid deck and installation of the proposed steel grating. The plan shall include the
following:
                1. Working Drawings in accordance with Subsection 105.04 of the Standard Specifications.
                2. Method of transporting, storing, and handling the proposed steel deck panels in accordance with
                    these Supplemental Specifications.
                3. Detailed construction plan for the removal of the existing open grid deck panels and installation
                    of the proposed deck panels. The construction plan shall include all anticipated tasks and their
                    durations. The plan shall be detailed with the labor crew sizes, equipment requirements,
                    equipment placements, temporary devices, and safety platforms necessary to complete the work
                    within the scheduled time period. The construction plan shall be coordinated with the working
                    drawings. The Contractor shall monitor the construction plan during the actual work and adjust
                    future work activities where necessary to complete the work within the time constraints.
                4. List of materials suppliers.
                5. Knowledge level of Contractor‟s or Subcontractor‟s work force.
                6. Maintenance and protection of traffic.
      Fabrication and Welding shall be performed in accordance with Subsection 503.05 of the Standard
Specifications except as modified herein.
      The Contractor shall survey and measure the existing bascule span for dimension verification; unrecorded
modifications to the structure; and to determine the relative elevations of the stringers and floorbeams to determine
any adjustments necessary for the fabrication of the grid deck. The survey and measurement of the bascule span for
elevation shall be performed with no live load traffic on the bascule span. The survey and measurement shall
include, but not be limited to, the elevation of the floorbeams at all the stringer intersections, the finish grade
elevation of the existing grid deck at each floorbeam and lane line, the depth from top of existing grid deck to the
top of each floorbeam at each of these locations, and the shim thickness between the floorbeams and stringers.
Adjustments, if any, shall be noted and incorporated into the shop drawings. The steel survey shall be submitted
with shop drawings. A datum shall be provided with the survey.
      Welding. A welding procedure and a welding sequence shall be submitted for review. Welding procedures
shall be submitted for all welds. The welding sequence shall include the sequence and methods to prevent and
minimize distortions and residual welding stresses in the completed grid flooring.
      Fabrication. The grid flooring shall be fabricated on a level solid surface. The flatness of grid deck panel shall
be monitored during the fabrication process. Welding of the grid deck shall be sequenced and controlled to prevent
distortions during and after the fabrication process of the grid deck. A welding procedure shall be submitted for all
welds.
      Tolerances. The grid deck panels shall be fabricated within the following tolerances:
          Overall Panel Length and Width: plus zero (+0) to minus one eighth (-1/8) inch maximum from
          the approved shop drawings.

         Panel Squareness: Diagonal lengths between extreme corners of a panel shall measure within one-
         quarter (1/4) inch from each other.

         Panel Flatness: The transverse camber (width) of panel shall be no more than 0.001 times the
         width of the panel. The longitudinal camber (length) shall be no more than 0.003 times the length
         of the panel.

         Sweep: The side bow (sweep) shall be no more than plus or minus one-quarter (¼) inch per 10
         linear feet in either direction.

         Main Bar Verticality: The main bar shall be no more than one sixteenth (1/16) inch out of vertical
         on the full bar height.



Route 35 over Manasquan River Bridge Rehabilitation
Monmouth and Ocean Counties                                                                                     Page 96
         Cross Bar Verticality: The cross bar shall be no more than one sixteenth (1/16) inch out of vertical
         on the full height.

         Main Bar Spacing: Center to center spacing of the main bar shall be no more than plus or minus
         one-sixteenth (1/16) inch from the detailed bar spacing.

         Cross Bar Spacing: Center to center spacing of the cross bar shall be no more than plus or minus
         one-sixteenth inch (1/16) inch from the detailed bar spacing.

     The grid deck panels shall be installed within the following tolerances:

         Panel Alignment:

         Cross bar alignment between adjacent grid deck panels shall be no more than plus or minus one-
         sixteenth (1/16) inch.

         The overall cross bar alignment of grid deck panels from end to end of the bascule span leaf shall
         be no more than plus or minus one-quarter (1/4) inch.

      Transport and Storage. Shipping, Handling and Erection shall be in accordance with Subsection 503.07 of the
Standard Specifications except as modified herein. In the transportation of the steel deck panels the deck panels
shall be supported in a manner to prevent distortion during transport and storage. Adequate support or dunnage
beneath the grid deck panel shall be provided at the ends of the panel and at intermediate points. The intermediate
spacing of the supports or dunnage during transport and storage shall be no more than half the maximum stringer
spacing. The grid deck shall be fully secured during transport. The flatness of deck panels shall be within the
allowable tolerances as noted in these Supplemental Specifications after transport and/or storage.
      Handling. The grid deck panels shall be supported in a manner to prevent distortion during handling. Care
shall be taken during lifting and placing to avoid overstressing, damaging or distorting the grid deck panels. The
panels shall not be placed or dragged over any obstruction that will damage the components of the grid deck.
      Repairs. The Contractor shall submit repair procedures for non-conforming grid deck panels or assemblies.
The repair procedure shall not be construed as acceptance of the deck panel or assemblies. All repairs shall be
documented and submitted to the Engineer.
      Shop and Field Assembly. The grid deck panels and stringers for each bascule span leaf shall be completely
assembled and match marked in the shop. During the assembly of the components, the stringers shall be set at
correct grades and spacing by use of blocking and bolted temporary steel diaphragms. The grades shall be based on
the survey of the bascule span performed prior to shop drawing submission. The temporary diaphragm rows shall be
located at the ends of the stringers and at intervals of approximately every 25 feet. The alignment of the cross bars
between grid deck panels shall be checked prior to drilling holes for hold down connections. The assembled grid
deck panels and the stringers shall be inspected for discrepancies and overall fit up. A template shall be used to
locate the bolt holes to minimize conflicts with the components of the grid deck. The interface between the main
bars and the stringers shall be inspected for bearing before and after the installation of the temporary hold down
fasteners. The edge bars shall be fully bearing on the stringers unless otherwise shown on contract drawings. The
assembled deck panels and stringers shall be surveyed and the recorded information shall be submitted to the
Engineer prior to shipping the grid deck.
      Temporary diaphragms and connections shall be removed after the permanent assembly has been completed on
the bascule span. Open holes from temporary connections shall be filled with high strength bolts.
      The placement of construction equipment on the bascule span shall be limited. Prior to placement of any
equipment on the bridge structure, the Contractor shall submit calculations to determine the capacity of the deck and
span with location of the equipment clearly defined on the work plans. The calculations shall be performed and
sealed by a Professional Engineer licensed in the State of New Jersey.
      The grid deck panels should be placed and installed in such a manner so that no initial stress is induced into the
bridge structure or grid deck panel. No external force shall be applied to the new grid deck panel, new stringer or
existing structure to fit the component except to close a gap less than 1/16 inch between the new deck panel and new
stringer. There shall be no imposed undue stresses or distortions of the grid deck during installation. If a gap
greater than 1/16 inch exists between the deck panel and stringer, shims shall be provided to fill the gap.


Route 35 over Manasquan River Bridge Rehabilitation
Monmouth and Ocean Counties                                                                                     Page 97
      Any deck panel installed with an undue stress or distortion shall be removed and replaced with a new panel
section at no additional cost to the Department. Any non-conforming deck panels installed shall be removed and
replaced with a new panel at no additional cost to the Department.
      In the furnishing of grid deck panels for the barrier and warning gate supports, the Contractor shall submit to
the Engineer a detailed plan of installation of the proposed steel grid flooring. The plan shall include the following:
              1. Working Drawings in accordance with Subsection 105.04 of the Standard Specifications.
              2. Method of transporting, storing and handling the proposed steel deck panels in accordance with
                    these Supplemental Specifications
              3. List of materials suppliers
      Fabrication and Welding shall be performed in accordance with Subsection 503.05 of the Standard
Specifications except as modified herein.
The grid deck panels shall be installed within the following tolerances:
          Panel Alignment:
            Cross bar alignment between adjacent grid deck panels shall be placed with a tolerance of one-sixteenth
            (1/16) inch.

     For the bascule span high early strength lightweight concrete closure pours, the provisions of the Standard
Specification Subsections 501.05 through 501.17 as applicable shall apply with the following modifications. The
Contractor shall furnish the mix design for the strength, unit weight and properties specified.
       a. Materials shall be proportioned to produce lightweight concrete with a 4-hour compressive strength of
           3000 psi.
       b. Materials shall be proportioned to produce lightweight concrete with an average 28-day compressive
           strength of 4,000 psi, or greater, with no individual cylinder compressive strength less than 3,600 psi.
       c. Materials shall be proportioned to produce lightweight concrete with a maximum dry unit mass of 115
           lb/cf at 28 days when tested in accordance with ASTM C567.
       d. The air content shall be 6% +/- 1.5% when measured by the volumetric method in accordance with
           ASTMC173
       e. The concrete slump shall be 6 inches +/- 2 inches when measured in accordance with ASTM C143
           Concrete.
       f. Cement for the high early strength lightweight concrete shall be Rapid Set Cement manufactured by CTS
           Manufacturing Company, Cypress, CA or approved equal. Materials shall be of recent manufacture
           (within one year) and uniform in composition and consistency.
       g. A minimum eight-bag cement mix with a 0.42 water to cement ratio using a super plasticizer is required
           unless otherwise approved by the Engineer.
       h. The 28-day drying shrinkage shall not be more than 400 microstrains

     No later than 30 calendar days after the notice to proceed is given, the Contractor shall begin preparing trial
batches of concrete. Sand-lightweight concrete mixes shall be designed by a testing laboratory, approved by the
Department, retained by and at the Contractor‟s expense. Trial batches and mix designs shall be developed and
tested for the specific fine and coarse aggregate from the exact manufacturing plant that is to be used by the
Contractor for the Project. In order to represent the strength development of the Project in place concrete, the trail
batches shall be maintained at a similar temperature as the anticipated project temperature. The Contractor shall be
responsible for preparing the trial batches and demonstrating the mix‟s ability to achieve the specified properties in
accordance with Section 914 of the Standard Specifications except as modified herein. Changes other than minor
fluctuations in admixture dosage rates will require a new mix design. The Engineer may halt pouring and order
additional trial batches whenever the specified properties are not achieved. Alternate mix designs will be considered
provided the Contractor demonstrates the ability to meet the requirements of this specification to the Engineer‟s
satisfaction.
       The mixes shall be proportioned by weight. They shall be designed and proportioned in accordance with the
applicable requirements of ACI Standard 211.1, “Recommended Practice for Selecting Proportions of Structural
Lightweight Concrete”, ACI Standard 211.2 “Standard Practice for Selecting Proportions for Structural Lightweight
Concrete”, 213R, “Guide for Structural Lightweight Aggregate Concrete” and Section 8 of Division 2 of the 1996
AASHTO Standard Specifications for Highway Bridges including all addendums.
       The design mixes, along with the entire test results as specified in the Standard Specifications, Section 914
(as modified herein) shall be submitted to the Engineer for approval. The copy of the design mix shall provide, at a
minimum, the following information:


Route 35 over Manasquan River Bridge Rehabilitation
Monmouth and Ocean Counties                                                                                    Page 98
                 1.          Fine and coarse aggregate (saturated surface dry condition) content in lb/cf
                 2.          Cement content in lb/cf
                 3.          Water content in lb/cf
                 4.          Air content in %, measured by volumetric method in accordance with ASTM C173
                 5.          Water cement ratio
                 6.          Slump in inches
                 7.          Dry unit mass in accordance with ASTM C567
                 8.          28 day compressive strengths
                 9.          Batch Masses.
      Approved batch weights shall be used to manufacture all lightweight concrete for this project. The Contractor
shall periodically correct batch masses to account for the changes in fine aggregate fineness modulas and aggregate
moisture content.
       The specific gravity and absorption of the lightweight aggregate shall be checked for each shipment.
Lightweight aggregate shall be in a saturated surface dry condition when delivered by the manufacturer.
Absorption shall be limited to a maximum of 6%-9%. Lightweight aggregate stockpile(s) shall be constructed so as
to maintain uniform moisture throughout the pile. The stockpiles shall be continuously and uniformly sprinkled
with water for a minimum of 24 hours using a sprinkler system approved by the Engineer. At the end of the wetting
period, the stockpiles shall be allowed to drain for 12 to 15 hours immediately prior to use, unless otherwise directed
by the Engineer.
      At least 30 days before the placement of concrete, a plan of action shall be submitted for approval for the
placement of concrete during hot and cold weather conditions as defined in the Standard Specifications, Subsection
501.11 - Limitations of Placing. Cold and hot weather concreting shall be according to the provisions of the
Standard Specifications Subsection 501.11 – Limitations of Placing. Measures shall be provided by the Contractor
to maintain the concrete mix temperature between 60 ºF and 70 ºF. Proposed methods of maintaining concrete mix
temperature shall be included in the plan of action and shall be in accordance with the recommendations of the
materials suppliers.
     The Contractor shall submit to the Engineer a detailed plan of operations for the removal and installation of the
steel grating panels in accordance with the requirements the Supplemental Specification for Steel Grid Deck
Replacement. In addition to the requirements specified therein, the written plan shall include the following:
            1. Method of concrete mixing, handling and placement for the closure pours in the field.
            2. A plan for discontinuing placement and protecting the closure pour concrete during unfavorable
                 weather conditions.
            3. Contingency plan for interruptions of pours, work schedules, limits of pours.
            4. Equipment descriptions.
            5. List of concrete materials suppliers.
       All lightweight concrete shall be placed, finished, cured and protected as specified in Section 501 of the
Standard Specifications, unless otherwise recommended by the manufacturer‟s product specifications and/or
approved by the Engineer. Lightweight concrete shall have a good workability and other properties such that proper
placement, consolidation, and finishing are obtained. Lightweight aggregates and sand shall be batched by weight.
Lightweight concrete shall be consolidated with vibrators taking care to provide uniform consolidation without over-
vibration. The closure pour concrete shall be covered promptly after final finishing with a single, clean layer of wet
burlap. The burlap shall remain until six hours minimum of wet curing has occurred. The burlap shall be kept
continuously wet for the 6-hour duration.
      The exposed surfaces of all metals such as deck joint plates and shapes that are not galvanized or metallized
shall be painted. Painting and metalzing shall conform to the Special Provisions.
       The supplier of the lightweight aggregate shall provide a technical representative at the site for the first day of
closure pour placement. The representative shall be responsible to assist the Contractor and Engineer in the control
of lightweight aggregate moisture content, unit weight, batching and placement requirements.
       The supplier of the high early strength cement shall provide a technical representative at the site for the first
day of closure pour placement. The representative shall be responsible to assist the Contractor and Engineer in the
control of high early strength cement mixing and placement operations.
      Field-testing shall be performed in accordance with the Standard Specifications, Section 914 as modified by
this section. Concrete cylinders shall be cured under the same conditions as the in-place concrete.




Route 35 over Manasquan River Bridge Rehabilitation
Monmouth and Ocean Counties                                                                                       Page 99
503.17 Method of Measurement.

THE FOLLOWING IS ADDED:
     Lightweight Class A concrete fill over the stringers and the side form pans over the bascule span stringers will
not be measured separately for payment. Cost is to be included under the Pay Item “Steel Grid Flooring.”
     Replace Rivets with High Strength Bolts will be measured on a unit basis for the number of rivets replaced.
     Girder Jacking shall not be measured for payment. This item will be paid on a lump sum amount shown on the
Proposal.
     Finger Joints will be measured by pounds.

503.18 Basis of Payment.
THE FOLLOWING PAY ITEMS ARE ADDED:

           Pay Item                                                                                   Pay Unit
           REPLACE RIVETS WITH HIGH STRENGTH BOLTS                                                    UNIT
           GIRDER JACKING                                                                             LUMP SUM
           PLATFORMS FOR BARRIER GATES AND TRAFFIC GATES                                              LUMP SUM
           REPAIR OF STRUCTURAL STEEL                                                                 LUMP SUM
           CLEANING, IF AND WHERE DIRECTED                                                            LUMP SUM

      The Lump Sum Price for constructing the new Barrier Gate and Traffic Gate Platforms shall include all labor,
materials, tools, and equipment, including all incidentals, furnishing and installing platforms and supports as
detailed on these plans. No separate payment will be made for the grid deck panels, concrete pedestals under the
barrier gate and traffic gate housings, structural steel supports, temporary bracing and supports, shapes, connections,
shear studs installed for barrier gate and traffic gate supports, galvanizing and painting of all components of the
supports; the costs thereof shall be included in the pay item for “Platforms for Barrier Gates and Traffic Gates”.



          THE SECOND PARAGRAPH IS CHANGED TO:

     Structural bearing assemblies shall include payment for furnishing all labor, materials, tools, equipment and
incidentals, and all work involving furnishing, testing, and installing said bearing assemblies, complete and in place,
as shown on the Working Drawings.

          THE FOLLOWING IS ADDED AFTER THE SECOND PARAGRAPH:

      The lump sum price for the bascule span grid deck replacement shall include the cost of furnishing all the
labor, material, and equipment to satisfactorily complete the work in accordance with Contract documents. The cost
for lightweight concrete Class A fill over the stringers, shear studs, painting, incidentals, adjustments, and inspection
of this work shall be included in the square foot price.



                                SECTION 504 - TIMBER STRUCTURES
504.03 Construction Requirements.
        THE FOURTH PARAGRAPH IS DELETED.

                                SECTION 505 - LOAD BEARING PILES
505.03 Equipment.
     B. Impact Pile Drivers.
        SUBPART 3. IS CHANGED TO:




Route 35 over Manasquan River Bridge Rehabilitation
Monmouth and Ocean Counties                                                                                     Page 100
          3.   For steam or air hammers, the weight of the ram shall be no less than 1/3 the weight of the pile. For
               diesel hammers, the weight of the ram shall be no less than ¼ the weight of the pile.

    E.    Leads and Followers.
         THE FOLLOWING IS ADDED AFTER THE SECOND SENTENCE:

               Leads may be either of the fixed or swinging type. Fixed leads, when used, shall be held in position
         by guys or braces to ensure support to the pile during driving. Swinging leads, when used, shall be fitted
         with a pile gate at the bottom of the leads and, in the case of battered piles, a horizontal brace may be
         required. Swinging leads shall be adequately embedded in the ground or the pile constrained in a
         structural frame such as a template to maintain alignment.

    F.    Water Jets.
         THE FOLLOWING IS ADDED:



    G.    Hammer Cushion (Cap Block) and Pile Cushion.
          1. Hammer Cushion.
         THE SECOND AND THIRD SENTENCES ARE CHANGE TO:

                 Hammer cushions (cap block) shall be made of manufactured materials according to the hammer
                 manufacturers guidelines. Wood, rope, wire rope, hose, tires and asbestos cushions are
                 specifically disallowed and shall not be used.

505.04 Preparation for Driving.
        THE FOLLOWING IS ADDED:


505.06 Methods of Driving.
     1. Accuracy of Driving.
        THE FIRST SENTENCE IS CHANGED TO:

              Foundation and fender piles shall be driven with a variation of not more than ¼ inch per foot from
         the vertical or from the batter. Foundation piles shall not be out of the required position by more than 6
         inches after driving, or ¼ of their diameter, whichever is greater.

         THE FIRST PARAGRAPH OF SUBPART 4. IS CHANGED TO:


505.07 Determination of Bearing Values.
        THE FIRST PARAGRAPH IS CHANGED TO:

    1.    Static Pile Load Test.
         THE FOLLOWING IS ADDED:


         SUBPART 2. IS CHANGED TO:

    2.   Empirical Pile Formula. If no other methods of determining pile capacity are stated in the Special
         Provisions or Plans, then the ENR formula shall be used.

    4.    Dynamic Pile Load Tests.
         THE THIRD SENTENCE OF THE FIFTH PARAGRAPH IS CHANGED TO:




Route 35 over Manasquan River Bridge Rehabilitation
Monmouth and Ocean Counties                                                                                Page 101
           The restrike should be terminated when the ultimate capacity of the pile is reached or the penetration
           reaches 6 inches or the total number of hammer blows reaches 50, whichever occurs first.

505.13 Cut-Offs and Cappings.
        THE SECOND PARAGRAPH IS DELETED.


          THE THIRD PARAGRAPH IS CHANGED TO:

     As shown on the Plans, all piles shall be anchored to the structure.

505.15 Method of Measurement.
        THE 10TH PARAGRAPH IS CHANGED TO:

     Splices for all type piles will be measured per each individual splice. However, splices within the pile length
ordered by the Engineer will not be measured unless the ordered length is in excess of 80 feet.

           SECTION 506 – BULKHEADS, FENDER SYSTEMS, AND DOLPHINS
506.01 Description.
        THE FOLLOWING IS ADDED:

     This work shall also consist of designing, furnishing and installation of Fiberglass-Concrete Composite Piles
(FCCP) and Fiberglass Reinforced Plastic Piles (FRPP) that may be used for the construction of fender systems and
dolphins. All equipment, materials and labor that are required to install these type piles, as shown on the plans, shall
be included.
     This work shall also consist of designing, furnishing and installing Fiberglass Reinforced Plastic Lumber
(FRPL) wales for fender systems and smaller dimensional FRPL for fender system platforms as shown on the plans
and specified herein.

506.02 Materials.
        THE FOLLOWING IS ADDED TO THE LIST OF MATERIAL REFERENCES:

           Fiber Reinforced Plastic Lumber………………………………………………..………….…..921
           Fiberglass Reinforced Plastic Piles……………………………………………………………..922
           Fiberglass-Concrete Composite Piles…………………………………………………………..923

          THE FOLLOWING IS ADDED:

     The material conformance criteria of Section 921 shall be followed for supplying FRPL, of Section 922 for
supplying FRPP and of Section 923 for supplying FCCP.

         THE NEW SUBSECTION IS ADDED:
506.06 Fiberglass-Concrete Composite Piles / Fiberglass Reinforced Plastic Piles / Fiberglass Reinforced
        Plastic Lumber.

     A.    Fiberglass-Concrete Composite Piles (FCCP). The following criteria shall be followed in furnishing
           (FCCP).
            1. Working Drawings. According to the requirements of 105.04, Working Drawings for FCCP shall
               be submitted. The submission shall include test results and calculations to establish the flexural
               strength requirements stated herein and shall also include the following criteria:
                      a. The outside diameter of the FCCP and wall thickness of the composite reinforcement
                           tube.
                      b. The location of any embedded or attached lifting devices and use of pick up or support
                           points.




Route 35 over Manasquan River Bridge Rehabilitation
Monmouth and Ocean Counties                                                                                    Page 102
                    c.   The location of the roughened surface where skin friction is needed between the pile and
                         the soil.
                    d. The location of detailing of any splices, shoes and top of pile connections that may be
                         required.
         2. Additional Submittals. The following documentation and details shall be submitted to the Engineer
             for approval at least thirty (30) days prior to the scheduled FCCP installation.
                    a. Documentation that indicates the fiberglass tubing physical properties and the diameter
                         and wall thickness of the tubes.
                    b. The method of placing concrete in the fiberglass tubes.
                    c. Catalog cuts, illustrations, schedules, diagrams, performance charts, instructions,
                         brochures or lab reports that illustrate the size, physical appearance and other
                         characteristics of FCCP that indicate conformity to the requirements of the Plans and the
                         requirements specified in Section 923.
                    d. Lab reports from an independent testing facility shall include calculations that confirm
                         that the FCCP meets the ultimate strength requirements specified in Section 923. A
                         minimum of three (3) flexural tests shall be required. The average of the three tests shall
                         exceed the specified ultimate flexural strength.
                    e. Placement method of the concrete for the fiberglass tubes. The concrete shall be placed
                         in one continuous bottom to top operation in a manner that prevents voids from forming.
         3. Storage and Handling. FCCP shall not be installed until 30 days after concrete has been placed in
             the tubes. FCCP shall be stored and handled to avoid damage to all components including fiberglass
             tubes, protective coatings and concrete. During storage, the piles shall be placed on minimum 6 inch
             wide timber cribbing arranged to give even support and to maintain straightness within the tolerance
             specified herein.
         4. Lifting Piles. Only fabric slings may be used to lift the piles. Chain or cable in direct contact with
             the piles may not be used.
         5. Splices. Full length piles where practicable shall be used. Where splices are unavoidable their
             number and locations will be subject to written approval by the Engineer. Splicing details shall be
             submitted to the Engineer for approval.
         6. Shoes. Steel shoes for FCCP, when required, shall be provided. Install shoes in conformance with
             details submitted to and approved by the Engineer.
         7. Equipment for Driving FCCP.
                    a. Equipment for driving FCCP shall conform to the requirements of 505.03.
                    b. As per the requirements of 505.03 G., an approved hammer cushion block to transfer pile
                         hammer energy to the FCCP shall be used. Each hammer shall be equipped with a
                         helmet/drive head to fit the diameter of the FCCP to be driven.
                    c. As per the requirements of 505.03 G., an approved pile cushion block to prevent damage
                         to the FCCP shall be used. At a minimum frequency, the pile cushion block shall be
                         inspected after each FCCP is driven and replaced as needed.
         8. Allowable. Variation in Pile Alignment. FCCP shall be installed truly vertical or accurately
             battered as indicated on the Plans. The top of any FCCP driven its full length into the ground shall
             not vary from the plan location by more than 2 inches.
         9. Defective Composite Piles. The provisions of 505.08, in addition to the following, shall apply for
             determining FCCP defective characteristics. The following will be causes for rejection of a FCCP:
                    a. Incorrect pile location or batter.
                    b. Pile damage from any cause prior to driving.
                    c. Insufficient concrete strength, based on testing of cylinders.
                    d. FCCP broken by reason of internal defects (even if placed in the leads), or improper
                         driving.
         10. Cutting Off Piles. Tops of FCCP shall be cut off at the elevation indicated on the Plans, or as
             established by the Engineer. The FCCP shall be cut to a true plane, in accordance with the detail
             shown on the Plans. All cut off lengths will become the property of the Contractor.

    B.   Fiberglass Reinforced Plastic Lumber (FRPL). The following criteria shall be adhered to in furnishing
         FRPL for the project:



Route 35 over Manasquan River Bridge Rehabilitation
Monmouth and Ocean Counties                                                                                Page 103
         1.   Submission Requirements. The Contractor shall submit the following information to the Resident
              for approval at least thirty (30) days before installation of FRPL.
                     a. Copies of the FRPL manufacturer‟s standards and most recent brochure for the product
                         covered by these Specifications.
                     b. According to the requirements of Subsection 106.04, the Contractor shall submit a
                         written certification from the FRPL manufacturer that their product satisfies the
                         requirements of Section 921 and has been in service for a minimum of three (3) years on
                         other bridge protection applications in the United States. This written certification shall
                         include project owner information, project names, locations, contacts and phone numbers.
                     c. Copies of independent lab test reports and performance test data that confirm that the
                         FRPL meets the Plastic material properties and the structural property requirements
                         specified in Section 921.
         2.   Shipping, Storage, Handling. During storage FRPL materials shall be protected at all times against
              exposure to extreme heat or impact. FRPL shall be shipped in a manner that will minimize
              scratching or damage to the outer surfaces. FRPL shall be stacked on dunnage above ground so that
              it may be easily inspected and stored in a manner that will avoid damage. FRPL shall be handled
              with nylon slings. Sharp instruments shall not be used in handling the product. FRPL damaged in
              shipping or handling will be rejected.
         3.   Installation. FRPL shall be cut, beveled, drilled, countersunk, and otherwise fabricated in
              accordance with the manufacturer‟s recommendations. Set all material accurately to required levels
              and lines, with members plumb and true and accurately cut and fitted. Securely attach all FRPL to
              substrate by anchoring and fastening as shown on plans.

    C.   Fiberglass Reinforced Plastic Piles (FRPP). The following criteria shall be adhered to in furnishing
         FRPP piles:
         1. Working Drawings. According to the requirements of Subsection 105.04, FRPP submissions shall
             consist of working drawings. The submission shall include calculations to establish the FRPP
             structural properties found in Tables 3-A and 3-B.
         2. Additional Submittals. Submit the following documentation and details to the Engineer for
             approval at least thirty (30) days prior to driving the piles.
                    a. Copies of FRPP manufacturer‟s standards and most recent product brochure for the
                         product covered by these specifications.
                    b. Written certification from the FRPP manufacturer that their product meets the
                         requirements of Section 922 and that the product has been in service for a minimum of
                         three (3) years on at least 5 bridge protection applications in the United States. The
                         certification shall include project owner information, project names, locations, contacts
                         and phone numbers.
                    c. Independent test lab report confirming that FRPP meets the Plastic Material Properties
                         and structural properties specified in Section 922.
                    d. Manufacturer‟s field guide with recommendations on handling, storage, cutting, drilling
                         and driving. Driving recommendations shall include recommended driving energies.
         3. Splices. Splices shall not be permitted except where overhead restrictions in the driving area require
             splices to be used. Splicing details shall be submitted to the Engineer for approval.
         4. Pile Points. Steel pile points shall be provided by the manufacturer and attached prior to shipment.
         5. Allowable Variation in Pile Alignment. Install FRPP truly vertical or accurately battered as
             indicated on the Contract Plans. The top of any pile driven its full length into the ground shall not
             vary from the plan location by more than 2 inches.
         6. Defective FRPP. The provisions of Subsection 505.08, in addition to the following, shall apply for
             determining FRPP defective characteristics:
                    a. Incorrect pile location or batter.
                    b. Pile damage from any cause prior to driving.
                    c. Pile broken by reason of internal defects (even if placed in the leads0, or improper
                         driving.
         7. Cutting Off Piles. Cut off the tops of FRPP at the elevation indicated on the Contract Plans, or as
             established by the Engineer. Cut the piles to a true plane, in accordance with the detail shown on the
             Contract Plans. All cut off lengths become the property of the Contractor.


Route 35 over Manasquan River Bridge Rehabilitation
Monmouth and Ocean Counties                                                                                Page 104
           8.   Wrapping. Wrapping for the FRPP that are to be placed in clusters shall be ½” diameter cable (5/8”
                OD covering) polypropylene impregnated wire rope.

     To verify suppliers of Composite Piles/Fiber Reinforced Plastic Piles/Composite Lumber that may be used, the
Contractor is advised to study the “Bureau of Material‟s Approved List” on the following NJDOT website:
          http://www.state.nj.us/transportation/eng/technology/materials

506.06 Method of Measurement.
        THE SUBSECTION NUMBER IS CHANGED:
506.07 Method of Measurement.
        THE FOLLOWING IS ADDED:

     FRPP and FCCP will be measured in linear feet of pile that is placed in accordance with the plans.

      FRPL will be measured in cubic feet computed on the basis of actual volumes and the shortest commercially
available lengths which may be used and that is placed in accordance with the Plans.

506.07 Basis of Payment.
        THE SUBSECTION NUMBER IS CHANGED:
506.08 Basis of Payment.
        THE FOLLOWING IS ADDED:

           Pay Item                                                                                  Pay Unit
           FIBERGLASS REINFORCED PLASTIC PILE (FRPP), 12-INCH DIAMETER                               LINEAR FOOT
           FIBERGLASS REINFORCED PLASTIC LUMBER (FRPL)                                               CUBIC FOOT
           FENDER PILE SPLICE                                                                        UNIT


      Wrapping is to be paid for under the item FIBERGLASS REINFORCED PLASTIC PILE (FRPP), 12-INCH
DIAMETER.
      No additional payment will be made for re-driving of FCCP or FRPP that are forced up by any cause. Included
in the Payment will be all costs for all material, labor, equipment, and other necessary items required for completing
the work including storage costs, disposal of unused piles, repair to damaged piles, and transportation costs. Parts of
pile cut off will not be included for payment.
      Payment for FRPL shall include all material, labor, equipment, fasteners, and other necessary items required
for completing the work including storage costs, disposal of unused materials, and transportation costs.
      Also, no separate payment will be made for grout, plates, bolts, screws or other hardware that is needed for
attaching the wales to the dolphins or for assembly and or installation of a platform. All costs hereof is to be
included in the item FIBERGLASS REINFORCED PLASTIC LUMBER.




                    SECTION 508 – METAL BRIDGE RAILING AND FENCE
508.04 Construction Requirements.
THE FOLLOWING IS ADDED AT THE END OF THE SECTION.

      Shop Plans shall indicate the locations of break in the railings to accommodate new warning gates and barrier
gates, consistent with the size of the gates, so as to allow full operation of the gates. The clearance from the most
restrictive gate dimension to the railing termination shall be one (1) inch. The ends of rails shall be covered at these
break locations with shop welded end cap plates, details of which shall be included in the shop plans.

508.08 Method of Measurement.
THE FOLLOWING IS ADDED AT THE END OF THE SECTION.



Route 35 over Manasquan River Bridge Rehabilitation
Monmouth and Ocean Counties                                                                                    Page 105
     Steel posts, plates, shims, bolts, nuts, washers, welding if required – will not be measured separately for
payment. All these aforementioned items in the railing system to be included in the bid item “4-Bar Open Steel
Bridge Railing”.


              SECTION 513 – SHEETING, TEMPORARY AND LEFT IN PLACE
513.05 Method of Measurement.
        THE FIRST PARAGRAPH IS REMOVED AND THE FOLLOWING IS ADDED:

     Temporary sheeting will be measured by the square foot basis. The area measured will be the product of the
average height and the length of sheeting that is driven. The average height will be determined by extending a line
from the bottom of excavation to a vertical plane of the top of sheeting.

                         SECTION 514 – PAINTING EXISTING BRIDGES
514.01 Description.
THIS SECTION IS REPLACED WITH THE FOLLOWING:

         The intent of this work is to clean, paint, and/or metalize all exposed previously painted surfaces of the
steel components of the bridge, including, but not limited to: all structural steel in the approach and flanking spans,
including bearings, steel work within the interior and exterior of the machinery house, and metalizing all bascule
span steel and counterweight casings. The only area not included in the scope of work is the interior of the control
houses. The work shall consist of the cleaning and painting of structural steel and metal surfaces on the bridge
during the rehabilitation of the bridge and metalizing all steel components of the bascule span. A finish coat of paint
shall also be applied to the outside face of the bascule girder and all steel outside that girder that supports the
roadway and sidewalk. The color of the finish coat shall match the finish coat on the approach spans. All steel
within the limits of the project shall be completely painted and/or repair painted to the requirements of this Section,
whether partially or fully painted in the shop or painted at the project location.
         All cleaning performed in the field for this project will be paid under the Item “NEAR-WHITE BLAST
CLEANING”; with the exception of localized areas in the vicinity of sensitive mechanical/electrical components,
which will be paid under “HAND/POWER TOOL CLEANING”. All field painting performed for this project will
be paid under the Item “PAINTING BRIDGES – EXISTING STEEL”. All field metalizing performed for this
project will be paid under the Item “METALIZING BRIDGES – EXISTING STEEL”.
         The cleaning and coating work is to be sequenced such that the following conditions are achieved:
         1) All cleaning and painting or metalizing of structural steel below the roadway shall be performed during
         Stage III except the bascule span, which will be done in Stage IV. These parts of the bridge are not subject
         to significant structural steel repairs.
         2) All new and/or replacement structural steel members or shapes that will be installed during the project
         shall be treated according to Section 503.15.
         3) Field cleaning and painting or metalizing of structural steel at elevations below the roadway shall be
         performed after deck replacement.
         4) The new center median barrier in the Bascule Span shall be cleaned, galvanized, and painted in the shop.
         (Per Section 503.15)
         The work shall consist of the cleaning and painting of all existing and re-constructed metal surfaces on the
bridge with an Organic Zinc Coating System. A prime coat only of the organic zinc shall be used when repainting
surfaces that will be in contact with freshly placed concrete. The specified surface preparation method shall not be
changed.
         All Mechanical equipment shall be painted and/or re-painted according to Subsection 525.04 “Painting”
with machinery enamel as approved by the Engineer.
         Whenever the term “coat” or “coating” is used hereinafter, it shall constitute as many applications as are
necessary to achieve the specified dry film thickness.
         Whenever there is a discrepancy between these Specifications and the manufacturer‟s recommendations,
with the approval of the Engineer, the manufacturer‟s recommendations shall govern.



Route 35 over Manasquan River Bridge Rehabilitation
Monmouth and Ocean Counties                                                                                   Page 106
514.02 Materials.

THE THIRD, FOURTH, AND FIFTH PARAGRAPHS ARE CHANGED TO THE FOLLOWING:

          For the organic zinc coating system, a complete coating system of an organic zinc-rich primer, a stripe coat
of the epoxy intermediate coat, a high-build epoxy intermediate coat, and a urethane finish coat shall be selected
from one of the approved coating systems described in Subsection 912.15. The color of the finish coat shall be
Lusterless Blue and shall match the following color chip of FED-STD-595B:
          Lusterless Blue .......................................................................... Chip No. 35190
          The primer shall be tinted to contrast the base metal.
          The color for the intermediate stripe coat shall contrast the primer and the intermediate coat.
          The color for the intermediate coat shall be white or an approved color that contrasts with the prime and
finish coats.
          For the metalizing operations, certified alloy wire is required. The Contractor will obtain written
certification from the manufacturer of the alloy and will provide the certifications at the end of the project. The wire
certification shall indicate percent composition.

514.04 Limits of Cleaning and Painting.
        A. General.
        THE FOLLOWING IS ADDED AFTER THE FIRST PARAGRAPH:
                 Surfaces to be cleaned and painted shall also include all appurtenances including, cat walks, metal
        junction boxes, electrical junction boxes, electrical conduit and related pipe hangers and rollers, ladders,
        light arms and fixtures inside the machinery rooms, metal grate flooring, navigational aids & lights, bell
        standards, wiring brackets, navigational sign supports, etc. Components to be metalized include all
        structural steel members of the bascule span.

          C. Organic Zinc Coating System.
          THIS SUBPART IS CHANGED TO THE FOLLOWING:
          All structural members and appurtenances to be painted shall be near-white blast cleaned.


514.05 Cleaning Methods.
       A. General.
              2. Blast Cleaning.
              THE FOURTH PARAGRAPH IS DELETED.

                 INSERT THE FOLLOWING AFTER THE FIFTH PARAGRAPH:

                       Chlor*Test soluble salt detection tests will be used by the Engineer to determine levels of
                 chloride contamination on blast cleaned surfaces. The Engineer will only test areas of previously
                 corroded/pitted steel and/or areas where visual indications of salt contamination are present. All
                 testing will be performed prior to application of any coating. The maximum allowable reading
                 must be less than 10 micrograms per square centimeter of Chloride. Areas shall be re-cleaned and
                 re-tested until less than 10 micrograms per square centimeter of Chloride are detected. The
                 Contractor may use other field test methods for quality control purposes; however, the Chlor*Test
                 method will determine acceptability.

          SUBPART B. IS CHANGED TO:

     B.    Epoxy Mastic Coating System. All existing surfaces shall be hand/power tool cleaned according to
           Subpart A.1 above, except where commercial blast cleaning is indicated on the Plans. All commercial
           blast cleaned surfaces shall leave an anchor profile from 1.5 to 3.0 mils deep.

     C.    Organic Zinc Coating System.
          THE FOLLOWING IS ADDED AFTER THE LAST SENTENCE OF THE FIRST PARAGRAPH:



Route 35 over Manasquan River Bridge Rehabilitation
Monmouth and Ocean Counties                                                                                    Page 107
           In the event that the anchor profile exceeds 2.5 mils, the coating thickness for the organic zinc shall
     exceed the anchor profile by a minimum of one (01) mil. In the event that the anchor profile exceeds 3.5 mils,
     the entire area shall be rejected and re-blasted to achieve the specified anchor profile.

     THE FOLLOWING IS ADDED:
     D. Surface Preparation for Metalization.
           Clean to a near-white metal cleaning standard. Steel surface will be free of all oil, grease, dirt, mill scale,
     rust, corrosion products, oxides, paint, and other foreign matter. Surface finish and cleanliness shall be
     confirmed according to SSPC-VIS1 or visual inspection.
           A profile of 3 to 5 mils is required. Angular blast media-Mineral and slag abrasives shall be selected and
     evaluated per SSPC-AB1, (aluminum oxide) recycled ferrous metallic abrasives per SSPC-AB2, steel grit per
     SSPC-AB3.
           Hardened flame cut edges shall be ground with a disk wheel grinder to a smooth contour prior to abrasive
     blasting.
           Measurements shall be taken using profile tape and a micrometer, as outlined in ASTM D4417. Standard
     Test Methods for Field Measurement of Surface Profile of Blast Cleaned Steel/NACE Standard RP0287, Field
     Measurement of Surface Profile of Abrasive Blast Cleaned Steel Surfaces Using a Replica Tape.

THE FOLLOWING IS ADDED AT END OF THIS SUBSECTION:
    E. Removal of Bird Excrement.
         Bird excrement is present in the pockets of both counterweights. It is expected that this material will be
    removed prior to any span balancing activites. All removal activities shall be conducted in accordance with the
    recommendations of the Department of Health and Human Services, National NIOSH Publication Number 97-
    146.
         All work performed to remove and dispose of the material shall be conducted by a specialty contractor
    with expertise in the removal and disposal of bird excrement, and the following:
         1. Cleaning, If and Where Directed, Removal of Bird Excrement.
              a. Permits and Approvals. The Contractor shall prepare and submit all documents to obtain all
                     permits and approvals necessary for this work. The charges to prepare the documents and the
                     fees required for all permits, approvals, and registrations shall be paid by the Contractor
                     according to Subsection 107.05
                           The Contractor shall notify the Engineer and the Bureau of Project Support and
                     Engineering six weeks before removal of the material to allow for the Department to
                     coordinate the work.
                           The Contractor shall ensure that the waste disposal or recycling facility planned for
                     receipt of the material is properly permitted to accept the material. A copy of the permit shall
                     be submitted to the Engineer one week before disposal or recycling.
                           The waste transporters shall provide proof of all requisite licenses, permits, training and
                     insurance to transport the waste.
              b. Removal Operations. The work shall be conducted in accordance with the Health and Safety
                     Program (Section 107.10) and the standard operating procedure detailed in the relevant NIOSH
                     publication.
                           One month prior to start of work submit a Spill Prevention and Control Plan to prevent
                     any uncontrolled exposure or discharge of the material to the environment. This plan shall
                     detail methods and equipment that will be provided during the removal to ensure that the work
                     is conducted in a safe and workmanlike manner accordance with the applicable regulations.
                           The contractor shall also submit a Waste Disposal Plan prior to starting the site work,
                     detailing methods for safe transportation and off-site disposal in accordance with Federal and
                     State laws, and the waste management plan of the district of origin.
              c. Manifesting and Transporting. The Contractor shall be responsible for all labeling and
                     placarding of the waste material.
                           A transporter that has a valid New Jersey hazardous waste transporter‟s permit shall
                     transport the waste material.
                           One copy of each manifest shall be returned to the Engineer within two business days
                     after notification of receipt at the disposal facility. If the Contractor does not receive
                     notification of receipt of any waste shipment within two weeks of departure from the site, the


Route 35 over Manasquan River Bridge Rehabilitation
Monmouth and Ocean Counties                                                                                      Page 108
                         Contractor shall immediately notify the Engineer and contact the disposal facility to determine
                         the status of the shipment and resolve the discrepancy. Any manifest discrepancies shall be
                         reported to the Engineer and be resolved by the Contractor.

514.07 Conditions for Painting.
       A. General
       THE FOLLOWING IS ADDED:
         Drying times between subsequent coats and recoating of existing coats shall be as per the manufacturer's
         recommendations. However, no painting of subsequent coats shall be permitted within twenty-four (24)
         hours of the application of a previous coat.

514.08 Number of Coats and Film Thickness.
       C. Organic Zinc Coating System.
       THIS SUBPART IS CHANGED TO THE FOLLOWING:
                 A minimum of three coats plus one brush applied stripe coat shall be applied in the field: prime,
       intermediate stripe coat, intermediate, and finish coats.
                 The dry film thickness of the paint at any point shall not be less than the following minimums:
                 Prime Coat ............................................................................................... 3 mils
                 Intermediate Stripe Coat .......................................................................... N/A - Visual Coverage
                 Intermediate Coat ..................................................................................... 3.5 mils
                 Finish Coat ............................................................................................... 2 mils
                 The Intermediate Stripe Coat shall be applied by brush to all edges, corners, welds, crevices,
       rivets, bolt threads, bolt heads, and other surface irregularities prior to application of the full intermediate
       coating. Visual coverage of the coated surfaces is required.

514.11 Paint Application.
        THIS SUBSECTION IS CHANGED TO:

514.11 Paint Application and Metalizing.
        A. General.
        REPLACE SUBPART 6 WITH THE FOLLOWING:
            6. All small cracks, joints, and cavities which were not sealed in a watertight manner by the first coat
                of paint shall be filled with a caulking compound. Fill all voids caused by impacted rust between
                steel plates with a caulking compound. Apply the caulk after the intermediate coat and prior to the
                finish coat. The coating system manufacturer shall recommend the caulking material in writing
                for Engineer approval. All manufacturer instructions shall be followed during the installation of
                caulking. Any cracks or defects found in the steel by the Contractor should be immediately
                reported to the Engineer according to Subsection 108.09.

          ADD THE FOLLOWING AFTER ARTICLE C:
          D. Provisions for Metalizing of Steel Members.

               1.  Metal Thickness.
                   The applied zinc metalizing thickness should be an average of 10 to 12 mils (dependent on
          environment) and recorded for each coated component using certified coating thickness calibration
          standards in accordance with SSPC PA2 standards.
                   If rust bloom, blistering, or a degraded coating appears at any time during the application of the
          Thermal Spray Coating, the following process shall be followed:
                   a.        Stop spraying
                   b.        Mark off the unsatisfactorily sprayed area
                   c.        Call the Thermal Spray Inspector/Foreman to observe and evaluate the error
                   d.        Report the deficiency to the purchaser and record the deficiency
                   e.        Repair the area by removing the Thermal Spray Coating, re-blast to a minimum near-
                        white metal finish (SSPC-10 standard) and as specified anchor tooth profile depth
                   f.        Recoat the area
                   g.        Record the actions taken to resume the job


Route 35 over Manasquan River Bridge Rehabilitation
Monmouth and Ocean Counties                                                                                                     Page 109
            2.    Adhesion.
                  Random adhesion testing shall be performed for each coated component, utilizing specified
        pull/off adhesion testing equipment, in accordance with ASTM D4541 standards.
                  Zinc adhesion = 600 psi

            3.  Metalizing Equipment.
                The metalizing equipment shall be set up, calibrated, and operated.
                        The wire feed method shall be push type system only.
                        The system shall be capable of operation at 1000 amps continuous duty cycle.
                        The system shall be able to operate remotely from the power supply unit for a distance up
                    to 1,200 feet.
                        The wire feed unit and thermal spray gun shall be portable and capable of operating from
                    a reach-all scaffolding, harness, sling, boat, or small barge location.
                        Power source must be separate from wire drive to meet containment safety requirements.
                Metalizing should occur while substrate still meets specified standards. Care must be taken to
        avoid contamination with oils and dirt.

             4. Compressed Air.
                 Compressed air shall meet ASTM D4285, method for Indicating Oil or Water in Compressed Air.
        Utilize a compressed air system capable of delivery at the nozzle of 125 cfm at 120 psi. To minimize any
        contamination, use an oil/water separator on the airline. 120 psi of compressed air maintains the proper
        atomization of the molten wire, producing the optimum spray pattern.

            5.   Painting Metalized Bridge Members.
                 A urethane finish coat shall be applied directly after the metalizing application. The finish coat
        shall only be applied to the outside face of the fascia girder, and the bottom flange and the other steel
        members outside of the fascia girder that support the roadway and sidewalk as shown on the plans. The
        finish coat color shall match the finish coat of the approach spans and shall be paid for under PAINTING
        BRIDGES – EXISTING STEEL. Metalizing leaves a surface profile that readily accepts paint coatings
        with no surface preparation. Directions as to the mixing of the coating material shall be in accordance with
        the manufacturer‟s latest instructions.

            6.    Qualifications.
                  The contractor or subcontractor executing the metalizing work shall have a minimum of five (5)
        years of previous experience in providing surface preparation for metalizing and metalizing application
        services in the shop and field, and a minimum history of three (3) completed similar projects.
                  The thermal spray technician must have a minimum of one year of experience in the operation of
        thermal spray equipment and hold a certificate of satisfactory completion of training.
                  Documentation of prior experience for a “Thermal Spray Coating Inspector/Foreman” shall be
        available for review. Documentation will consist of a minimum of four (4) separate project “Quality
        Assurance” sheets signed by the company “Thermal Spray Coating Inspector/Foreman” and customer
        representative.

            7.   Quality Assurance Plan.
                 The Contractor will provide a written quality assurance plan that will be submitted to the Engineer
        or contracting officer for approval. Such a plan shall include a method of adhesion testing, thickness
        measuring, bend test protocol, and MSDS sheets for material utilized on the projects. A micrograph study,
        performed by an independent laboratory, must be supplied with the QA Plan, depicting less than 10%
        porosity in the thermal spray coating.




514.13 Protection of Environment, Structure, Persons, and Property.
THE SIXTH PARAGRAPH IS CHANGED TO:


Route 35 over Manasquan River Bridge Rehabilitation
Monmouth and Ocean Counties                                                                                Page 110
         Projects that involve lead paint abatement shall require that the Contractor‟s personnel, who supervise
and/or perform the lead paint abatement work, be trained in the applicable programs that concern health and safety
compliance and environmental regulations regarding lead abatement. The training shall be certified by the
Department of Health, in accordance with N.J.S.A.26:2q.1 et seq. and N.J.A.C. 8:62-1.1 et seq. Each supervisor and
worker shall possess an individual lead permit as issued by the Department of Health. Also, the Contractor‟s firm
shall be certified by the Department of Community Affairs, Division of Codes and Standards, in accordance with
N.J.S.A. 52:27d-427 et seq. And N.J.A.C.5:17-1.1 et seq. The Contractor shall submit a copy of the Department of
Community Affairs certification to the Bureau of Construction Services, Division of Procurement (609.530.2103),
prior to the award of this Contract. The Contractor shall maintain the appropriate lead abatement certification
throughout the duration of this Contract. The applicable regulating State agencies will monitor projects for
compliance with the training and certification requirements through random inspections.

     1.     Blast Cleaning Requirements.
            a. Pollution Control System.
                 (1) Containment Plan.
                      (a) Description.

THE FOLLOWING IS ADDED AFTER THE SECOND PARAGRAPH:
                  A “Level-1 Class-A Containment System”, as specified in accordance with SSPC Guide 6i
              (con), shall be utilized on this project for all surface preparation for all structural steel, bearings
              and appurtenances. Visible emissions for this project shall not meet or exceed section 5.5.1.1,
              level 1 Emissions. Compliance with all Federal, State and Local Regulations shall be verified
              in accordance with section 5.5.4 Method D, Ambient Air Monitoring for Toxic Metals.
                  The Contractor shall consider the following time frames when submitting all plans required
              under the pollution control system for this project. The Department will require up to two (2)
              weeks in order to complete the review process for all containment plans, waste disposal plans
              and lead health and safety plans. An additional two (2) weeks may be required each time plans
              are resubmitted, if revisions are necessary.

              (c) Construction.
THE FOLLOWING IS ADDED:
                 Reference information can be obtained from the following sources:
                 SSPC Guide 6i(con), latest version.

            A “suspended work platform” shall only be permitted provided that all of the below listed criteria can be
     met:
           1.      The platform shall have a minimum live load design of twenty-five (25) pounds per square foot,
           excluding all OSHA safety factors.
           2.      The minimum clearance shall be greater than sixteen (16) feet after installation and during
           operations under Span 1.
           3.      The Contractor shall specify and employ continuous vacuuming of all spent blast material, during
           all blast cleaning operations. This shall be noted in the Containment Plans.
           4.      The Contractor shall have an independent qualified individual certify in writing that each
           “suspended work platform” has been constructed in accordance with the Containment Plans accepted by
           the Department. The qualified individual shall not be an employee of the Contractor or have any
           affiliation with the individual or firm that prepared the Contractor‟s Containment Plans. The credentials
           of the qualified individual who certifies the construction of the suspended work platform shall be subject
           to the approval of the Resident Engineer. No blast cleaning operations shall be permitted until this
           written certification has been received by the Resident Engineer.
           The Resident Engineer shall be responsible for approving the type and design of containment structures
     prior to implementation for use at each specific location.
           For all work over water, suspended work platforms may be utilized, provided all of the above listed
     criteria can be met for suspended work platforms for use over roadways with the following exceptions:
           1.      The minimum clearance over each span shall be determined on a case-by-case basis, depending on
           the use of the waterway.



Route 35 over Manasquan River Bridge Rehabilitation
Monmouth and Ocean Counties                                                                                 Page 111
           2.     The minimum clearance over Span 3 shall be 19 feet above MHW during cleaning and painting
           operations.
           No specific payment shall be made for providing the above noted independent written certifications. All
     costs shall be deemed included in the various unit prices bid in the Proposal.
        The Engineer may request the Contractor to conduct or request others to conduct air quality, water quality
or such other testing that will determine the quality of any materials escaping from the containment system(s)
employed on the Project. If it is determined that pollution of the environment adjacent to the site has occurred, the
Contractor shall be responsible for all corrective action and cleanup.

     2.    Blast Cleaning Requirements.
           b. Pollution Control System.
                (2) Waste Disposal Plan.
          THE FOLLOWING IS ADDED AFTER THE THIRD PARAGRAPH:

                The hazardous waste generator identification number(s) for use on the manifest is (are) as follows:

                     Structure No.
                     1506-152                               (State to provide)
                          The Hazardous Waste Manifests should be sent to the following address:
                                                 Department of Transportation
                                                 Bureau of Project Support
                                                 951 Parkway Ave.
                                                 P. O. Box 600
                                                 Trenton, NJ 08625

          THE FIRST SENTENCE OF THE TWENTY THIRD PARAGRAPH IS CHANGED TO:
                                    Prior to any reclaiming/disposal activities the Contractor shall also
                                    specify the proposed transportation/storage/disposal (TSD) facility,
                                    including a commitment letter from the TSD facility indicating that it
                                    has the capacity to accept the estimated volume of waste material and
                                    stating that it will be open for business during the Contract duration to
                                    accept the estimated volume of waste materials specified herein.

          THE FOLLOWING IS ADDED TO THIS SUBSECTION:
                                   The Contractor is advised that it is the Department‟s intent to dispose
                                   of the waste generated on this project at an approved USEPA lead
                                   reclaiming facility. The Department is aware of the following two
                                   possible lead reclaiming facilities which believes are currently
                                   approved by USEPA:

                                                      1.       Exide Corporation
                                                               645 Penn Street
                                                               Reading, Pa. 19612
                                                               1-800-437-8495
                                                               Contact: Robert F. Jordan

                                                      2.       Encycle Texas
                                                               5500 Upriver Road
                                                               Corpus Christi, Texas 78407
                                                               512-289-0300
                                                               Contact: Rick Gilbert

          The Contractor is specifically warned to verify that the lead reclaiming facility it intends to use is
     currently approved by USEPA for lead reclaiming.
          Lead reclaiming facilities that are not listed above may be used, but only if such facilities are approved
     by the United States Environmental Protection Agency (USEPA) for lead reclaiming. The Contractor is


Route 35 over Manasquan River Bridge Rehabilitation
Monmouth and Ocean Counties                                                                                 Page 112
    advised to contact USEPA to determine whether a particular lead reclaiming facility is approved by USEPA.
    Proof of approval by USEPA of the reclaiming facility shall be submitted to the Engineer prior to any cleaning
    or blasting.
          In the event that the Contractor is unable to legally dispose of the waste at a lead reclaiming facility, an
    alternate transportation/storage/disposal (TSD) facility may be selected. The alternate TSD shall meet all the
    requirements of this subsection, with the exception of the lead reclaiming requirements. However, in order to
    use the alternate TSD, the Contractor shall provide sufficient documentation to the Resident Engineer
    indicating that the waste was unable to be disposed of at a lead reclaiming facility.
    1. Blast Cleaning Requirements.
                        b. Lead Health and Safety.
                                 (1) Lead Health and Safety Requirements
                                       (h) Medical Surveillance Program.
                                            THE FOLLOWING IS ADDED AFTER THE END OF SUB
                                            PARAGRAPH 7):
                                                      The Resident Engineer shall verify that all blood monitoring is
                                            conducted at a New Jersey clinical laboratory approved by OSHA, and
                                            has demonstrated proficiency in blood lead analysis. A list of all
                                            currently approved laboratories for the State of New Jersey can be
                                            obtained from the following web site:

                                            http://osha.gov/SLT/bloodlead/state/_list.html#states

                                     (k)    Reference Documents
                                            THE FOLLOWING IS ADDED TO EACH SUB PARAGRAPH
                                                           1) Additional information is also available from the
                                                                home page of the following website under laws
                                                                and regulations – standards:

                                            http://www/osha.gov/

                                                              2) Additional information is also available from the
                                                                 home page of the following website under laws
                                                                 and regulations – standards:

                                            http://www.osha.gov/

                                                              3) This publication is available from the following
                                                                 website address:

                                            http://www.osha.gov/Publications/osha3142.pdf

                                                              4) Additional information is also available from the
                                                                 home page of the following website:

                                            http://www.state.nj.us/health/eoh/survweb/

                                                              5) This publication is available from the following
                                                                 website address:

                                            http://www.cdc.gov/niosh/91-116.html

        THE FIRST PARAGRAPH OF SUBPART (2) IS CHANGED TO:

               (2) Lead Health and Safety Plan (LHASP). When over 500 tons of structural steel are to be
                   blast cleaned, the following additional requirements and provisions shall be complied with by
                   the Contractor.


Route 35 over Manasquan River Bridge Rehabilitation
Monmouth and Ocean Counties                                                                                  Page 113
      2.    Epoxy Mastic Surface Preparation.
            a. Pollution Control System.
                (2) Hazardous Waste Collection and Disposal.
           THE FOLLOWING IS ADDED AFTER THE THIRD PARAGRAPH:

                 The hazardous waste generator identification number(s) for use on the manifest is (are) as follows:

                      Structure No. 1506-152                 EPA ID No . NJR0000??????? (State to Provide)


 514.14 Provisions for Inspection.

 THE EQUIPMENT LIST AT THE END OF THE FOURTH PARAGRAPH IS CHANGED TO READ AS
 FOLLOWS:

                                   Equipment                                                     Quantity
           1.    SSPC Publications Volume 1 and 2                                                1 set
           2.    “Positector 6000”                                                               2 each
           3.    NIST calibration standards                                                      2 sets
           4.    Plastic shims                                                                   2 sets
           5.    “Dew Check” conditions meter (fully electronic)                                 2 each
           6.    Testex “Press-O-Film” test kits (appropriate size)                              2 each
           7.    Digital thermometer, 1% accuracy                                                2 each
           8.    Disposal latex gloves (sizes as needed)                                         200 pairs
           9.    “Tyvek” suits (sizes as needed)                                                 100 each
           10.   Portable flashlight 14,000 candle power                                         2 each
           11.   Coating inspection mirrors                                                      6 each
           12.   SSPC Visual Standard Vis 1                                                      2 each
           13.   SSPC Visual Standard Vis 2                                                      2 each
           14.   Chlor*Test surface chloride test kits                                           As Required
           15.   Respirators (self contained breathing apparatus)                                As Required
                 shall be properly fitted for each person designated
                 by the Engineer complete with appropriate
                 chemical cartridges as specified by the
                 manufacturer.

THE FOLLOWING IS ADDED:
         The Contractor shall have available for use by the Project Manager one (01) dry film thickness – Tooke
     Gauge. This will only need to be provided if requested by the Project Manager.

 514.15 Method of Measurement.

 THE FOLLOWING IS ADDED AFTER THE FIRST SENTENCE:
         Metalizing existing steel bridges will not be measured, and payment will be made for the quantity in the
 Proposal adjusted for Change Orders except as provided for in Subsection 109.01.

 THE FOLLOWING IS ADDED:
       Cleaning, If and Where Directed by the Engineer, will be measured on a lump sum basis.

 514.16 Basis 0f Payment.

 THE FOLLOWING IS ADDED:
        Pay Item                                                                                    Pay Unit
        METALIZING BRIDGES – EXISTING STEEL                                                         TON
        CLEANING, IF AND WHERE DIRECTED                                                             LUMPS SUM



 Route 35 over Manasquan River Bridge Rehabilitation
 Monmouth and Ocean Counties                                                                                 Page 114
                      SECTION 518 – BRIDGE DECK REHABILITATION
518.02 Description.
A.
THE SECTION IS DELETED AND REPLACED WITH THE FOLLOWING:
       A.       Repair of Concrete Deck and Sidewalks: This work shall consist of the removal and disposal of
       loose concrete, the preparation of the surface, cleaning and replacement of the existing reinforcement steel,
       application of epoxy bonding coat, and placing of concrete patch materials as shown on the plans for the
       bridge deck and sidewalks of ONLY the spans over the north and south bin abutments.

518.02 Materials.
     A. Repair of Concrete Deck and Sidewalks
        THE SECOND “OTHER MATERIALS” REFERENCE IS CHANGED TO:

          Epoxy Bonding Coat ……………………………………………………………………………912.06

          THE FIRST SENTENCE OF THE SECOND PARAGRAPH IS CHANGED TO:

           To verify the approved product listing of quick-setting patching materials that may be used, the
     Contractor is advised to study the “Bureau of Material‟s Approved List” on the following NJDOT website:
     http://www.state.nj.us/transportation/eng/technology/materials

     B.    Membrane Waterproofing.
          THE FIRST SENTENCE OF THE FIRST PARAGRAPH IS CHANGED TO:

           To verify approved membrane waterproofing products, the Contractor is advised to study the “Bureau of
     Material‟s        Approved          List”        on       the    following          NJDOT          website:
     http://www.state.nj.us/transportation/eng/technology/materials

     C.    Concrete Deck Overlay Protective System.
          THE SECOND SENTENCE OF SUBPART 6 IS CHANGED TO:

           To verify approved listing of Concrete Deck Overlay Protective Systems that may be used, the Contractor
     is advised to study the “Bureau of Material‟s Approved List” on the following NJDOT website:
     http://www.state.nj.us/transportation/eng/technology/materials
518.04 Repair of Concrete Deck.
THE TITLE IS CHANGED TO:

518.04 Repair of Concrete Deck and Sidewalks.
      The words “and sidewalks” are added to this entire subsection after the word “deck” and “decks”, wherever
referred to in this subsection.


518.06 Concrete Deck Overlay Protective System.
     C. Furnishing and Installation.
           13. Saw Cut Grooving.
        THE FIRST SENTENCE IS CHANGED TO:

             After the completion of the curing time specified in C.12. the overlay shall be sawcut grooved
             according to Subsection 501.15, Item 3., provided that the concrete has attained a strength of at least
             4000 psi as determined from cylinders that are cast during the placement.

518.09 Basis of Payment.
THE FIRST PAY ITEM IS DELETED AND REPLACED WITH;


Route 35 over Manasquan River Bridge Rehabilitation
Monmouth and Ocean Counties                                                                                Page 115
             Pay Item                                                                                                                       Pay Unit
            REPAIR OF CONCRETE DECK, TYPE B                                                                                                 SQUARE FOOT
            REPAIR OF CONCRETE DECK, TYPE C                                                                                                 SQUARE FOOT

ADD THE FOLLOWING AT THE END OF THE SECTION:

   Repair Areas of Sidewalks, as designated on the Plans will be included for payment under REPAIR OF
CONCRETE DECK, TYPE B, or REPAIR OF CONCRETE DECK, TYPE C, as determined by the Engineer.




THE FOLLOWING NEW SECTION IS ADDED:

                             SECTION 523– EXODERMIC BRIDGE DECK SYSTEM
523.01 Description.
      This work shall consist of the furnishing and installing steel grid panels, metal forms and cast-in-place high-
performance concrete (HPC) in all the approach spans, flanking spans and spans over the counterweight, as shown
in the contract plans. Produce steel grid panels according to Manufacturer‟s recommendations. Purchase the steel
grid panels for the patented Exodermic deck from:

            L.B. Foster Company                                                          American Bridge Manufacturing
            1016 Greentree Road                                                          2000 American Bridge Way
            Pittsburgh, PA 15220                               or                        Coraopolis, PA 15108
            TEL: (412) 928-7820                                                          TEL: (412) 631-3040
            FAX: (412) 928-3514                                                          FAX: (412) 631-4001

or other licensed Exodermic deck steel grid panel Manufacturers such as:

            The D.S. Brown Company
            300 E. Cherry Street
            North Baltimore, OH
            TEL: (419) 257-3561
            FAX: (419) 257-2200
            Website: dsbrown.com

(All royalty payments are paid by licensed Manufacturers.) Licensing status and other information can be obtained
from:

            D.S. Brown Company
            Exodermic deck technology.

    Notify the Engineer of the name, address, telephone number, and contact person of the steel grid panel
Manufacturer.

523.02 Materials.
Steel Grid Panels:
           Structural Steel – ................................................................................................................................. 917.10
           (ASTM A992 Structural Tees with a minimum 0.20% copper content, unless plans show otherwise.)
           Galvanized Coatings and Repair Methods .......................................................................................... 917.12
           Leveling Bolts ........................................................................................................... ASTM A307, Grade A
           Nuts ........................................................................................................................................... ASTM A563
           Stud Shear Connectors ........................................................................................................................ 503.10



Route 35 over Manasquan River Bridge Rehabilitation
Monmouth and Ocean Counties                                                                                                                              Page 116
            Use ASTM A36 for the distribution bars and miscellaneous plates. Vertical sheet metal form pans installed
            in the grid prior to galvanizing shall conform to the latest specification for ASTM A1008 or A1011.

             Use galvanized steel, sheet metal conforming to ASTM A653 for the forms.

Cast-In-Place High-Performance Concrete (HPC):
          Admixtures:
             Air-Entraining ................................................................................................................................. 905.01
             Chemical .......................................................................................................................................... 905.02
             Reinforcement Steel for Structures .................................................................................................. 915.01
          Mineral:
               Fly Ash ......................................................................................................................................... 919.07
               Microsilica ....................................................................................................................................924
          Portland Cement .................................................................................................................................. 919.11
          Water ................................................................................................................................................... 919.15

523.03 Mix Design and Fabrication.
     Cast-In-Place High-Performance Concrete (HPC).

523.04 Construction Requirements.
      A. Steel Grid Panel Manufacturing Details.
      Prior to steel grid panel manufacture, check the proposed panel layout, and verify all shop drawing dimensions
and cross-slopes in the field for accuracy.
      Manufacture the steel grid panels with the properties and to the dimensions shown on the plans, shop drawings,
and in accordance with Section 503. Weld sizes shall be in conformance with established grid industry practice
unless otherwise indicated on the contract plans. It shall be the Contractor‟s responsibility to field verify all
dimensions in order to make necessary changes prior to fabrication. Due consideration shall be given to the
placement of leveling devices to provide adequate clearance for their field adjustment from above using a socket
wrench and for adequate clearance for field placement of headed shear studs. The use of tertiary or supplemental
bars to develop composite action between the concrete deck and the steel grid shall not be allowed.
      Gas Metal Arc Welding (MIG) may be used for steel grid panel manufacture.
      Use the Bridge Grid Flooring Manufacturers Association current standards for dimension tolerances.
      After the attachment of all edge bars, leveling devices (with clearance for on-top field adjustment), and other
components, galvanize the grid according to Subsection 917.12. Repair defects in galvanizing as specified in
Subsection 503.14. Leveling bolts need not be galvanized if minimum to cover over the bolts of 2.5 inches is
provided.
      Identify each steel grid panel for correct placement on the structure. Support the steel grid panels with wood or
similar blocks to avoid distortion or other damage during transportation and storage.
      Lifting locations and procedures shall be included on the shop drawing submission. Care shall be taken to
avoid twisting of the panels or bending of the panels in the distribution bar direction. [Use of multiple pick points is
recommended].
      Any Contractor proposed changes, additions, substitutions to the details/dimensions shall be accompanied by
calculations sealed and signed by a Licensed Professional Engineer licensed to practice in the State of New Jersey.

       B. Steel Grid Panel Installation:
       1. Panel layout shown in contract plans is suggested. The fabricator shall develop the layout and detail it in
           the shop drawings. The layout is subject to approval by the Engineer. When rehabilitating a structure,
           and prior to steel grid panel installation, blast clean the top surface of beam flanges, and the surfaces of
           concrete or reinforcing that will be in contact with new concrete, according to the following:
               a. Blast clean all surfaces to be in contact with new concrete. Remove all grease and dirt. Remove
                   all rust and mortar which is not firmly bonded to the surface being cleaned. Rust and concrete
                   deposits which are firmly bonded and cannot be removed by blast cleaning may remain. A light
                   coating of orange rust that forms on steel surfaces after blast cleaning is not considered
                   detrimental to bond and may remain. Remove all debris created by blast cleaning.
               b. After structural slab wetting and immediately before placing concrete, use stiff, nylon-bristle
                   brooms to brush a thin (approximately 3 mm) coating of grout into the prepared surfaces,



Route 35 over Manasquan River Bridge Rehabilitation
Monmouth and Ocean Counties                                                                                                                                  Page 117
                    including any slabs, curbs, longitudinal and transverse joints and reinforcing steel. Do not allow
                    the grout to puddle.
                c. Apply the grout with straight handled stiff, nylon-bristle brooms around reinforcing steel, and at
                    joints.
                d. Limit the application of grout, according to atmospheric conditions, to that area which will be
                    covered with new concrete before the grout begins to dry. Dry bonding grout appears light grey
                    in color and has a chalky texture. Do not place concrete on dry bonding grout. Concrete
                    placement operations must be interrupted if dry bonding grout is encountered. Install
                    construction dams, wait at least 48 hours, remove dry grout by blast cleaning, and place new
                    grout and concrete, all in accordance with this specification.
                e. Place positive-tie-downs at a maximum spacing of 4 feet.
                f. Repeat blast cleaning if more than 48 hours pass before bonding grout placement begins.
     2.   Check the steel grid panels for defects and identification. Repair or replace steel grid panels or metal forms
           damaged during shipment and site storage to the satisfaction of the Engineer.
     3.   Position steel grid panels on the steel beams and align with adjacent panels. Measure from fixed points to
           avoid cumulative error. Adjust elevations with the attached leveling devices and square-up as necessary.
     4.   After sheet metal form and miscellaneous form installation, attach the shear studs through openings in the
           steel grid panels as per Subsection 501.10. With precise layout, and the Engineer‟s permission, shear
           studs may be welded in place prior to placing the steel grid panels. Sheet metal forms shall be installed in
           such a manner as to minimize leakage.
     5.   Break the ceramic ferrules around the welded studs, and remove all debris.

     C. High-Performance Concrete Placement:
     Apply the provisions of Section 501 and the following modifications:
     1. Install epoxy coated reinforcing steel in accordance with Subsection 501.08. Position the top rebars, which
          run in the same direction as the tertiary bars with the vertical studs, a minimum of 1 inch away from the
          tertiary bars.
     2. Add the following to Section 501.10:
          a. Introduce coarse aggregate, along with approximately 2/3 of the total mixing water, into the mixer
                and mix for a minimum of 10 minutes. Add the fine aggregate, admixtures, cement, fly ash,
                microsilica, and remaining mixing water and mix completely.
          b. Have the aggregate manufacturer supply a service representative at the site for the first two days of
                concrete placement operations to assist in the control of concrete mixing and placement operations.
     3. Handle and place concrete according to Subsections 501.10 to 501.12. No waivers will be granted. Insert
          concrete vibrators deeper at the haunch and full depth areas between panels.
          a. During concrete placement, wash off any mortar that leaks through the steel grid panels and drips
                onto any structural steel.
          b. Test the concrete according to Section 914.
     4. Cure concrete according to Subsection 501.17, except that only a continuous 14-day wet cure is allowed.
     5. Make any repairs as per the provisions of Section 518. In addition, the Engineer will reject any concrete
          represented by a cylinder set with an average compressive strength less than 4400 psi, or an individual
          cylinder with a compressive strength less than 4000 psi. Proposed repairs shall be submitted to the
          Engineer for approval.
     6. The loading limitations of Subsection 501.24 apply, except that concrete cylinder sets designated for early
          loading must attain an average compression strength of 4400 psi, or greater, with no individual cylinder
          less than 4000 psi.

523.05 Method of Measurement.
     Exodermic deck will not be measured and payment will be made for the quantity in the Proposal.

523.06 Basis of Payment.
     Payment will be made at the unit price bid per square foot of Exodermic deck stated in the Proposal. Include
the cost of all labor, materials, and equipment necessary to complete the work in the square foot bid price, which
includes High Performance Concrete. Reinforcement steel required as detailed in the plans is paid for under
“Reinforcement Steel, Epoxy-coated”.



Route 35 over Manasquan River Bridge Rehabilitation
Monmouth and Ocean Counties                                                                                    Page 118
     Make progress payments on a per span basis as follows:
     1. 40 percent of the estimate area after all steel grid panels and reinforcing is properly placed.
     2. 40 percent of the estimate area after concrete placement, and curing initiated.
     3. Pay the remainder after curing is complete and the deck construction accepted by the Engineer.

     Payment will be made under:
         Pay Item                                                                         Pay Unit
        EXODERMIC DECK SYSTEM                                                             SQUARE FOOT


THE FOLLOWING NEW SECTION IS ADDED:

                               SECTION 524 – VINYL SHEET PILING
524.01 Description.
      This work shall consist of furnishing and installation of vinyl sheet piles as part of a new bulkhead to be
constructed in front of the existing north timber bulkhead.
      The work shall also consist of furnishing, installation and testing of earth anchors to support the vinyl sheet
piles and furnishing and placement of in-fill soil between the existing and proposed bulkheads.

524.02 Materials.
     A. Vinyl Sheet Piles
        Sheet pile profile shall be manufactured with an interlocking feature that ensures adjacent panels maintain
        alignment. The sheeting shall be UV resistant, homogeneous, uniform in color, free from visible cracks,
        and free from other injurious defects. Manufacturer‟s extrusion facility shall have at least 5 years
        experience with the manufacturing of vinyl sheet piling and 10 years experience with the manufacturing of
        other PVC parts. The sheeting shall be Shoreguard 950 as manufactured by Crane Materials International
        of Atlanta, Georgia or approved equal. The color shall be brown.
        Acceptable manufacturers of vinyl sheet piling are:
             a. Northstar Vinyl Products, LLC of Kennsaw, GA
                  800-558-6702
             b. Crane Materials International of Atlanta, GA
                  866-867-3762
        Pile Capping shall be as recommended by the manufacturer and approved by the Engineer to match the
        proposed sheet piles.
     B. Earth Anchors
        Earth anchors shall be Manta Ray anchors as manufactured by Foresight Products, LLC of Commerce
        City, Co. or Williams Form Engineering Corp. of Grand Rapids, MI, or approved equal.
     C. Anchor Rods and other Hardware
        All steel for anchor rods, anchor rod couplers, washers, turnbuckles, nuts, bolts, washers, and all other
        hardware shall be of steel with dual coating system consisting of zinc coating (galvanizing) and coal tar
        epoxy-polyamide paint. Coal tar epoxy-plyamide paint shall be applied immediately after the installation
        of all connections except that anchor rods excluding threaded ends, shall be painted at least 72 hours
        before the installation. All galvanized surfaces to receive coal tar epoxy-polyamide paint shall be cleaned
        according to the procedure given under Painting Galvanized Steel in Steel Structures Painting Manual.
        Galvanizing shall not be damaged during the cleaning process.
     D. Drainage-Filtration Elements
        Drainage-filtration elements shall be 3 inch long flanged Blue Marlin Filter as manufactured by Blue
        Marlin Filter, Inc. of Marco Island, Florida or approved equal.
     E. In-Fill Soil
        In-fill material placed between the existing and proposed bulkheads shall be I-9 material with the added
        restriction that the maximum particle size shall not exceed ¾ inch.
     F. Geotextiles




Route 35 over Manasquan River Bridge Rehabilitation
Monmouth and Ocean Counties                                                                                 Page 119
          Geotextile placed in front of the existing bulkhead, at the east and west end terminations of the new
          bulkhead, shall follow material specifications of NJDOT Standard Specifications, latest edition, Section
          919.06, Geotextiles Section 2. – Roadway Stabilization, Riprap Filter, Retaining Structure Filter.

524.03 Submittals.
    A. Vinyl Sheet Piles and Capping
        The following documentation shall be submitted to the Engineer for approval at least thirty (30) days prior
        to the scheduled bulkhead installation:
               Records documenting a minimum of five years experience in driving sheet piles and a minimum
                   of five previous vinyl sheeting jobs of similar or greater scope. Names of individuals (with
                   address, affiliation, title, and telephone number) who can attest to the adequacy of the work done
                   on these projects shall be submitted.
               Shop drawings showing elevation, plan, and cross-sections of the proposed vinyl bulkhead
                   together with the existing timber bulkhead. Shop drawings shall also be provided showing the
                   ends where the proposed bulkhead ties in with the existing bulkhead.
               Catalog cuts of proposed sheet pile capping.
               Method of installing the sheeting, including hammer information.
               Test reports documenting the testing and data pertaining to the vinyl sheeting material properties.
    B. Earth Anchors
        The following documentation shall be submitted to the Engineer for approval at least thirty (30) days prior
        to the scheduled bulkhead installation:
               Records documenting a minimum of three years experience in Manta Ray or approved equal earth
                   anchor installation and a minimum of five previous anchoring jobs of similar or greater scope.
                   Names of individuals (with address, affiliation, title, and telephone number) who can attest to the
                   adequacy of the work done on these projects shall be submitted.
               Shop drawings, test reports, construction sequence, and documentation of properties of all
                   materials to be used shall be submitted to the Engineer prior to installation. Shop drawings shall
                   include, but not be limited to the following:
                        a) Proposed temporary platform and any other related access work required to install the
                            anchors.
                        b) Anchor schedule giving:
                                   Load for each anchor
                                   Type and size of anchor
                                   Total anchor length
                        c) A drawing of the Manta Ray earth anchor system and corrosion protection
                        d) Detailed description of the proposed procedures, including specific makes and models of
                            equipment to be used for driving Manta Ray anchors.
                        e) Detailed description of proposed procedures and applicable manufacturer‟s literature for
                            the equipment to be used for pulling Manta Ray anchors to their locked position,
                            including but not limited to the following:
                                   Diagrams showing the arrangement of the pulling equipment relative to the
                                      anchor and the calibration of the loading measuring device.
                                   The Contractor‟s proposed equipment set-ups for monitoring movement of the
                                      existing bulkhead during installation and pulling the Manta Ray anchors.
                                   The Contractor shall also submit a report to the Engineer within 5 working days
                                      after completion of the Manta Ray anchor work containing as-built drawings
                                      showing the locations of the anchors and total anchor lengths.
    C. Anchor Rods and other Hardware
        Applicable manufacturer certification and/or literature for anchor rods, anchorage fittings, and accessories
        shall be submitted to the Engineer for approval at least thirty (30) days prior to the scheduled bulkhead
        installation.
    D. Drainage-Filtration Elements
        Dimensions and method of installation of drainage-filtration elements shall be submitted to the Engineer
        for approval at least thirty (30) days prior to the scheduled bulkhead installation.
    E. In-Fill Soil



Route 35 over Manasquan River Bridge Rehabilitation
Monmouth and Ocean Counties                                                                                  Page 120
         The following documentation shall be submitted to the Engineer for approval at least thirty (30) days prior
         to the scheduled bulkhead installation:
               Gradation of the in-fill soil.
    F.   Backflow Check Valve at the Outlet End of 18” RCP Outfall Extension
         Dimensions and method of attachment to outfall end of pipe, type of valve, manufacturer catalogs, and
         accessories shall be submitted 30 days prior to the scheduled bulkhead construction.

524.04 Delivery and Storage.
     Upon delivery of materials to the site, Contractor shall visually inspect all materials for defects or damage. If
serious defect or damage is detected, Contractor shall notify Engineer immediately. Any defective vinyl sheet pile
components shall be replaced at no cost to the State. Bundled vinyl sheet piles shall be stored on relatively level
surface with a slight pitch to allow water to drain. Contractor shall not break bundled sheets until ready for
immediate installation.

524.05 Installation.
     The Contractor shall follow the installation sequence shown on the Contract Drawings. Additionally, the
following requirements shall be followed:
      A. Before installation the Contractor shall inspect bulkhead components including anchors and vinyl sheeting
          for breaching of coating. If breaches exist, they shall be repaired according to manufacturer‟s
          recommendations. If any part is deemed defective beyond repair by the Engineer, it shall be replaced at
          no additional cost to the State.
      B. Vinyl sheet piles shall be driven using a guiding system with adequate precautions to ensure that they are
          driven plumb. The completed piling shall be vertical, in line, driven to the prescribed depth, cut off to a
          straight line at the prescribed elevation, and practically watertight at the joints. Sheet piling shall not be
          driven more than ½-inch per foot out of plumb in the plane of the wall, nor more than 1/16-inch per foot
          “out” of plumb perpendicular to the plane of the wall, nor more than 1-inch per foot “in” of plumb
          perpendicular to the plane of the wall.
      C. Sheet piles shall be driven preferably in pairs to the depth specified on the plans. The method of
          construction shall conform to Section 505 except that lighter driving equipment or vibratory pile drivers
          may be used. Jetting shall not be used without the written approval from the Engineer. Under no
          circumstances shall the Contractor cut-off or install shorter sheets without written authorization from the
          Engineer. Sheet piles driven out of interlock with adjacent sheets or otherwise damaged shall be removed
          and replaced by new sheet piles at the Contractor‟s expense.
      D. Wales, anchor rods and anchors shall be installed as noted on the plans.
      E. The Contractor shall extend existing drainage pipe through the vinyl sheet piles as noted on the drawings.
      F. In-fill soil between existing and proposed bulkheads shall be placed as noted on the Plans.
      G. The Contractor shall install sheet piles between November 1 and November 30, and in coordination with
          Bogan‟s Basin as not to interfere with their business operations. This work will not be done at the same
          time as the contaminated soil removal at the north abutment.
      H. Water levels in the river vary rapidly during the day. It is the Contractor‟s responsibility to check
          predicted tidal variations of the Manasquan River at the project location to plan and optimize his work.
          The Contractor shall bid the job taking into account the large tidal variations in water levels. It is also the
          Contractor‟s responsibility to visit the site of the bulkhead prior to bidding in order to envision the
          construction aspects of the project including the possible need for the installation of a temporary platform
          above the river bed and to consider the clearance under the bridge in installing the sheeting, the piles and
          the earth anchors. No claim shall be made by the Contractor for any additional cost resulting from his
          lack of knowledge of the site conditions.
      I. It is the Contractor‟s responsibility to determine with the utility company the location of the gas pipe on
          the eastern side of the bulkhead and any other existing pipes. The Contractor shall be responsible for any
          damage to the pipe or any other existing utilities as a result of his bulkhead installation procedure.

524.06 Method of Measurement.
     Vinyl sheet piles will be measured by the square foot of projected area inclusive of the embedded and exposed
areas and exclusive of indentation of pile section.




Route 35 over Manasquan River Bridge Rehabilitation
Monmouth and Ocean Counties                                                                                     Page 121
      Earth anchors will be measured by the number of earth anchors installed. No separate measurement shall be
made for the components of the earth anchors including Manta Ray anchor or approved equal, anchor rod, couplers,
washers, nuts or any other components of the earth anchor.
      Geotextile will be measured by the Square Yard.
      Drainage-filtration elements will be measured by the number of elements installed.
      Bolts, screws, threaded bars, washers, nuts, or other hardware that is needed for tying the proposed bulkhead to
the timber bulkhead and for attaching the capping to the vinyl sheeting will not be measured, the cost thereof will be
included in the vinyl sheet piling unit cost.

524.07 Basis of Payment.
Payment will be made under:

           Pay Item                                                                        Pay Unit
         VINYL SHEET PILING                                                                SQUARE FOOT
         EARTH ANCHORS                                                                     UNIT
         DRAINAGE-FILTRATION ELEMENTS                                                      UNIT
         IN-FILL SOIL                                                                      CUBIC YARD
         GEOTEXTILE                                                                        SQUARE YARD

      No separate payment will be made for furnishing all labor, equipment, temporary access work, materials,
setup, mobilization and demobilization, storage, disposal of unused piles, repair or replacement of damaged piles
and incidentals necessary to satisfactorily complete the installation of the vinyl sheeting as shown on the contract
drawings and specified herein. All costs thereof shall be included in the item VINYL SHEET PILING. Parts of
sheeting cut off will not be included for payment.
      No separate payment will be made for furnishing all labor, equipment, temporary access work, materials,
equipment, setup, mobilization and demobilization, storage, disposal of unused anchors, repair or replacement of
damaged anchors and incidentals necessary to satisfactorily complete the installation of the earth anchors as shown
on the contract drawings and specified herein. All costs thereof shall be included in the item EARTH ANCHORS.
      No separate payment will be made for furnishing all labor, equipment, temporary access work, equipment,
setup, transportation, and incidentals necessary to satisfactorily complete the placement of the in-fill soil as shown
on the contract drawings and specified herein. All costs thereof shall be included in the item IN-FILL SOIL.
      No separate payment will be made for capping, bolts, screws, threaded bars, washers, nuts or other hardware
that is needed for tying the proposed bulkhead to the timber bulkheads and for attaching the capping to the vinyl
sheeting. All costs thereof will be included in the item VINYL SHEET PILING.
      No separate payment will be made for the installation of the drainage-filtration elements. All costs thereof
shall be included in the item DRAINAGE-FILTRATION ELEMENTS.
      No separate payment shall be made for extending the existing reinforced concrete drainage pipe or the
backflow check valve required at its outfall end, through the vinyl sheeting. All costs thereof will be included in the
item VINYL SHEET PILING.


THE FOLLOWING NEW SECTION IS ADDED:


SECTION 525 - BASCULE SPAN FIBER REINFORCED POLYMER (FRP) SIDEWALK

525.01 Description.
      This work shall consist of the installation of fiber reinforced polymer (FRP) sidewalk panels on the bascule
span.
      This work shall also consist of applying a non-skid surface for the FRP sidewalk.

                                                 MATERIALS
525.02 Materials.
     FRP panels shall be as manufactured by the following or approved equal:
         1. Bedford Reinforced Plastics, Inc.


Route 35 over Manasquan River Bridge Rehabilitation
Monmouth and Ocean Counties                                                                                   Page 122
               264 Reynoldsdale Road
               Bedford, PA 15522-7401
               Product Name: Prodeck 4 Composite Decking
               Contact: Mr. Tom Wright (814) 623-8125
         2.    Martin Marietta Composites
               2501 Blue Ridge Road
               Raleigh, NC 27607
               Product Name: DuraSpan 500
               Contact: Matt Sams (919) 882-2310
         3.    Strongwell
               400 Commonwealth Avenue, PO Box 580
               Bristol, VA 24203-0580
               Product Name: EXTREN Series 4”x 4” x ¼” square tubes with EXTREN Series 500 3/8” Plates.
               Contact: Dan Witcher (276) 645-8151

    Materials shall conform to the following:
        A. Fiber type. Any commercial grade E-glass fiber is permitted to produce a FRP (fiber reinforced
               polymer) composite bridge deck module. The fiber can be in the form of unidirectional rovings of
               any size, weight and in the form of continuous strand mats, bidirectional or multidirectional fabrics
               of any weight. The fabrics can be stitched/non-stitched, woven/non-woven, knitted or braided.
        B. Resin type. Only thermoset resins, specifically commercial grade vinyl ester resin are permitted in
               FRP composite bridge deck module production. Vinyl ester has good stability against harsh
               environments compared to other thermoset resins and more ductile than epoxy.
        C. Fiber architecture. The performance of FRP composite bridge deck modules depends on the relative
               volume of fiber and resin present in the composites. Since fibers are main load resisting
               constituents in composites, the fiber content should be high compared to resin content. The fiber
               content in composite deck modules is normally expressed in terms of fiber volume fraction.
                     The overall fiber volume fraction in a given FRP composite bridge deck module made of
               fibers/fabrics should be no more than 60% and no less than 25%. The overall upper bound fiber
               volume fraction of 60% is the practical limit from the manufacturing point of view due to wet-out
               problems in the part beyond 60% and the overall lower bound fiber volume fraction of 25% is to be
               maintained in the part to prevent any catastrophic shear failure, or excessive deck flexibility.
                     The ratio of fiber reinforcement in the minor bending direction of the FRP composite bridge
               deck module should be no less than one-fourth of total fiber reinforcement in the major bending
               direction.
        D. Laminate type. The laminates in a FRP composite bridge deck module are built by orienting the
               fibers/fabric in various directions. Fiber orientation is expressed in terms of angle with respect to
               the main bending direction of the part. For laminates resisting bending stress, the fibers should be
               distributed along the major bending direction of the part i.e., should be oriented at 00 (i.e., along the
               major bending axis) and for laminates resisting shear stress, the fiber should be distributed in other
               directions i.e., should be oriented at 900, ± 450.
        E. Other materials. The other materials such as additives, fillers, pigments, fire retardants etc
               appropriate with the E-glass fiber and vinyl ester resin are permitted.
        F. Mechanical properties of constituent materials. The fiber and resin materials acquired from a
               supplier shall be certified in accordance with ASTM standards. The fiber and resin materials must
               be accompanied with a certification document clearly stating the type of material and its mechanical
               properties. The mechanical properties of reinforcing fibers, resin and FRP laminates shall be
               determined as per the following ASTM standard tests:

                                                                                                   ASTM
               Materials              Properties
                                                                                                   Standards

                                      Tensile strength and modulus of elasticity                   D 3379
               Fibers
                                      Fiber volume content                                         D 3171




Route 35 over Manasquan River Bridge Rehabilitation
Monmouth and Ocean Counties                                                                                    Page 123
               Resin                  Tensile strength and modulus of elasticity                D 638
               Laminates              Tensile strength and modulus of elasticity                D 3039
                                      Flexural strength and modulus of elasticity               D 790
                                      Shear strength                                            D 3846

          G.  Wearing surface. The thickness of the polymer concrete wearing surface shall be in conformance to
              the Manufacturing Section of this document and the field application of the wearing surface shall be
              in conformance to Construction Section.
                   Polymer concrete overlay shall be as manufactured by the following or approved equal:
               1. Tamms Industries
                   3835 State Route 72
                   Kirkland, IL 60146
                   Product Name: Flexolith
                   Contact: (800) 862-2667
              2. Transpo Industries, Inc.
                   20 Jones Street
                   New Rochelle, NY 10801
                   Product Name: T-48 Thin Overlay System
                   Contact: (914) 636-1000
           H. Adhesive. Epoxy adhesive for bonding fiberglass panel to fiberglass panel shall be as manufactured
              by the following or approved equal:
              1. Magnolia Plastics, Inc.
                   5547 Peachtree Industrial Boulevard
                   Chamblee, GA 30341-2296
                   Product Name: Magnobond 56 A/B
                   Contact: (770) 451-2777
              2. Ashland Specialty Chemical Company
                   Specialty Polymers and Adhesives Division
                   Corporate Office: P.O. Box 2219
                   Columbus, OH 43216
                   Product Name: Pliogrip Adhesive systems 8000/6660
                   Contact: (800) 322-6580

                                                     CONSTRUCTION
525.03 Manufacturing.
      The FRP deck manufacturer shall be certified to be qualified under the provisions of ISO 9000, 9001 standards
for manufacturing performance. If the FRP deck manufacturer‟s facility is not qualified as an ISO 9000, 9001
facilities, then the FRP deck manufacturer must supply a Quality Assurance Plan which clearly states how the
manufacturer will ensure that the deck products produced will be of consistent and required quality.
      The FRP deck manufacturer shall supply the Contractor with manufacturer‟s process specification that details
the manufacture of FRP composite deck modules. The process specification shall have the following details:
      A. Materials. The specification shall include details on fiber and resin such as fiber architecture, laminate
             type, mechanical properties etc. to be used in the FRP deck manufacturing process. The specification on
             materials shall be in conformance with the Materials Section.
      B. Processing. The selection of the composite processing technique will be the choice of the FRP composite
             deck manufacturer. Processing of constituent materials (fibers and resin) into composite bridge deck
             module shall be accomplished by varying techniques that include pultrusion, resin transfer molding, wet
             lay-up, SCRIMP and others.
      C. Curing. The process specification shall specify curing temperature (room temperature), pressure
             (vacuum), RH and time to cure. The FRP deck modules shall be prevented from any deformation during
             curing.
      D. Assembly. The modules shall be connected in the manufacturing plant to produce FRP panel. A module
             shall be fabricated to maximum length and width and assembled to FRP panel with maximum dimensions
             for ease of transportation by trailers.



Route 35 over Manasquan River Bridge Rehabilitation
Monmouth and Ocean Counties                                                                                Page 124
                  The specification shall address the details on connecting modules into composite bridge deck
            panels. The modules shall be connected either by bonding, bolting, or combination of bonding and
            bolting. The modules should be connected so as to have proper horizontal and vertical shear transfer
            from one module to another.
      E. Wearing Surface. Wearing surface shall be field applied. The wearing surface materials shall be in
            accordance to Materials Section. The polymer concrete wearing surface shall be of ¼” thick and shall be
            applied after surface preparation of deck as per Construction Section.
                  The manufacturer shall apply the wearing surface in accordance with material supplier instructions,
            and also follow instructions as per Construction Section.
                  The process specification shall specify the details on reinforcement of field joints that shall be
            applied in accordance with Construction Section.
      The Manufacturer‟s process specification shall define specific quality assurance testing to be conducted to
assure that the finished composite deck module/panel has been manufactured to the quality and workmanship levels
necessary to meet the functional and structural performance requirements for the intended application. As a
minimum static and fatigue tests have to be conducted on the FRP module/panel to verify the structural properties of
the module/panel.
      Transportation. The sections shall be manufactured to maximum dimensions for ease of transportation on
trailers. They shall also be provided with proper lifting devices or methods to prevent damage during shipping and
unloading.
      Marking. The manufacturer shall provide tags or markings on each section shipped with details such as name
of the manufacturer, date manufactured, etc.
      Joints. The sections shall be manufactured so as to have adequate shear transfer between panels bonded in the
shop and spliced in the field. All field joints shall be reinforced with two layers of glass fabrics of weight 24-26
oz/SY to prevent reflective cracking of wearing surface and resist thermal induced stresses.
      Documentation. The manufacturer shall assemble and maintain a project documentation file for the FRP
bridge project. Project documentation shall include:
      1. Design data and calculations
      2. Approved fabrication drawings
      3. Manufacturing quality control records
      4. Installation instructions
      5. Terms of warranty
      This documentation shall be made available for review and copying during the project and shall be archived at
the manufacturer‟s facility for a period of at least five years after the product is shipped. Documentation shall be
copied and submitted as record to the owner.

525.04 Design.
     A. Deflection criteria. The maximum global deflection (deflection of stringer) in FRP bridge deck stiffened
         with stringer or concrete girder system shall be limited to L/800, where L is the effective span of support
         stringers or girders.
               The maximum deck deflection (deflection of deck relative to two contiguous stringers or
         diaphragms as per the traffic flow) shall be limited to S/500, where S is the center-to-center distance
         between the stringers or diaphragms.
               The maximum local deflection (deflection of top flange of deck) shall be limited to s/100, where s is
         the distance between two contiguous webs in the FRP deck module.
     B. Strength criteria. The deck shall be designed to resist the following two loading conditions: 1) 85 psf
         pedestrian load and 2) HS 25 wheel load on sidewalk with an impact of 25%. An increase in allowable
         stress of 150% shall be permitted for HS25 wheel loading. The failure load of the original deck under
         static loading shall be no less than 125 kips, which includes knockdown factors.
               The FRP bridge deck system (deck supported on stringers) should be capable of sustaining 2 million
         cycles at a load range 1 – 26 kips under fatigue loading.
     C. Flexure Criteria. The maximum allowable bending strain in FRP bridge deck shall be limited to 20% of
         strain to failure under service loads including environmental/aging effects.
               The maximum allowable dead load strain shall be limited to 10% of strain to failure of FRP
         composite material. This includes 3 to 6 psf of wearing surface.
     D. Shear Criteria. The maximum allowable shear strain in FRP bridge deck shall be limited to 16% of the
         ultimate strain under service loads including environmental/aging effects.


Route 35 over Manasquan River Bridge Rehabilitation
Monmouth and Ocean Counties                                                                                 Page 125
     E.    Coefficient of thermal expansion. The maximum coefficient of thermal expansion in major and minor
           bending direction shall not exceed 5.5 x 10-6 and 9.5 x 10-6 per deg F respectively.
                The maximum Transverse Load Distribution Factor (TLDF) in FRP bridge deck system shall be
           taken no more S/5.5, where S is the center-to-center distance of stringers.
                The FRP bridge deck system shall be designed for 0% structural compositeness, between the FRP
           deck and stiffening stringers.

525.05 Construction.
     A. Transportation. The panels shall be manufactured to maximum dimensions or ease of transportation on
         trailers. The panels should be provided with proper lifting provisions to prevent any damage under
         shipping and handling loads.
     B. Deck marking. The manufacturer shall provide tags on each batch of deck panels, with details such as
         name of the manufacturer, date manufactured etc.
     C. Installation. The panels shall be installed as per the manufacturer‟s installation guide. The panels shall
         be assembled so as to have adequate shear transfer from one panel to another.
     D. Connections. The FRP bridge deck shall be connected to stringer by mechanical fasteners.
     E. Joints.
         1. Expansion joints. The type of expansion joint should be specified in the manufacturer‟s
               specification. The specification should also have the details of materials for the closure pour or
               filler material, between the deck and the back wall of the bridge seat.
         2. Field joints. All field joints shall be reinforced with two layers of glass fabrics of weight 24-26
               oz/yd2, to prevent reflective cracking of wearing surface and resist thermal induced stresses.
                      For best bonding results, the fabrics should be reinforced in the late afternoon of a hot day (i.e.,
               5 to 6 p.m.) after the water from the joint is evaporated to its maximum and the evaporation may not
               be one hundred percent.
               The joints should be effective in transferring moments between the panels and eliminate water
               seepage.
     F. Surface preparation. The surface area of the deck where the glass fabric is to be attached should be
         mechanically abraded to remove any gloss from the surface of the deck.
               The surface should be cleaned with proper chemical solvent to clean dust and chemical residue after
         30 minutes of cleaning with solvent. The fabric should be rolled over the joint, which is followed with
         the resin. The excess resin shall be removed and allowed to cure for about 24 hours prior to apply the
         wearing surface.
               During surface preparation, the minimum temperature shall be 50F and the weather condition
               should be dry.
         Application of peel ply at factory and removal at field to apply wearing surface is also permitted.
     G. Cold weather. The required FRP sidewalk installation must be scheduled to meet contract schedule.
         Contractor shall provide cold weather protection as required. Protection methods shall be submitted to
         the Engineer for approval.

525.06 Acceptance.
     A. Finished Geometric Tolerances. The finished dimensions of the FRP bridge structures shall conform to
        the following dimensional tolerances unless otherwise specified on the fabrication drawings:
         1. Overall depth: +/-¼ inch
         2. Out-of-straightness (bow): +/-1 inch per 25 feet of length
         3. Panel length and width: +/-¼ inch
     B. Submittals. Fabrication drawings shall be submitted to the Engineer for review and approval. The
          following information shall be included as a minimum:
         Cross sectional and overall dimensions
         Material references
         Recommended lifting method and locations
         Instructions and recommendations for panel delivery, storage, and installation
         Design calculations shall be submitted to the Engineer for review and approval. Calculations shall be
         prepared by a Professional Engineer licensed in the State of New Jersey.




Route 35 over Manasquan River Bridge Rehabilitation
Monmouth and Ocean Counties                                                                                      Page 126
     C.     Inspection. The quality of materials, the process of manufacture and the finished sections shall be
           subject to inspection by the Engineer. The Engineer reserves the right to hire a consulting engineer for
           the inspection of the materials delivered and installation of the materials at the site.
     D.    Rejection. The Engineer may reject any section if, in the Engineer‟s opinion, the structural integrity or
           service life of the section has been reduced due to materials, manufacture, handling, or installation.

                                                 COMPENSATION

525.07 Method of Measurement.
     Bascule Span Fiber Reinforced Polymer (FRP) Sidewalk will be measured by the square foot.
     FRP sidewalk panel overlay will not be measured.

525.08 Basis of Payment.
     Payment will be made under:
         Pay Item                                                                                     Pay Unit
         BASCULE SPAN FIBER REINFORCED POLYMER (FRP) SIDEWALK                                         SQUARE FOOT

     No separate payment will be made for the overlay material that is applied on the FRP sidewalk panel. The
Contractor shall include the cost of furnishing and applying the overlay for the Pay Item “Bascule Span Fiber
Reinforced Polymer (FRP) Sidewalk”.


                       SECTION 526 – BASCULE SPAN MEDIAN BARRIER
526.01 Description.
     This work shall consist of furnishing and installation of Bascule Span Median Barrier as shown on the contract
drawings and specified herein. Additional replacement sections shall be furnished as specified on the contract
drawings. Replacement sections shall be delivered to a location designated by the Engineer. All equipment,
materials, and labor that are required to fabricate, deliver, and install the barrier as shown on the plans and specified
herein shall be included.

526.02 Materials.
     Structural steel for median barrier shall be AASHTO M270, Grade 50 (ASTM A709, Grade 50). The material
conformance criteria of Section 503 shall be followed.

526.03 Inspection and Testing.
     The inspection and testing criteria of Section 503 shall be followed.

526.04 Working Drawings.
     Working Drawings shall be furnished according to Subsection 105.04.

526.05 Fabrication and Welding.
     The fabrication criteria of Section 503 shall be followed.

526.06 Shipping, Handling, and Erection.
     The criteria of Section 503 shall be followed.

526.07 Cleaning and Painting.
     Median barrier shall be galvanized and shop painted the same as the bridge railing in accordance with Section
503. Color to match proposed bridge railing.

526.08 Method of Measurement.
     Bascule Span median barrier shall be measured by the linear foot.

526.08 Basis of Payment.
     Payment will be made under:
         Pay Item                                                                                     Pay Unit


Route 35 over Manasquan River Bridge Rehabilitation
Monmouth and Ocean Counties                                                                                      Page 127
     BASCULE SPAN MEDIAN BARRIER                                                                  LINEAR FOOT


                          SECTION 527 – BASCULE SPAN BALANCING
527.01 Description.
      This work shall include balancing and balance testing the movable span to ensure compliance with the design
criteria listed on the Plans and elsewhere herein for the bascule span leaves. Balance testing shall be performed
using the dynamic strain gage procedure as described herein. This item includes the calculation and documentation
of the span balance procedure and methods. All work required to complete the span balance, including furnishing,
placing, removing and adjusting the location of the balance blocks within the counterweight and counterweight
pockets, is included in this item. The span must be kept operable in accordance with the provisions of Section
107.13, Construction Over or Adjacent to Navigable Waters
      Balance calculations shall be prepared prior to performing any work potentially affecting the span balance.
Calculations shall be based on approved shop drawings and material tests, and shall be submitted to the Engineer for
review and approval.
      The Contractor shall measure the imbalance moment and determine the location of the leaf center of gravity a
minimum of six (6) times.
             1. Existing Condition: Prior to construction to determine the existing balance condition and adjust the
                 balance to 700 lbs. toe heavy per girder.
             2. Stage I completion
             3. Stage II completion
             4. Stage III completion
             5. Stage IV completion - After leaf construction is completed to determine the balance condition and to
                 determine the required final adjustments.
             6. Final - After Stage IV balance block adjustments, to determine if the revised imbalance is within the
                 limits specified on the Plans and as described herein. Leaf operation for final balance testing shall
                 be performed with the span drive machinery. If the second balance testing indicates that the revised
                 imbalance is not within acceptable limits, further balance block adjustments and imbalance
                 measurements are to be performed until the criteria specified on the Plans and herein are met.
      In all cases above, prior to performing balance testing, the Contractor shall submit balance calculations and
summary tables to the Engineer for review. The Contractor shall perform span balance calculations of the draw span
for the removal of existing bascule span components and installation of the new components to determine the
interim and final balance of the span. The Contractor shall update span balance calculations continually throughout
construction and at a minimum shall be prepared for each weekly opening as defined in Section 107.13
“Construction over or adjacent to Navigable Waters”. The calculations shall be formatted such that each removal
and installation is in sequential order according to the Contractor's planned schedule. The maximum calculated span
imbalance as shown on the Contract Plans shall not be exceeded at any leaf position.
      Included in this Section are the following Items:
             1. Inventory the existing balance blocks and plates in the horizontal and vertical pockets of the draw
                 span counterweight boxes. The inventory shall include documenting and recording the weight and
                 location of the existing balance blocks and plates. The existing blocks and plates shall be weight
                 measured for the inventory.
             2. In addition, as the existing bascule span components are removed and new components are installed,
                 the balance of the bascule span shall be adjusted. This work shall consist of balancing the leaves by
                 adding, removing, or shifting existing concrete or new cast iron balance blocks in the
                 counterweights to obtain interim balance of the bascule spans during the various stages of
                 construction. The installation of additional cast iron blocks and the removal and replacement of
                 existing concrete blocks with cast iron blocks shall be performed as necessary so that the bascule
                 span is balanced at all times. At the completion of the work on the bascule span, the bascule span
                 shall be toe heavy 700 pounds per girder at the lock bar assembly. This work shall be scheduled to
                 be performed after the installation of the strain gages to assist in maintaining the bascule span
                 balancing.

                                                   MATERIALS



Route 35 over Manasquan River Bridge Rehabilitation
Monmouth and Ocean Counties                                                                                  Page 128
527.02 Materials.
      New balance blocks shall be constructed of cast iron and conform to ASTM A48 of any class. Block
dimensions and quantity furnished shall be as shown on the Contract Plans. Cast iron balance blocks shall be
cleaned to meet the requirements of SSPC-SP2, Hand Tool Cleaning (as depicted in SSPC Vis. 1) prior to painting.
Case iron balance blocks shall be shop painted with one coat of epoxy mastic primer, one intermediate coat of
approved epoxy paint compatible with the prime coat system, and one final coat of approved polyurethane paint
resistant to weathering and abrasion and compatible with intermediate coat.

                                               CONSTRUCTION

527.03 Construction.
     A. Calculation of Leaf Balance During Construction. The Contractor shall submit balance calculations as
         specified herein to the Engineer for review and approval. A Professional Engineer licensed in the State of
         New Jersey shall perform the balance calculations. The calculations shall be formatted such that each
         removal and installation is in sequential order according to the Contractor's planned schedule. The
         quantity and location of balance material required within the counterweight pockets, based on the
         specified balance requirements and the weight and center of gravity of each bascule leaf shall be
         computed. These calculations shall be based on weights of approved shop details and material tests for
         the actual material on each leaf, including the counterweight box. The calculated weight shall be
         extremely accurate and account for all material, weld fillets, bolt heads, washers, nuts, paint, normal
         overruns on plate thickness, etc. The balance calculations shall incorporate the distributions of leaf
         weight in the vertical, horizontal, and transverse directions. The balance calculations and summary tables
         shall be updated by the Contractor throughout construction and be submitted to the Engineer prior to each
         weekly opening, as defined in Section 107.13 “Construction over or adjacent to Navigable Waters”. The
         balance calculations shall be approved by the Engineer before removal operations can begin. The balance
         calculations summary shall be prepared using an Excel spreadsheet. The calculations and results shall be
         submitted with a Microsoft Windows compatible CD.
               Weights for new work shall be developed on the shop drawings for each component. Summary
         balance tables shall be developed and shown on the shop drawings. Summary tables shall be developed
         for all phases of the balance and the proposed imbalances. The format of these tables shall be in
         accordance with the balance tables shown in the Plans. Temporary balance material, if used, shall be
         accounted for in the summary tables. All summary tables and back-up materials shall be submitted for
         review. A narrative shall be included with the outline of the proposed phasing, the duration of the
         imbalance condition, and all other aspects of the work in accordance with the approved construction
         schedule. This information shall be coordinated with the Contractor‟s scheduling requirements and shall
         be submitted to the Engineer for review.
               It shall be the Contractor‟s responsibility to provide temporary bracing and supports and/or
         temporary balance material as required to stabilize the movable span during construction. It shall be the
         Contractor‟s responsibility to coordinate work such that the bascule leaves are never in an unbalanced
         condition that may be detrimental in any way to the structure, electrical/mechanical components or the
         safety of construction personnel or the public.
               Review of the balance calculations, counterweight details, and quantity and location of balance
         material does not relieve the Contractor from making such changes in the counterweights and balance
         material as deemed necessary to balance each leaf. All changes shall be submitted for approval.

     B.   Measurement of Span Balance. The balance of each leaf of the movable span shall be measured using the
          dynamic strain gauging technique. The Contractor shall furnish and install all equipment, materials,
          instruments, and labor necessary to determine the imbalance by dynamic strain gauging.
                Immediately prior to strain gauge testing, the Contractor shall lubricate all trunnions to the
          satisfaction of the Engineer. The Contractor shall employ the services of an established testing company
          experienced in dynamic strain gage measurement of movable bridge imbalance, subject to approval of the
          Engineer. Such experience shall be demonstrated by identifying a minimum of six movable bridges
          including at least three trunnion bascule bridges for which the company has provided complete and
          satisfactory dynamic strain gage measurements and reporting. The measurements shall be made under
          the immediate direction of a Professional Engineer registered in the State of New Jersey who has had
          hands-on-experience measuring movable span imbalance by the dynamic strain gage procedure.


Route 35 over Manasquan River Bridge Rehabilitation
Monmouth and Ocean Counties                                                                               Page 129
               The testing company shall furnish and install the required strain gages, all cabling and transmission
         equipment, data acquisition equipment and strip chart recorders and produce fully documented reports
         detailing the results of the measurements. Acceptable testing companies include:
                 SMI Incorporated, Pittstown, NJ
                 Teledyne Engineering Services, Waburn, MA
                 Stafford Bandlow Engineering, Washington Crossing, PA.
               The approved testing company shall submit the following items to the Engineer for approval:
                     (1) Description of experimental procedure including type and method of installation of strain
                          gage rosettes, method of transmission of low level signals, data acquisition equipment
                          and/or strip chart recorders.
                     (2) Layout of span drive machinery showing proposed location of strain gages, amplifiers,
                          cable or radio links, data acquisition equipment and all associated cabling.
                     (3) Details of method of transmission of signals from shafting to data acquisition units.
                     (4) Elementary wiring diagrams of interconnection of strain gages, amplifiers, data
                          acquisition equipment, and strip chart recorders.
                     (5) Sample computations of: shaft torque from measured strains, span imbalance, curve
                          fitting, and basis for friction correction.

               Two foil resistance strain gage rosettes shall be affixed as close as practicable to each of the main
         pinion shafts, in accordance with the strain gage manufacturer‟s installation instructions. They shall be 2-
         arm 90 degree rosettes mounted such that the grids are oriented at 45 degrees with the shaft axis and the
         two rosettes shall be affixed “back-to-back”, spaced 180 degrees apart circumferentially. The gages shall
         be connected such that any bending strains in the shafts will be canceled and torsional shearing strains
         will be measured on each pinion shaft. The areas of the shafts where the gages are to be mounted shall be
         sufficiently cleaned to remove all contaminants. On each shaft, two rosettes shall be mounted at 180
         degrees from each other. The two gages shall be connected such that any direct shear forces in the shafts
         are neglected and true torsional shear is measured.
               The strain gage leads on each shaft shall be connected to a four arm amplifier. Transmission of
         signals from the gauges to the data acquisition equipment shall be either through cable links or amplified
         and then through wireless transmitters.
               Output leads from each channel of the amplifiers shall be connected to either a computer-based data
         logger provided with a two-channel strain gage module streaming the amplified data to disk at a
         minimum1-kHz sample rate, or a five channel minimum strip chart recorder with at least ten inch wide
         chart paper. An inclinometer shall be provided to provide continuous leaf angle to either the datalogging
         equipment or the strip chart recorder. The chart speed shall be step-wise adjustable and shall include a
         setting of at least 250 mm per minute. The recorder shall be capable of recording data from at least 4
         channels if it is equipped with a dedicated event marker or 5 channels if a channel is used to record
         events.
               The strains in both shafts shall be recorded simultaneously versus span opening angle during
         opening and closing to a suitable scale. The readings for all shafts shall be recorded at the same strain
         scale and the chart speed, if a strip chart recorder is used. At least 3 opening/closing runs shall be made,
         when the wind speed is less than 5 mph and the bridge deck is visibly dry. Wind-up torque in the
         operating machinery shall be released prior to each run as verified by space between the faces of the
         engaged teeth of main pinion and gears.
               The strains induced in the shafts shall be numerically converted to torque by applying fundamental
         stress-strain relationship calculations for each strain plot for both opening and closing. This data shall be
         processed to give leaf imbalance (kip-ft) versus opening angle, corrected for friction, at each trunnion.
         From them, plots of total span imbalance shall be prepared.
               Upon completion of each of the six (6) required span balancing stages, the Contractor shall submit
         five copies of a report documenting the results of the strain gage measurements. Separate reports are
         required for each leaf. The reports shall contain the following:
                     (1) Description of experimental procedure and equipment used.
                     (2) Span drive diagram showing location at which strain gages were attached and all
                           applicable gear ratios.
                     (3) Photocopies of a sample original strip chart for one complete run of each of the three sets
                           in the case of strip chart recordings or data and chart files in Excel format if recorded by a


Route 35 over Manasquan River Bridge Rehabilitation
Monmouth and Ocean Counties                                                                                     Page 130
                           data logger. They shall be annotated with strain scales, angle of opening, significant
                           ordinates, etc.
                     (4) Description of relationships and sample calculations for obtaining shaft torque from
                           strains, span imbalance from shaft torque, curve fitting, and basis for friction correction.
                     (5) Plots of the following parameters versus degree of opening during each opening/closing
                           run and fitted balance curves corrected for friction:
                                 a. Total imbalance (kip-feet) for span.
                                 b. Frictional moment (kip-feet) for span.
                     (6) Tabulation of imbalance moment at seated position for each leaf/run including the
                           average value for each leaf.
                     (7) The location of the leaf center of gravity.
                The reports will be bound between heavy plastic covers. The report shall include an introductory
          section giving the name of the bridge, the date of the measurements, weather conditions during
          measurements and any other information requested by the Engineer.
                The final imbalance measured by the procedures described herein shall be considered acceptable if:
                     (1) The allowable range of imbalance with the leaf in the seated position and the maximum
                           allowable imbalance throughout the operational travel of each leaf meets the
                           requirements stipulated on the Contract Plans.
                     (2) The location of the final center of gravity for each leaf in the seated position is as shown
                           on the Contract Plans.

               Drift tests shall also be used to corroborate the final balance of the bascule leaf by testing for a
          tendency of the leaf to move more in one direction than the other. They shall be performed as follows,
          preferably by using the regular electric motors for the operation of the leaf and the position indicator for
          measurement of drift:
                     (1) Each bascule leaf shall be raised and lowered alternately, and at three selected points in
                           its travel, as determined on the leaf position indicator, the operating power shall be cut
                           off and, with the leaf brakes released, the leaf allowed to come to a stop through the
                           friction of the trunnion and span drive system alone. Balance blocks shall be placed in
                           the pockets of the counterweights or blocks/plates shall be removed, until the angular
                           movement of the leaf (drift) in the closing direction is 1½ times greater than the drift in
                           the opening direction.
                     (2) The mid-travel and quarter-travel positions of the leaf shall be used in conducting these
                           drift tests. The minimum number of drift tests shall not be less than 2 full cycles of the
                           span opening and closing. Additional drift tests shall be performed as directed by the
                           Engineer to determine the span balance.
                     (3) Operation of the leaves by temporary drive power, and measurement of drift by means
                           other than the position indicators will be permitted subject to approval by the Engineer.
                 Records of the drift tests shall be submitted to the Engineer.

                                                COMPENSATION

527.04 Method of Measurement.
     A. Span Balancing
        No measurement shall be made for this work.
     B. Balance Block
        The quantity of balance blocks furnished shall be as shown on the Contract Drawings. Additional
        balance blocks shall be furnished if required to meet the balance criteria specified in the Contract
        Documents. If, with the Engineer‟s approval, the Contractor modifies the mass of the bascule leaves
        solely for the purpose of facilitating his/her operations, there will be no measurement made for additional
        blocks necessitated to balance such modifications.

527.05 Basis of Payment.
     A. Span Balancing
         The lump sum price bid for "Bascule Span Balance" shall include the cost of all labor, materials, and
         equipment necessary to complete the work in accordance with the Contract Plans and Specifications. The



Route 35 over Manasquan River Bridge Rehabilitation
Monmouth and Ocean Counties                                                                                   Page 131
         cost of all analyses, testing, and Professional Engineer services shall be included in the unit price. The
         price bid shall include the cost of installing, removing, and/or adjusting the location of balance blocks to
         achieve final balance. One sixth of the Lump Sum shall be paid after completion of each of the six
         different span balancings.
     B. Balance Blocks
         The unit price for “Balance Blocks” shall include the cost of all labor, materials, and equipment necessary
         for fabricating and transporting the blocks to the site.
     Payment will be made under:
         Pay Item                                                                                  Pay Unit
         SPAN BALANCING                                                                            LUMP SUM
         BALANCE BLOCKS                                                                            POUNDS


                SECTION 528 – BASCULE SPAN FINGER AND HEEL JOINTS
528.01 Description.
     This work shall consist of furnishing and installation of Bascule Span finger and heel joints as shown on the
contract drawings and specified herein. All equipment, materials, and labor that are required to fabricate, deliver,
and install the joints as shown on the plans and specified herein shall be included.

528.02 Materials.
     Structural steel for finger and heel joints shall be AASHTO M270, Grade 50 (ASTM A709, Grade 50). The
material conformance criteria of Section 503 shall be followed.

528.03 Inspection and Testing.
     The inspection and testing criteria of Section 503 shall be followed.

528.04 Working Drawings.
     Working Drawings shall be furnished according to Subsection 105.04.

528.05 Fabrication and Welding.
     The fabrication criteria of Section 503 shall be followed.

528.06 Shipping, Handling, and Erection.
     The criteria of Section 503 shall be followed.

528.07 Cleaning and Painting.
      Finger and heel joints shall be shop painted in accordance with Section 503. Color to match proposed bridge
railing.

528.08 Method of Measurement.
     Bascule Span finger and heel joints shall be measured by the pound.

528.09 Basis of Payment.
     Payment will be made under:
         Pay Item                                                                                 Pay Unit
         BASCULE SPAN FINGER AND HEEL JOINTS                                                      POUND


                             SECTION 529 – CONTROL HOUSE WORK
529.01 Description.
     This work shall consist of the following:
     1. Removal of existing steel doors and thresholds, modifying door jambs, and furnishing and installing new
          steel doors, thresholds, and weather strips at locations indicated on drawings.
     2. Modification of the stairs to eliminate tripping hazard due to impacted rust as shown on the drawings.



Route 35 over Manasquan River Bridge Rehabilitation
Monmouth and Ocean Counties                                                                                  Page 132
     3. Modification of the existing louver opening for new diesel engine generator louver as shown on the
drawings.
     4. Replacement of the timber bumper block as shown on the drawings.

                                                   MATERIALS
529.02 Materials.
     A. Steel Doors, Jambs, and Accessories. All steel used to manufacture doors, jambs, and accessories shall
        meet at least one or more of the following requirements:
              1. Cold rolled steel shall conform to ASTM A1008, “Standard Specification for Steel Sheet,
                    Cold-Rolled, Carbon, Structural, High-Strength Low-Alloy and High-Strength Low-Alloy with
                    Improved Formability” and A568, “Standard Specification for Steel Sheet, Carbon, and High-
                    Strength, Low-Alloy, Hot-Rolled and Cold-Rolled, General Requirements for.”
              2. Hot rolled, pickled and oiled steel shall comply with ASTM A1011, “Standard Specification
                    for Steel Sheet and Strip, Hot-Rolled, Carbon, Structural, High-Strength Low-Alloy and High-
                    Strength Low-Alloy with Improved Formability” and A568, “Standard Specification for Steel
                    Sheet, Carbon, and High-Strength, Low-Alloy, Hot-Rolled and Cold-Rolled, General
                    Requirements for.”
              3. Aluminum doors at roadway level shall be extruded aluminum having the properties of
                    aluminum alloy 6063-T5.
     B. Prime Finish. Doors and frames shall be thoroughly cleaned and chemically treated to insure maximum
        paint adhesion. All surfaces of the door and frame exposed to view shall receive a factory applied coat of
        rust inhibiting primer, either air-dried or baked-on. The finish shall meet the requirements for acceptance
        stated in ANSI/SDI A250.10, “Test Procedure and Acceptance Criteria for Prime Painted Steel Surfaces
        for Steel Doors and Frames.”
     C. Factory Applied Finish Paint. Doors and frames shall be finish painted on all surfaces of the door and
        frame exposed to view. The factory applied finish paint shall meet the performance requirements and
        acceptance criteria as stated in ANSI/SDI A250.3, “Test Procedure and Acceptance Criteria for Factory
        Applied Finish Painted Steel Surfaces for Steel Doors and Frames.” Consult individual manufacturers for
        product availability and color selection.
     D. Field Applied Finish Paint. Unless doors and frames are factory finish painted, a compatible coat of
        finish paint shall be applied in the field. The finish paint shall be of a type recommended for use on
        primed steel. Consult the door and frame manufacturer‟s literature for description of primer used.
     E. Test Procedures. The products furnished shall have demonstrated successful performance to the
        following established standard test methods:
              1. ANSI/SDI A250.3 – Test Procedure and Acceptance Criteria for Factory Applied Finished
                    Painted Steel Surfaces for Steel Doors and Frames.
              2. ANSI/SDI A250.4 – Test Procedure and Acceptance Criteria for Physical Endurance for Steel
                    Doors, Frames, Frame Anchors, and Hardware Reinforcings.
              3. ANSI/SDI A250.10 – Test Procedure and Acceptance Criteria for Prime Painted Steel Surfaces
                    for Steel Doors and Frames.
     F. Design Clearances.
              1. The clearance between the door and frame shall be a maximum of 1/8”.
              2. The clearance measured from the bottom of the door to the bottom of the frame (Undercut)
                    shall be a maximum of ¾” unless otherwise specified.
              3. All clearances shall be, unless otherwise specified in this document, subject to a tolerance of
                    +/-1/32”.
     G. Door Faces and Edge.
              1. Full Flush. Each door face shall be formed from a single sheet of steel. There shall be no
                    visible seams on the surface of the faces. A full height vertical seam is permitted on door
                    edges.
              2. Seamless. In addition to the requirements for full flush doors, no visible seams are permitted
                    along the vertical edges.
              3. Door edges shall be fabricated with a square edge – edge of door which is 90 degrees to the
                    face
     H. Door Hardware.
        1. General.


Route 35 over Manasquan River Bridge Rehabilitation
Monmouth and Ocean Counties                                                                               Page 133
              a.   Hardware shall be of best grade, entirely free of imperfections in manufacture and finish, and
                   shall satisfactorily perform various functions needed.
              b. Do not use manufacturer's products which have manufacturer's name or trade name displayed
                   in a visible location (omit removable nameplates), except in conjunction with UL labels.
                   Manufacturer's identification shall be permitted on rim of lock cylinders only.
              c. Furnish necessary screws, bolts, or other fastenings of suitable size and type to anchor
                   hardware in position and match hardware as to material and finish. Provide Phillips flat-head
                   screws except as otherwise indicated.
              d. Do not use through-bolts for installations where bolt head or nut opposite face is exposed in
                   other work, use of hex bolts shall not be allowed.
              e. Drawings show direction of slide, swing, or hand of each door leaf. Furnish each item of
                   hardware for proper installation and operation of door movement as indicated. Items of
                   hardware not definitely specified, but needed for satisfactory installation of hardware shall be
                   provided. Such items shall be of type and quality suitable for service needed and comparable
                   to adjacent hardware.
         2.   Hinges. Provide full mortise, template, 5-knuckle, heavy duty, button tip hinges with non-rising
              loose pins and ball type bearings.
              a. Out-swinging exterior doors shall be furnished with solid bronze, extra heavy weight hinges
                   with non-removable pins or security studs.
              b. Interior doors with locksets shall be furnished with non-removable pin hinges.
              c. Hinges shall be furnished in following quantities, per door leaf:
                   Doors Up to 90 in. in height; 3 hinges
                   Doors over 90 in. in height: Add one hinge for every additional 30”
              d. Furnish hinge sizes as follows for 1-3/4 in. thick doors:
                   Doors up to 3 ft-0 in. wide - 4 ½ x 4 ½ in.
                   Doors 3 ft. –0 in. to 3 ft.-4 in. wide: 5 x 4 ½ in.
                   Doors over 3 ft. –4 in. wide: Extra heavy 5 x 4½
              e. Furnish hinges of sufficient throw where needed to clear trim or permit doors to swing 180
                   degrees.
         3.   Locksets and Latchsets. Series 1000, Operational Grade 1
              a. Provide heavy duty mortise locksets and latchsets.
                   (1) Provide one piece ¾ in., stainless steel, anti-friction latch bolts, and V stainless steel
                         deadbolt with hardened steel roller inserts.
                   (2) Hand of lock is to be easily field reversible without opening lock body case.
                   (3) Lever trim is to be thru-bolted through door and lock case.
                   (4) Cylinder collars for mortise locks to be cast.
                   (5) Locksets shall be equipped with Best Lock cylinders with interchangeable cores. Cores
                         shall be provided by Contracting Officer.
              b. Locks and cylinders shall be provided with manufacturer‟s standard 7-pin tumblers which
                   comply with A156.5, unless otherwise indicated. Lock cylinder parts shall be made from
                   brass/bronze, stainless steel, or nickel silver.
              c. Provide manufacturer's standard wrought box strike for each latchset and lockset with curved
                   lip extended to protect frame. Finish shall match hardware set.
              d. Where rabbeted door stiles are indicated, provide special rabbeted front on locksets, latchsets,
                   and bolts.
              e. Seals and Gaskets. Seals and gaskets shall be continuous and without unnecessary
                   interruptions at door comers and hardware. Provide components which shall not become
                   ineffective as seals due to misalignment at corners, minor out-of -adjustment of doors and
                   frames, temperature variations, and normal wear and aging. Provide resilient or flexible
                   weather-seals that are easily replaceable and readily available during projected life of
                   installation.
              f.   Thresholds. Extruded aluminum, 6063-T5 alloy. Thresholds shall extend full width of
                   opening. Miter both ends of threshold as necessary to suit Project conditions.
              g. Keys:
                   (1) Verify keying requirements with Owner.



Route 35 over Manasquan River Bridge Rehabilitation
Monmouth and Ocean Counties                                                                               Page 134
                    (2) A new master key and grand master key shall be established for this Project in
                          compliance with specific requirements determined in consultation with Owner and to
                          work with building's established keying system.
                    (3) Locksets shall be construction master keyed for use during construction.
                h. Furnish keys as follows:
                    (1) Grand Master Keys: 6 total
                    (2) Master Keys: 6 per set
                    (3) Change Keys
                    (4) Locks Keyed Alike: 4 per set
                    (5) Locks Keyed Different: 3 per lock
                    (6) Construction Master Keys: 12 total
                i.        Provide a key control system complete with accessories. Key cabinet shall be set up with
                    keys and hooks tagged, keys installed, and index cards completed. Install key cabinet in
                    location as indicated on Drawings or as directed by Engineer.
     H.   Timber Block.
                Timber for bumper blocks shall be white oak or similar hardwood as approved by the Engineer.
          Timber shall be treated with a water based preservative by pressure process as specified by the latest
          edition of the American Wood Preserver‟s Association Standards, Section C2 (above ground
          requirements).

                                               CONSTRUCTION
529.03 Steel Doors.
     A. Installation. Install steel doors and accessories according to Shop Drawings, manufacturer's data, and as
         specified.
     B. Door Installation. Comply with ANSI A250.8. Fit hollow-metal doors accurately in frames, within
         clearances specified in ANSI A250.8. Shim as necessary to comply with SDI 122 and ANSI/DHI
         A115.1G.
     C. Adjusting and Cleaning. Immediately after installation, Contractor shall sand smooth any rusted or
         damaged areas of prime coat and apply touch up of compatible air-drying primer. Immediately before
         final inspection, Contractor shall remove protective wrappings from doors.

529.04 Door Hardware.
     A. Examination. Examine doors, frame, and related items for conditions that would prevent proper
         application of hardware. Correct conditions detrimental to timely and proper execution of Work. Do not
         proceed until unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected. Commencement of installation constitutes
         acceptance of conditions and responsibility for satisfactory performance.
     B. Securely install finish hardware items in compliance with accepted schedule and templates furnished with
         hardware.
     C. Provide metal fasteners of type and size which will not work loose as a result of normal door use, and
         which are compatible with metal materials of hardware item and doors and frames. Provide only smooth
         exposed fastener heads, which do not constitute a snagging hazard to clothing. Finish of exposed fastener
         shall match finish of hardware item.
     D. Install mortised items flush with adjacent surfaces.
     E. Install locksets, surface mounted closers, and trim after finishing of doors and frames is complete.
         Wherever cutting and fitting is needed to install hardware onto or into surfaces which are later to be
         finished, install each item completely and then remove and store in a secure place during finish
         application. After completion of finishes, reinstall each item.
     F. Locate items on hollow metal doors in compliance with Door and Hardware Institute publication
         Recommended Locations for Architectural Hardware for Standard Steel Doors and Frames. Mounting
         heights shall be measured from finish floor, except top butt.
         1. Butts:
               a. Top: 11-3/4 in. center of butt to top of door
               b. Intermediate: Equal distance between top and bottom butts
               c. Bottom: 13 in. to center of butt
         2. Locksets and Latchset: 40-5/16 in. to center of strike
         3. Deadlocks: 48 in. to center of strike.


Route 35 over Manasquan River Bridge Rehabilitation
Monmouth and Ocean Counties                                                                              Page 135
          4. Exit Devices: 40-5/16 in to center of strike.
     G.   Field Quality Control. Provide manufacturer's field representation consisting of the following services.
          1. Supplier of door hardware shall make periodic visits to Site during and at completion of hardware
               installation for purpose of monitoring compliance with manufacturer's installation requirements.
          2. Prepare and submit, to Contracting Officer a written report of each periodic and final site visits.
               Report shall be submitted within 3 days following site visits.
     H.   Adjusting.
          1. Final Adjustment. Before final completion, adjust hardware so doors operate in perfect order.
               Test and adjust hardware for quiet, smooth operation, free of sticking, binding, or rattling. Adjust
               closers for proper, smooth operation.
          2. Exposed hardware shall be carefully cleaned by methods not injurious to finish, immediately
               preceding occupancy. Replace defective, damaged, or missing hardware.
          3. At final completion, properly tag and identify keys and deliver to Owner.

                                              COMPENSATION
529.05 Method of Measurement.
     Control house work will not be measured, and payment will be made on a lump sum basis.

529.06 Basis of Payment.
     Payment will be made under:
         Pay Item                                                                                  Pay Unit
          CONTROL HOUSE WORK                                                                       LUMP SUM


       SECTION 530 – CONTROL HOUSE REPAIRS DUE TO WATER LEAKAGE
530.01 Description.
     This work shall consist of removing existing caulk and, furnishing and installing silicon based sealants on all
metal seams and concrete/metal interface around the perimeter of all the control houses.

                                                   MATERIALS
530.02 Materials.
         Silicone Weatherseal Joint Sealants. Medium and Low Modulus Silicone Joint Sealant, one-part, non
acidic, neutral curing, Type S, Grade NS, Class 25, Use NT, capable of withstanding movements from +50 to -50
for medium modulus and +100 to -50 percent for low modulus.

                                               CONSTRUCTION
530.03 Construction.
     A. Examination. Prior to the installation of sealant, and at the Engineer‟s direction, meet at the project site
         to review the material selections, joint preparations, installation procedures, and weather conditions.
         Examine sample installations, which have been prepared, and determine and record whether everyone
         present is in agreement that the proposed installations are likely to perform as required. Accepted control
         sections shall be standard to which all other sealant work must conform.
     B. Examine the substrates and the conditions under which the work is to be installed. Do not proceed with
         the work until satisfactory conditions have been corrected. Proceeding with work indicates acceptance of
         conditions.
     C. Preparation. Clean all joints thoroughly, removing all foreign matter, dust, oil, grease, water, surface dirt,
         frost, old caulking material and loose or latent materials.
     D. Clean porous materials where necessary by grinding, sand or water-blast cleaning, mechanical abrading,
         acid washing or combination of these methods as required to provide a clean, sound base surface for
         sealant adhesion. Clean nonporous surfaces, either mechanically or chemically.
     E. Remove laitance by acid washing, grinding or mechanical abrading. Remove form oils by sand or water
         blast cleaning. Remove all loose particles present or resulting from grinding, abrading, or blast cleaning
         by blowing out joints with oil free compressed air or by vacuuming joint prior to application of sealant.
     F. Remove protective coatings on metallic surfaces by a solvent that leaves no residue. Use clean white
         cloths or lintless paper towels for cleaning with solvent and drying. Clean joint areas protected with



Route 35 over Manasquan River Bridge Rehabilitation
Monmouth and Ocean Counties                                                                                   Page 136
          masking tape or strippable film with solvent after removal of tape or film. Do not allow solvent to air dry
          without wiping.
     G.   Joint Widths. Joints must be uniform in width.
          Clean out and rake to full width and depth, joints to receive sealant. Make joints of sufficient width and
          depth to accommodate specified joint sealant.
     H.   Application.      Follow sealant manufacturer's instruction regarding surface preparation, priming,
          application life, and application procedure. Consult sealant manufacturer for recommendation for
          application procedure. Consult sealant manufacturer for recommendation for application of sealant when
          air temperature is below 40° F, or surface temperatures of sealant contact surfaces are above 120° F.
              1. Apply masking tape, where required, in continuous strips in alignment with joint edge. Remove
                   tape immediately after joints have been sealed and tooled as directed.
              2. Prime surfaces, where required, with primer as recommended by sealant manufacturer. Prime
                   metals where moisture or joint movement occurs. Prime all concrete and masonry surfaces, as
                   required by sealant manufacturer.
              3. Install back-up material or joint filler at proper depth in joint to provide specified sealant
                   dimensions. Compress back-up material 25% to 50% into the joints as required. Do not apply
                   sealant without back-up materials. Install bond breaker strip between sealant and non-release
                   type backup material. Three- side adhesion is acceptable only for the sealing at joinery of
                   members that are to be rigidly attached to each other by means of screws or welding restricting all
                   movement.
              4. Install back-up rod stock into the joint to avoid length-wise stretching. Rod stock shall not be
                   twisted or braided. Use bond breaker strip in all joints where sufficient room for backup does not
                   exist.
              5. Apply sealant under pressure with power actuated gun having nozzle of proper size, or other
                   appropriate means. Provide sufficient pressure to completely fill joints as detailed.
              6. Neatly point or tool sealant to provide proper contour. Dry tool joints. Do not use water-wet tool
                   or tooling solution. Sealant on face of adjacent materials will not be acceptable.
              7. Surfaces of joints to be sealed must be dry. Do not attempt sealant work on wet surfaces or
                   where frost is present.
     I.   Cleaning. Clean adjacent surfaces free of sealant or soil resulting from this work as the work progresses.
          Use solvent or cleaning agent as recommended be sealant manufacturer. Leave all finished work in a
          neat, clean condition.
     J.   Curing and Protection.          Cure sealants in compliance with manufacturer‟s instructions and
          recommendations, to obtain high early bond strength, internal cohesive strength and surface durability.
          Cure and protect sealants in a manner which will minimize increases in modulus of elasticity and other
          accelerated aging effects. Replace or restore sealants which are damaged or deteriorated during the
          construction period.

                                               COMPENSATION
530.04 Method of Measurement.
      Control house repairs due to water leakage will not be measured, and payment will be made on a lump sum
basis.

530.05 Basis of Payment.
     Payment will be made under:
         Pay Item                                                                                  Pay Unit
         CONTROL HOUSE REPAIRS DUE TO WATER LEAKAGE                                                LUMP SUM


                               SECTION 531 – PAINTING CONCRETE
531.01 Description.
     This work shall consist of preparing and painting of the exterior concrete walls of the Control Houses. It shall
include furnishing all labor, materials, tools, equipment, and incidentals, and for doing all the work involved in
preparing the concrete and applying the paint to concrete surfaces, as shown on the plans, and as directed by the
Engineer.



Route 35 over Manasquan River Bridge Rehabilitation
Monmouth and Ocean Counties                                                                                  Page 137
                                                    MATERIALS
531.02 Materials.
      Paints to be applied to concrete surfaces shall be Acrylic Emulsion, Exterior White and Light and Medium
Tints designed for use on exterior masonry. Paint shall be tinted to provide color specified by Engineer. This paint
shall comply in all respects to Federal Specification TT-P-19 (latest revision), Paint, Acrylic Emulsion, Exterior.
      This paint may be tinted by using “universal” or “all purpose” concentrates.

                                                  CONSTRUCTION
531.03 General.
     A. Surface Preparation. Prior to painting concrete surfaces, laitance and curing compounds shall be removed
        from the surface by abrasive blast cleaning in conformance with the requirements in ASTM Designation:
        D 4259. Protection of Environment, Structure, Persons, and Property shall be according to Subsection
        514.13. The cleaned surface shall have a roughened, textured appearance.
                 Concrete surfaces shall be thoroughly dry and free of dust at the time the paint is to be applied.
                       Any artificial drying procedures and methods shall be subject to approval by the Engineer.
     B. Weather Conditions. Paint shall be applied only on thoroughly dry surfaces and during periods of
         favorable weather. Blast cleaning or application of solvent-borne paint will not be permitted when the
         atmospheric or surface temperature is at or below 35 F or above 100F, or when the relative humidity
         exceeds 85 percent at the site of the work. Application of water-borne paint will not be permitted when
         the atmospheric or surface temperature is at or below 50F, or above 100F, or when the relative humidity
         exceeds 75 percent at the site of the work. Application of paint will not be permitted when freshly painted
         surfaces may become damaged by rain, fog, or condensation, or when it can be anticipated that the
         atmospheric temperature or relative humidity will not remain within the specified application conditions
         during the drying period, except as provided in the following paragraph for enclosures. If fresh paint is
         damaged by the elements, it shall be replaced or repaired by the Contractor at the Contractor‟s expense.
                 Subject to approval by the Engineer in writing, the Contractor may provide suitable enclosures to
         permit painting during inclement weather. Provisions shall be made to control atmospheric conditions
         artificially inside the enclosures within limits suitable for painting throughout the painting operation and
         drying period. Full compensation for providing and maintaining the enclosures shall be considered as
         included in the prices paid for the various contract items of work requiring paint and no additional
         compensation will be allowed therefore.
     C. Application. The Contractor shall notify the Engineer, in writing, at least one week in advance of the date
         cleaning and painting operations are to begin.
                       Painting shall be done in a neat and workmanlike manner. Unless otherwise specified, paint
          shall be applied by brush, or spray, or roller, or any combination of these methods. Airless spray methods
          shall not be used.
                       Each application of paint shall be thoroughly cured and any skips, holidays, thin areas or other
          deficiencies corrected before the succeeding application. The surface of the paint being covered shall be
          free from moisture, dust, grease or any other deleterious material which would prevent the bond of the
          succeeding applications. In spot painting, old paint which lifts after the first application shall be removed
          by scraping and the area repainted before the next application.
                       Unless otherwise specified, should 7 days elapse between paint applications, the painted
          surface shall be water rinsed prior to the next paint application. Water rinsing is defined as a pressurized
          water rinse with a minimum nozzle pressure of 1,160 pounds per square inch. During rinsing, the tip of
          the pressure nozzle shall be placed between 12 inches and 18 inches from the surface to be rinsed. The
          nozzle shall have a maximum fan tip angle of 30.
                       Brushes, when used, shall have sufficient body and length of bristle to spread the paint in a
          uniform film. Paint shall be evenly spread and thoroughly brushed out.
                       On all surfaces which are inaccessible for painting by regular means, the paint shall be applied
          by sheepskin daubers, bottle brushes or by any other means approved by the Engineer.
                       Rollers, when used, shall be of a type which does not leave a stippled texture in the paint film.
                       Runs, sags, thin and excessively thick areas in the paint film, skips, and holidays, or areas of
          non-uniform appearance shall be considered as evidence that the work is unsatisfactory, and the
          Contractor may be required to blast clean the areas and reapply the paint.
                       A water trap acceptable to the Engineer shall be furnished and installed at each spray spot.


Route 35 over Manasquan River Bridge Rehabilitation
Monmouth and Ocean Counties                                                                                    Page 138
                      Mechanical mixers shall be used to mix paint. Prior to applying, the paint shall be mixed a
          sufficient length of time to thoroughly mix the pigment and vehicle together.
                      Precautions in the handling and the application of the paints shall be in conformance with all
          applicable occupational safety and health standards, rules, regulations and orders established by the State
          of New Jersey.
                      Application of Acrylic Emulsion Paint. Acrylic emulsion paint shall be applied in not less than
          2 applications to produce a uniform appearance.
     C.         Thinning paint. Paints specified are formulated ready for application, and no thinning will be
          allowed unless permitted by the Engineer.
     D.         Protection against damage. The Contractor shall provide protective devices, such as tarps, screens,
          or covers, as necessary to prevent damage to the work and to other property or persons from all cleaning
          and painting operations.
                      Paint or paint stains which result in an unsightly appearance on surfaces not designated to be
          painted shall be removed or obliterated by the Contractor at the Contractor‟s expense and to the
          satisfaction of the Engineer.
                      All painted surfaces that are marred or damaged as a result of operations of the Contractor
          shall be repaired by the Contractor, at the Contractor‟s expense, with materials and to a condition equal to
          that of the coating specified herein.
                      Upon completion of all painting operations and of any other work that would cause dust,
          grease or other foreign materials to be deposited upon the painted surfaces, the painted surfaces shall be
          thoroughly cleaned.

                                               COMPENSATION
531.04 Method of Measurement.
      Cleaning and painting of concrete surfaces will not be measured, and payment will be made on a lump sum
basis.

531.05 Basis of Payment.
     Payment will be made under:
         Pay Item                                                                                  Pay Unit
         PAINTING CONCRETE                                                                         LUMP SUM

      Separate payment will not be made for cleaning of concrete surfaces. All costs associated with cleaning the
concrete surfaces shall be included in the Pay Item “Painting Concrete”.
      Separate payment will not be made for the preparation of the required pollution control system submission,
which includes the containment plan and waste disposal plan or the implementation of each plan, as it pertains to the
Project Site including but not limited to permits; capture, containment, collection, storage and disposal costs; and
revisions, alterations and resubmissions; and all record keeping that may be required during the execution of the
Work. All costs thereof shall be included in the lump sum price bid for “Painting Concrete”


                     SECTION 532 – MACHINERY HOUSE WALL PANELS
532.01 Description.
      This work shall consist of installing wall panels in the machinery rooms as shown on the contract plans and
described herein. This work includes factory-formed panels in vertical installation and all necessary metal flashings
and trim.

                                                      MATERIALS
532.02 Materials.
     A. Wall Panels:
              1. Profile: Longitudinal ribs 7/8 inch (22 mm) deep, spaced 2.7 inches (68 mm) on center, 35-1/2
                  inch (902 mm) sheet width
             2. Size: 32 inches (813 mm) cover width, lengths indicated on drawings.
             3. Material: Galvanized steel sheet conforming to ASTM A 653/A 653M, G90 coating; 26 gage
                  sheet thickness.



Route 35 over Manasquan River Bridge Rehabilitation
Monmouth and Ocean Counties                                                                                  Page 139
              4.    Finish: Siliconized polyester color coat applied to sight-exposed face of sheet after
                    pretreatment and priming in accordance with coating manufacturer's recommendations.
              5.    Color: Match existing machinery house.
    B.   Trim
             1.      Manufacturer's standard sheet metal matching panel material and finish, break-formed to
                     profiles indicated on drawings, including, but not limited to copings, terminations and
                     transition strips.
               2.    Color: Match panel finish
    C.    Clips and Fasteners: Supply items required for installation of panels in accordance with manufacturer's
          installation instructions and other indicated items; supply galvanized clips and fasteners.
    D.   Panel Performance Requirements
              1.     Air infiltration: Maximum 0.06 cubic feet per minute per lineal foot (0.33 cu m per hour per
                     linear meter) of seam at static pressure of 6.24 pounds per square foot when tested per ASTM
                     E 1680.
              2.     Water penetration: No uncontrolled water penetration through panel joints when tested in
                     accordance with AAMA 501.2.
    E.   Finish Performance Requirements
              1.     Color change and fade resistance: No cracking, peeling, blistering, or loss of adhesion when
                     tested in accordance with ASTM G 90; color change, after removal of surface deposits such as
                     dirt or chalk, maximum 5 NBS units.
              2.     Humidity resistance: No blistering, peeling, or loss of adhesion, after 1,000 hours testing in
                     accordance with ASTM D 2247.
    F.   Submittals
              1.     Product Data: Manufacturer's product literature for panel, finishes, and trim.
              2.     Shop Drawings. Indicate layout of panels and panel sizes, including custom-fabricated panels
                     if indicated; indicate each item of trim and accessories. Indicate in detailed drawings profile
                     and gauge of interior and exterior sheets, locations and types of fasteners; indicate locations,
                     gages, shapes, and methods of attachment of panels, trim and accessory items. Indicate
                     products/materials required for construction activities of this section not supplied by
                     manufacturer of products of this section.
              3.     Quality Assurance Submittals. Contractor's certification that Manufacturer of products of this
                     section meets specified qualifications and installer of products of this section meets specified
                     qualifications. Manufacturer's certification that materials comply with specified performance
                     characteristics and physical requirements. Manufacturer's instructions.
              4.     Closeout Submittals. Warranty documents issued and executed by manufacturer of products of
                     this section, countersigned by Contractor.
    G.   Quality Assurance
              1.     Installer Qualifications: Installer experienced in performing work of this section who has
                     specialized in the installation of work similar to that required for this project.
              2.     Quality Standard: Comply with Sheet Metal and Air Conditioning Contractors National
                     Association (SMACNA) Architectural Sheet Metal Manual.
    H.   Delivery, Storage and Handling
              1.     Delivery: Deliver materials in manufacturer's original, unopened, undamaged containers with
                     identification labels intact; identify fabricated components with UL 90 label where appropriate.
              2.     Packing, Shipping, Handling and Unloading. Bundle panels in waterproof wrapping paper.
                     Package trim and accessories in waterproof wrapping paper.
              3.     Storage and Protection. Stack prefinished material to prevent twisting, bending, abrasion,
                     scratching, and denting; elevate one end of skid to allow for moisture run off. Store products
                     of this section in manufacturer's unopened packaging until installation of products. Maintain
                     dry, heated storage area for products of this section until installation of products.
    I.   Project/site conditions. Obtain field measurements before cutting panels to size.
    J.   Warranty. Panel manufacturer's standard warranty against defects in product workmanship and materials,
         including deterioration of panel finish.

                                               CONSTRUCTION



Route 35 over Manasquan River Bridge Rehabilitation
Monmouth and Ocean Counties                                                                                 Page 140
532.03 Wall Panels.
     A. Installation. Install panels plumb, true, and in correct alignment with structural framing, in accordance
         with shop drawings and manufacturer's printed installation instructions.
     B. Installation Tolerances
            1. Variation from Plumb: Maximum 1/8 inch
            2. Variation from Level: Maximum 1/8 inch
            3. Variation from True Plane: Maximum 1/8 inch
            4. Variation from True Position: Maximum 1/4 inch
            5. Variation of Member from Plane: Maximum 1/8 inch
     C. Cleaning. Remove strippable coating and perform dry wipe-down cleaning of panels as erected.
     D. Protection of installed products. Protect installed products from damage by subsequent construction
         activities. Replace products having damage other than minor finish damage. Repair products having
         minor damage to finish in accordance with panel manufacturer's recommendations. Engineer shall be
         sole judge of acceptability of repair to damaged finishes; replace products having rejected repairs.

                                               COMPENSATION

532.04 Method of Measurement.
     Machinery House wall panels will not be measured, and payment will be made on a lump sum basis.

532.05 Basis of Payment.
     Payment will be made under:
         Pay Item                                                                                Pay Unit
         MACHINERY HOUSE WALL PANELS                                                             LUMP SUM



                           SECTION 533 – MACHINERY IN GENERAL
533.01 Description.
     A. Scope of Work. Section 533 applies to the installation of auxiliary drive machinery, lock machinery,
        electric motors, brakes, limit switches, position transmitters, resolvers, selsyns, encoders, and tach-
        overspeed switches to be mounted with the machinery but supplied under the Electrical Work.
         Work on the bridge machinery includes installation of new and rehabilitation of existing machinery
        components in accordance with the Contract Drawings.
         All special machining, tools and installation shall be included as part of the work. This work shall
        include coordination of special machinery manufacturer requirements, special shimming, and alignment.
         The Contractor, except as noted otherwise on the Plans or as specified otherwise in these Specifications,
        shall furnish, install, lubricate, test, paint, and place in satisfactory operating condition new machinery
        components.
     B. Basis of Machinery Design. The design of new machinery conforms to the applicable requirements of the
        AASHTO Standard Specification for Movable Highway Bridges, except as otherwise noted on the
        Contract Drawings or otherwise specified herein.
     C. Shop Drawings. The Contractor shall prepare shop drawings in accordance with Section E, and
        additionally, meet the following requirements:
             1. Manufacturer's data and/or shop drawings shall be submitted for all manufactured and purchased
                 items of machinery to the Engineer for approval.
             2. The Contractor shall coordinate the work of the machinery component manufacturers where
                 components interface. The Contractor shall review and approve all shop and working drawings
                 prepared by those Manufacturers for coordination prior to submittal of shop drawings to the
                 Engineer for approval.
             3. Shop drawings shall show all parts completely detailed and dimensioned. Reproduction of the
                 Plans shall not be used as base sheets for assembly or erection drawings.
             4. Materials and material specifications shall be stated for each part. Where ASTM or any other
                 standard specifications are used, the applicable numbers of such specifications shall be given.




Route 35 over Manasquan River Bridge Rehabilitation
Monmouth and Ocean Counties                                                                               Page 141
            5.    Required finish machining shall be shown including grade of finish in accordance with ANSI
                  B46.1, Surface Texture, and dimensional tolerances and allowances for specific fits in accordance
                  with ANSI B4.1, Preferred Limits and Fits for Cylindrical Parts.
            6.    Shop drawings shall conform to the provisions of the general requirements of the Standard
                  Specifications as supplemented and amended herein and to the special requirements specified
                  hereinafter. All drawings shall be in conformance with NJDOT Microfilming Standards, latest
                  revision.
            7.    Submittals for each manufactured item shall be manufacturer's descriptive literature, drawings,
                  diagrams, performance and characteristic curves, and catalog cuts, and shall include the
                  manufacturer's name, trade name, catalog model or number, nameplate data, size, certified layout
                  dimensions, capacity, specification reference, including ASTM, ANSI, Federal Military
                  Specification and any other applicable references, and all other information necessary to establish
                  Contract compliance.
            8.    The fits and finishes used shall conform to the requirements for fits and finishes given in the
                  Plans and to any other requirements given hereinafter in this General Specification.
            9.    Shop drawings shall show all external dimensions and clearances necessary for installation and
                  operation of all new machinery components.
            10.   For all assemblies and parts, the Contractor shall furnish complete assembly drawings or
                  diagrams showing each part contained therein and the manufacturer's part number assigned to
                  each part. The drawings or diagrams shall be sufficient to enable complete disassembly and
                  reassembly of the assemblies covered. In the event that any part is modified in any manner from
                  the way it is described or delivered by its original manufacturer, the Contractor shall furnish a
                  drawing which details each modification and the part shall be assigned a unique part number to
                  assure the furnishing of replacement parts modified in similar fashion.
            11.   Certified prints of each manufactured assembly shall be furnished. Certified prints are
                  manufacturer's drawings of proprietary products on which the manufacturer or supplier states
                  mounting dimensions, ratios, speeds, ratings, and any other correctness for use on this specific
                  project. In addition to identifying and describing each part, they shall show:
                         a. Dimensions of all principal parts comprising the assembly.
                         b. Certified external dimensions affecting clearances and required for installation.
                         c. Capacity and normal operating ratings.
                         d. Recommended lubrication, including location, lubrication fittings, and provisions for
                               adding, draining and checking the level of lubricants.
                         e. Inspection openings, seals, and vents.
                         f.    Details or description of all fasteners required to mount the assembly.
                         g. Gross weight.
                         h. Certified prints shall be signed by an officer of the manufacturing company.
            12.   All proprietary items shall be shown in outline on shop drawings, which shall also indicate the
                  method and sequence to be employed in assembly of bridge machinery and installation of
                  necessary utilities support and service facilities. The assembly drawings of each item shall, in
                  addition to identifying and describing each internal part, contain dimensions of all principal
                  elements within the item; certified external dimensions affecting interfaces or installations; gross
                  weight capacity and normal operating ratings; method and recommended type of lubrication,
                  including location and type of fittings and provisions for adding, draining, and checking the level
                  of each lubricant employed; inspection openings, seals, and vents; and details of all fasteners used
                  to mount the equipment to its foundation.
            13.   Complete shop bills of materials shall be made for all machinery parts. If the bills are not shown
                  on the shop drawings, prints of the bills shall be furnished for approval in the same manner as
                  specified for the shop drawings.
            14.   The weight of each piece of machinery shall be stated on the shop drawing upon which it is
                  detailed or billed.
            15.   Complete assembly and erection drawings shall be furnished. These drawings shall give part
                  numbers, match marks, and essential dimensions for locating each part or assembled unit with
                  respect to the bridge structure or foundation.
            16.   Marks or indentations of any type shall be clearly shown and detailed on the drawings. In general
                  die-stamping or scoring shall be avoided unless otherwise called for on the plans. All


Route 35 over Manasquan River Bridge Rehabilitation
Monmouth and Ocean Counties                                                                                  Page 142
                components and assemblies shall be detailed separately to assure correct fabrication, assembly,
                and erection. Use of mirror image or opposite hand erection drawings will not be allowed.
            17. Each shop drawing shall be given a suitable title to describe the parts detailed thereon and shall
                state by whom shop inspection will be made.
            18. Where equipment or materials are specified to conform to requirements of the standards of an
                organization, such as American Society for Mechanical Engineers (ASME), Underwriters
                Laboratories (UL), American Gas Association (AGA), and American Refrigeration Institute
                (ARI), that use a label or listing as method of indicating compliance, proof of such conformance
                shall be submitted and approved. The label or listing of the specified organization will be
                acceptable evidence. In lieu of the label or listing, the Contractor shall submit a certificate from
                an independent testing organization adequately equipped and competent to perform such services
                and approved by the Contracting Officer, stating that the item has been tested in accordance with
                the specified organization's test methods and that the item conforms to the specified
                organization's standard or code.
            19. As used herein, certified test reports refer to reports of tests conducted on previously
                manufactured materials or equipment identical to that proposed for use.
            20. As used herein, factory tests refer to tests required to be performed on the actual materials or
                equipment proposed for use. Results of the tests shall be submitted in accordance with the
                provisions of this Contract for laboratory test results.
            21. The Contractor shall prepare a list of all machinery items that require lubrication and their
                recommended cycle for lubrication. The list shall contain the types of lubricant used and the date
                it was lubricated by the Contractor and shall be given to the Engineer prior to start up and testing
                of the machinery.
            22. Lubrication charts shall be prepared and submitted as working drawings.
            23. If any departures from the Contract Documents are deemed necessary by the Contractor, details
                of such departures and the reasons therefore shall be submitted to the Engineer in writing as soon
                as practicable for his approval. No departures from Contract Drawings shall be made without the
                Engineer's approval. If any departures from the Contract documents are made without this
                approval the Contractor may at his own expense be required to remove the equipment, correct
                any modifications, and replace with approved equipment, components, etc.
            24. If the Contractor has any objection to any feature of the machinery as designed or required by the
                Contract Plans, he shall state his objection in writing to the Engineer at the time of submitting
                shop drawings or prior thereto; otherwise his objection will not be considered if offered later as
                an excuse for malfunctioning, defective or broken machinery.
            25. It is the Contractor's responsibility to manufacture and install suitable functioning machinery.
                Review and approval of shop drawings by the Engineer does not relieve the Contractor of this
                responsibility.
    D. Submittals. The Contractor shall submit the required shop drawings for machinery items to the Engineer
       for review within 120 days after the date of award of contract.
                    The Contractor shall submit to the Engineer for his approval seven (7) prints of all shop
       drawings. In case of correction or rejection, the Contractor shall resubmit seven (7) prints of shop
       drawings until drawings are approved. The Contractor shall bear all costs for damages, which may result
       from the ordering of any materials prior to the approval of the shop drawings; and no work shall be done
       until the shop drawings therefore have been approved. After approval of the shop drawings, the
       Contractor shall supply the Engineer with up to seven (7) prints of the approved shop drawings as may be
       ordered.
    E. Delivery and Storage.
             1. Protection for Shipment.
                        a. Machinery parts shall be cleaned of dirt, chips, grit, and all other injurious materials
                             prior to shipping and shall be given a coat of corrosion-inhibiting preservative.
                        b. Finished metal surfaces and unpainted metal surfaces that would be damaged by
                             corrosion shall be coated as soon as practicable after finishing with a rust-inhibiting
                             preservative. Excepting unfinished metal surfaces inside of gear reducers, this
                             coating shall be removed from operation and from all surfaces prior to painting after
                             erection.



Route 35 over Manasquan River Bridge Rehabilitation
Monmouth and Ocean Counties                                                                                Page 143
                         c.   Any interface between stainless steel or aluminum and Structural Steel shall receive
                              an Engineer approval coat of zinc-chromate primer prior to assembly.
                        d. Shims shall be coated prior to shipment with a rust-inhibiting preservative, and
                              before erection, this coating shall be removed from the shims that are used.
                        e. Machinery parts shall be completely protected from weather, dirt, and all other
                              injurious conditions during manufacture, shipment, and storage.
                        f.    Shaft journals that are shipped disassembled from their bearings shall be protected
                              during shipment and before erection by a packing of oil-soaked waste secured in
                              place by burlap and covered with heavy metal thimbles or heavy timber lagging
                              securely attached. Every precaution shall be taken to ensure that the bearing surfaces
                              are not damaged and that all parts arrive at their destination in satisfactory condition.
                        g. Assembled units shall be mounted on skids or otherwise crated for protection during
                              handling and shipment.
              2.    Packaging and Delivery of Spare Parts. Spare parts shall be protected for shipment and
                 prolonged storage by coating, wrapping, and boxing.
                        a.     All spare parts shall be durably tagged or marked with a clear identification showing
                              the designation used on the approved shop drawing.
                        b. Boxes for spare parts shall be clearly marked on the outside to show their contents.
                               Spare parts shall be delivered to a location designated by the NJDOT.
              3.    Guarantee and Warranties. Manufacturer's warranties or guarantees on equipment, materials
                 or products purchased for use on the Contract which are consistent with those provided as
                 customary trade practice, shall be obtained by the Contractor and, upon acceptance of the
                 Contract, the Contractor shall assign to the New Jersey Department of Transportation, all
                 manufacturer's warranties or guarantees on all such equipment, material or products furnished for
                 or installed as part of the Work.
                          The Contractor shall warrant the satisfactory in-service operation of the mechanical
                 equipment, material, products, and related components. This warranty shall extend for a period
                 of one year following the date of final acceptance of the Project.

                                            QUALITY ASSURANCE
533.02 Quality Assurance.
     A. Qualifications, Personnel, and Facilities. Products used in the work under the Machinery Pay Items shall
         be produced by manufacturers regularly engaged in the manufacture of the specified products.
               For the fabrication, installation, cleaning, aligning, testing, and all other work required by the
         Machinery Pay Items, the Contractor shall use adequate numbers of skilled, trained, and experienced
         mechanics and millwrights who are thoroughly familiar with the requirements and methods specified for
         the proper execution of the specified work. The Contractor shall provide personnel and supervisory
         personnel with a minimum of two movable bridge jobs as previous experience in the installation of bridge
         machinery.
                    The Contractor shall provide adequate plant and all necessary tools and instruments required
         for the proper performance of the personnel engaged in the execution of the specified work.
     B. Codes and Standards. Work under machinery pay items shall comply with, but not be limited to, all
         applicable requirements of the following codes and standards and their abbreviations used in this
         Specification shall be as shown:
            1. American Association of State Highway and Transportation Officials                    AASHTO
            2. American Gear Manufacturers Association                                               AGMA
            3. American Iron and Steel Institute                                                     AISI
            4. American National Standards Institute                                                 ANSI
            5. American Society for Testing and Materials                                            ASTM
            6. American Welding Society                                                              AWS
            7. Anti-Friction Bearing Manufacturers Association                                       AFBMA
            8. National Lubricating Grease Institute                                                 NLGI
            9. Society of Automotive Engineers                                                       SAE
            10. Steel Structures Painting Council                                                    SSPC
            11. New Jersey Standard Specifications                                                   NJSS



Route 35 over Manasquan River Bridge Rehabilitation
Monmouth and Ocean Counties                                                                                   Page 144
           The work shall meet the requirements of all other codes and standards as specified elsewhere in these
           Specifications. Where codes and standards are mentioned for any pay item, it is intended to call
           particular attention to them; it is not intended that any other codes and standards shall be assumed to be
           omitted if not mentioned.
    C.    Rules, Regulations, and Ordinances. Work shall comply with all applicable Federal, State and local rules,
          regulations, and ordinances.
                  In the event of a conflict between these Specifications and the above-mentioned codes, standards,
          rules, regulations, and ordinances, the most stringent requirement shall apply.
    D.    Measurements and Verification. Dimensions indicated on the Contract Drawings are nominal and are
          intended for guidance only. All variations from the nominal dimensions on the Contract Drawings shall
          be noted on the shop drawings.
    E.    Substitutions. The terms "approved equal", "of equal quality" and "or equal" which appear on the
          Contract Drawings and in these Specifications are intended to allow the Contractor to substitute other
          manufacturers and model numbers of products of equal quality and rating for those specified.
                  Prior to the Contractor's ordering of any substitute product, the Engineer's approval of the
           equivalence of the substitute product shall be obtained in writing. The acceptance of the substitute
           products is at the sole discretion of the Engineer who will establish the basis for equivalence and will
           review the quality of the materials and products described in detail on the submitted shop drawings and
           product data.
                  The Engineer will review and stamp substitute material either "No Exceptions" or "Revise and
           Resubmit". Upon return of a shop drawing showing rejection, the Contractor shall resubmit the shop
           drawing showing the specified product. Rejection shall not in any way result in any extra cost.
                  Approval by the Engineer of any substitute products submitted by the Contractor shall not relieve
           the Contractor of responsibility for the proper operation, performance, or functioning of that product.
                  Where a particular product is specified by a manufacturer's name and catalog or part number in this
           Specification or on the Contract Drawings, it is so specified to establish quality, configuration, and
           arrangement of parts. An equivalent product made by another manufacturer may be substituted for the
           specified product subject to the approval of the Engineer; however, all necessary changes required by the
           substitution in related machinery, structural, architectural, and electrical parts, shall be made by the
           Contractor at no additional cost.
                  If any departures from the Contract Drawings or these Specifications are deemed necessary by the
           Contractor, details of such departures and the reasons therefore shall be submitted as soon as practicable
           for approval. No such departures shall be made without approval by the Engineer. If any departure from
           the Contract documents is made without this approval the Contractor may at his own expense be required
           to remove the equipment, correct any modifications, and replace with approved equipment, components,
           etc.
     F.    Shop Assembly. Shop assembly of machinery is covered under Section 535 – “Miscellaneous
           Mechanical Work” and Section 534 – “Auxiliary Span Drive Machinery”.
     G.    Specialized Machinery Components Field Installation, Adjustment, and Inspection. For the installation,
           adjustment, and alignment of all specialized machinery components the Contractor shall provide for the
           presence at the job site of manufacturers‟ service personnel skilled in these specialties. Such service
           personnel shall be properly equipped with all necessary instruments to assure that related components
           have been provided within acceptable tolerances and to make all necessary adjustments for attaining the
           specified ratings.
     H.    Inspection and Testing. The Contractor shall give no less than ten (10) working days notice to the
           Engineer of the beginning of work at foundries, forge, and machine shops so that inspection may be
           provided. No materials shall be cast, forged, or machined before the Engineer has been notified where
           the orders have been placed.
                  The Contractor shall furnish all facilities for the inspection of material and workmanship in the
           foundries, forge, and machine shops and the Inspector designated by the Engineer shall be allowed free
           access to necessary parts of the premises. Work done while the Inspector has been refused access or
           presented in a manner that prevents adequate inspection will automatically be rejected.
                  The Engineer‟s Inspector shall have the authority to reject materials or workmanship that does not
           fulfill the requirements of these Specifications.




Route 35 over Manasquan River Bridge Rehabilitation
Monmouth and Ocean Counties                                                                                 Page 145
                 Inspection at the foundries, forge, and machine shops is intended as a means of facilitating the work
           and responsibility in regard to imperfect material or workmanship and to avoid the necessity of replacing
           defective materials or workmanship delivered to the job site.
                 The Contractor shall furnish the Engineer with a copy of all orders covering work performed by
           subcontractors or suppliers.
                 Unless otherwise provided, the Contractor shall furnish without additional charge test specimens as
           required, and all labor, testing machines, tools, and equipment necessary to prepare the specimens and to
           make the physical tests and chemical analyses required by material specifications. A copy of all test
           reports and chemical analyses shall be furnished to the Engineer.
                 The acceptance of any material or finished parts by the Engineer shall not be a bar to their
           subsequent rejection if found defective. Rejected material and workmanship shall be replaced or made
           acceptable by the Contractor at no additional cost to the State – NJDOT.
      I.   Defective Materials and Workmanship. All machinery rejected during inspection and testing shall be
           removed from the work site and replaced without additional cost.
           Delays resulting from the rejection of material, equipment or work shall not be the basis of any claim by
            the Contractor.
           All defects found during the guarantee period resulting from faulty material, components, workmanship,
            or installation shall be corrected by the Contractor without cost. The NJDOT reserves the right to make
            necessary correction with its own forces and charge the resulting costs to the Contractor.
      J.   Training. The Contractor shall provide three (3) days of instruction to NJDOT Maintenance personnel.
           The instruction shall include but not be limited to the following with respect to all machinery
           components.
                1. Brake adjustment and operation
                2. Checking, adding, and purging lubricants to newly installed components
                3. Auxiliary drive operation
                4. Instrument drive and limit switch adjustments

                                                   MATERIALS
533.03 Materials.
      A. Standard Products. Materials and equipment shall be essentially the standard catalogued products of
         manufacturers regularly engaged in production of such materials or equipment and shall be
         manufacturer's latest standard design that complies with the specification requirements. Materials and
         equipment shall essentially duplicate items that have been in satisfactory commercial or industrial use at
         least two years prior to bid opening. Where two units of the same class of equipment are required, these
         units shall be products of a single manufacturer; however, the component parts of the system need not be
         the products of the same manufacturer. Each major component of equipment shall have the
         manufacturer's name and address and the model and serial number on a nameplate, securely affixed in a
         conspicuous place. The nameplate of the distributing agent will not be acceptable.
      B. Manufacturer‟s Recommendations
               Where installation procedures or any part thereof are required to be in accordance with the
         recommendations of the manufacturer of the material being installed, printed copies of these
         recommendations shall be furnished to the Engineer prior to installation. Installation of the item will not
         be allowed to proceed until the recommendations are received. Failure to furnish these recommendations
         can be cause for rejection of the material. The Contractor shall provide all special machining and
         installation required by the manufacturer without additional cost.
      C. Castings and Forgings. All necessary precautions shall be taken to fabricate the castings free of cracks,
         cold shuts, shrink holes, blowholes, and porosity.
               All castings shall be cleaned free of loose scale and sand; all fins, seams, gates, risers, and other
         irregularities shall be removed. All unfinished edges of castings shall be neatly cast with rounded
         corners, and all inside angles shall have ample fillets.
               All castings shall be ultrasonically tested in accordance with ASTM A609, Method A, Quality Level
         3. Castings that do not pass this test may be rejected. Test results, whether positive or negative, shall be
         submitted to the Engineer. Test records meeting Quality Level 4 may be considered for weld repaired,
         provided the fabricator submits a procedure to the Engineer for review and approval. All repair
         procedures shall include a means to qualify the repair. Test records meeting Quality Level 5 or higher



Route 35 over Manasquan River Bridge Rehabilitation
Monmouth and Ocean Counties                                                                                  Page 146
        shall be cause for rejection, and not be allowed for weld repair. Rejection shall result in the Contractor
        providing a new casting meeting the acceptance criteria, at no additional cost to NJDOT.
              All castings shall be visually inspected in accordance with ASTM A 802, Level II. Castings that do
        not pass this test may be rejected. Test results, whether positive or negative, shall be submitted to the
        Engineer. Test records meeting Level III may be considered for weld repair, provided the fabricator
        submits a procedure to the Engineer for review and approval. All repair procedures shall include a means
        to qualify the repair.
              All castings shall be magnetic particle examined in accordance with ASTM E125. The following
        level of discontinuities will be acceptable.
                Type I                      Cracks/Hot Tears            ¼” max
                Type II                     Shrink                      Degree 3
                Type III                    Inclusions                  Degree 3
                Type IV                     Chaplets                    Degree 2
                Type V                      Porosity                    Degree 1
        Test results, whether positive or negative, shall be submitted to the Engineer. All surface discontinuities
        may be considered for weld repaired, provided the fabricator submits a procedure to the Engineer for
        review and approval. All repair procedures shall include a means to qualify the repair.
        All proposed weld repairs shall be performed prior to all heat treatment so that no weld repairs will be
        necessary after machining. In addition, all surface defects removed by machining shall be performed
        prior to heat treatment.
        Carbon Steel and Alloy Steel Forgings shall meet the requirements of ASTM A668 unless otherwise
        approved by NJDOT.
    D. Shafting and Pins. All shafts and pins shall be accurately finished, round, smooth, and straight and, when
       turned to different diameters, shall have rounded fillets at the shoulders. Each shaft or pin having a
       uniform diameter of 8” or more and each shaft or pin having several diameters, of which the smallest is 8”
       or more, shall be bored lengthwise through the center to a diameter approximately one-fifth the smallest
       body diameter.
              All shafts shall conform to tolerances in ASTM A29 unless otherwise indicated. Turned, ground
        and polished shafting straightness tolerances shall be 0.005” per foot for shafts up to and including 1½” in
        diameter and 0.010“ per foot for shafts over 1 ½” in diameter.
              Each end of all shafts, when finished to the required lengths shall have a 60-degree lathe center,
        with clearance hole, at the exact center of the shaft. Shafts that are bored with an inspection hole shall
        have the ends prepared for the attachment of a centering device equivalent to the lathe center. All such
        devices shall be furnished as part of the work.
              Where shown on the drawings, stepped shafts shall have fillets blended in smoothly to adjacent
        surfaces without tool marks or scratches. Unless otherwise required herein or on the drawings to have a
        finer finish, the surfaces shall have an ANSI maximum roughness of 0.8 microinches.
              All cold-finished shafting shall be steel of the type and grade shown on the drawings and shall be
        tested for its mechanical properties, and a test certificate shall be furnished to the Engineer. Each cold-
        finished shaft shall be free from camber and shall run without vibration, noise, or chatter at all speeds up
        to and including the maximum rated speed.
              All hubs mounted on the ends of cold-finished shafts shall have the fit specified herein or on the
        drawings. To obtain the required fit between hub and shaft, the Contractor shall furnish the cold-finished
        shaft 1/16” larger than the nominal diameter specified and shall turn the ends to the required dimension
        for the hub. The Contractor may, at his option, furnish any cold-finished shaft of one diameter end to
        end; but such shaft shall have tolerances selected from the normal manufacturing range to provide the
        specified fit. The selected tolerances shall be shown on the shop drawings.
              Turned, ground, and polished commercial shafting of the grade specified shall be used where shown
        on the drawings.
    E. Fasteners. All bolts for connecting machinery parts to each other or to supporting members shall be as
       shown on the plans or specified otherwise and conform to one of the following types:
            1. Machinery Fit, high-strength bolts.
            2. Structural Fit, high strength bolts.
            3. Turned bolts, turned cap screws, and turned studs.
        All high strength bolts shown on the mechanical drawings shall be machinery fit unless otherwise noted.
        All high strength bolts shall meet the requirements of ASTM A325.


Route 35 over Manasquan River Bridge Rehabilitation
Monmouth and Ocean Counties                                                                                Page 147
          Holes for Machinery Fit high strength bolts shall be individually reamed for a clearance of not more than
          0.01” with the actual bolt for that hole. The clearance shall be checked with a 0.011” wire. The hole
          shall be considered too large if the wire can be inserted in the hole together with the bolt. Structural Fit
          high strength bolts shall have a maximum clearance of 1/16” between the bolt shank and hole.
          Both Machinery Fit and Structural Fit high strength bolts shall be connected using nuts meeting the
          requirements of ASTM A563.
          Turned bolts, turned cap screws, and turned studs shall have turned shanks and cut threads. Turned bolts
          shall have semi-finished, washer-faced, hexagonal heads and nuts. Turned cap screws shall have
          finished, washer-faced, hexagonal heads. All finished shanks of turned fasteners shall be 1/16” larger in
          diameter than the diameter of the thread, which shall determine the head and nut dimensions. The shanks
          of all turned fasteners shall have Class LC1 fit in the finished holes in accordance with ANSI Standard
          B4.1. The material used for machining turned shank fasteners shall meet the requirements of ASTM
          A193, Grade B7. Turned bolts shall be connected using nuts meeting the requirements of ASTM A194.
          Turned fasteners shall be fully detailed on shop drawings.
          The dimensions of all bolt heads, up to and including size 1 ½” shall be in accordance with ANSI
          Standard B18.2.3.7 – Heavy Hex Structural Bolts and for bolt sizes 1 5/8” – 4” shall be in accordance
          with ANSI B18.2.3.5 – Hex Bolts. All Heavy Hex nuts shall be in accordance with ANSI Standard
          B18.2.4.6 – Heavy Hex Nuts and all Hex Nuts shall be in accordance with ANSI Standard B18.2.4.2 –
          Hex Nuts.
          The dimensions of socket-head cap screws, socket flathead cap screws, and socket-set screws shall
          conform to ANSI Standard B18.3. The screws shall be made of heat-treated alloy steel, cadmium-plated,
          and furnished with a self-locking nylon pellet embedded in the threaded section. Unless otherwise called
          for on the drawings or specified herein, set screws shall be of the headless safety type, shall have threads
          of coarse thread series, and shall have cup points. Set screws shall neither be used to transmit torsion nor
          as the fastening or stop for any equipment that contributes to the stability or operation of the bridge.
          Threads for bolts, nuts, and cap screws shall conform to the coarse thread series and shall have a
          tolerance Class 2A bolts and nuts in accordance with the ASME Standard for Unified Inch Screw
          Threads.
          Bolt holes through unfinished surfaces shall be spotfaced for the head and nut, square with the axis of the
          hole.
          Unless otherwise called for, all bolt holes in machinery parts or connecting these parts to the supporting
          steel work shall be subdrilled at least 1/16” smaller in diameter than the bolt diameter and shall be reamed
          assembled for the proper fit at assembly or at erection with the steel work after the parts are correctly
          assembled and aligned.
          All elements connected by bolts shall be drilled or reamed assembled to assure accurate alignment of the
          hole and accurate clearance over the entire length of the bolt within the specified limit.
          Holes in shims and fills for machinery parts shall be reamed or drilled to the same tolerances as the
          connected parts at final assembly.
          Wherever possible, high strength bolts connecting machinery parts to structural parts or other machinery
          parts shall be inserted through the thinner element into the thicker element.
          High-strength bolts shall be installed with a hardened plain washer meeting ASTM F436 at each end.
          Positive locks of an approved type shall be furnished for all nuts, except those on ASTM A325 bolts. If
          double nuts are used, they shall be used for all connections requiring occasional opening or adjustment.
          If lock washers are used for securing, they shall be made of tempered steel and shall conform to the SAE
          regular dimensions. The material shall meet the SAE tests for temper and toughness.
          All cotters shall conform to the SAE standard dimensions and shall be made of half-round stainless steel
          wire, ASTM A276, Type 316.
          All fasteners shall be of United States manufacture and shall be clearly marked with the manufacturer's
          designation.
     F.   Keys and Keyways. Keys and keyways shall conform to the dimensions and tolerances for square and
          flat keys of ANSI Standard B17.1, Keys and Keyseats, unless otherwise specified. All keys shall be
          effectively held in place, preferably by setting them into closed-end keyways milled into the shaft. The
          ends of all such keys shall be rounded to a half circle equal to the width of the key. Keyways shall have a
          radius in the inside corners. Keyways shall not extend into any bearing. If two keys are used in a hub,
          they shall be located 120 degrees apart and in line with wheel arms where practicable. The fit between
          key and keyways shall be as shown on the drawings.


Route 35 over Manasquan River Bridge Rehabilitation
Monmouth and Ocean Counties                                                                                  Page 148
               Unless otherwise specified herein or in the drawings, keys shall be machined from carbon steel
         forgings, ASTM A668, Class K.
     G. Enclosed Gear Reducer. Speed reducers shall be standard models from one manufacturer, with ratios,
         dimensions, construction details, and AGMA ratings as shown on the Plans. Ratings shall be based on a
         service factor of 1.0 or higher.
               Reducers shall be manufactured in accordance with the requirements of the AGMA and shall have
         nameplates giving the rated horsepower, ratio, speed, service factor, and AGMA symbols.
               Reducers shall be tested at no-load by rotating at operating speed for two hours in each direction.
               Gear reducers shall have provisions for oil expansion due to churning and temperature change.
               The manufacturer shall submit for approval a certified print of each speed reducer showing as a
         minimum the following:
                    1. All external mounting dimensions including shaft sizes, bores, and keyways where
                          required.
                    2. Internal drawings showing each gear box component with part numbers.
                    3. The ratings that will appear on the nameplate.
                    4. Location of all lubricant connections.
                    5. Lubrication recommendations.
         The reducer shall meet the additional requirements set forth on the Contract Plans and in these
         Specifications.
         Reducers that drive electrical controls shall be as shown on plans or approved equal.
    H. Hubs and Bores. The hubs of all couplings shall be finished on both faces and polished where the hub
        face performs the function of a collar to prevent shaft movement. The hubs shall be bored concentric with
        the outside of couplings. All hubs shall have an ANSI Class FN2 shrink fit on the shafts, unless otherwise
        specified. Assembly shall be accomplished by heating the hub, cooling the shaft and moving the parts to
        correct position with out force. The use of liquid nitrogen for cooling is prohibited.
    I. Shims. Where shown on the drawings, all machinery shims required for leveling and alignment of
        equipment shall be steel, neatly trimmed to the dimensions of the assembled parts and drilled for all bolts
        that pass through the shims. In general, sufficient thickness shall be furnished to secure 1/64” variations
        of the shim allowance plus one shim equal to the full allowance. Shims shall be Stainless Steel ASTM
        A272 Type 302. Shims shall be provided without boltholes and shall be reamed in the field to the same fit
        as the other connected components. Shims greater than ½” shall include one solid plate of thickness equal
        to ½” less than total shim thickness.
               Shims shall be shown and fully dimensioned as details on the working drawings. Shims with open
        side or U-shaped holes for bolts will not be permitted. No shims shall have less than two holes for bolts.
               The use of peelable laminated shims with solder or resin bonding will be permitted as previously
        specified. Plastic or other non-metallic shims will not be permitted.
    J. Welding. Welding required for machinery shall be done in accordance with the requirements for welding
        structural steel. Stress relieving will be required only when specified. All welds used to fabricate
        machinery shall be completely tested by ultrasonic inspection (ASTM E164-74) per AWS D1.5, Section 6,
        Part C, and are subject to the acceptance criteria of Section 9.25.3. All machining shall be performed after
        welding and stress relieving.
               Welding joint sizes and details shall be shown on working drawings. Where multi-pass welds are
        required, welding procedures shall be submitted on or with shop drawings.
               Distortion during fabrication shall be kept to a minimum by the use of welding fixtures and proper
        welding procedures.
    K. Machinery Guards. Machinery guards shall be provided for all brakes and shall be constructed to comply
        with the applicable requirements of ANSI B15.1, Safety Standard for Mechanical Power Transmission
        Apparatus.
               Unless otherwise indicated or specified, all machinery guards shall be constructed of stainless steel
        having minimum thickness of No. 12 Gauge (0.105 inch) and shall have provision for removal without
        requiring disassembly of any machinery component.
               Machinery guards shall be provided with removable hinged or bolted covers for access to
        lubrication fittings enclosed by the guard. Phenolic nameplates shall be provided on these covers with
        lubrication instructions.
               The inside of machinery guards shall be painted Safety Orange.



Route 35 over Manasquan River Bridge Rehabilitation
Monmouth and Ocean Counties                                                                                Page 149
    L. Flexible Couplings. Gear-type, self-aligning, full-flexible couplings or semi-flexible couplings with
       floating shafts shall be used to connect all machinery components, except where other types of couplings
       are called for on the drawings. All couplings shall have shrouded bolts.
              The gear-type couplings shall be made of machined forged or cast steel, have curved face teeth and
       shall provide for at least a  ¾ degree misalignment per gear mesh.
              Grid-type, self-aligning, fully flexible, torsionally flexible couplings shall be used to connect
       electric motors to machinery components.
              The grid-type couplings shall have steel hubs, alloy steel grids, and steel or aluminum covers. Bolts
       in the covers shall be shrouded.
              Couplings shall be the standard products of an established manufacturer.
              Special couplings shall be as shown on the drawings.
              Coupling hubs shall be bored by the coupling manufacturer to the required size and tolerances,
       including keyways, and each hub shipped to the proper location for installation on its shaft by the
       manufacturer of the connected component.
              All coupling hubs with interference fits shall be provided with tapped holes for a means of removal
       from the shafts.
              Grid type flexible couplings shall be as manufactured by one of the following companies, or
       approved equal:
                   1. Falk Corporation, Milwaukee, WI
                   2. Lovejoy Corporation
                   3. Mondel Engineering (brakewheel)
        Gear couplings shall have two bolt-connected halves, consisting of either two flexible halves or one
        flexible half and one rigid half and each flexible half shall consist of two parts with meshing teeth; a hub
        and a flanged sleeve or outer casing. Gear couplings shall be as manufactured by one of the following
        companies, or approved equal;
                   1. Falk Corporation, Milwaukee, WI
                   2. Kop-Flex, Incorporated, Baltimore, MD
                   3. Sier-Bath Gear Company, Inc., North Bergen, NJ
    M. Lubrication. Standard grease fittings for a pressure system of lubrication shall be provided where
        applicable as shown on the Plans. Not more than two sizes of fittings shall be used. The large size shall
        be used wherever possible, and the smaller size shall be used for motor bearings and other small devices.
        Pressure fittings shall be rated at a minimum of 10,000 psi. Fittings shall contain a steel check valve that
        will receive grease and close against backpressure.
              The large fittings shall be connected directly into the bushings by ¼” minimum size, extra strong,
        threaded steel pipe and forged threaded fittings. The smaller fittings shall be connected with ¼” pipe
        where pipe extensions are required or by the size pipe thread furnished with the device to be lubricated.
              Pipe extensions shall be provided to facilitate access for lubrication but shall be kept as short as
        practical and shall be rigidly supported at the fittings and at intermediate points.
              Immediately after the completion of fabrication, all grease fittings shall be plugged until
        components are installed and regular lubrication is started. The plugs will then be replaced with the
        proper grease fittings.
              The Contractor shall furnish component manufacturer's lubrication literature for every machinery
        component, which requires lubrication.
              The bridge shall be furnished with an amount of lubricants as specified for each lubricant. The
        amount shall be in addition to the lubricant required for initial lubrication. The lubricant shall be stored
        in new steel containers in a location specified by NJDOT Maintenance Forces.
              The lubricant for each type of machinery component shall be kept separately in clearly marked new
        steel containers in a l. All measures shall be taken to prevent lubricant contamination.
              During installation and where applicable, the Contractor shall lubricate rotating and sliding parts of
        the machinery and fill gear reducers and flexible couplings with lubricants indicated on the
        manufacturer's lubrication literature.
              Lubrication fittings shall be as manufactured by one of the following companies, or approved equal:
                   1. Stewart Warner Alemite Corp., Charlotte, NC
                   2. Lincoln, Inc., St. Louis, MO
                   3. M. Brown Fitting Specialists, Inc., New York, NY
                   4. Auto Vehicle Parts Co., Covington, KY


Route 35 over Manasquan River Bridge Rehabilitation
Monmouth and Ocean Counties                                                                                Page 150
     N. Lubricants.
            1. General. The Contractor shall submit proposed lubricant selections to the Engineer for approval.
            2. Enclosed Gear Reducer. Enclosed gear reducer lubricant shall meet the requirements of the
                American Gear Manufacturers Association (AGMA) Standard 9005-D94 "Industrial Gear
                Lubrication".
                              The lubricant shall be manufactured by a reputable and knowledgeable supplier of
                lubrication and all lubricant shall be recommended for use in each application by the lubricant
                manufacturer.
                              The lubricant shall be recommended for use by the reducer manufacturer.
                              The lubricant should contain oxidation inhibitors, rust inhibitors, anti-foaming
                agents and anti wear additives.
                              Enclosed Gear Reducer Lubricant specification to be used in conjunction with
                AGMA Standard 9005-D94.
                        The maintenance of the lubricant, method of application and re-lubrication intervals, shall
                be recommended by both the reducer manufacturer and the lubricant manufacturer, and meet the
                requirements of the AGMA Standard 9005-D94, unless otherwise stated herein.
            3. Open Gearing. The open gear lubricant utilized must bond strongly to gear teeth to maintain a
                continuous film on bearing surfaces despite high loading and high load repetition, contain an EP
                additive, repel water, resist throw off and dripping, maintain consistency over wide temperature
                variations, and allow for east in application and removal.
                              The lubricant shall have an operating range of (-18 to 94)C and shall be considered
                a heavy bodied, adhesive type open gear lubricant by a reputable lubricant manufacturer.
                              Some adhesive lubricants are available in a diluted form for ease of application.
                This type of lubricant is diluted with solvent that quickly evaporates after application leaving
                behind an adhesive tacky film. If such a lubricant is desired, the solvent must be non-flammable
                and the mixture must not pose any hazard to health. The detailed specifications for open gear
                lubrications that will satisfy the above requirements do vary. The lubricant chosen shall be
                comparable to the following lubricants:
                              Mobil Mobiltac LL
                              Exxon Dynagear
            4. Roller Bearings. The roller bearing lubricant, the maintenance of the lubricant, method of
                application and re-lubrication intervals shall be recommended or approved by the manufacturer
                unless otherwise stated herein.
            5. Sleeve Bearings. The lubricant shall be comparable to the following:
                              Mobil Mobilux EP-2
                              Exxon Lidok EP-2
            6. Couplings. Coupling lubricant shall be comparable to Falk LTG as specified by the coupling
                manufacturer.
            7. Lock Bars. Lock bar front guide, rear guide, and receiving socket grease shall be comparable to
                the grease used in sleeve bearings as specified herein. Lock bar rack and pinion grease shall be
                comparable to the grease used for open gearing as specified herein.
     O. Tools and Equipment. The following tools and lubrication equipment shall be provided:
             One each of any other special size wrench and special tools or special lubrication equipment
        necessary to service machinery components actually installed on the bridge, which are not otherwise
        specified.
     P. Spare Parts. In addition to the spare parts described under other items the following spare parts shall be
        provided:
            1. One grid for each grid-type coupling.
            2. One complete set of gaskets for every new flexible coupling.
            3. Complete list of every new shaft and coupling seal used at the job, including current part number
                and manufacturing of each seal furnished plus sufficient generic description and dimensions to
                order seals in the future when current models/manufacturers may no longer be identifiable.
     Q. Paints. All new machinery components and existing machinery components as shown on the Plans shall
        be coated with one coat of epoxy mastic primer manufactured by one of the following companies or an
        approved equal.
            1. Sherwin-Williams Co., Epoxy Mastic Aluminum II


Route 35 over Manasquan River Bridge Rehabilitation
Monmouth and Ocean Counties                                                                               Page 151
             2. Carboline                  Carbomastic 15-Epoxy Mastic
         Paint for the pre-final field painting of machinery shall consist of one intermediate coat of approved
         epoxy paint compatible with the prime coat system.
         The final field applied paint shall consist of one coat of approved polyurethane paint resistant to
         weathering and abrasion and compatible with the intermediate coat.
         Paint for painting the interior of gear housings, pillow blocks and flexible couplings shall be special oil-
         resistant crankcase paint as approved by the paint manufacturer.
         No paints used shall contain lead. All layer thicknesses shall meet paint manufacturer‟s specification.
      R. Coatings. Where indicated on the Contract Drawings fabricated steel parts and weldments shall be hot-dip
         galvanized in accordance with NJDOT Standard Specifications.
               In general, fabricated steel parts having thickness‟ less than ¼” shall be hot-dip galvanized unless
         made of corrosion resisting material.
               The threads of all mounting bolts shall be coated with anti-seize compound before assembly of the
         nuts to prevent corrosion or galling and to facilitate future removal if necessary.
               Anti-seize compounds shall be as manufactured by the following companies, or approval equal:
                     1. Huron Industries, Port Huron, MI          Neolube #1
                     2. Fel-Pro, Inc., Skokie, IL                 #C-670
                     3. SPC Technologies Unbrako, Jenkintown, PA
         Rust-inhibiting coatings for temporary protection of machined surfaces shall be as manufactured by one
         of the following companies, or approved equal:
                     1. E.F. Houghton & Co.,                Rust Veto 344
                          Valley Forge, PA                  Cosomoline 1058
                     2. Sanchem, Inc., Chicago, IL          No-Ox-Id "A" Special "X”
                     3. A.W. Chesterton, Co.,               Heavy-Duty Rust Guard
                          Stoneham, MA
                     4. Texaco, Houston, TX                 Metal Protective Oil L.

                                                CONSTRUCTION
533.04 Construction Requirements.
      A. Shop Assembly and Operation. Machinery components shall be shop assembled to verify their correct fit
         prior to shipment. Any components requiring selective assembly shall be match marked for future
         assembly.
      B. Erection. The Contractor shall submit calculations, plans, and procedures detailing his intended scheme
         for installing all machinery.
               Construction and installation shall be done in a coordinated manner to ensure that the machinery
         components fit the adjacent material furnished under other items.
               All parts of the machinery shall be match marked for proper assembly and correct orientation.
         Before final drilling or reaming, all parts shall be adjusted to exact alignment by means of shims.
         Tapered shims shall be provided at no additional cost only if required. Electric motors, and devices such
         as limit switches and encoders, shall be included with the machinery for such erection. After final
         alignment and bolting, all parts shall operate smoothly.
               The span shall not be operated by the auxiliary drive machinery until all other machinery is in final
         alignment and bolted as approved by the Engineer.
               All edges and corners of machinery parts, sheet metal work, bedplates, and fabricated supports that
         are exposed in the finished work shall be rounded or chamfered. All burrs or other surface defects that
         could be injurious to workers erecting or maintaining the bridge machinery shall be removed.
               Bolt holes in structural steel for connecting machinery shall, in general, be drilled from the solid
         after final alignment of the machinery. Sufficient erection holes, subdrilled ¼” undersize, for temporary
         bolts may be used for erection and alignment of the machinery. When the machinery is aligned in its
         final position, full-size holes for the remaining bolts shall be subdrilled and reamed, the full-size bolts
         installed, and the temporary bolts removed and the bolt holes for temporary bolts reamed full size and
         bolts installed.
               ASTM A325 bolts shall be torqued to produce a tension equal to 70% of their minimum specified
         tensile strength. The tension shall be checked using a calibrated wrench.
               Torques for other grades of bolts shall be proportioned to their strength and shall be indicated on the
         erection drawings.


Route 35 over Manasquan River Bridge Rehabilitation
Monmouth and Ocean Counties                                                                                  Page 152
              The machinery shall be erected and adjusted by millwrights competent in the type of work involved.
        They shall be provided with all necessary measuring and leveling instruments as may be required.
              The Contractor shall be responsible for verifying and documenting all measurements required to
        assure that the machinery has been properly installed. The Contractor shall schedule all final
        measurements with the Resident Engineer. All measurements will be subject to the Engineers approval.
     C. Contractor‟s Inspection. After erection is completed, the Contractor shall make a thorough inspection to
        insure that all parts are properly aligned and adjusted as closely as practicable without actual operation,
        and that all bolts are properly tightened.
              Inspection of tightened fasteners shall be in accordance with the NJDOT Standard Specifications.
        The Contractor's inspection shall also verify that field painting has been performed as specified herein.
        Touch-up painting shall be performed to correct all painting defects found during this inspection.
              The Contractor's inspection shall also verify that all machinery components have been lubricated as
        specified herein.
              The Contractors shall be accompanied by the Engineer, during his final inspection before machinery
        testing. On the basis of the results of this inspection, the Engineer shall determine whether the bridge is
        ready for testing.
     D. Painting.
             1. General. Cleaning and painting of all unfinished surfaces of machinery shall comply with all the
                 applicable additional requirements of the NJDOT Standard Specifications. The Contractor shall
                 submit for review with the working drawings an outline of painting materials and methods.
             2. Shop Painting. All unfinished machinery external surfaces shall be cleaned with final surface
                 preparation, prior to painting, done by blast cleaning to meet the requirements of SSPC-SP6
                 "Commercial Blast Cleaning" with the following exceptions:
                         a. Flexible couplings.
                         b. Roller bearing pillow blocks
                         c. Electric motors
                         d. Brakes
                         e. Limit switches
                         f. Other equipment with shaft seals
                         g. The equipment excepted by the Engineer
        The excepted machinery or equipment shall be cleaned with solvent and hand tools to meet the
        requirements of SSPC-SP2, Hand Tool Cleaning as depicted in SSPC Vis. 1.
        After proper surface preparation, all unfinished machinery surfaces, except for those inside of gear
        housings and flexible shall be given two shop coats of primer by hand brushing. The shop coat shall be
        coordinated with the final field coat for compatibility. Application of primer shall adhere to all relative
        NJDOT Standard Specifications and the paint manufacturer recommendations. Insides of gear housings
        shall be cleaned and protected from rusting by an oil resistant paint as previously specified herein.
              Field Painting. After erection is complete, all machinery surfaces remaining exposed, except
                  rubbing surfaces, shall be thoroughly cleaned with an approved high-flash solvent (noted
                  below), all exposed metal surfaces such as mounting bolts, lifting points and all other paint
                  defects or voids shall be given two coats of primer. After successfully completing the prime
                  coats, all machinery shall be given two field coats of machinery enamel (minimum 2 mils dry
                  each coat) applied by hand brushing. Application of paint shall adhere to all relative NJDOT
                  Standard Specifications and the paint manufacturer recommendations. Acceptable machinery
                  enamels are given under MATERIALS. Colors for the field coats will be selected from
                  manufacturer's standard samples with the approval of the Engineer.
        The Contractor shall take special care to avoid painting of machinery surfaces, which are in normal
        rubbing contact. All nameplates, legend plates, and escutcheons mounted on machinery shall be masked
        for protection from paint. Lubrication fittings shall be kept clog-free.
        After completion of the operating tests and acceptance of the machinery, all accumulated oil, grease, dirt,
        and other contaminants shall be washed from exposed machinery surfaces, excepting rubbing surfaces,
        with an approved high-flash solvent. The cleaned exposed surfaces shall then be hand brush painted a
        third final field coat of machinery enamel as specified above, which shall color-code the machinery to
        distinguish between fixed and moving parts. Again, the application of paint shall adhere to all relative
        NJDOT Standard Specifications and the paint manufacturer recommendations. The following colors
        shall be used.


Route 35 over Manasquan River Bridge Rehabilitation
Monmouth and Ocean Counties                                                                               Page 153
               1. FEDERAL SAFETY ORANGE: Except for rubbing surfaces, for all moving parts of the
                   machinery such as shafting, couplings, and the side of gears and brakewheels.
               2. FEDERAL SAFETY GREEN: For all stationary parts of the machinery.
               Paint for the final field coat, which shall be compatible with the previous field coats, shall be a high-
         gloss machinery enamel resistant to weathering and abrasion, conforming to OSHA color requirements of
         the Safety Color Code for Marking Physical Hazards, ANSI Z53.1. The brand and colors shall be
         submitted to the Engineer for approval. The Contractor shall place cautionary signs in the Operator's
         House and at the entrances to the machinery rooms that shall explain the color code. Details of the sign
         giving text, dimensions and materials shall be placed on a shop drawing.
      E. Field Testing. Field testing is required for both the auxiliary drive machinery and the permanent electric
         motor drive machinery after it is installed.
               When the mechanical machinery and electrical equipment is ready for testing, the Contractor shall
         meet with the Engineer to arrange a test schedule, and shall keep available a complete crew of mechanics
         for a minimum of four working days in order to provide operation of the span for all tests and to make all
         adjustments and corrections which shall be required to complete the tests.
               The Contractor shall prepare a field testing procedure which shall be approved by the Engineer. The
         testing procedure shall be coordinated with tests required for the electrical equipment and shall include
         measurements of power and current drawn by the motors when operating under load as required
         hereinafter. The Contractor shall be responsible not to exceed the electrical design ratings of any
         component during all testing.
               The testing procedure shall include but not be limited to the verification of the proper operation
         and/or final adjustment of the following:
                     1. Coupling alignment
                     2. Machinery mounting integrity
                     3. Span operating times
                     4. Brake settings
                     5. Span seating and balance
         When the permanent machinery is ready for field testing, the operating machinery shall be driven by the
         main electrical system through at least ten complete cycles.
         Additional testing requirements are detailed in the Electrical Specifications.
         Strain gauge balance tests shall be performed. The strain gauges shall be mounted appropriately on each
         main pinion shaft. See additional requirements under Section 526, “Span Balancing”.
         During the test runs, the entire operating machinery shall be inspected to determine whether everything is
         in proper working order and fully meets the requirements of the Contract Drawings and these
         Specifications. The temperature rise of all electrical components shall not exceed design ratings. If any
         tests show that any components are defective or inadequate, or function improperly, the Contractor shall
         make all corrections, adjustments, or replacement required before the final acceptance at no additional
         cost.
         The Contractor shall coordinate the machinery with the structural supports and with the installation of
         electric motors, brakes, limit switches and other electrical components furnished under other items with
         the work in this item.
      E. Lubrication. The following amounts of additional lubricant shall be stored at the site in coordination with
         NJDOT Maintenance Forces:
              1. Reducer Oil – 55 gallons
              2. Grid Coupling Lubricant - 25 pounds
              3. Gear Coupling Lubricant - 50 pounds

                                             COMPENSATION
533.05 Method of Measurement.
      Machinery in General will not be measured for payment. It shall include all items and activities noted and
required in this section.

533.06 Basis of Payment.
          Separate payment will not be made for Machinery in General. All costs associated with this work shall
 be included in the applicable pay items for mechanical work.



Route 35 over Manasquan River Bridge Rehabilitation
Monmouth and Ocean Counties                                                                                    Page 154
                  SECTION 534 – EMERGENCY SPAN DRIVE MACHINERY
534.01 Description.
     The work shall consist of furnishing and placing in proper operating condition, acceptable to NJDOT, the
temporary span drive machinery, complete with all appurtenances required for proper operation. Work includes
removal and replacement of existing vertical floating shafts, existing auxiliary drive reducers (miter boxes), and
modifying existing horizontal output shafts to accept new reducers. Work also includes the modification of existing
supports to accept the new reducers and gear motor assemblies.
     It is the intent and purpose of these Specifications to cover and include all apparatus, appliances, material,
plant and labor necessary to properly install, equip, test, adjust, paint, and put in approved working order the
respective portions of the work herein specified.
     The existing components of the existing auxiliary drive machinery to be replaced shall be removed in
accordance with Section 201 “Clearing Site”.

                                                  MATERIALS
534.02 Materials and Equipment.
     A. Conformance. All equipment and its installation shall conform to the requirements of the latest revision of
        the Standard Specifications for Movable Highway Bridges of the American Association of State Highway
        and Transportation Officials, except as may be otherwise provided herein.
               Materials and construction shall conform to the requirements of the current National Electrical Code
         and to any applicable local rules and ordinances. The Contractor shall obtain any required permits and
         approvals of all Departments or Agencies having jurisdiction.
     B. Equipment and Material Provisions. The temporary span drive machinery and all associated equipment
         and materials shall be new. All equipment, materials, and workmanship shall be first-class in every
         aspect of this project and shall be manufactured and erected to the satisfaction of the Engineer and
         NJDOT Movable Bridge Engineering Group. See Section 533, “Machinery in General” for related
         requirements. The Contractor shall warrantee the in-service working of the temporary span drive
         machinery for one year following the date of installation. If the Contractor has any objection to any
         feature of the equipment as designed and laid out, he must state his objection at once, in writing, to the
         Engineer and NJDOT Movable Bridge Engineering Group; otherwise, his objection will be not be valid
         as an excuse for operational malfunctioning of the equipment or for defective or broken apparatus.
               If any changes from the Plans or these Specifications are deemed necessary by the Contractor,
         details of such departures and the reasons therefore shall be submitted for approval as soon as practicable
         before construction. No such changes shall be made without approval of the Engineer and NJDOT
         Movable Bridge Engineering Group.
               Material requirements for apparatus, equipment, and materials will be found in the articles under
         "Construction" in this item.

                                                CONSTRUCTION
     A.  Shop Assembly and Operation. The temporary span drive machinery includes the motors, reducers,
         electric clutches, and coupling halves. The gear motors shall be shop assembled and shipped to the field
         as assembled units. The auxiliary reducers (miter boxes) shall be shop assembled with all three coupling
         halves and shipped to the field.
               Visual inspection of the shop-assembled machinery shall be made by, and shop tests shall be
         witnessed by, a designated representative of the Engineer. Testing shall be in accordance with
         “Mechanical Work” Section 533.03 Materials, Part G. ENCLOSED GEAR REDUCERS. If any
         malfunctions are observed, they shall be corrected and such units shall pass all shop tests before release
         from the machinery manufacturer's shop.
               After each unit has passed all shop tests, the manufacturer shall prepare Certificates of Compliance
         with the specified tests and shall submit them to the Engineer.
     B. Field Testing. Following the installation and alignment work, the Contractor shall test the temporary span
        drive machinery. The Engineer and NJDOT Movable Bridge Engineering Group and bridge operators
        shall be notified of the time and date of the site test. The tests shall include:
             1. Time of operation
             2. Movement during starting and stopping


Route 35 over Manasquan River Bridge Rehabilitation
Monmouth and Ocean Counties                                                                                Page 155
             3. Vibration during running
             4. Overheating and leaking of oil
               Should the tests show that the gear motor or any component piece of equipment or apparatus, in the
         judgment of the Engineer and NJDOT Movable Bridge Engineering Group, is defective or functions
         improperly, such adjustments and/or replacements shall be made by the Contractor as to make the
         installation satisfactory to the Engineer and NJDOT Movable Bridge Engineering Group at no extra cost.
     C. Warranty and Maintenance. The temporary span drive machinery shall be guaranteed against defects and
        poor workmanship for the duration of the project.

                                                 COMPENSATION
534.03 Method of Measurement.
     Measurement will be on a lump sum basis.

534.04 Basis of Payment.
     Payment will be made under:
         Pay Item                                                                                    Pay Unit
         EMERGENCY SPAN DRIVE MACHINERY                                                              LUMP SUM


                  SECTION 535 – MISCELLANEOUS MECHANICAL WORK
535.01 Description.
      The work shall consist of furnishing, rehabilitating, and placing in proper operating condition, acceptable to
NJDOT, miscellaneous machinery components, including but not limited to the span instrumentation, motors,
brakes, couplings, and span lock machinery, complete with all appurtenances required for proper operation. Work
includes removal and replacement of existing span motors, motor brakes, machinery brakes, instrumentation and
limit switches, lock motors, shaft couplings and coupling seals as shown on the Plans, and primary differential
reducer seals. Work also includes any modifications to existing supports to accept new machinery.
      The span lock bars are to be removed and milled and a temporary lock is to be manufactured and installed
while existing bars are removed, one at a time. New proximity limit switches are to be installed for lock bar
positioning. The front guides and receiving sockets are to be shimmed and provided with new socket shoes. The
lock machinery reducers are to be cleaned and painted.
      It is the intent and purpose of these Special Provisions to cover and include all apparatus, appliances, material,
plant and labor necessary to properly install, equip, test, adjust, paint, and put in approved working order the
respective portions of the work herein specified.
      Existing components as called out on the Plans shall be removed in accordance with Section 201 “Clearing Site
Bridge”.

                                                 MATERIALS
535.02 Materials and Equipment.
     D. Conformance. All equipment and its installation shall conform to the requirements of the latest revision of
        the Standard Specifications for Movable Highway Bridges of the American Association of State Highway
        and Transportation Officials, except as may be otherwise provided herein.
              Materials and construction shall conform to the requirements of the current National Electrical Code
         and to any applicable local rules and ordinances. The Contractor shall obtain any required permits and
         approvals of all Departments or Agencies having jurisdiction.
     B. Equipment and Material Provisions. The machinery covered in this section and all associated equipment
         and materials shall be new. All equipment, materials, and workmanship shall be first-class in every
         aspect of this project and shall be manufactured and erected to the satisfaction of the Engineer and
         NJDOT Movable Bridge Engineering Group. See section 525, “Machinery in General” for related
         requirements. The Contractor shall warrantee the in-service working of the miscellaneous machinery for
         one year following the date of acceptance. If the Contractor has any objection to any feature of the
         equipment as designed and laid out, he must state his objection at once, in writing, to the Engineer and
         NJDOT Movable Bridge Engineering Group; otherwise, his objection will be not be valid as an excuse
         for operational malfunctioning of the equipment or for defective or broken apparatus.




Route 35 over Manasquan River Bridge Rehabilitation
Monmouth and Ocean Counties                                                                                    Page 156
                If any changes from the Plans or these Specifications are deemed necessary by the Contractor,
          details of such departures and the reasons therefore shall be submitted for approval as soon as practicable
          before construction. No such changes shall be made without approval of the Engineer and NJDOT
          Movable Bridge Engineering Group.
                Material requirements for apparatus, equipment, and materials will be found in the articles under
          "Construction" in this item.

                                              CONSTRUCTION
535.03         Construction Requirements
     A.        Shop Assembly and Operation. All motors shall be shop-assembled with their respective coupling
        halves prior to shipment to the field. The main span and lock electric motors, brakes, brakewheel
        couplings, flexible couplings, and limit switches shall be shipped to the bridge for field assembly and
        inspection.
               The instrumentation drive machinery, including gear reducer, rotary limit switch, and resolvers, has
         been designed as a shop-assembled package that shall include alignment of all shop assembled
         components. Components may require disassembly at installation. The shaft alignments shall be
         rechecked and adjusted as necessary at erection.
     E. Field Testing. Following the installation and alignment work, the Contractor shall test all machinery
        furnished and rehabilitated under this section. The Engineer and NJDOT Movable Bridge Engineering
        Group and bridge operators shall be notified of the time and date of the site test. The tests shall include:
             1. Span time of operation and trip positions (min. 5 cycles)
             2. Lock bar time of operation and trip positions (min. 5 cycles)
             3. Movement of span operating and lock machinery during starting and stopping
             4. Vibration during running/operating
             5. Overheating and leaking of oil
               Should the tests show that any component piece of equipment or apparatus, in the judgment of the
         Engineer and NJDOT Movable Bridge Engineering Group, is defective or functions improperly, such
         adjustments and/or replacements shall be made by the Contractor as to make the installation satisfactory
         to the Engineer and NJDOT Movable Bridge Engineering Group at no extra cost.
     F. Warranty and Maintenance. The machinery in this section shall be guaranteed against defects and poor
        workmanship for one year after acceptance of the bridge.

                                                COMPENSATION
535.04 Method of Measurement.
     Measurement will be on a lump sum basis.

535.05 Basis of Payment.
     Payment will be made under:
         Pay Item                                                                                 Pay Unit
         MISCELLANEOUS MECHANICAL WORK                                                            LUMP SUM



          SECTION 536 – BRIDGE OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE DURING
                                CONSTRUCTION
536.01 Description.
         The Contractor shall be held responsible for operation of the bascule span during periods of restricted
openings defined in Section 107.13 “Construction over or Adjacent to Navigable Waters.” The Contractor shall also
be responsible for the maintenance of the existing bridge components from the construction start date until final
acceptance. During this period the Contractor shall be responsible to operate and maintain the existing bridge
uninterrupted for pedestrian, vehicle, and marine traffic. The Department will meet the Contractor over the first 6
months to review operations and maintenance history. The Contractor shall maintain a log of all operation and
maintenance activities and submit them to the Department on a monthly basis. Completed forms shall be submitted
to the Engineer and Mr. John Rainiero at the Bureau of Maintenance Engineering Bridge Section, 1035 Parkway
Avenue, Trenton NJ, 08625 for record. The Sample Forms are included in Appendix B for contractor‟s use; see


Route 35 over Manasquan River Bridge Rehabilitation
Monmouth and Ocean Counties                                                                                 Page 157
Forms EL-45DCER, EL-45EER, and EL-45MER. In the event of an operational or bridge malfunction, the
Contractor shall notify Engineer and contact Mr. Robert Cunningham, Manager, Bureau of Maintenance
Engineering and Operations at (609) 530-2702 and Mr. John Rainiero, Project Engineer, Bureau of Maintenance
Engineering-Bridge Section at (609) 530-3708.

A.      Maintaining Existing Facilities. The Contractor shall maintain the existing electrical and mechanical
        components of the bridge operating system in operating condition at all times throughout the construction
        of the project. This includes, but is not limited to, navigation lights, traffic signals, warning and barrier
        gates, roadway lights, bridge lighting and heating and any other electrical facilities required for safe
        operations of the span. The Contractor shall furnish and install any temporary equipment necessary to
        conform with the above requirements. The arrangement of any temporary facilities and controls shall be
        approved by the Engineer. Lane closures shall be in accordance with the requirements listed of the
        maintenance of traffic plan sheets.
                  The maintenance shall include regular greasing, fluid change, electrical control maintenance, Fire
        Alarm System maintenance, up-keep for the Operator‟s Houses including, but is not limited to, cleaning,
        garbage removal, , and maintaining stairs to provide for safe access to Operator‟s Houses, and also repairs
        to any breakdowns during the construction period.. The following is a summary of typical required bridge
        maintenance for the movable bridge.
        1. Monthly Greasing – Four (4) trunnions, six (6) span lock guides, all open gears and remaining
             bearings shall require monthly greasing. For location of moveable components requiring greasing, the
             contractor shall refer to as-built plans for the existing bridge located at NJDOT, Trenton office and as-
             built plans of Route 35, Sec.12P – Electrical and Mechanical Rehabilitation contract located at NJDOT
             Freehold office, Moveable Bridge Engineering Unit.
        2. Annual Maintenance – All gear reducers require an oil flush and fill every 12 months.
             The Contractor shall be responsible for disposal of lubrication oil, grease, and hydraulic fluids in
             accordance with the all applicable environmental regulations.
        3. Electrical Maintenance – The work shall include, but is not limited to, the following tasks:
              Contact cleaning and tightening of connections of electrical panel components in the operator‟s
                  house.
              CCTV system maintenance and repositioning and relocation of cameras to get clear view of
                  channel for bridges openings during construction.
              Relamping of street lights, Operator‟s House lights, navigational lights, traffic signal lights and
                  traffic/barrier gate lights as necessary.
                  The Contractor and Engineer will examine all the required facilities on the bridge and will note
                  items requiring modification prior to the start of mandated maintenance.
                            Upon issuance of a report of non-operating items to the Engineer, the Engineer will make
                  arrangements with Contractor or other parties to repair any mal/non-functioning items. Contractor
                  shall assume the full responsibility for maintenance of the bridge once these non-operating items
                  are addressed but no later than six (6) months after the award of the project.
                            Thirty (30) days prior to assuming responsibility for operation of the bridge, the
                  Contractor shall submit to the Engineer for approval an Emergency Bridge Operation Response
                  Plan (EBORP) explaining the Contractor‟s planned response to open the bridge in event the bridge
                  fails open. The EBORP shall detail the Contractor‟s list of emergency response personnel and
                  equipment. If the bridge fails to operate for any reason, the Contractor‟s is required to respond to
                  the project site with emergency personnel and equipment within two (2) hours from the bridge
                  becomes un-operational to address emergencies. Should the Contractor fail to respond and costing
                  the State to respond with its own forces to restore bridge operation, the Contractor agrees to pay
                  the State the following damages:
                   For each occurrence that the Contractor fails to provide scheduled bridge openings on
                       Sundays, for the period between November 1 through March 1, each season throughout the
                       construction duration, as described under Section 107.13, the Contractor shall pay liquidated
                       damages consisting of Road User Costs and Consulting Engineering Costs to the State in the
                       amount of $4,800 plus USCG civil penalties in the amount of $15,000 per day in 2006,
                       $20,000 per day in 2007, and $25,000 per day in 2008 and beyond, plus $5,400 per every
                       offense for mobilizing the State‟s forces and equipment, plus



Route 35 over Manasquan River Bridge Rehabilitation
Monmouth and Ocean Counties                                                                                  Page 158
                      The Contractor shall be held liable for any lawsuits and damaged assessed against the State by
                       marine operators for their losses.

                  Approved EBORP shall be kept at the Operator‟s House for record.

536.02 Materials and Workmanship.
         All electrical equipment and its installation shall conform to the requirements of the 2000 AASHTO LRFD
Movable Highway Bridge Specifications with current interims, except as may be otherwise provided herein.
         All work shall conform to the requirements of the current national electrical code, and to any applicable
local rules and ordinances. The Contractor shall obtain any required permits and approvals of all departments or
agencies having jurisdiction.
         All equipment and materials except those designated to the reused shall be new. All equipment, materials,
and workmanship shall be manufactured end erected to the satisfaction of the Engineer.
         The contractor shall coordinate all mandated lubrication of the bridge machinery with the Engineer. Refer
to Section 533 – Machinery in General for lubricant requirements.

536.03 Bridge Operating Personnel.
         During periods of restricted openings defined in Section 107.13 “Construction over or adjacent to
Navigable Waters”, the Contractor shall provide three (3) operators (operators must have the ability to speak, write,
and communicate in English).
                   The basic qualifications of a Bridge Operator is the ability to seat the bridge safely without
         causing damage to the bridge structure by using eye-hand coordination to operate semi-automatic and
         manual controls. The individual must have good communicative skills, as they will be required to operate
         marine band radios to transmit and receive messages from the mariners, as well as communicate with the
         general public and law enforcement agencies. The Bridge Operator must have ability to use sound
         judgment and good common sense when dealing with day-to-day situations that arise.
                   The Contractor shall provide names and resumes of these operators to the Engineer and US Coast
         Guard for approval prior to beginning training as specified under Section 101.01 herein for security
         reasons.
                   Bridge opening time for construction and test purposes, shall be limited to certain hours for
         training and testing as directed by the Engineer.
                   Throughout the construction period, during working hours, the Contractor shall have available on
         call at the bridge a person who is knowledgeable as to the bridge workings and be able to perform electrical
         trouble shooting. At all other times he shall be available to report at the bridge within one hour, after verbal
         notification by the department or other duly appointed representative.
                   The bridge is required to open on signal from 8 a.m to 11 pm with the following exceptions:
                        1. During periods of restricted openings defined in Section 107.13 “Construction over or
                             adjacent to Navigable Waters”,
                        2. From May 15 through September 30 the draw need only open 15 minutes before the hour
                             and 15 minutes after the hour on:
                                   a. Saturdays, Sundays and Federal holidays, from 8 a.m. to 10 p.m.
                                   b. Mondays to Thursdays from 4 p.m. to 7 p.m.
                                   c. Fridays, except Federal holidays, from 12 p.m. to 7 p.m.
                             Year round from 11 p.m. to 8 a.m. the draw need only open if at least four (4) hours of
    notice is given.
                  During the initial week of employment, all new operators will be instructed with the normal
         operating procedure by the Department‟s Chief Bridge Operator. Once they are ready to certified, the
         Department will observe their performance and certify their ability to correctly operate the structure. The
         Sample Form used for certification of the Operator is included in Appendix B; see Form “Bridge
         Operator‟s Certification”. Once Operators are certified to operate the bridge by the Department; the
         completed certification form shall be submitted to the Engineer and one copy shall be kept at the Bridge
         Operator‟s Room for record. Operators shall not be allowed to operate the bridge unless certified by the
         Department. It is the Contractors responsibility to provide adequate training and get operators certified.
         Normally, two (2) months of training is required prior to certifying Operator for safe operation of the
         bridge. The Department will pay for the two months of training for each Operator. If Operator leaves



Route 35 over Manasquan River Bridge Rehabilitation
Monmouth and Ocean Counties                                                                                     Page 159
        during employment or after receiving training, the Department will not pay for any additional training
        required to train additional Operators.

536.04 Method of Measurement.
       Bridge Operation and Maintenance During Construction will not be measured for payment. It shall include
       all items and activities noted and required in this section

536.05 Basis of Payment.
       Separate payment will not be made for Bridge Operation and Maintenance During Construction. All costs
       associated with monthly greasing and gear reducer annual oil flush shall be included under
       MISCELLANEOUS MECHANICAL WORK. All costs associated with Bridge Operators and Electrical
       Maintenance shall be included under ELECTRICAL WORK.




Route 35 over Manasquan River Bridge Rehabilitation
Monmouth and Ocean Counties                                                                           Page 160
                            DIVISION 600 - INCIDENTAL CONSTRUCTION
                                                               SECTION 602 - PIPES
602.02 Materials.
        THE ENTIRE SUBSECTION IS CHANGED TO:

      Materials shall conform to the following Subsections:
           Ductile Iron Culvert Pipe..................................................................................................................... 913.02
           Ductile Iron Water Pipe ....................................................................................................................... 913.03
           Concrete Pipe ...................................................................................................................................... 913.04
           Corrugated Aluminum Alloy Culvert Pipe and Pipe Arches ............................................................... 913.05
           Corrugated Steel Culvert Pipe and Pipe Arches .................................................................................. 913.07
           Corrugated Steel Sewer Pipe and Pipe Arches .................................................................................... 913.08
           High Density Polyethylene (HDPE) pipe ............................................................................................ 913.11
           Mortar and Grout ................................................................................................................................. 914.03
           Gaskets ................................................................................................................................................ 919.08
      Portland cement concrete for pipe plugs, encasements, or saddles shall conform to Section 914.
      Where corrugated metal culvert pipe is designated, corrugated aluminum alloy culvert pipe or corrugated steel
culvert pipe may be used.
      Where corrugated metal culvert pipe arch is designated, corrugated aluminum alloy culvert pipe arch or
corrugated steel culvert pipe arch may be used.
      End sections shall be of the same material as the pipe or pipe arch to which the end sections are attached,
except that end sections for HDPE pipe for outfall systems shall be concrete.
      For jacked pipe, reinforced concrete culvert pipe shall conform to Subsection 913.04 except that the pipe shall
be Class V, Wall B, tongue and groove type.
      The tube material shall conform to the requirements of ASTM F 1216. The tube shall be fabricated to a size
that, when installed, conforms to the internal circumference and length of the original pipe.
      The wall color of the interior tube surface after installation shall not be of a dark or non-reflective nature that
could inhibit proper closed-circuit television inspection.
      All HDPE pipe shall be type S (smooth interior with annular corrugations), with gasketed silt-tight joints
according to AASHTO M294
      All HDPE pipes shall be in compliance with the requirements of the National Transportation Product
Evaluation Program‟s (NTPEP) evaluation of HDPE and thermoplastic pipe. NTPEP test results shall be furnished
to the Resident Engineer and to the Bureau of Materials Engineering and Testing before construction operation.

602.03 Construction Requirements.
        THE SUBSECTION HEADING AND ENTIRE TEXT ARE CHANGED TO:

602.03 Construction and Inspection Requirements.
     A. Construction. Excavation, bedding, backfilling, and disposal of excess material shall conform to
         Section 207 and the following:
         1. Trench openings shall not remain open overnight, unless adequately protected, within or adjacent to
              roadways on which traffic is being maintained or within the normal limits of pedestrian access.
         2. When installing storm drains across private property, the topsoil and sod disturbed by excavation
              operations shall be salvaged for use in restoring the area to its original condition.
         3. Except where necessary to maintain flow, drains shall not be placed in embankment until it has been
              constructed to a height of at least 3 feet above the top of the pipe or to the top of the embankment,
              whichever is lower, and then a trench shall be excavated for placing of the pipe.
         4. Before the installation of HDPE pipe, and at the discretion of the Resident Engineer, a technical
              representative from the pipe manufacturer shall be on site for the first day of pipe installation to
              validate proper installation procedures.
         5. Existing drainage flow during construction shall be maintained until proposed drainage facilities are
              completed and put into service.



Route 35 over Manasquan River Bridge Rehabilitation
Monmouth and Ocean Counties                                                                                                                                  Page 161
           6.   Pipe shall be handled and stored carefully in order to prevent damage such as cracking, denting and
                breaking. Pipe shall be lifted off of the delivery vehicle in order to avoid damage while unloading.
                Pipe shall not be dragged off the vehicle. Pipe shall be stored in an area where it will not be
                damaged during construction operations. When pipe is stacked, it shall be properly blocked or
                strapped, and the bell and spigots shall alternate to reduce the load on the bells. Pipe that is
                damaged, bowed or considered unacceptable for other reasons will be rejected by the Engineer and
                shall not be used on the Project.
           7.   If heavy construction equipment (100 kips axle load) will be used in or over the vicinity of HDPE
                pipe or corrugated aluminum alloy culvert pipe, a temporary compacted cover of a minimum of 4
                feet shall be placed over the top of the pipe. The materials for the temporary cover shall be
                excavated material free from stones larger than 2 inch for concrete pipe, 1½ inch for HDPE and 1
                inch for corrugated steel pipe.
           8.   Sections of pipe damaged during construction shall be removed and replaced.

     B.    Inspection.
           1. Video Inspection of Pipe.
                      Video inspection of pipe has been waived for this project.
           2. Deflection Inspection of HDPE Pipe.
                      Approximately 25 percent of the length of HDPE pipe shall be tested for deflection no sooner
                than 30 days after installation. Perform the deflection testing using either electronic deflectometers,
                calibrated television or video cameras, properly sized “go, no-go” mandrel, direct measurement
                extension rulers and tape measures in pipes that permit safe entry, or another acceptable device.
                      Where deflection is greater than 5 percent of the base inside diameter, the Contractor shall
                develop and submit a remediation or replacement plan to the Resident Engineer for approval.
                      Remedial action may include but is not limited to removal and replacement or an accepted
                repair procedure.

602.04 Laying of Pipe.
        THE LAST PARAGRAPH IS CHANGED TO:

     Pipe will be inspected before and during backfilling operations. Any pipe found to be out of alignment,
excessively settled, lifted, or damaged shall be removed and relaid or replaced.

602.05 Joining Pipe.
        THE FIRST PARAGRAPH IS CHANGED TO:

     Joints for rigid pipe shall be made with mortar, grout, or gaskets. Other types of joints recommended by the
pipe manufacturer may be permitted as approved by the Resident Engineer. Corrugated metal pipe shall be joined
by coupling bands.

          THE FOLLOWING IS ADDED AFTER THE LAST PARAGRAPH:

      The use of split couplings for HDPE pipe shall not be permitted unless approved by the Resident Engineer for
use in joining field cuts. All joints shall be of the bell and spigot, or bell and spigot type with a gasket according to
ASTM F 477 to provide a silt-tight seal. Pipe connections shall be constructed according to the manufacturer‟s
recommendations for assembly of joint components, lubrications and making of joints. The pipe fittings shall be free
of inclusions and visible defects. The ends of the pipe shall be cut squarely so as not to adversely affect joining.

602.11 Basis of Payment.
        THE FOLLOWING PAY ITEMS ARE DELETED:

           ___” X ___” REINFORCED CONCRETE CULVERT PIPE ARCH, CLASS ___                               LINEAR FOOT
           ___” X ___” REINFORCED CONCRETE SEWER PIPE ARCH, CLASS ___                                 LINEAR FOOT
          THE FOLLOWING PAY ITEMS ARE ADDED

           ___ " HIGH DENSITY POLYETHYLENE PIPE                                                       LINEAR FOOT
           DEFLECTION TESTING OF HIGH DENSITY POLYETHYLENE PIPE                                       LINEAR FOOT


Route 35 over Manasquan River Bridge Rehabilitation
Monmouth and Ocean Counties                                                                                     Page 162
              THE FOURTH PARAGRAPH IS CHANGED TO:

     Separate payment will not be made for material used as a temporary cover over corrugated aluminum alloy
culvert pipe or HDPE pipe.

                                         SECTION 603 – INLETS AND MANHOLES
              WAS THIS STUFF ADDED BY PB? - KR
              603.08 INLETS.
              THE FOLLOWING IS ADDED:
               TO PROVIDE FOR TEMPORARY DRAINAGE, AND TO PROVIDE A BETTER RIDING SURFACE
                   AFTER THE BASE AND INTERMEDIATE PAVEMENT COURSES ARE CONSTRUCTED,
                   INLETS AND MANHOLE CASTINGS SHALL BE INITIALLY SET 2 INCHES BELOW THE
                   INDICATED GRATE ELEVATION. INLETS WITH CURB PIECES SHALL BE PROVIDED
                   WITH A CURB PIECE 2 INCHES HIGHER THAN NORMALLY PROVIDED SO THAT THE
                   CURB PIECE MATCHES THE ADJACENT CURB HEIGHT. TYPE D INLETS IN BARRIER
                   CURB SHALL BE CONSTRUCTED IN THE NORMAL MANNER. AS THE FINAL 2 INCH
                   SURFACE COURSE IS CONSTRUCTED, INLETS AND MANHOLES SHALL BE FITTED
                   WITH A 2-INCH FRAME OR RING, AND THE GRATE REINSTALLED.


                                                             SECTION 605 - CURBS
605.07 Concrete Curbs.

605.10 Method of Measurement.
        THE FOLLOWING IS ADDED:
         CONCRETE BARRIER CURB TRANSITION WILL BE MEASURED BY THE LINEAR FOOT.

              605.11 BASIS OF PAYMENT.
              THE FOLLOWING IS ADDED:
               Pay Item                                                                                                                      Pay Unit
               CONCRETE BARRIER CURB TRANSITION                                                                                              LINEAR FOOT




                                   SECTION 607 – SIDEWALKS AND DRIVEWAYS
607.02 Materials.
        THE ENTIRE SUBSECTION IS CHANGED TO:

      HMA shall conform to Section 903 except that the composition of the mixture for the top layer may also
include up to 20 percent of RAP. Portland cement concrete shall conform to Section 914 except that driveways shall
attain a strength of not less than 3,000 pounds per square inch in three days. Other materials shall conform to the
following Subsections:
            Soil Aggregate ..................................................................................................................................... 901.09
            Prime Coat:
             Cut-back Asphalt, Grade MC-30 or MC-70 ...................................................................................... 904.02
            Tack Coat:
             Cut-back Asphalt, Grade RC-70 or RC-T ......................................................................................... 904.02
             Emulsified Asphalt, Grade RS-1, SS-1, or SS-1h.............................................................................. 904.03
             Cationic Emulsified Asphalt, Grade CSS-1 or CSS-1h ..................................................................... 904.03
            Curing Materials .................................................................................................................................. 905.03
            Preformed Expansion Joint Filler ........................................................................................................ 908.01
            Reinforcement Steel ............................................................................................................................ 915.03


Route 35 over Manasquan River Bridge Rehabilitation
Monmouth and Ocean Counties                                                                                                                               Page 163
         Detectable Warning Surfaces .............................................................................................................. 905.06
     Dense-graded aggregate for base course used with HMA sidewalk shall conform to Subsection 901.08.

607.06 Concrete Sidewalks, Driveways, and Public Sidewalk Curb Ramp Delineation.
        THE SUBSECTION HEADING IS CHANGED TO:

607.06 Concrete Sidewalks, Driveways, and Detectable Warning Surfaces.

           SUBPART 5 HEADING AND ENTIRE TEXT ARE CHANGED TO:

     5.     Detectable Warning Surfaces. Immediately before installing safety red color and Detectable Warning
            Surfaces, the designated area shall be thoroughly cleaned and dried according to the manufacturer‟s
            recommendation. The installation of Detectable Warning Surfaces shall be according to the
            corresponding construction details and the manufacturer‟s recommendation. The background surface
            upon which the detectable warning surface is installed, silicon carbide 60 grit shall be evenly broadcast at
            a rate of 0.07 pounds per square yards for skid resistance.
                  A list of approved manufacturers will be provided in the Special Provisions.
            Product Name                          Manufacturer                          Address / Phone No.
            SAFTI-TRAXTM                          COTE-L Industries, Inc                1542 Jefferson Street
                                                                                        Teaneck, NJ 07666
                                                                                        201-836-0733
                  All areas determined to have been damaged or not to be in conformance with the Specifications or
            the Plans shall be removed and replaced at no additional compensation to the State.

607.07 Method of Measurement.
        THE THIRD PARAGRAPH IS CHANGED TO:

     Detectable Warning Surfaces will be measured by the square yard.

607.08 Basis of Payment.
        THE FOLLOWING PAY ITEM IS DELETED:

            Pay Item                                                                                                             Pay Unit
            PUBLIC SIDEWALK CURB RAMP DELINEATION                                                                                SQUARE YARD

           THE FOLLOWING PAY ITEM IS ADDED:

            Pay Item                                                                                                             Pay Unit
            DETECTABLE WARNING SURFACES                                                                                          SQUARE YARD



                             SECTION 616 – SLOPE AND CHANNEL PROTECTION
616.01 Description.
     This work shall consist of installation of riprap stones around Piers 1N and 2N, as shown in the plans. This
work shall also consist of installation of riprap stones over the excavated contaminated soil in front of each
abutment, the limits as specified in the plans.

616.02 Materials.
THE FOLLOWING IS ADDED AT THE END OF THIS SUBSECTION:
     Riprap Stone Channel Protection, Piers 1N and 2N, shall consist of clean rock, identified as riprap in
accordance with Subsection 901.16, with the following modifications: stones shall not weigh more than 200 pounds
each, with at least 90 percent of the stones weighing more than 50 pounds each, but not more than 40 percent
weighing more than 100 pounds each.

616.07 Riprap Stone Slope or Channel Protection.



Route 35 over Manasquan River Bridge Rehabilitation
Monmouth and Ocean Counties                                                                                                                   Page 164
THE FOLLOWING IS ADDED AT THE BEGINNING OF THIS SUBSECTION:
      Riprap Stone Slope Protection shall be placed at both the existing north and south abutments as shown on the
plans. Riprap stone channel protection shall be installed at existing Piers 1N and 2N of the existing bridge, as
shown on the plans and as described below:
      The plan and cross sections as depicted in the plans is generic, and meant to represent the typical expected
type, area, and location of stone channel protection riprap to restore the original cross section of the scoured areas
adjacent to these piers.
      The below-water surface areas shall be inspected by a diver prior to placement to determine the location and
quantity of riprap required. The estimated quantity has been approved for filling in the water by the NJDEP and
USCOE and the total volume may not be increased without prior approval of these agencies.
      The elevations to which the top of riprap shall be terminated may not deviate by more than three inches, so as
to not change the riverbed, as large boats frequent these spans.
      Sections of geotextile fabric and riprap protection shall be constructed to the lines and grades and in the areas
shown on the contract drawings or modified by the Engineer.

THE SECOND PARAGRAPH IS REPLACED WITH THE FOLLOWING:
      The geotextile is to extend over the entire surface over which the riprap is to be placed and extend a minimum
of 1 foot out on each side. At the time of installation, fabric shall be rejected if it has defects, rips, holes, flaws,
deterioration, or damage incurred during manufacture, transportation, or storage. The fabric shall be laid smooth
and free of tension, stress, fold, wrinkles, or creases. The strips shall be placed to provide a minimum width of 3
feet of overlap for each joint. Securing pins with washers shall be inserted through both strips of overlapped fabric
at no greater than 3-foot intervals along a line through the midpoint of the overlap. Additional pins, regardless of
location, shall be installed as necessary to prevent any slippage of the filter fabric. When laid parallel to the
shoreline, the fabric shall be placed so that the upper strip of fabric will overlap the next lower strip. Each securing
pin shall be pushed through the fabric until the washer bears against the fabric and secures it firmly to the
foundation. The fabric shall be protected from contamination form spillage or contact with unsuitable material at all
times during construction and any contaminated fabric shall be removed and replaced with uncontaminated fabric.
The filter fabric shall be protected from damage due to the placement of stone protection by limiting the height of
drop of the material. Before any placement of stone, the Contractor shall demonstrate that the placement technique
will prevent damage to the fabric.

616.08 Method of Measurement.
THE FOLLOWING IS ADDED AT THE END OF THE SUBSECTION:
     Riprap Stone Channel Protection, Piers 1N and 2N, will be measured by the cubic yard.

616.09 Basis of Payment.
     Payment will be made under:
         Pay Item                                                                                    Pay Unit
         RIPRAP STONE SLOPE PROTECTION, 16” THICK (D50 = 8”)                                         SQUARE YARD
         RIPRAP STONE CHANNEL PROTECTION, PIERS 1N AND 2N                                            CUBIC YARD

     Separate payment will not be made for geotextiles and coarse aggregate placed under riprap stone slope or
channel protection.


                                  SECTION 612 – BEAM GUIDE RAIL
612.08 Beam Guide Rail on Bridges.
        THE FOURTH PARAGRAPH IS DELETED.

          THE FOLLOWING IS ADDED

      The existing guide rail anchors and posts on the Ashley Avenue Bridge are to remain. The Contractor will take
care to avoid damaging the existing guide rail elements to remain. No extra payment will be made for replacement
of elements to remain that are damaged by the Contractor or for the unforeseen replacement of existing elements.



Route 35 over Manasquan River Bridge Rehabilitation
Monmouth and Ocean Counties                                                                                    Page 165
                                         SECTION 617 - TRAFFIC CONTROL
617.02 Materials.
        THE ENTIRE SUBSECTION IS CHANGED TO:

     Materials shall conform to the following Subsections:
         Removable Wet Weather Pavement Marking Tape and Removable Black Line Masking Tape ........ 912.12
         Temporary Pavement Markers ............................................................................................................ 912.16

617.03 Traffic Control Devices.
        THE FOLLOWING IS ADDED TO THE FIRST PARAGRAPH:

      Traffic Control devices shall be NCHRP-350 crash test compliant by the NJDOT implementation dates stated
in the table below and shall be duly certified, if necessary.


  Traffic                                              AASHTO/FHWA           NJDOT                                NJDOT deadline
 Control             Commonly used                      implementation   implementation                           By which devices
  Device                  NJDOT                          date for newly   date for newly                              must be
 Category         Traffic Control Devices                  purchased    purchased Devices                           NCHRP-350
                                                            Devices                                                  compliant

                  Traffic cones, drums and
     1             delineator guide posts                    10/1/1998                   1/1/2003                      8/15/2003


                Vertical panel, portable sign
     2             supports, and type III                    10/1/2000                   1/1/2003                      8/15/2003
                         barricades


                 Truck mounted attenuators
                 and traffic barriers-impact     10/01/1998
                attenuators (crash cushions),    attenuators
     3              barrier terminals, and       10/01/2002                            10/01/1998                      3/15/2005
                    longitudinal barriers     temporary barriers




                  Portable, usually trailer-
                  mounted, devices such as
                 lighting supports, flashing
     4            arrows panels, temporary               to be announced                6/15/2005                      6/15/2007
                      traffic signals, and
                 changeable message signs
                  used in or adjacent to the
                         traveled way



     Note: Resident Engineer‟s approval shall be obtained to use traffic control devices that are
           certified NCHRP 350 compliant, but not listed in the table.




Route 35 over Manasquan River Bridge Rehabilitation
Monmouth and Ocean Counties                                                                                                                Page 166
     Newly purchased devices shall be NCHRP-350 compliant. A list of NCHRP 350 compliant and FHWA
approved devices can be found at:

http://www.fhwa.dot.gov/safety/fourthlevel/pro_res_road_nchrp350.htm

     3.   Illuminated Flashing Arrows. The solar powered arrow boards approved for use on projects are:
          a. Work Area Protection – Arrowmaster Model WAAW–15-SB
          b. Solar Technology Inc. – Silent Sentinel
          c. Trafcon Industries Inc. – Model TC1-15S
          d. Protect-O-Flash Inc. – Model No. M-90 (LED bulbs only)
          e. TRACOM (Trailer Component Mfg., Inc.)

     Temporary bridge barriers for the bascule span shall be connected to the open steel grid deck as shown on the
contract plans.

617.10 Traffic Directors.
         THE FOLLOWING NEW SUBPART IS ADDED

     C.   Emergency Towing Service. Thirty days before the start of Construction Operations, the Contractor
          shall provide an Emergency Towing Service Plan for approval by the Resident Engineer, which shall
          indicate the type, quantity, and location of towing equipment to be used.
                Emergency towing service shall be provided during those periods of time when construction
          operations require closure of a lane or lanes of traffic, and during AM and PM traffic peak periods
          Monday through Friday, on holidays and other periods (as defined in the General Notes of the Traffic
          Control Plans), plus on Fridays 4 PM to 12 midnight and Sundays 12 noon through 12 midnight from
          Memorial Day to Labor Day, or as directed by the Resident Engineer. Emergency towing service shall
          consist of having personnel and equipment at the designated locations on the project site capable of
          removing disabled vehicles, without damage to the vehicle, from the construction zone to the nearest
          location that will permit the disabled vehicle to be legally parked without interfering with traffic.
          Emergency towing service shall respond immediately upon notice of a disabled vehicle by the Resident
          Engineer or Contractor personnel.

     D.   Emergency Towing Service (On-Call). Thirty days before the start of Construction Operations, the
          Contractor shall provide an Emergency Towing Service Plan for approval by the Resident Engineer,
          which shall indicate the name and location of a reputable, licensed towing service(s) to be used.
               Emergency towing services (on-call) shall provide for the call up of a designated tow operator
          during hours when on-site Emergency Towing (617.10C) is not provided to remove a disabled vehicle
          from the construction zone. The tow service shall be capable of removing disabled vehicles, without
          damage to the vehicle, from the construction zone to the nearest location that will permit the disabled
          vehicle to be legally parked without interfering with traffic. Emergency towing service shall respond
          immediately upon notice of a disabled vehicle by the Resident Engineer, Contractor personnel, Bridge
          Tender, or police.


617.15 Removable Pavement Marking Tape.
        THE SUBSECTION HEADING AND ENTIRE SUBSECTION ARE CHANGED TO:

617.15 Removable Wet Weather Pavement Marking Tape.
     Removable wet weather pavement marking tape shall be installed at designated locations and according to the
Manufacturer‟s recommendations. The tape shall be white or yellow and shall be installed in single or double lines,
as designated.
     The surface upon which the tape is to be installed shall be prepared according to Subsection 618.05.
Removable wet weather pavement marking tape shall be installed on dry surfaces, when the surface temperature is
between 50 F and 150 ºF and when the ambient temperature is 50 ºF and rising, and when the weather is otherwise
favorable as determined by the Engineer. The tape shall not be overlapped, and only butt splices shall be used.




Route 35 over Manasquan River Bridge Rehabilitation
Monmouth and Ocean Counties                                                                               Page 167
      To ensure maximum adhesion, the tape shall be tamped and a truck shall be driven slowly over the tape several
times. The tape shall be removed when no longer required for traffic control.
      Removable tape that has become damaged and is no longer serviceable shall be replaced immediately and will
not be measured for payment. Tape that is damaged by construction operations shall also be replaced without
additional compensation.

617.16 Method of Measurement.
        THE SIXTEENTH PARAGRAPH IS CHANGED TO:

    Removable wet weather pavement marking tape will be measured by the linear foot of 4-inch wide strips,
deducting the gaps.

     Emergency Towing Service On-call will be measured on a per response basis.
     Temporary bridge barrier for bascule span will be measured by the linear foot.



         THE FOLLOWING IS ADDED

     Emergency Towing Service will be measured by the number of hours at the project site.

617.17 Basis of Payment.
        DELETE THE FOLLOWING PAY ITEM:

          Pay Item                                                                                 Pay Unit
          REMOVABLE PAVEMENT MARKING TAPE                                                          LINEAR FOOT

         ADD THE FOLLOWING PAY ITEMS:

          Pay Item                                                                                 Pay Unit
          REMOVABLE WET WEATHER PAVEMENT MARKING TAPE                                              LINEAR FOOT
          EMERGENCY TOWING SERVICE                                                                 HOURS
          TEMPORARY BRIDGE BARRIER – BASCULE SPAN                                                  LINEAR FOOT

                      SECTION 618 - TRAFFIC STRIPES AND MARKINGS
618.01 Description.
        THE FOLLOWING IS ADDED TO THIS SUBSECTION:

     Removal of pavement reflectors and castings consists of the removal and disposal of existing raised pavement
markers, including the lens when still intact.
     Removal and replacement of pavement reflector lenses consists of the removal of existing pavement reflector
lenses and installing new monodirectional or bidirectional pavement reflector lenses.

618.03 Equipment.
        THE ENTIRE SUBSECTION TEXT IS CHANGED TO:

      The epoxy resin striping and liquid system striping equipment shall be so designed, equipped, maintained, and
operated that the material is properly applied in variable widths at a consistent temperature. The striping equipment
shall include a tachometer and a pressure gauge and a calibrated holding vessel for each component. The holding
vessels for all pigments and hardeners shall have thermometers for measuring the temperature of the vessel contents.
The striping equipment shall be equipped with a separate power unit for the pumps used in the mixing and
distribution of the components. The following shall be furnished with each striping equipment:
      1. A calibration sheet that shows the number of the truck body, the capacity thereof, and an outage table in
          increments of not over ½ inch. This calibration sheet must be certified by the manufacturer or testing
          agency.



Route 35 over Manasquan River Bridge Rehabilitation
Monmouth and Ocean Counties                                                                                   Page 168
     2.     A metal rod for each holding vessel, with accurate divisions marked and consecutively numbered starting
          at the bottom. The rod shall be not less than 1 foot longer than the depth of the vessel.
      3. Slip-proof steps with handrail to reach ground level.
      4. Slip-proof catwalk with handrail, running along the top of the vessel.
      5. Fire extinguisher in working order.
      The equipment for applying thermoplastic material shall be capable of providing continuous mixing and
agitation of the material. The parts of the equipment conveying the material between the main reservoir and the
shaping die shall be so constructed to prevent accumulation and clogging. The mixing and conveying parts and the
shaping dies or spray gun shall be capable of maintaining the material at optimum plastic temperature. The
equipment shall be so constructed to ensure continuous uniformity in the dimensions of the entire stripe or marking.
The kettle provided for the melting and heating of the thermoplastic material shall be equipped with an automatic
thermostat control device and heated by a controlled heat-transfer liquid rather than by a direct flame. The heating
kettle and applicator shall be equipped and arranged to meet the National Board of Fire Underwriters and State and
Federal regulations. The parts of the equipment that come in contact with the material shall be easily accessible for
cleaning and maintenance.
      All equipment for applying traffic stripes or traffic markings shall be equipped with glass bead dispensers of a
type that will mechanically and automatically dispense beads uniformly on wet stripes or markings at the rates
specified.
      Equipment for removing the various types of traffic stripes or traffic markings shall be designed with a vacuum
system to remove all millings from the pavement surface and prevent airborne residue from escaping into the
atmosphere.
      All equipment including traffic marking tape applicator and retrometer shall be duly calibrated and shall
conform manufacturer‟s requirements.

618.04 Determination of Acceptability.
        THE ENTIRE SUBSECTION TEXT IS CHANGED TO:

      The Contractor shall furnish for approval, 20 calendar days before placement, a complete schedule of
operations for applying pavement markings, including the number and types of equipment, and procedures for the
Project.
      When long-life traffic stripes are required on the Project, the Contractor shall furnish the manufacturer‟s
written instructions for proper use of the materials, including but not limited to, mixing ratios and application
temperatures.
      The Contractor shall arrange for and have each long-life material manufacturer‟s representative on the site for
the first full day of applying either long-life traffic stripes or traffic markings to provide technical assistance.
      The Contractor shall furnish a LTL-2000 Retrometer for the Engineer‟s use in determining the retroreflectance
values of the various traffic stripes or traffic markings. This equipment is for the sole use of the Engineer and will
become the property of the Contractor after Acceptance.
      Before starting long-life traffic striping operations, the Contractor shall construct one or more test strips. Each
test strip shall consist of approximately 500 linear feet of pavement with white and yellow striping (lane and edge
lines) or markings similar to that required for the Project. The test strips shall demonstrate the capability of the
proposed materials, equipment, and procedures to produce long-life traffic stripes that comply with the
Specifications, including dimensions, appearance (stripes with uniform color and crisp, well defined edges), wet
film thickness, drying time, adhesion, and glass beads application and retention. A test strip will be required for
each applicator equipment used. Additional test strips may be required when major equipment repairs or
adjustments are made or when the traffic stripes fail to comply with the Specifications. Permission to proceed with
the striping operations will be given when the test strips are in compliance. Each test strip may remain in place and
become part of the finished stripes subject to the requirements of Subsection 618.10.

618.05 Surface Preparation.
        THE SECOND PARAGRAPH IS CHANGED TO:

     The Contractor shall apply a primer-sealer conforming to NJDEP volatile organic content (VOC) requirements
to the areas of HMA and Portland cement concrete surfaces as required, in accordance with the striping
manufacturer‟s recommendations.



Route 35 over Manasquan River Bridge Rehabilitation
Monmouth and Ocean Counties                                                                                     Page 169
618.07 Long-Life Epoxy Resin Traffic Stripes.
        THE SUBSECTION HEADING AND TEXT ARE CHANGED TO:

618.07 Long-Life Traffic Stripes.
      The Contractor shall mix epoxy resin material with an automatic proportioning and mixing machine and hot-
spray the compound at a temperature between 100 and 130 ºF onto thoroughly dry surfaces. The material shall only
be placed during anticipated dry weather when the ambient temperature is a minimum of 45 ºF and the surface
temperature is a minimum of 50 ºF. The temperature of the sprayed mixture shall be adjusted as required for
prevailing conditions, including the air and pavement surface temperatures, to achieve a no-track drying time of 30
minutes or less. The epoxy resin mixture shall be applied in a wet film thickness of 20  1 mil.
      Immediately after, or in conjunction with the epoxy resin application, the Contractor shall apply large glass
beads and small glass beads to the wet compound. Each type of bead shall be applied in a uniform pattern and each
at a rate of 12 pounds per gallon of epoxy resin material.
      The Contractor shall remove all epoxy resin material that has been tracked or spilled in areas outside of the
intended placement areas.
      Alternate liquid striping materials shall be selected from the approved product list maintained by the Bureau of
Materials.

618.08 Long-Life Thermoplastic Traffic Markings.
        THE SUBSECTION HEADING AND ENTIRE TEXT ARE CHANGED TO:

618.08 Long-Life Thermoplastic and Preformed Tape Traffic Markings.

     The Contractor shall apply preformed thermoplastic or hot extruded thermoplastic or preformed tape traffic
markings, using equipment and procedures that produce markings that are straight and have sharp edges; that are the
specified color, width, and thickness; that have uniform retroreflectivity; and that are properly bonded to the
pavement. The thermoplastic material shall be applied as follows:
     1. Preformed Thermoplastic. The Contractor shall place preformed thermoplastic traffic marking tape on
           thoroughly dry surfaces and during anticipated dry weather. The preformed thermoplastic tape shall be
           melted using the flame from a propane-type torch, according to the manufacturer‟s recommendations, to
           bond the traffic markings permanently in position.
                 If required, the Contractor shall apply additional glass beads to the hot-wet material in a uniform
            pattern, to attain the minimum initial retroreflectance value specified in Subsection 618.10 for
            thermoplastic tape.
     2.           Hot Extruded Thermoplastic. The Contractor shall heat the thermoplastic material uniformly and
           apply the melted material at a temperature between 400 and 425 ºF, to thoroughly dry surfaces and during
           anticipated dry weather, when the ambient and surface temperatures are a minimum of 50 ºF. The
           thermoplastic traffic markings shall be extruded on the HMA or Portland cement concrete pavement in a
           thickness of 90  5 mils.
                 Immediately after, or in conjunction with the thermoplastic application, the Contractor shall apply,
            by mechanical means, glass beads to the wet material in a uniform pattern and at a minimum rate of 10
            pounds per 100 square feet of markings. Hand throwing of the beads will not be allowed.
     3.                Preformed tape. Preformed traffic tape shall be applied according to the tape manufacturer‟s
           installation instructions. The use of primers or other adhesion promoting agents shall be used according
           to the recommendations of the tape and primer/agent manufacturers. Applied stripes and markings shall
           be free from snaking, air bubbles, loose edges or any other condition that may cause early failure as
           determined by the engineer.
                 Tape shall be applied at least 3 inches away from longitudinal joints. In areas where it is not
            possible to avoid a joint beneath the tape, such as transverse construction joints, short lengths of
            longitudinal joints or other pavement depressions and irregularities directly beneath the tape, the tape
            shall be cut or treated according to the tape or marking manufacturer‟s recommendations. In no case
            shall more than two continuous feet of striping tape be placed over a longitudinal joint.

618.10 Defective Stripes or Markings.
        THE ENTIRE SUBSECTION TEXT IS CHANGED TO:




Route 35 over Manasquan River Bridge Rehabilitation
Monmouth and Ocean Counties                                                                                  Page 170
     The Contractor shall replace long-life traffic stripes or traffic markings determined to be in nonconformance
with the Specifications, or not placed at the locations or in the dimensions specified. The defective stripes or
markings shall be removed according to Subsection 618.12.
     The Contractor shall replace defective long-life traffic stripes based on the following:
     1. The entire 10 foot broken line if the line to be replaced is determined to have a deficiency.
     2. The entire length of epoxy resin striping determined to have a wet film thickness of less than 19 mils shall
        be restriped with 20 mils of new epoxy resin, based upon the calculated and measured yields.
     3. The entire length of striping shall be replaced where improper curing or discoloration has occurred.
        Discoloration is defined as localized areas or patches of brown or grayish colored epoxy resin material.
        When improper curing or discoloration occurs intermittently in intervals of 100 feet or less throughout the
        striping, the entire length of striping shall be replaced from where it first occurs until where it no longer
        exists plus 5 feet on each end.
     4. The entire length of striping that has failed to bond or adhere to the pavement, or has chipped or cracked,
        shall be replaced from where it first occurs to where it no longer exists. When more than 25 spots
        (combined or individual) of chipping, cracking or poor bonding/adhesion has occurred within a 1,000 linear
        foot distance, the entire 1,000 linear feet shall be replaced.
     5. The entire length of 1 mile of striping shall be replaced where the initial retroreflectance value of two of
        four readings for that 1 mile of 4-inch wide striping is not in compliance with the following:
        As measured with a LTL-2000 Retrometer

                                                 White                                      Yellow
                  Type              (Millicandelas per square foot per         (Millicandelas per square foot per
                                               footcandle)                                footcandle)
             Epoxy Resin                           375                                         250
            Permanent Tape                         500                                         300

     6.    The entire area of striping shall be replaced where the glass bead coverage or retention is deficient, based
          on yield determinations made during application and on visual comparisons of the production traffic stripes
          with those of the test strips.

     The Contractor shall replace defective long-life thermoplastic traffic markings based on the following:
     1. The entire area of marking determined to be less than the required thickness, to have an incorrect color or
         width, to have failed to bond to the pavement, or to have chipped or cracked shall be replaced. The
         minimum replacement area is an individual word or symbol, or entire length of longitudinal line from
         where the deficiency first occurs to where it no longer exists.
     2 The entire area of marking shall be replaced where the initial retroreflectance value is less than 375
         millicandelas per square foot per footcandle for white or 250 millicandelas per square foot per footcandle
         for yellow. Initial retroreflectance will be determined as follows:
           Step 1:   Visual night inspections will be made to identify traffic markings that appear to be below the
                     specified minimum value.
           Step 2:   All retroreflectance measurements taken with an LTL-2000 retrometer will be made on a
                     clean, dry surface.
           Step 3:   a. For word markings, three random retroreflectance measurements will be made on each
                            letter.
                     b. For symbols, nine random retroreflectance measurements will be made over the symbol.
           Step 4:   All retroreflectance measurements within an area will be averaged to determine if the
                     minimum retroreflectance requirements are met.
     At no Additional Compensation to the State, the Contractor shall remove all traffic paint where the striping or
markings will not be directly under long-life material, replace long-life traffic stripes or traffic markings damaged
due to any sawing or sealing of joints in the HMA overlay, and replace all existing pavement reflectors that have
been marred by striping or marking material as a result of improperly located traffic stripes or traffic markings.

618.12 Removal of Traffic Stripes or Traffic Markings.
        SUBSECTION IS RENAMED AND CHANGED TO:

618.12 Removal and Replacement of Traffic Delineation Devices.


Route 35 over Manasquan River Bridge Rehabilitation
Monmouth and Ocean Counties                                                                                   Page 171
     A.    Removal of Traffic Stripes, Markings, or Reflectors and Castings. The Contractor shall remove all
           types of traffic stripes or traffic markings by methods that do not damage the integrity of the underlying
           pavement or adjacent pavement areas, and that do not cause gouging, or create ridges or grooves in the
           pavement that may result in compromising vehicular control. Obliterating stripes or markings by painting
           over them shall not be permitted.
                Before starting removal operations, the Contractor shall demonstrate the proposed method to
           accomplish the complete removal of the reflectors and castings and the removal of approximately 95
           percent of the stripe or marking without the removal of more than 1/16 inch of pavement thickness. Area
           of removal includes the area of the stripe or marking plus 1 inch on all sides. Removal operations shall
           not be permitted until the method of removal has been approved.
                Debris from the removal of traffic stripes and markings shall be disposed of according to Subsection
           201.10.
                Disposal of pavement reflectors and castings shall be in conformance with Subsection 201.10.
     B.    Removal and Replacement of Pavement Reflector Lenses. The Contractor shall remove existing
           pavement reflector lenses and install new monodirectional or bidirectional pavement reflector lenses
           within the limits of construction or as directed by the Engineer. The reflector adhesive used in the
           bonding of the reflector lenses to the casting shall be in conformance with Subsection 912.17.
                The Contractor shall remove and replace pavement reflector lenses by methods that do not damage
           the underlying castings.
                Disposal of pavement reflectors lenses shall be in conformance with Subsection 201.10.

618.14 Method of Measurement.
        THE FOLLOWING IS ADDED TO THIS SUBSECTION:

     Removal of pavement reflectors and castings will be measured by the number of units.
     Removal and replacement of pavement reflector lenses will be measured by the number of units.

618.15 Basis of Payment.
        THE FOLLOWING PAY ITEMS ARE ADDED:

           Pay Item                                                                                 Pay Unit
           REMOVAL OF PAVEMENT REFLECTORS AND CASTINGS                                              UNIT
           REMOVAL AND REPLACEMENT OF PAVEMENT REFLECTOR LENSES                                     UNIT
           TRAFFIC STRIPES, LIQUID SYSTEM                                                           LINEAR FOOT
           TRAFFIC STRIPES, LONG LIFE, PREFORMED TAPE                                               LINEAR FOOT
           TRAFFIC MARKINGS, LINES, PREFORMED TAPE                                                  LINEAR FOOT
           TRAFFIC MARKINGS, SYMBOLS, PREFORMED TAPE                                                SQUARE FOOT

                                            SECTION 619 - SIGNS
619.03 Regulatory and Warning Signs.
        THE FIRST PARAGRAPH IS CHANGED TO:

     Regulatory and warning signs shall be fabricated of flat aluminum sheets and shall be covered with ASTM D
4956 Type III retroreflective sheeting. Legends, borders, and accessories shall be Type B unless otherwise
designated. Signs shall be fabricated according to Subsection 916.08.

619.04 Guide Signs.



619.07 Basis of Payment.
        THE FOLLOWING IS ADDED:

          Separate payment shall not be made for relocating signs but shall be included in the price bid for Clearing
Site as indicated in Section 201.03.



Route 35 over Manasquan River Bridge Rehabilitation
Monmouth and Ocean Counties                                                                                    Page 172
          THE FIRST PARAGRAPH IS CHANGED TO:

     Guide signs fabricated of extruded aluminum sheets shall be covered with ASTM D 4956, TYPE III, Type VIII
or Type IX retroreflective sheeting depending on the following:
     1. Guide signs on steel “U” posts shall be fabricated of flat aluminum sheets and shall be covered with
          ASTM D 4956 Type III retroreflective sheeting. Legends, borders, and accessories shall be Type B
          unless otherwise designated.
     2. Guide signs on overheads and breakaway or non-breakaway posts shall be fabricated of extruded
          aluminum panels covered with ASTM D 4956 Types VIII or IX retroreflective sheeting. Legends,
          borders, and accessories shall be Type A.

                                      SECTION 620 - DELINEATORS

620.03 Ground Mounted Flexible Delineators.
SUBSECTION HEADING AND ENTIRE TEXT ARE CHANGED TO:

620.03 Ground Mounted and Surface Mounted Flexible Delineators.
A.        Ground Mounted Flexible Delineators. Flexible delineator units shall be driven vertically into the
ground to a minimum depth of 1 foot-6 inches. Units shall be installed so that the plane face of the center of the
reflective area is at an angle of zero degrees with a perpendicular to the direction of traffic. Retroreflective sheeting,
ASTM D 4956 Types VII or VIII shall be pre-applied to the front (surface facing traffic) of the unit by the
manufacturer. The retroreflective sheeting shall cover a minimum area of 3 by 12 inches, beginning a maximum of
2 inches from the top of the post. The color shall be white when the delineator is located on the right side to the
direction of traffic and shall be yellow when the delineator is located on the left side to the direction of traffic.

B.        Surface Mounted Flexible Delineators. Flexible delineator shall be used as a temporary channelization
device to separate pedestrian and vehicular traffic on a roadway surface. The delineator shall be capable of
withstanding numerous vehicle impacts. The delineator shall be a two-piece design to allow the post to be
unscrewed from the base. The delineator shall consist of a rod of round polymer alloy material with a minimum
length of 36 inches and 3 inch diameter, and a 1 lbs, 7 inch diameter base made of a rubber composite. The base
shall be affixed to the roadway surface using an epoxy adhesive as recommended by the delineator's manufacturer.
The color of the polymer rod shall be red with 3 bands of orange retroreflective sheeting applied 2 inches from the
top of the rod.


620.04 Guide Rail Mounted Flexible Delineators.
        THE SECOND PARAGRAPH IS CHANGED TO:

      Retroreflective sheeting, ASTM D 4956 Types VII or VIII shall be applied to the upper portion of the flexible
delineator panel. The retroreflective sheeting shall cover a minimum area of 4 ½ by 4 ½ inches (4 ½ by 9 inches for
deceleration and acceleration lanes). The color shall be white when the delineator is located on the right side to the
direction of traffic and shall be yellow when the delineator is located on the left side to the direction of traffic.


620.05 Barrier Curb Mounted Flexible Delineators.
        THE THIRD PARAGRAPH IS CHANGED TO:

      Retroreflective sheeting, ASTM D 4956 Types VII or VIII shall be applied to the upper portion of the flexible
delineator panel facing traffic and perpendicular to the top of the concrete barrier curb. The retroreflective sheeting
shall cover an area of 3 ½ by 3 ½ inches. The color shall be white when the delineator is located on the right side to
the direction of traffic and shall be yellow when the delineator is located on the left side to the direction of traffic.

620.07 Basis of Payment.



Route 35 over Manasquan River Bridge Rehabilitation
Monmouth and Ocean Counties                                                                                      Page 173
          THE FOLLOWING PAY ITEM IS ADDED:

          Pay Item                                                                                 Pay Unit
          FLEXIBLE DELINEATOR, SURFACE MOUNTED                                                     UNIT

    All incidentals required to furnish, install, remove, and maintain shall be included in the bid price. No separate
payment shall be made to replace damaged delineators during the entire construction duration.


               SECTION 622 - WATER, GAS, AND SANITARY SEWER LINES
622.02 Materials.

622.03 Construction Requirements.
THE FOLLOWING SECTION IS ADDED:


                        SECTION 623 –SNOW REMOVAL AND DEICING
623.01 Description.
      This work shall include the removal of accumulated snow on active walkways and curbs, bridge sidewalks and
along construction barrier through the work zone including the Contractor‟s work zone in the bridge approach spans,
adjacent to the bascule spans. This work encompasses the bridge and approach roadways, pedestrian routes, and
pedestrian detour routes (when in effect) as depicted on the Traffic Control Plans. The work is to include removal of
snow resulting from the snow plowing operations of the Department‟s and/or local municipal maintenance forces or
their agents during all stages of construction as well as from normal snow accumulations. The snow removal shall
include disposal of the snow by the Contractor at areas approved by the Engineer. The Contractor shall also spread
deicing materials on all walkways after removal of snow and/or when icing conditions exist.

623.02 Method of Construction.
      The Contractor shall utilize snow removal equipment that can remove the plowed snow deposits from the
edges of the roadways and walkways and within the work zone on the bridge spans, adjacent to the bascule spans
and the approach roadways, utilizing a moving lane closure in accordance with NJDOT TCD 22 –Multi-lane
Moving Lane Closure. The snow deposits shall be displaced into hauling equipment or into the work areas of the
roadways. Snow shall not be permitted to be placed anywhere on the bridge spans. The snow removal equipment
shall only travel in the direction of traffic. Snow shall also be removed from walkways along active pedestrian
routes and pedestrian detour routes utilizing appropriate equipment and methods. The Contractor may be directed to
perform snow removal at any time while the Contract is in force. The Contractor shall initiate snow removal
operations within four hours after notification by the Engineer. The failure to commence work within a four-hour
notification time-frame will result in back charges for all costs incurred by the Department to remove snow adjacent
to construction barriers, walkways and on the bridge spans and associated areas within work zone limits and along
pedestrian routes and pedestrian detour routes when in effect. In addition the Contractor will be charged a $1,000.00
per hour penalty for each hour over the above four-hour notification timeframe up to $4,000.00 for each event.
      All lane closings for snow removal work under Snow Removal and Deicing shall be performed by the
Contractor‟s forces.
      The Contractor shall submit his plan for snow removal and deicing to the Engineer for review and approval 30
days after Contract is awarded. The plan shall detail the Contractor‟s methods for removal of plowed or
accumulated snow deposits and placing of deicing materials, including the work force and number and type of
equipment to be used and the type of deicing material to be used.
      The removal of snow deposited in the Contractor‟s work areas by Department or municipal plowing operations
or the Contractor‟s snow removal operations shall not be eligible for payment.

623.03 Method of Measurement.
      Snow Removal and Deicing will not be measured for payment but measurement will be made on a Lump Sum
basis for the time and material used per each occurrence.




Route 35 over Manasquan River Bridge Rehabilitation
Monmouth and Ocean Counties                                                                                   Page 174
623.04 Basis of Payment.
     Payment will be made under:
         Pay Item                                                                                    Pay Unit
           SNOW REMOVAL AND DEICING – WALKWAYS (NOT A BID ITEM)                                      LUMP SUM

     Payment for Snow Removal and Deicing includes all manpower, equipment and materials for removal and
disposal as directed by the Engineer, moving lane closures and placement of deicing materials, and will be made on
a Lump Sum basis for each occurrence in accordance with Subsection 109.03 against a force account total amount of
$50,000 over the duration of the work.


                        SECTION 624 – BOAT SLIP ACCOMMODATIONS
624.01 Description.
         This work shall consist of the rental of a boat slip at Brielle Marine Basin during the periods of time that
the bascule span is closed to large vessels (not permitted to open for vessels taller than 30 feet). This time period
shall be from December 1 through March 15 for the calendar years 2006, 2007, 2008, and 2009), Monday through
Saturday, with designated opening times on Sundays only. Each rental period shall be limited to a period of 1 to 6
days (maximum) and shall end on the Sunday when the bascule span is opened to let the vessel pass. The Marina
owners and vessel owners to the west of the bridge will be required to notify the Engineer when a large vessel is to
arrive within the Manasquan River so that he may alert Brielle Marine Basin (Fred Ziemba @ 732-528-6200) to
make the accommodations.

624.02 Method of Measurement.
         Boat Slip Accommodations will not be measured for payment but will be made on a Lump Sum basis for
the actual rental time required for the boat slip for each occurrence. Any portion of a day shall be paid as a full day.

624.03 Method of Payment.
       Payment will be made under:
        Pay Item                                                                                     Pay Unit
           BOAT SLIP ACCOMMODATIONS (NOT A BID ITEM)                                                 LUMP SUM

          Payment for Boat Slip Accommodations will be made on a Lump Sum basis for each occurrence in
accordance with Subsection 109.03 against a force account total amount of $50,000 over the duration of the work.
Brielle Marine Basin will present a voucher to the Engineer for each rental occurrence that will be approved by the
Engineer for payment.




Route 35 over Manasquan River Bridge Rehabilitation
Monmouth and Ocean Counties                                                                                     Page 175
                                  DIVISION 700 - ELECTRICAL
                               SECTION 701 – COMMON PROVISIONS
701.01 Description
        THE FIRST SENTENCE IS CHANGED TO:

     These provisions are common to all work specified in Division 700.

701.02 Materials and Equipment.
         THE WEBSITE IN THE LAST PARAGRAPH IS CHANGED TO:
http://www.state.nj.us/transportation/eng/

701.03 Existing Systems.
        THE LAST PARAGRAPH IS CHANGED TO:

      Before starting work on existing electrical facilities, the Contractor shall provide notification as specified in
Subsection 105.09 and arrange a meeting with the Department if requested to verify the proper operation of the
existing facilities. The Contractor shall document the resolutions of any meetings and forward a written summary to
the Resident Engineer and all attendees.

701.04 Working Drawings.
        THE ENTIRE SUBSECTION TEXT IS CHANGED TO:

     Furnish, as specified in Subsection 105.04, certified working drawings for all non pre-approved electrical
materials and equipment, and approved working drawings as specified. The Department will allow the use of pre-
approved materials provided the materials meet all requirements of the Contract. The current pre-approved
materials list is available on the web site specified in Subsection 701.02. The Contractor shall submit a list of all
pre-approved materials to be used for the duration of the Project with the initial Materials Questionnaire Forms as
specified in Subsection 106.01.
     As specified in Subsection 701.10, approval of the working drawings for the precast foundations or junction
boxes shall only apply to the locations designated.
     Other certified or approval working drawings shall be submitted as specified.

                              SECTION 702 – TRAFFIC SIGNALS
702.02 Materials and Equipment.
       THE FOLLOWING IS ADDED:

          13.       Temporary Trailer-Mounted Traffic Signal. Temporary trailer-mounted traffic signals shall be
model SQ3 or SQ5, as manufactured by Horizon Signal Technologies, 216 Line Road, Malvern, Pennsylvania
19355 (1.800.852.8796), or approved equal.
                  Temporary trailer-mounted traffic signals shall consist of a towable trailer equipped with two signal
heads each with three 12 inch signal sections (Red, Yellow, and Green). One signal head is to be mounted on a mast
arm capable of extending over the traveled lane with a minimum vertical clearance above the adjacent road surface
of 20 feet while the second head is to be mounted on the pole at minimum height of eight feet above the pavement
surface. The trailer is to be equipped with a battery case and charger. The system is to contain a cabinet mounted
controller with a conflict monitor. Each unit is programmed with a movable module, called the microterminal.
                  The cabinet is to be water tight and equipped with a secure keyed lock.
                  A remote module switch shall be included with the temporary trailer-mounted traffic signals. The
remote module switch shall be capable of freezing the signal heads on the units on a red interval.
                  The signal heads shall conform to ITE specification “Vehicle Traffic Control Signal Heads”.
                  The trailer unit shall be capable of operating from an AC voltage source of 117 volts  10 percent.
If the unit is not to be wired to a continuous source of 117 volts  10 percent power, it shall be equipped with solar


Route 35 over Manasquan River Bridge Rehabilitation
Monmouth and Ocean Counties                                                                                   Page 176
panels capable of maintaining sufficient battery charge to operate the system. The time required for battery charging
shall not exceed 72 hours. The solar array shall contain a method for anti-theft and the run time of batteries only
(autonomy) shall be a minimum of 21 days at 77 degrees Fahrenheit.
                 The trailer mounted traffic signals shall be hardwired to the existing bridge traffic signals by means
of an aerial wire feed. All wiring and connections shall be in accordance with NJDOT Electrical Specifications for
Traffic Signal installations. The system shall be equipped with a manual switch that has off, on, blink red, blink
yellow, and manual functions. The trailer unit shall have the following standby modes that can be set by the Bridge
Tender:
         A)        Off. All lights are off.
         B)        Blink Yellow. The yellow light blinks at 60 times/minute.
         C)        Blink Red. The red light blinks at 60 times/minute.
         D)        Red. The red light is on continuously.
                   The trailer unit shall be capable of operating in a stand-alone configuration except for manual
operation.
                   The trailer unit shall operate at any temperature between minus 93 degrees Fahrenheit and 163
degrees Fahrenheit. The trailer unit shall operate in any humidity environment up to 100 percent as would be
encountered in North America. The trailer unit shall survive wind gusts of up to 80 MPH without sand bagging or
staking.

702.04 Temporary and Interim Signal Systems.
           1.       Temporary Traffic Signals
           This subsection is revised as follows:
      Two traffic signal heads with control features as described in Subsection 702.02 above shall be installed in
accordance with the Maintenance and Protection of Traffic plans. One traffic signal head shall be installed above
the traffic lane and one shall be installed to the right of the traffic lane.
      The temporary traffic signal system shall consist of a trailer-mounted signals conforming to Subsection 702.02
above.
      The trailer-mounted signals shall be installed behind temporary construction barrier following manufacturer‟s
recommendations. If required the Contractor shall construct and install a temporary platform to support the
temporary traffic signals at the height and location as specified in section 702.2 and shown on the plans. The
Contractor shall submit catalog cuts of the proposed temporary traffic signals to the Engineer for approval prior to
their use.
      The Contractor shall be responsible for furnishing, installing, relocating and maintaining the temporary traffic
signal system for as long as required to construct the project and shall be responsible for its removal when no longer
needed to the Contractor‟s yard or returned to the leasing company.
      If the temporary traffic signals malfunctions, the Contractor shall immediately, and at his own expense,
provide trained flaggers and communications devices for use by them and the Bridge Tender to control the flow of
traffic at the direction of the Bridge Tender until the signal system is repaired and operating.

702.07 Basis of Payment.
     THE FOLLOWING IS ADDED:

     All incidentals required to furnish, install, operate, relocate, store, remove, and maintain the temporary traffic
signals such as, but not limited to wiring, temporary platform construction, equipment repair, traffic protection,
flaggers, and communications devices, shall be included in the Lump Sum price bid for the temporary traffic signals.

         The following is added to the Pay Item table:

         Pay Item                                                                                       Pay Unit
         TEMPORARY TRAFFIC SIGNALS .................................................................... LUMP SUM


THE FOLLOWING IS ADDED:

                             SECTION 703 – HIGHWAY LIGHTING

Route 35 over Manasquan River Bridge Rehabilitation
Monmouth and Ocean Counties                                                                                        Page 177
703.02 Materials and Equipment
    2. Lighting Standard Assemblies.
    THE FOLLOWING IS ADDED TO THIS SUBSECTION:

     Lighting standard assemblies shall be furnished with internal vibration dampers.
     Fuse assemblies shall be furnished in the junction box adjacent to each lighting standard assembly mounted on
the bridge,

703.03 Temporary Highway Lighting System.
THE FOLLOWING IS ADDED TO THIS SUBSECTION:

      The work shall consist of furnishing and installing a temporary highway lighting system, and maintaining
continuous highway lighting during all dark hours. It shall include, but not be limited to temporary wire, conduit,
splices, ballasts, electric services, junction boxes, and other incidentals deemed required. Existing lighting poles and
arms will be used as part of the system, as shown on the traffic control and staging plans.
      In order to provide temporary power to the existing bridge mounted highway lights, it will be necessary to
furnish and install the two new permanent load centers (“CN” and “CS”) and some conduit and junction boxes as
called for on the highway lighting plans. The new load centers will be utilized to provide temporary power to the
existing bridge mounted highway lights during the various stages of construction. In addition, the contractor shall
provide temporary power to the existing bridge mounted highway lights. This will include furnishing and installing
new temporary conduits, wiring, splices, junction boxes, and other incidental materials required. As called for in the
staging plans, the temporary lighting power system will be run from the new load centers to the existing lights.
Some of the existing bridge mounted highway lights will also be powered from the existing power source and load
center.

703.04 Construction Requirements.
THE FOLLOWING IS ADDED:

      The Contractor shall furnish and install all labor, materials, and equipment required to maintain the existing
lighting on the bridge as shown on the traffic control and staging plans.

703.06 Method of Measurement.
THE FOLLOWING IS ADDED:

     The temporary highway lighting system shall not be measured and payment will be made on a lump sum basis.
Separate payment shall not be made for lighting equipment consisting of, but not limited to, conduits, wire, junction
boxes, and all other incidental materials required. All costs shall be included in the price bid for “Temporary
Highway Lighting System”.

703.07 Basis of Payment.
        THE LAST PARAGRAPH IS DELETED AND THE FOLLOWING IS ADDED:

         Pay Item                                                                  Pay Unit
         TEMPORARY HIGHWAY LIGHTING SYSTEM                                         LUMP SUM

Exposed Rigid Metallic Conduit shall be paid for as Rigid Metallic Conduit, Type CUG.


      SECTION 706 - INTELLIGENT TRANSPORTATION SERVICES FACILITIES
706.03 Construction Requirements.
THE FOLLOWING IS INSERTED IN THIS SUBSECTION:

Fiberglass Multi-duct (Communications) Conduit. Fiberglass multi-duct (communication) conduit is for fiber
optic conduit installations and shall be installed and furnished where shown on the plans. Minimum bend radius


Route 35 over Manasquan River Bridge Rehabilitation
Monmouth and Ocean Counties                                                                                    Page 178
shall be maintained. The Contractor shall eliminate/modify any conduit bends which may obstruct any future
installation of optical fiber cables. The total sum of all the conduit bends, in degrees, between junction boxes, shall
not exceed a total of 180 degrees. No bends shall be greater than 90 degrees.
      The Contractor shall install a pre-lubricated woven pull tape in each spare duct that has been installed for this
project. The tape shall be marked with sequential distance measurements. The tape shall have a pull strength of at
least 877.5 lbf (3900 Newtons). Each duct installed or utilized by the Contractor shall be sealed with a properly
sized duct plug, as is standard in the telecommunications industry. Duct plugs shall be manufactured by Calam,
Carlon, or other approved equal manufacturer.
      Type F, Fiberglass Multi-duct (Communications) Conduit shall conform to NJDOT Material Specification EB-
MULTI-2. Type F Fiberglass Multi-duct (Communications) Conduit shall be mounted onto bridge structure as
shown in the plans for future fiber optic cable installation. The following subsections of the Material Specification
are to be revised as noted.
      Conduit General – II: Paragraphs 2-11 and 2-12 do not apply.
      Training –VI: Paragraphs 6-1 and 6-2 do not apply.
      Instructions and Guarantees – VI paragraph 7-2: Replace paragraph as follows: – “No changes or
          substitutions in these requirements will be acceptable unless authorized in writing by the Resident
          Engineer.”
      Paragraph 7-3: Change “... Manager, Office of ITS Engineering…” to “Resident Engineer”.
      Paragraph 7-4: Change “…within the warranty period.” to “…until State‟s acceptance of the project”. In
          last sentence of paragraph delete “…for two years after…” and insert “until”.
      In general, Type F conduit shall be installed under the bridge superstructure and mounted to the bridge
abutments and moveable bridge span piers on both the south and north bridge spans. The exposed conduits shall be
fastened to bridge steel/concrete using conduit mounting support hardware as shown on the bridge structural plan
details. Conduit mounting support spacing shall not be more than 10 feet, 0 inches.
      Expansion fittings shall be provided at all expansion joints. The expansion fittings shall provide a minimum of
4” straight line movement (2” in either direction from center), and also provide radial movement. The movement
shall be sufficient to cover the full width of the expansion joint.
      Type F, Fiberglass Multi-duct (Communications) Conduit shall include, but not be limited to, furnishing and
installing fiberglass multi-duct conduit mounted to the bridge structure and its abutments and piers and furnishing,
conduit mounting support hardware, expansion fittings, and end caps. The installation shall be as noted in the bridge
plan and details and to the satisfaction of the Engineer.


706.04 Method of Measurement.
THE FOLLOWING IS INSERTED IN THIS SUBSECTION:

      Fiberglass multiduct (communications) conduits for optical fiber cable installation shall be measured by the
linear foot installed and furnished.
      Measurement will not be made for expansion fittings, pull tape, hangars, mounting clamps, hardware and all
labor, equipment, and materials necessary to perform the work. All such labor, material, and equipment will be
considered incidental to the multiduct conduit item and costs shall be included in the multiduct conduit item.


706.05 Basis of Payment.
THE FOLLOWING IS ADDED TO THIS SECTION:
         Pay Item                                                                                   Pay Unit
         TYPE F FIBERGLASS MULTIDUCT (COMMUNICATIONS) CONDUIT                                       LINEAR FOOT

      No separate payment will be made for expansion fittings, pull tape, hangars, clamps, hardware and all labor,
equipment, and materials necessary to perform the work. All costs shall be included into bid price for Type F
fiberglass multiduct (communications) conduit.
      The contract item and unit price bids set forth in the bid schedule shall include all services, permits, labor,
equipment, transportation, materials, testing, and supplies for the complete work, including, without limitation,
mobilization and demobilization for completion of the work.




Route 35 over Manasquan River Bridge Rehabilitation
Monmouth and Ocean Counties                                                                                   Page 179
                                  SECTION 707 - ELECTRICAL WORK
707.01 Description.
      The work shall consist of furnishing, installing, and satisfactorily completing an operating system with
electrical equipment for operation of the bascule span and its auxiliaries, including electric heating and other
electrical facilities, all as indicated on the Plans, called for in these specifications, or as may be required to complete
the project to the approval of New Jersey Department of Transportation (NJDOT), Movable Bridge Engineering
Group (MBEG). The Contractor's attention is also directed to the requirements for electrical work appearing in
other items of these Specifications.
      It is the intent and purpose of these Specifications to cover and include all apparatus and appliances to properly
install, wire, connect, equip, test, adjust, and put into approved working condition the respective portions of the
electrical work herein specified. The work shall also include disconnecting and removing the existing equipment
and facilities to be replaced. Any incidental apparatus, appliance, material, or labor not herein specifically
mentioned or included that may be found necessary to comply with the requirements of the related documents and
referenced standards or codes shall be furnished and installed, if applicable, by the Contractor without any extra cost
to NJDOT.
      Installation, alignment and fastening of electrical equipment to be incorporated into the bridge machinery, such
as bascule span motors, brakes, motor encoders, position resolvers, selsyns, proximity switches and overspeed
switches, shall be done under "Mechanical Work". Installation of inclinometers shall be done under structural work.
      Shop drawings and operation & maintenance manuals shall be provided as specified hereinafter.

                                                 MATERIALS
707.02 Materials and Equipment.
     A. Conformance. All electrical equipment and its installation shall conform to the requirements of the latest
        revision of the Standard Specifications for Movable Highway Bridges of the American Association of
        State Highway and Transportation Officials, except as may be otherwise provided herein.
              Materials and construction shall conform to the requirements of the current National Electrical Code
        and to any applicable local rules and ordinances. The Contractor is responsible for obtaining any required
        permits and approvals of Agencies/Departments having jurisdiction.
     B. Equipment and Material Provisions. All equipment and materials shall be new. All equipment, materials,
        and workmanship shall be first-class in every aspect of this project and shall be manufactured and erected
        to the satisfaction of the Resident Engineer (the engineer) and NJDOT MBEG. The Contractor shall
        warrantee the in-service working of the electrical installations for one year or the manufacturer‟s
        warranty period, whichever is greater, following project acceptance by New Jersey Department of
        Transportation. If the Contractor has any objection to any feature of the electrical equipment as designed
        and laid out, the Contractor must state the objection in writing to the Engineer and NJDOT MBEG prior
        to shop drawing submittal, fabrication and/or installation.. If an objection is not received in writing by
        the Engineer and NJDOT MBEG and the equipment or apparatus malfunctions, it will be deemed
        defective or broken. The Contractor shall be responsible for replacing the defective/broken equipment at
        no additional cost to NJDOT.
              Each piece of electrical equipment and apparatus shall have a corrosion-resisting stainless steel
        metal nameplate on which is stamped the name of the manufacturer, the rating or capacity of the
        equipment or apparatus, etc.
              All metal parts of the installation, except structural steel, shall be of corrosion-resisting material,
        such as bronze or stainless steel. Malleable iron, or steel with a hot-dip galvanized finish, shall be used
        where specified herein. Structural steel shall conform to the requirements given under "Structural Steel".
              All mounting hardware and all wire and cable terminals shall be vibration proof and weather proof.
        If any changes from the Plans or these Specifications are deemed necessary by the Contractor, details of
        such changes and the reasons therefore shall be submitted in writing for approval as soon as practicable,
        but before the first submittal. No such changes shall be made nor work started without approval of the
        Engineer and NJDOT MBEG.
              Material requirements for specific apparatus, equipment, and materials are found in the articles
        under "Construction Requirements" in this item.
     C. Bridge Control System Vendor. All apparatus and equipment comprising the bridge control system,
        including, but not limited to, drives, motors, brakes, limit switches, flux vector drives, control cabinets,
        special control panels, modifications to the control desk, programmable controllers, interfacing


Route 35 over Manasquan River Bridge Rehabilitation
Monmouth and Ocean Counties                                                                                       Page 180
          equipment, laptop hardware for local troubleshooting, and other apparatus required to provide a complete
          functioning system, shall be manufactured or furnished and assembled by a single qualified control
          system vendor. The vendor shall assemble the control panels, programmable logic controller
          racks/chassis and flux vector drives at an Underwriters Laboratory approved Facility in accordance with
          UL 508. The Bridge Control System Integrator will be Link Controls, Inc or NJDOT MBEG approved
          equal.
                The control system vendor shall have experience in providing electrical control systems for movable
          bridges of various types, including bascule, vertical-lift, swing bridges, and control systems, including
          AC flux vector drives and programmable logic controllers. Such experience shall be demonstrated by
          identifying a minimum of five movable bridges for which the system vendor has provided complete
          systems, including flux vector drives, motors, controls and programmable logic controller hardware and
          software within the past ten years.
                The control system vendor shall assume complete system responsibility for the integrated
          functioning of all components to provide a satisfactory assembled system operating in accordance with
          specified requirements. The control system vendor shall be responsible for the detailed schematics and
          fabrication of the total control and power distribution system to ensure compatibility of equipment and
          suitability for the intended system functioning. The vendor shall provide supervisory assistance in the
          installation of equipment to ensure maximum reliability and ease of maintenance.
                The system vendor shall provide a field service staff having the capability of providing services for
          field coordination during construction and final adjustments to the control and drive systems. Upon final
          acceptance of the bridge by New Jersey Department of Transportation, the system vendor's staff shall
          provide on-call warranty service for a period of one year. System vendor/integrator field staff shall be
          capable of responding to an emergency within eight (8) hours.
                The Contractor shall provide written certification of compliance with specified requirements for the
          control system vendor, Link Controls Inc. or NJDOT MBEG approved vendor. This certification shall be
          included in the bid documents and shall be subject to approval by the New Jersey Department of
          Transportation.

                                               CONSTRUCTION

707.03 Working Drawings and Samples.
     A. Working Drawings. The Contractor shall prepare and submit for review within thirty (30) working days
        after the award of the Contract the following working drawings executed in accordance with the
        provisions of the Contract:
             1. Certified dimension prints of all motors, bascule span brakes, brake wheels, limit switches, and
                 other electrical apparatus external to the control desk, control panels, panelboards and transfer
                 switches.
             2. A complete schematic wiring diagram, including all power, control, and lighting connections.
                 Both electrical devices and each wire between devices shall be identified by an individual
                 unique designation of letters, numbers, or a combination of both; and such designations shall be
                 used wherever the devices or wires appear on other drawings. Certified dimension prints of all
                 motors, bascule span brakes, brake wheels, limit switches, and other electrical apparatus
                 external to the control desk, control panels, panelboards and transfer switches. A complete set
                 of catalog cuts for materials furnished shall be included for review at time of schematic
                 submittal.
             3. Layout drawings and internal connection wiring diagrams of the modified control desk, power
                 distribution and control panels, and flux vector drive panels.
             4. A schedule of electrical apparatus for each cabinet or panel which shall list each electrical
                 device by its designation as shown on the schematic wiring diagram and shall state for each
                 device its rating, number of poles or contacts, function, catalog number, and location.
             5. A complete interconnection diagram(s) for all electrical apparatus and equipment used in the
                 operation of the bascule span and its auxiliaries. The diagram(s) shall be of the elementary type
                 and shall show the external connections of all devices and equipment. Computer-generated
                 interconnection lists will not be acceptable in lieu of a true interconnection diagram.
             6. Outline drawings and complete construction details of the position indicator to be installed in
                 the control desk. Details of the indicator dial shall also be submitted.


Route 35 over Manasquan River Bridge Rehabilitation
Monmouth and Ocean Counties                                                                                 Page 181
              7.    Layouts of the dynamic resistors for the bascule span flux vector drives, together with
                    construction details of the resistor enclosures.
               8. Outline drawing, details, and connection diagram for the temporary manual transfer switch, its
                    components, and assembly.
               9. A complete schematic conduit and cable diagram or diagrams showing the interconnection of
                    all devices and equipment, including ducts and junction boxes, and showing all conduit. The
                    size of each conduit, and the wire number and size of each conductor in conduit shall be shown
                    on the diagrams. Each conduit shall be suitably numbered or lettered, and percent wire fill shall
                    be shown.
               10. A complete set of layout and installation drawings for the electrical work showing the location
                    and installation, including support and mounting details, of all electrical apparatus and
                    equipment. These drawings shall be made to scale and shall show the exact location of all
                    conduits, cables, wiring ducts, boxes, motors, brakes, limit switches, disconnect switches, and
                    other electrical equipment and the method of supporting them on the structure.
               11. Detail drawings showing the construction of cabinets, brackets, and special supports required
                    for the installation of the inclinometers.
               12. Catalog cuts of electric air conditioning/heating equipment, if required to be installed.
               13. Arrangement of conduits, wiring, and boxes (including their support) for the existing bridge
                    electrical equipment to remain viz. lighting fixtures and switches, receptacles, intercom system,
                    outside telephone, navigation and pier lights, air conditioning equipment, etc.
               14. Arrangement of conduits, wiring, and equipment for the electric heating units in the control
                    house and machinery room.
               15. Detail drawings showing the construction and mounting details of all wiring troughs and
                    raceways.
               16. A complete list of all spare parts furnished as part of the contract.
               17. Material listing and specifications for programmable controllers, including input/output units,
                    programming terminal, and equipment for interfacing.
               18. The programmable controllers programs (both temporary and permanent) listing in ladder rung
                    format. Circuit functions shall be described; all contacts and outputs shall be identified by word
                    description and by number designation. Ladder rungs shall be numbered sequentially for
                    reference. The ladder diagram shall be fully documented, and internal ladder logic relay
                    contacts usage in other rungs shall be identified and listed. Inputs and outputs shall be
                    referenced to locations of signals on interconnection diagram.
               19. Any other drawings, which, in the opinion of the Engineer and NJDOT MBEG, may be
                    necessary to show the electrical work.
               Certified dimension prints of the apparatus shall state in the certification the name of the job, the
         application of the apparatus, device designation, number required, right-hand or left-hand assembly,
         electrical rating, number of poles or contacts, material, finish, and any other pertinent data to show that
         the apparatus meets the specified requirements.
               Upon completion of the work, the Contractor shall correct all working drawings, including all
         working drawings submitted by the electrical system vendor, to show the work as-built and shall provide
         two (2) sets of 22 inch x 36 inch, 4 mil thick, Mylar reproduced of all as-built working drawings. One (1)
         set to be submitted to the Resident Engineer and one (1) set to be delivered to Roy Bill, MBEG.
               All as-built working drawings submitted by the electrical system vendor, including all electrical
         schematics, ladder diagrams, system documentation, dimension drawings of equipment, and devices,
         shall also be submitted in a computerized file form as well as on Mylar reproduced as specified above.
         The computerized file form for all electronic files shall be in “.DGN” and “PDF” format. The electrical
         system vendor shall provide all pertinent drawings and data on CD ROM. The electrical system vendor
         shall verify the compatibility of his computerized file form prior to submission.
               The preparation and submission of working drawings shall meet the provision for shop drawings in
         accordance with Subsection 105.04 of the Standard Specifications.
               The Contractor shall submit for inspection and test, if directed by the Engineer and NJDOT MBEG,
         samples of any apparatus or devices that the Contractor proposes to use as a part of the electrical
         installation.
    B.   Instruction Books and Drawing Books. For all Instruction Books and Drawing Books, one copy of each
         shall be submitted to the Engineer and NJDOT MBEG for approval.


Route 35 over Manasquan River Bridge Rehabilitation
Monmouth and Ocean Counties                                                                                  Page 182
                The Contractor shall furnish to the Engineer and NJDOT MBEG eight bound copies of an
         instruction book with the title "Operation and Maintenance Manual, Volume 1 – Bridge Operator's
         Manual". The manual shall contain non-technical information and instructions to operate the bridge. The
         manual shall be operator-oriented and recognize the technical limitations of the average operator. The
         manual shall contain suitably arranged chapters including, but not limited to, the following:
               1. Table of Contents.
               2. Introduction, including a general description of the bridge, its facilities and specifics of
                   rehabilitation done under this contract.
               3. Operating Procedure, including a simplified step-by-step, opening and closing procedure to
                   normally operate the bascule span. Temporary Operation of the bascule span opening/closing
                   shall also be included. This description shall be augmented and cross-referenced with a layout of
                   the control desk, which shall be included in this section.
               4. A description of the bridge's electric/mechanical power sources including methods and
                   precautions for their selection.
               5. Procedure for selecting drives and instrumentation to operate the bascule span.
               6. A description of additional devices on the control desk, including the methods and operation of
                   these devices.
               7. A description of the bridge's instrumentation and controls including normal operating ranges of
                   existing desk meters, operation of indicating lights, etc.
               8. A detailed description of sequence interlocking including methods and precautions for use of the
                   bypass switches.
               9. A simplified description of how the bascule span normally operates under control of the PLC,
                   both main and temporary, and how to recognize when there is a PLC/SLC malfunction. In
                   addition, the procedure for operating the bascule span when the PLC/SLC is disabled shall be
                   provided.
               10. Detailed results of acceptance testing in a tabulation format. The Contractor shall submit the
                   format before start of acceptance testing for approval.
               11. A description of Abnormal Indications/faults such as, bascule span over-travel, bascule span
                   drive permissive fault, etc.
                The Contractor shall furnish to the Engineer eight bound copies of an instruction manual with the
         title "Operation and Maintenance Manual, Volume 2 - Operation of Electrical Equipment," containing the
         following:
                1. Table of Contents.
                2. Detailed, technical operating instructions, which shall cover bascule span operation, manual
                    bascule span operation, temporary bascule span operation etc.
                3. Detailed description of all control equipment including instructions to achieve optimum settings
                    of all limit switches, detectors, etc.
                4. Description of control, which shall describe in full the functions of all protective devices, limit
                    switches, contactors, relays, PLC and associated equipment, existing and new and all other
                    electrical equipment used, both in the power system and in the control system, in connection
                    with each step in the operating sequence. Wire and apparatus numbers appearing on the wiring
                    diagrams shall be used in this description for identifying the various devices and circuits.
                5. To augment the description of control and operations, reference drawings showing locations of
                    equipment, both existing and new, shall be included. A layout of control apparatus in the
                    control house and operator's room shall be included. All descriptions shall be cross-referenced
                    with reference drawings.
                6. Complete bascule span motor flux vector drive manual, including all annotated drive
                    parameters.
                7. PLC/SLC manuals shall include but not necessarily be limited to:
                           a. System specifications
                           b. Electrical power requirements and special grounding
                           c. Application considerations
                                1)    Assembly and installation procedures
                                2)    Troubleshooting procedure.
                                3)    Programming procedure
                                4)    Explanation of internal fault diagnostics.


Route 35 over Manasquan River Bridge Rehabilitation
Monmouth and Ocean Counties                                                                                  Page 183
                                 5)     Shut down procedures.
               The Contractor shall also furnish to the Engineer eight bound copies of a book with the title
         "Operation and Maintenance Manual, Volume 3 - Maintenance of Electrical Equipment," and the manual
         shall contain the following:
               1. Table of Contents.
               2. Maintenance instructions for the electrical equipment, including warnings and precautions to be
                    observed during maintenance actions. All preventive maintenance procedures are to be outlined
                    and a chart listing all maintenance procedures in chronological order shall be provided:
               3. Set of descriptive catalog sheets, bulletins, maintenance instructions, and drawings covering all
                    approved items of equipment furnished and installed under the item "Electrical Work”.
               4. A troubleshooting flow chart for troubleshooting the bridge electrical system shall be provided
                    to facilitate the diagnosing and correcting of malfunctions.
               5. Reduced size (11” x 17”) prints of all approved working drawings, including all schematic
                    wiring diagrams, control desk and control panel layouts and connection diagrams.
               6. PLC/SLC schematic wiring, ladder diagrams, and electrical schematic.
               7. A listing of all PLC/SLC inputs and outputs. The listing shall include:
                            a. Designation as symbol
                            b. Description of function
                            c. Drop where connected
                            d. Sheet number where used on wiring diagram
               8. Composite schedule of electrical apparatus.
               9. Complete spare parts list.
               10. Test data, equipment, criteria, and performance curves for the bascule span drive motor.
               11. Conduit layout and installation drawings.
               12. Names, addresses, and telephone numbers of vendors and suppliers.
               The material for the operation and maintenance manuals shall be assembled to form a booklet for
         each volume with heavy plastic covers. Each booklet shall be approximately 9 inches by 12 inches,
         three-ring binder with 3-inch "D" rings, and vinyl cover to allow insert type Title Sheets. Each booklet
         shall be neatly entitled with a descriptive title, the name of the bridge, the Owner, the location, year of
         installation, Contractor, and Designer. Copies of drawings shall be in black on a white background and
         shall be easily legible. Blue print drawings and/or hand drawn sketches are not acceptable. The
         arrangements of the booklets, the method of binding, material to be included, and the text shall all be as
         approved by the Engineer and NJDOT MBEG. The final bound volumes of the instruction books shall be
         completed and made available at the bridge site for use during the final acceptance testing period
         hereinafter specified for the electrical work.
               All literature, descriptive materials for inclusion in any manual, shall have all sheets numbered and
         listed by section in the Table of Contents.
               Each section/subsection shall be separated with tabbed divider sheets. Each tab shall be suitably
         titled.
               All loose-leaf paper used for reproduction shall be 20 pound, 3-hole pre-punched and reinforced
         with plastic or cloth tape.
               All copies of the Operations and Maintenance Manuals shall be distributed as follows:
                      1. One (1) copy each of Volume 1, Volume 2 and Volume 3 shall be distributed to the
                          MBEG.
                      2. One (1) copy each of Volume 1, Volume 2, and Volume 3 shall be distributed to the Route
                          35 Operator House. The Contractor shall provide adequate additional shelving for all
                          manuals in the Southeast operator house.
                      3. Two (2) copies of Volume 1 and six (6) copies each of Volume 2 and Volume 3 shall be
                          distributed to the Bureau of Maintenance Engineering – Bridge Section, 1035 Parkway
                          Avenue, Trenton, NJ 08625.
                      4. Three (3) copies of Volume 1 shall be distributed to the Bureau of Project Support and
                          Engineering, Drawbridge Operations, 2436 Paynter‟s Road, Manasquan, NJ 08736.
                      5. Additional volumes of Operations and Maintenance Manuals created from other sections
                          shall be distributed to the Groups listed in subparagraphs 1, 2 & 3 above.

707.04 Construction Requirements.


Route 35 over Manasquan River Bridge Rehabilitation
Monmouth and Ocean Counties                                                                                Page 184
    A.   Maintaining Existing Facilities. The Contractor shall conduct his operations in such a manner as to
         maintain the existing bridge electrical equipment and systems in operating condition at all times
         throughout the construction in accordance with the approved work schedule and all requirements for
         construction staging. This includes but is not limited to navigation lights, traffic signals, warning gates,
         barrier gates, roadway lights, heat trace cables for water and waste line and any other electrical facilities
         required for safe operation of the bascule span. The Contractor shall furnish and install any temporary
         facilities and equipment necessary to conform to the above requirements at no additional cost. The bridge
         operation during construction has been detailed on contract drawings and under “Temporary Bridge
         Operation during Construction”.
               The Contractor shall be held responsible for the maintenance and repairs of the bridge components
         from the start of the project to the final acceptance. The Contractor shall be held responsible for the
         operation of the bascule span during periods defined in Section 107.13 “Construction over or adjacent to
         Navigable Waters”. The Contractor shall also be responsible for maintaining all bridge approaches
         lighting fixtures.
               The maintenance shall include regular greasing, fluid change, electrical control maintenance, and
         repairs to any breakdowns during the construction period. Snow plowing and salt spreading both on the
         bridge and approaches, should be cleared away by the Contractor.
               The Contractor, in the presence of the Engineer, shall examine all the required facilities on the
         bridge and he shall note items requiring modification and repair prior to the start of mandated
         maintenance. Upon receipt of a listing of non-operating items the Engineer will make arrangements with
         the Contractor or other parties to repair mal/non-functioning items. The Contractor shall be required to
         provide, at no additional cost to the NJDOT, temporary power for bridge facilities. As and if required,
         temporary power shall be provided by the Contractor at no additional cost to the State.
               Additional items required to maintain facilities during construction can be found in Section 539 –
         “Temporary Bridge Operation During Construction”.
    B.   Construction Scheduling. The disconnecting and removal of existing facilities, the modification or
         rehabilitation of other existing equipment, the installation of new apparatus and equipment and the
         connections of all existing and new apparatus shall be coordinated with the structural, architectural, and
         mechanical work under this contract and shall be done in conformance with the requirements governing
         the sequencing and scheduling of construction as shown on the Plans and specified herein. Component
         sizes must be coordinated with existing or proposed access to their installed or temporary locations.
               The Contractor shall prepare and maintain an updated progress schedule to indicate phases of work.
         The schedule shall be submitted to the Engineer and NJDOT MBEG for review and approval prior to the
         start of work and shall be in accordance with Section 108.04 of the Standard Specifications.
    C.   Removal of Existing Equipment. For demolition, removal, and salvage of existing equipment, refer to
         Section 540 “Demolition and Removal”.
    D.   Connections to Existing Facilities. The Contractor shall make all connections required between the
         rehabilitated and new equipment and the existing circuits and apparatus to provide for proper operation of
         the bascule span and its auxiliary equipment, in accordance with the requirements specified herein.
    E.   Cutting, Patching and Miscellaneous. The Contractor shall perform all necessary drilling, cutting, and
         patching required to install his work. All cutting of concrete, structural steel, sidewalks, floor slabs,
         walls, and other portions shall be done by skilled personnel. All conduits and pipe sleeves shall be
         properly grouted in the mortar.
               After completion of the work, the Contractor shall repair all damages caused by either his
         installation to existing structure/bridge or facilities or existing damages/deformities, such as due to water
         leakage noticed while relocating equipment within structure/bridge or facilities and shall finish the job in
         a workman like manner satisfactory to the Engineer and NJDOT MBEG. Holes in the walls, ceiling, or
         floor shall be patched and finished to match the existing surfaces. Painted surfaces shall be repainted
         after being repaired. Any damage to windows, window framing, sash, sills, frames or any other
         architectural trim shall be repaired by the Contractor at his own expense.
    F.   Factory Inspection and Testing. The control and power distribution cabinets, motor flux vector drive
         cabinets, programmable logic controllers and other apparatus fabricated or assembled by the control
         system vendor shall be subjected to shop inspection to demonstrate compliance with all specified
         requirements. The shop inspection is intended as a means of facilitating the work and minimizing errors,
         with an understanding that it will not relieve the Contractor of responsibility for imperfect material or
         workmanship, both in the shop and at the bridge site.


Route 35 over Manasquan River Bridge Rehabilitation
Monmouth and Ocean Counties                                                                                  Page 185
                The control cabinets, control desk, and enclosures with programmable controllers and all associated
         PLC-drops with all required interfacing equipment shall be assembled and temporarily interconnected for
         operational testing at the plant of the control system vendor. The testing shall demonstrate proper
         programmed operation of all bridge drives and auxiliary equipment in accordance with specified
         requirements for system functioning, including the programmable controllers, flux vector drives, and all
         control relays and motor starters etc.
                The manufacturer's standard testing shall comprise at least the following:
                     1. Inspection of materials, fit of parts, finishes, adjustments, and conformance with catalog
                          cuts.
                     2. Wire continuity tests, either visual or verified with continuity tester.
                     3. Operational check of circuits to determine proper interlocking of circuits and operator‟s
                          devices.
                     4. Polarity of connections to instruments and other polarity-sensitive devices.
                     5. Dielectric test in accordance with applicable NEMA standards.
                The Engineer and NJDOT MBEG or authorized representative shall witness the factory inspection
         and special testing required herein, and no equipment shall be shipped from the factory until it has been
         approved by NJDOT MBEG and released for shipment by the Engineer. The Contractor shall provide
         notification thirty (30) days in advance of the date of the tests so that arrangements can be made for the
         Engineer and NJDOT MBEG to be present at the tests. The Contractor shall submit to the Engineer and
         NJDOT MBEG for review, ten (10) days prior to the testing date, a copy of all standard and all special
         tests to be performed, as well as actual test formats.
                During the witnessed inspection, nameplate legends, conductor identifications, instrument scales,
         escutcheon plate engraving, and all other details of construction shall be checked for conformity with
         specified requirements.
    G.   Material Installation/Entry Clearance. To facilitate installation of the electrical and electrical related
         assemblies, the Contractor shall review all drawings to ensure that adequate installation space is
         available. Review of space installation shall be provided prior to manufacture or purchase. Units too
         large to fit through or into available space shall require the Contractor to enlarge the opening, relocate, or
         re-package the internal equipment at no additional expense to the New Jersey Department of
         Transportation.
                The Contractor may arrange, furnish, and install hoisting equipment to facilitate installation and
         removal of various items. The Contractor shall ensure that the hoisting device, if used, has sufficient
         capacity to raise and lower the loads.
                The cost to remove, hoist, and reconnect the bascule span motor, cabinets, enclosures, and
         associated equipment shall be paid for under Section 707, “Electrical Work”.
    H.   Manufacturer's Field Start-Up Service and Testing. Included with the furnishing of the major items of
         electrical equipment by the manufacturer shall be the furnishing of all necessary field supervisory start-up
         time by the manufacturer's service engineering department to facilitate proper adjustment of the drive
         equipment so as to achieve satisfactory functioning of the drives.
                The manufacturer's field service engineering personnel shall be experienced in the adjustment and
         functioning of the particular control equipment furnished by the manufacturer. The personnel shall be
         capable of locating and correcting faults or defects and of obtaining from the manufacturer, without
         delay, new parts or replacements for apparatus that, in the opinion of the Engineer and NJDOT MBEG,
         does not perform satisfactorily.
                Manufacturer‟s Field Start-Up Service and Testing shall be for individual sub-systems and
         components. The final acceptance of the bridge electrical and control systems and peripherals shall be
         included and paid for under the “Acceptance Testing” Section of these specifications.
    I.   Field Testing. The Contractor shall arrange for and provide all the necessary field tests, including detailed
         bridge system acceptance testing, as directed by the Engineer and NJDOT MBEG, to demonstrate that the
         entire electrical system is in proper working order and in accordance with the Plans and Specifications.
         The tests shall include, but not be limited to, continuity and insulation resistance testing of conductors
         and operational testing of traffic signals, warning gates, barrier gates, lift bascule span, navigation lights,
         signals, existing automatic transfer switch, temporary manual transfer switch and complete PLC/SLC
         system. The Contractor shall arrange with the local power company to obtain, at his own expense,
         electric power during the testing period until the bridge has been accepted.



Route 35 over Manasquan River Bridge Rehabilitation
Monmouth and Ocean Counties                                                                                    Page 186
               Should the acceptance tests show that any piece of equipment, cable or wiring connection, and
         interlocking, in the judgment of the Engineer and NJDOT MBEG, is defective or functions improperly,
         such adjustments and/or replacements shall be made by the Contractor as to make the installation
         satisfactory to the Engineer and NJDOT MBEG and at no extra cost.
               The Contractor shall obtain final approval of the Operation and Maintenance Manual from the
         Engineer and NJDOT MBEG prior to final acceptance testing of the bridge.
               Other field tests for specific equipment shall be as specified in the various sections of this
         Specification.
    J.   Electric Service. Utility electric power for operation of the bridge and its auxiliaries is supplied by one
         source. The source is the three-phase, 480/277-volt, 60-hertz, 4-wire, 225 KVA.
               Normal power for operation of the bridge and its auxiliaries will be continued to be supplied by
         “Jersey Central Power and Light Company” from existing pole mounted transformers located near the
         parking lot at the southwest side of the bridge where shown on the Plans. The Contractor shall furnish
         and install 4” PVC schedule 80 conduits along the abutment wall and along approach bascule span
         stringers to the southeast house. The routing shall be as shown on the contract plans. Utility to ensure
         that a proper, solid, neutral to ground connection is furnished and installed at the transformers service
         point, and shall be connected to the bridge grounding system as shown on the Plans. The Utility
         Company provides, and maintains primary cables and the existing transformers.
               The Contractor shall furnish and install, as shown on the plans wire with AWG size and quantity
         shall be as shown on the Plans. Standby power for the bridge and its auxiliaries shall be provided by a
         standby engine-generator set as indicated in “Diesel Engine Generator Rehabilitation”.
    K.   Louvers/Dampers. All existing generator room louvers shall be removed and replaced with new motor
         operated combination louvers/dampers. In addition, wall openings and the intake louver in the generator
         room shall be enlarged. The new enlarged intake louver/damper shall measure 48 inches high by 48
         inches wide. The existing exhaust louver/damper shall be replaced with similar type combination louver
         of same size.
               The louvers/dampers shall be the AC, 4” deep, 6063-T5 Aluminum Alloy Combination Louver
         manufactured by Ruskin Co. or the engineer and NJDOT MBEG approved equal. Front louver stationary
         blades shall be drainable type, rear adjustable blades shall be operable by concealed linkage, stainless
         steel sleeve bearings with locking louver quadrant, 120 V, direct coupled, spring return type actuator.
    L.   Bascule Span Brakes. Brakes – bascule span motor brakes and one machinery brakes, shall be furnished
         and installed in each machinery room as shown on the Plans. Each brake shall be a spring-set, thrustor-
         released, shoe-type, open brake, with a second mode for manual release, hydraulic set, and the brake shall
         be provided with corrosion-resisting fittings. The brakes shall be floor-mounted on structural supports.
         Each motor brake shall be rated 380 foot-pounds and shall be factory set to exert an actual retarding
         torque of - - - foot-pounds. Each machinery brake shall be factory set for 2150 ft.-lb. Brakes shall be
         manufactured by Mondel, or the Engineer and NJDOT MBEG approved manufacturer.
               All motor and machinery brake wheels and couplings shall be furnished with the brakes by the
         brake manufacturer. The bores shall be left undersize, and the wheels shall be shipped to the machinery
         manufacturer who shall finish-bore and key seat the wheels and fit them onto the machinery shafts. For
         machinery brake wheels and couplings refer to plan sheets and mechanical specifications.
               Each brake shall be equipped with a hand release that will not change the torque setting or require
         removable levers or wrenches. The hand release mechanism shall be located on the side of the brake
         away from the main reducer (right hand and left hand units are required). Each hand release shall be
         provided with a lever type limit switch for interlocking purposes as described under "interlocking." It
         shall not be possible to set the hand release of the brakes without tripping these switches. Switches shall
         be an approved equal to Square D Class 9007 with epoxy potted STOWA cable.
               In addition to the hand release limit switch, two lever type limit switches shall be mounted on each
         brake. One shall indicate that the brake is fully set, the other that the brake is fully released. The brake
         released limit switch (which shall have two N.O. contacts) shall trip when the brake is electrically
         released or hand released. The brake set limit switch shall have two N.O. and two N.C. contacts and shall
         trip when the brake is fully set. Switches shall be an approved equal to Square D Class 9007 with epoxy
         potted STOWA cable.
               The down-stroke (set) time delays of the thrustors shall be set in such a manner that the brakes will
         not be applied simultaneously should electric power fail or a stop is activated while the bascule span is in



Route 35 over Manasquan River Bridge Rehabilitation
Monmouth and Ocean Counties                                                                                 Page 187
         motion. The intervals between the setting of the brakes shall be adjusted to obtain smooth stopping of the
         bascule span in the shortest possible time as approved by the Engineer and NJDOT MBEG.
                The oil used in the thrustor operating chambers of the brakes shall be a grade as approved by the
         Engineer and NJDOT MBEG. It shall have a free operating temperature range between -40 degrees and
         150 degrees Fahrenheit.
                The thrustors shall be actuated by 460-volt, three-phase, 60 Hertz, totally enclosed, squirrel cage
         motors controlled by magnetic contactors with manual-reset thermal overload relays. The rated stalled
         thrust of each thrustor shall be not less than 135 percent of the thrust actually required to release the brake
         with the torque adjusted to the continuous rated value.
                Each thrustor shall include a 120-volt, single phase heater installed to maintain an acceptable oil
         temperature of 50 degrees Fahrenheit.
                Each brake shall have nitriding finish on all ferrous parts and the brake covers shall be stainless
         steel.
                The set, released, and hand-released status of each brake shall be indicated through the use of pilot
         light indicators on the control desk. Pilot lights to indicate excessive thrustor motor currents shall also be
         furnished.
                To allow checking of the thrustor brake operation, key operated selector switches located on the
         control desk shall be furnished. Two position maintained one key operated switch per brake will allow
         brake testing with bascule span seated and motors not running. Only one brake may be tested at a time.
    M.   Provision for Gate Motors and Controls. Electric motors for operation of the Traffic Warning and barrier
         gates shall be furnished as part of the Traffic Warning and barrier gate machinery by the gate
         manufacturer and shall be installed under "Traffic Warning and Barrier Gates", Section 535.
                Each Traffic Warning gate motor (total of two) and barrier gate motor (total of four motors) shall be
         of weatherproof, totally enclosed non-ventilated (TENV) type, 460-volt, three-phase, 60 Hertz, ball-
         bearing, squirrel cage motor capable of withstanding instant reversal when running at full speed. Each
         Traffic Warning and barrier gate motor shall be provided with a brake for stopping and holding the
         mechanism.
                Each Traffic Warning and barrier gate motor shall be controlled by magnetic reversing type
         contactors, electrically and mechanically interlocked, and shall be protected by a three-element, thermal
         overload relay, automatic reset.
                Each gate – two Traffic Warning gates and four barrier gates – shall be operated from individual
         raise and lower pushbuttons on the control desk. Pushbutton circuitry is arranged such that the gate in
         motion will stop immediately when the pushbutton is released. In addition, the group of two Traffic
         Warning gates is provided with a group raising pushbutton, and the four barrier gates are provided with a
         group raising pushbutton. All gates in a group shall travel to their respective limits after a momentary
         raise command of the group switch. The group shall stop immediately upon momentary contact of the
         group's respective stop pushbutton. The push-to-stop lamp shall illuminate when gates are in motion.
         While gates are in motion the raise or lower light will flash. When gate has been fully raised/lowered the
         light will be constantly illuminated. All existing pushbutton shall be interlocked in the new control
         scheme using Allen-Bradley controllers.
                All electrical work to provide for the connection, operation, and control of the gate motors,
         including control apparatus, switches, conduits, boxes, cables, and other equipment, shall be furnished
         and installed under this item of "Electrical Work." The work shall also include adjustment of all
         apparatus and overload devices to provide proper functioning of the equipment.
                Each gate furnished under the item of "Traffic Warning and Barrier Gates" shall include a 120/12-
         volt flasher and gate lights. Each barrier gate shall be equipped a proximity limit switch built into the gate
         housing. The limit switch shall provide contacts to control the limit of travel of the barrier gates in each
         direction and for indication and sequence interlocking. Adjustment of gate crank arms and limit switches
         for proper operation of the barrier gates shall be done under the item of "Traffic Warning and Barrier
         Gates.”
    N.   Bridge Control. The control circuits for operation of the bridge shall be made available through relays,
         encoders and programmable logic control for the leaf bascule span drives. The positions of the control
         selector switch shall be marked “Off” and “On. The control selector switch shall be kept in the “Off”
         position, except when operation of the bridge is required.
    O.   Bascule span Operation. Four modes of bascule span operation shall be provided to operate the bascule
         span. Normal bascule span operation shall be with utility power and the 40 horsepower vector duty


Route 35 over Manasquan River Bridge Rehabilitation
Monmouth and Ocean Counties                                                                                    Page 188
         squirrel cage motors. Backup bascule span operation shall be with generator power and the 40
         horsepower vector duty squirrel cage motors. Emergency bascule span operation shall utilize the
         machinery room diesel engines to operate the bascule span, and utility or generator power to operate the
         traffic devices and utilities. The fourth mode will be two speed/two winding, brake/clutch integral
         assembly temporary motors powered either by the Utility power or Engine-generator power.
               The flux vector drives can be selected from the drive selector switch on the control desk. The
         bascule span control pushbuttons shall provide for raising, lowering, or normal stop of the bascule span
         by momentary contact in the desired switch position. Depressing the “stop” pushbutton will cause the
         bascule span motor to decelerate to a reduced speed and then power will be removed from the motor and
         the brakes shall set. If an immediate stop is called for, the "Emergency Stop" pushbutton shall be
         depressed, causing power to be removed from all necessary bascule span drive and brake contactors. A
         fault reset pushbutton will reset the drives when pushed, a red pilot light will illuminate when a drive
         fault occurs.
    P.   Bascule Span Control.
               1. Drive Selection. Flux vector drives for bascule span shall be provided as specified under “Flux
                    Vector Drive Cabinets”. The flux vector drives shall be located in the switchboard room. Four,
                    four-position pushbutton type selector switches are provided on the control desk to select push
                    to stop, Raise, lower, or permissive fault.
                     If a drive is overloaded or failed or if a motor is disconnected, the bascule span shall come to a
               stop. The operator shall be alerted to this fault by displaying the message on the message display
               unit (the device that has been selected by the PLC). The fault light will continue to flash until the
               operator acknowledges the changeover in equipment by physically moving the appropriate selector
               switch to the second drive position or until the fault is corrected. The light shall then illuminate in
               the normal fashion.
               2. Positional Measurement Devices: Bascule span position shall be indicated on the control desk
                    by two modes; a digital resolver and selsyn-based system. The selsyn transmitter and receiver
                    specifications are included in this Section.
                           a. Digital Angular Position Resolver. For the flux vector drives using PLC operation,
                                 position of the bascule span is to be measured by a digital position resolver. In each
                                 machinery room, there shall be mounted two (2) digital position resolvers connected
                                 to the operating machinery through gearing. Each digital position resolver shall
                                 produce an analog signal via a brushless resolver. This signal is converted to a 4-
                                 20mA analog signal format by a built-in ratiometric tracking converter. Each
                                 digital position encoder shall retain positional information, even in the event of a
                                 power failure to provide a fully absolute position encoder system. Each digital
                                 position encoder shall be a single-turn, heavy-duty, Size 40, and mounted in a
                                 NEMA 13 enclosure. The outputs shall be furnished with short-circuit proof PNP
                                 transistors. Output shall be 18 mA per 78 degrees of bascule span movement. Each
                                 digital resolver shall be furnished with a lockable, external toggle switch to allow
                                 changing of count direction without opening the housing, and be powered by a
                                 separate fused 5-volt D-C source and provide a TTL multiplexed digital output with
                                 end mount connected and multiconductor cable as recommended by the
                                 manufacturer. Mounting brackets and flexible couplings are to be used for
                                 mounting the encoders to the machinery supports. The Contractor shall include a
                                 single length of the multiconductor interconnecting cable and associated connectors
                                 between each encoder and the adjacent I/O drop.
                                       Each resolver will produce approximately 17 mA for a full opening of 75
                                 degrees.
                                       At the seated position, the PLC software shall "initialize" the resolver count to
                                 a value “greater than 0”. As the bascule span raises, the resolver count shall
                                 increase. The PLC shall account for any rope stretch/slippage, etc., by taking the
                                 initial encoder count while the bascule span is seated into consideration during all
                                 manipulations and comparisons to the count during bascule span operation. This
                                 will provide exact limits of travel, deceleration points, etc.




Route 35 over Manasquan River Bridge Rehabilitation
Monmouth and Ocean Counties                                                                                    Page 189
                                       Resolver failure shall immediately reduce the bascule span speed to creep and
                                 travel to full open or seated and set all brakes. At full open/closed position resolver
                                 count will reinitialize and bascule span shall be allowed to run at normal speed.
                                       The PLC shall perform calibration error checks at seated, and at fully open to
                                 determine if the resolvers are properly measuring bascule span position. The checks
                                 shall be performed upon changing states of the fully seated limit switches. An error
                                 of 1 inch maximum will be tolerated for either resolver. If either resolver shall fail
                                 a calibration check during bascule span operation, the operator shall be alerted to
                                 this change by the flashing of the backup positional measurement indicating light
                                 and the extinguishing of the resolver‟s indicating light. The light will continue to
                                 flash until the operator acknowledges the change by changing the selector switch
                                 position or when the bascule span becomes seated.
                                       The control desk shall have two selector switches to select either of the two (2)
                                 digital resolvers. The digital resolvers shall be the DigiSolver, manufactured by
                                 Autotech, or Engineer and NJDOT MBEG approved equal.
    Q.   Sequence of Operation.
             1. After a boat gives proper request signals for an opening, give the necessary signals with the air
                   horns.
             2. Turn the bridge control switch to "On.”
             3. Turn the traffic signals switch from "Green" to "Red," to request traffic signals to turn off the
                   green traffic lights and turn on the “Red Signal Ahead” sign flasher automatically.
                   Approximately five (5) seconds after the “Red Signal Ahead” sign starts flashing, the traffic
                   signals turn amber. After a short time delay of six (6) seconds, the amber lights shall be
                   extinguished and the red traffic lights, gate warning lights, and gongs turned on.
             4. Lower the warning gates for oncoming traffic one approach at a time.
             5. Lower barrier gates in the proper sequence. Gongs will shut off when all gates are lowered.
             6. Open the bascule span to the fully open position; bascule span navigation lights will turn from
                   red to green. Sound horn to indicate span opening.
             7. After the boat has passed, sound horn and lower the bascule span, bringing it to a full seat at all
                   corners.
             8. Raise barrier gates by means of the group raising or individual control. Gongs will begin
                   ringing again.
             9. Raise the warning gates by means of the group raising control.
             10. As soon as all warning gates are raised, turn the traffic signals switch from "Stop" to "Go."
                   Gongs will stop ringing. Bridge traffic signal will turn green and the “Red Signal Ahead” signs
                   shall automatically stop flashing “Red.”
             11. Turn bridge control switch to "off.”
    R.   Interlocking. The various control operations shall be so interlocked that they can be performed only in
         their proper sequence and that no damage can result from an incorrect operation. This interlocking shall
         be arranged as follows:
               1. Contacts of the gate limit switches shall be so arranged that movement of any gate by 10
                   degrees from its fully raised position shall turn on the “Red Signals Ahead” signs, red traffic
                   signals, warning lights, and gongs.
               2. As soon as the warning gates are fully raised (after any one of them has been partly or fully
                   lowered), the “Red Signals Ahead” signs, red traffic lights, warning lights, and gongs shall be
                   turned off, provided the traffic signals switch has been returned to "Go”.
               3. The warning gates cannot be operated electrically unless the bridge control is turned on, the
                   “Red Signals Ahead” signs and "Stop" traffic signals have been turned on, and all barrier gates
                   are fully raised.
               4. The barrier gates cannot be operated electrically unless the “Red Signals Ahead” signs and
                   "Stop" traffic signals have been turned on, the warning gates are down, and the bascule span is
                   seated.
               5. The bascule span cannot be operated electrically if more than one brake in the machinery room
                   has been released by hand and barrier gates are not down and locked.
               6. Sealed tumbler switches for bypassing the sequence interlocks in an emergency are provided
                   and installed on the control desk. These switches shall be held in their open position by hinged


Route 35 over Manasquan River Bridge Rehabilitation
Monmouth and Ocean Counties                                                                                    Page 190
                   plates at least 2 inches long, which have to be unlocked and turned over backwards in order to
                   release the switch handles for bypassing. The underside of these plates shall be painted bright
                   red. Provision shall be made so that each bypass switch can be locked in the "Off" position by
                   means of a lockable brass cover plate. The bypass switches shall only be effective for a single
                   close-open-close cycle. Operated switches must be turned off and back on to be effective.
    S.   Provisions for Laptop Computer, Printer and Data Logger. Under Section 536 – “Data Logging” the
         vendor (Link Control Systems, Inc. or NJDOT MBEG approved) shall supply a portable programming
         terminal printer and data logger assembly. The data logger assembly shall be delivered to the Contractor
         for installation in the Bridge Control House. The laptop computer and printer shall be delivered to a
         location as required by NJDOT MBEG.
               Under “Raceway, Conductors, Terminations and Boxes”, the Contractor shall furnish and install all
         boxes, wires, cables to interconnect the printer and data logger. The Contractor shall also extend the
         necessary power for operation of these devices.
    T.   Maintenance Tests. The PLC shall store the various parameters described below for a total of one bridge
         opening/closing cycles. Subsequent bridge cycles shall overwrite any stored data so that the two most
         recent cycles' parameters are stored in memory at any given time.
               The stored parameters for the one most recent bridge cycles shall be accessed using a designated
         code entered via the keyboard on the PLC user desk. The user shall have the option to print either or both
         groups of parameters on the printer.
               The parameters listed below are to be recorded every 5 degree opening of bascule span. Tests for
         the bascule span drive system shall be conducted for the first and last five feet of travel and every five
         feet thereafter. The parameters to be measured are as follows:
               1. Bascule span angular position against bascule span motor kilowatts, amps, and speed for both
                   near and far leaves.
               In addition, the drive used during the lifts shall be recorded and printed out with the above
         parameters as shall be the date and time of the lifts. The format for the printout of parameters shall be in
         tabular form with date, time, and drive identification heading the table. All parameters shall be measured
         and printed versus position of the bascule span as described in the acceptance test. The Vendor shall
         provide PLC software for additional maintenance test at the request of the Engineer and NJDOT MBEG.
         1. Drift Test.
                          a. Used as a maintenance test to estimate bascule span balance.
         Procedures for checking bascule span balance shall be as follows:
               1. PLC Controlled
               2. Initiated by a keyed switch located on the control desk.
               3. Open the bascule span from fully closed at mid bascule span, the bascule span motors will
                   automatically be disconnected keeping all bascule span brakes released.
               4. PLC will record the amount of bascule span drift “angular position of bascule span when power
                   was removed to angular position of bascule span stop position”. Bascule span will coast to stop.
               5. Restart after bascule span stops and travel to full open.
               6. Close bascule span and at mid bascule span, the bascule span motors will automatically be
                   removed keeping all bascule span brakes released.
               7. PLC will record the amount of bascule span drift.
               8. Upon completion of bascule span raising and lowering drift test, the result of the test shall be
                   displayed on the two-line display with indications drift raise (distance) drift lower (distance).
               9. The bascule span balance is correct when the amount of drift while lowering is approximately
                   1½ times the amount of drift while opening.
                     The drift test shall be monitored by PLC logic. The PLC system shall monitor the bascule
         span speed and amount of drift time. Should either of these items become excessive, the drift test shall
         automatically reconnect the bascule span motors to regain control.
    U.   Position Indicator. The position of the bascule span during operation shall be shown by a position
         indicators mounted on the pinnacle of the control desk. The pointers shall be driven by a high-accuracy
         selsyn receivers connected to a high-accuracy transmitters mounted in the machinery rooms and geared to
         the operating machinery so that the input shaft of the transmitters shall rotate 280 for the maximum
         angular opening of 78 degrees.
               The existing position indicators on the control desk will be reused.



Route 35 over Manasquan River Bridge Rehabilitation
Monmouth and Ocean Counties                                                                                 Page 191
             Any changes in the ratios of gear sets provided as part of the rehabilitated operation machinery will
       affect the calibration of the position indicator. It shall be the Contractor‟s responsibility to verify the
       actual rotation at the transmitter input shafts corresponding to the full-bascule span opening and to
       modify the position indicators‟ design if necessary.
    V. Limit Switches.
            1. Fully Seated and Span Locks driven and pulled Limit Switches. The proximity sensor shall have
                 a 5 mm nominal sensing range with a standard steel target as shown on the Plans with a 3-15%
                 differential travel. The sensor shall be short circuit and overload protected. It shall be able to
                 operate from 20-250VAC with a maximum voltage drop across a conducting sensor of 6 volts.
                 Off state leakage current shall be less than or equal to 1.7mA. Minimum load current shall be
                 no less than 3 mA. The sensor shall be repeatable within 2% of the nominal operating distance.
                 It shall be able to operate within a +70C to -25C temperature range at a maximum of 10% drift.
                 The sensor shall meet or exceed NEMA 6 and IP 67 enclosure ratings. The sensor shall be
                 equipped with two LEDs, one to indicate power on and one to indicate sensing status with the
                 power on LED also serving as Short Circuit Warning if flashing. The sensor shall be able to
                 withstand a 30 g shock load for a maximum time of 11ms and be able to withstand a 55 Hz
                 vibration 0.039 inch Amplitude in all three planes. The switch shall be provided with a
                 minimum of one normally open contact. The switch shall be connected via a potted-in,
                 watertight, PVC jacketed cable. The proximity switch shall be the B5-G18-ADZ3X2 Proximity
                 Sensor as manufactured by Turck, or the Engineer and NJDOT MBEG approved equal
            2. Traffic Warning and Barrier Gate Limit Switches. Limit Switches for each of the barrier gates
                 shall be furnished as part of each respective gate. Each gate shall contain a rotary, cam
                 operated, adjustable limit switch. A minimum of eight contacts is furnished, to provide gate
                 motor control, interlocking, logic and indicating features. The warning gate and barrier gates
                 limit switches shall be properly wired and used in the new PLC/SLC control system.
            3. Over travel and Fully Open – Inclinometers. Two inclinometers, one for each leaf for over travel
                 and fully open applications shall be provided and mounted to bascule girder web, near access
                 cutout on the South and the North side as shown on the Plans.
                    Each inclinometer shall be waterproof, high performance model SI-701WPBIHP of Columbia
             Research Laboratories, Woodlyn, PA or NJDOT MBEG approved equal. The operational range
             shall be +/-5 degrees, with current output of 4-20 mA and Power requirement of 15 VDC. The
             sensor shall be encased in SS 316L material and shall satisfy IP 68 and NEMA 6P rating. Cables
             WC-2 and EC-5, with waterproof connectors shall be provided.
       4. Overspeed Switches. Provide and install foot mount, NEMA 4 enclosed, euclide type C, AC
             overspeed protection switch on each of span motor shaft as shown on contract plans. Each switch
             shall have repetitive accuracy and temperature range from -50 degrees to + 120 degrees with 2
             N.O./2 N.C. snap action contacts. The input shaft of the switch shall be 5/8” diameter, stainless
             steel.
                    Overspeed switches shall be Series 2210 – 122CD, NEMA 4 as manufactured by Hubbell or
             NJDOT MBEG approved equal.
    W. Control Apparatus and Miscellaneous Equipment. Control apparatus shall conform to the applicable
       requirements of NEMA Publication No. ICS, latest revision, Industrial Control and Systems, rated as
       shown on the Plans or as required and to the following:
            1. Circuit Breakers: All branch circuits where shown on the Plans shall be protected by molded-
                 case circuit breakers mounted on the control panels. All breakers shall have quick-make and
                 quick-break contacts, and the mechanism shall be trip-free and trip-indicating. Frame sizes shall
                 not be less than 100 amperes and/or as shown on the Plans. The breakers shall be equipped with
                 thermal-magnetic trips or adjustable, instantaneous, magnetic trip units, with trip rating as
                 shown on the Plans or as required. Molded-case circuit breakers shall meet the requirements of
                 NEMA Publication No. AB1, latest revision. Interrupting capacity shall be as shown on the
                 contract documents. All circuit breakers shall be furnished with 2 N.O./2 N.C. contacts.
            2. Motor Circuit Protectors: All branch circuits, where shown on the Plans, shall be protected by
                 instantaneous trip motor circuit protectors (MCP). The MCP shall comply with UL 489 and
                 IEC 157.1. The MCP shall be marked to permit proper electrical application within the assigned
                 equipment ratings. The MCP shall be F-frame, 480 VAC maximum with alternate cam setting



Route 35 over Manasquan River Bridge Rehabilitation
Monmouth and Ocean Counties                                                                               Page 192
                   provision as manufactured by Cutler-Hammer, Square D FAL-frame, or Engineer and NJDOT
                   MBEG approved equal.
             3.    Motor Starters and Magnetic Contactors: The continuous current rating of contactors and
                   starters shall be adequate for the connected loads, and no starters shall be smaller than NEMA
                   Size 1. All contact poles shall be provided with arc chutes, and contactors rated 150 amperes
                   and above shall be equipped with magnetic blowouts. Contactors and overload relays shall be
                   provided with a minimum of one normally open auxiliary contact and one normally closed
                   auxiliary contact. Three-element, automatic reset, overload relays shall be provided for motor
                   protection. Reversing contactors shall be electrically and magnetically interlocked.
             4.    Motor Disconnect Switches: Un-fused safety switches for use as disconnects, shall be installed
                   within the range of view of each motor. The switches shall be lockable, non-fusible, heavy-
                   duty, safety switches, rated as shown on the Plans, and in watertight and dust-tight NEMA 4X,
                   stainless steel enclosures. Each disconnect shall be furnished with a 2 N.O/2 N.C. auxiliary
                   contact and phenolic nameplate to identify corresponding motor or brake.
             5.    Overload Relays: Manual reset overload relays shall be provided to protect the brake motors,
                   controllers, and wiring against overheating due to excessive current. Automatic reset overload
                   relays shall be provided for bascule span motor and gate motors. Heater elements are to be
                   selected based on motor full-load running current. Each O.L. shall provide a 2 N.O. and 2 N.C.
                   contact.
             6.    Over-current Relay: Adjustable magnetically-operated/overload relays shall be set to trip at 180
                   percent full load current.
             7.    Control Relays: Auxiliary control relays shall be multi-contact magnetic industrial relays with
                   contacts rated at 10 amperes, 600 volts, on a continuous basis. Relays that meet the specified
                   requirements are the Square D 8501 Class X, Allen Bradley Bulletin 700 Type P, General
                   Electric CR120B or Engineer and NJDOT MBEG Approved Equal.
             8.    Industrial Alternating Control Relays: Alternating relays shall be multi-contact magnetic relays
                   with contacts rated at 10 amperes, 600 volts on a continuous basis. Alternating relays that meet
                   the specified requirements are the Square D CA2SKE or Engineer and NJDOT MBEG approved
                   equal.
             9.    Timing Relays: Time-delay relays shall be of the electro-pneumatic type providing time delay
                   intervals as required with a linear timing range in the ratio of 1:10. Each timing relay shall be
                   provided with a timing head calibrated in linear increments. The number and type of poles shall
                   be as shown on the Plans.
             10.   Phase Failure and Reversal Relay: This relay shall prevent energizing the bridge controls in the
                   event of reversed phase sequence, loss of one phase, or low voltage. Equipment that meets the
                   specified requirements includes the Square D type MPD, Cutler Hammer Type D65,
                   Westinghouse CP, or Engineer and NJDOT MBEG approved equal.
             11.   Selector switches and Pushbuttons: Control switches and pushbuttons on the control desk shall
                   be heavy-duty, oil-tight contact blocks operated by selector knobs or pushbuttons as indicated
                   on the Plans. Contacts shall be fine silver, capable of interrupting 6 amperes at 120 volts A-C
                   and of continuously carrying 10 amperes.
             12.   Indicating Lights: Indicating lights shall be heavy-duty, oil-tight sockets provided with 6-watt
                   lamps rated 135 volts. Indicating lights shall be of the remote test type. All lenses shall be glass
                   or plastic, with color and escutcheon plates as shown on the Plans. Indicating lights shall be
                   Square D Class 9001 Type K and Type J or Engineer and NJDOT MBEG approved equal.
             13.   Terminal Blocks: Terminal blocks for conductors of Size No. 8 AWG and smaller shall be one-
                   piece blocks of phenolic material recognized under the UL Component Recognition Program.
                   Barriers shall be not less than 1/2 inch high and 1/8 inch thick and shall be spaced 5/8 inch
                   center-to-center. Straps and screws shall be of brass, nickel plated for use in highly corrosive
                   atmospheres, and shall be rated for 50 amperes. The blocks shall provide a withstand voltage
                   rating of 750 volts per IEEE switchgear standards. The terminal blocks shall provide strap
                   screws suitable for use with ring tongue wire connectors. Corrosion resistant marking strips
                   shall be provided for conductor identification. At least ten percent spare terminals shall be
                   provided for use with power conductors and twenty percent for use with control conductors.
                   Terminal blocks shall be Buchanan Type 2B112, General Electric Series CR 151B, Marathon



Route 35 over Manasquan River Bridge Rehabilitation
Monmouth and Ocean Counties                                                                                   Page 193
                    series 1600 or Engineer and NJDOT MBEG approved equal. Screws shall be nickel plated
                    brass construction.
               14. Power Distribution Blocks: Power distribution blocks, for all conductors larger than No. 8
                    AWG, shall be constructed from a single piece of hard-drawn copper, machined and electro-
                    tinned. All blocks shall be mounted on heavy-duty phenolic material and furnished with safety
                    cover kits. Number and size of primary and secondary wire openings will be selected by the
                    Contractor/Vendor and shall be approved equal to the 66000 series blocks as manufactured by
                    Gould Shawmut or Series 145 by Marathon.
               15. Control Transformer Bridge Control: The Contractor shall furnish and install a bridge control
                    transformer in the power distribution and control cabinet which shall have the following
                    characteristics: 5 KVA, 1-phase, 60 Hertz, 480V primary, 115C temperature rise, two-5%
                    FCBN full capacity 120/240 volt secondary, indoor enclosure arranged for floor mounting or
                    wall mounting as required.
               16. A warning gong shall be mounted on the traffic signal pole. Each warning gong shall be a
                    weatherproof, motor-operated, vandal-proof, 12-inch gong mounted in a heavy-duty, cast-
                    aluminum housing with hinged back door. Provide The gong shall be of cast silicon bronze, fire
                    alarm metal. Gong shall operate on 120 Volts. Each gong shall be approved equal to model G-
                    12, as manufactured by B&B Roadway, the Western-Cullen No. 555, or the Security Products
                    Division of Federal Signal Corporation Type 555. Gongs shall be painted and mounted with
                    hardware in such a way as to prevent theft.
               17. Nameplates: Nameplates shall be provided for all aforementioned devices and shall be made of
                    laminated phenolic plastic with white front and back and black core and shall be not less than
                    0.094 inch thick. The lettering shall be etched through the front layer to show black engraved
                    letters on a white background. Lettering shall be not less than 1/4 inch high, unless otherwise
                    detailed on the Plans. Nameplates shall be securely fastened to the equipment with stainless
                    steel screws.
    X.   Transformers.
               1. Bridge Lighting: The Contractor shall furnish and install a lighting transformer in the
                    switchboard room, which shall have the following characteristics: 25 KVA , 480 delta primary
                    voltage, 208/120 wye secondary voltage, dry type, energy efficient, electro-statically shielded.
                    Sound level shall be below ANSI Std. C89.2 and shall not exceed 45DB, 2-20 FCAN and 4-
                    20% FCBN primary taps. UL component recognized 220 C insulation with 80 C temp rise in
                    accordance with NEMA Std. ST-20, 10-year warranty and mounted in accordance with UL
                    standard 506 or 1561. The transformer shall be floor mount type where shown on the Plans.
    Y.   Equipment Labels. All electrical devices, disconnect switches and cabinet equipment shall have a label
         affixed to each unit. The label shall be similar in construction to the aforementioned nameplates. Each
         label shall be of suitable size and letter characteristics. Text shall indicate name/function of each item.
         Disconnect switches shall provide a label indicating the voltage within. Labels shall be securely attached
         using stainless steel screws. The Contractor shall submit to the Engineer and NJDOT MBEG for review,
         all signs, with sizes, location, and text.
    Z.   Bridge Control Cabinets. Control panels enclosed in free-standing cabinets shall be furnished and
         installed where shown on the Plans. All circuit breakers, switches, contactors, starters, relays, regulating
         equipment, and other apparatus for control of the bascule span and its auxiliaries shall be mounted on
         these enclosed panels. The arrangement and line-up of the individual control cabinets shall be as shown
         on the Plans.
                All equipment in each control cabinet shall be mounted on painted sheet-steel bases, and each
         device shall be front-connected, front-wired, and removable from the front. The equipment in all cabinets
         shall be arranged for ease of access and for safety and convenience of operation. Special care shall be
         taken to obtain a systematic and neat arrangement of the equipment. Each device shall be suitably named
         and plainly marked by a laminated nameplate mounted near the device on the panel. Each nameplate
         shall show an approved descriptive title for the apparatus, together with the device designation appearing
         on the schematic wiring diagrams.
                Each control cabinet shall be a NEMA Type 12 enclosure constructed of No. 12 gauge sheet-steel
         and shall be reinforced with steel angles or channels so as to provide a rigid, free-standing structure. The
         control cabinets shall be provided with stainless steel continuous hinged doors on the front of each panel
         section. Door panels shall have gaskets and shall be provided with three-point, vault-type latches. For


Route 35 over Manasquan River Bridge Rehabilitation
Monmouth and Ocean Counties                                                                                 Page 194
        cabinets with two (2) doors, the center support shall be removable. Ventilating louvers shall be provided
        at the front of each enclosure. All hardware shall be corrosion resistant. Thermostatically controlled strip
        heaters shall be provided in each cabinet to prevent build-up of excess moisture. Each panel shall be
        provided with suitable interior fluorescent light fixtures operated from a door operated switch and a
        duplex receptacle.
              Each control panel enclosure shall permit mounting in the available space along the walls of the
        control house. If the final cabinet dimensions, as established by the manufacturer, should necessitate
        rearrangement or modification of the equipment in order to fit in the available space, such rearrangement
        or modifications shall be made and at no extra cost. The final arrangement of all equipment in the control
        house shall be subject to the approval of the Engineer and NJDOT MBEG.
              The control panel enclosures and all metal reinforcing shall be painted inside with two coats and
        outside with three coats, consisting of one coat of primer followed by one coat of white enamel on the
        inside surfaces and two coats of gray enamel outside. The finish coat shall be ANSI 61 light gray enamel.
              All contactors, relays, and other devices shall be of required current-carrying and interrupting
        capacity. All apparatus shall be of substantial construction and shall conform to the requirements of
        NEMA Standards Publications ICS 1 and 2, 1978, for industrial control devices.
              All internal wiring between devices and/or terminal blocks shall be flame-retardant, ethylene-
        propylene insulated, switchboard wire, Type SIS. Control conductors shall be stranded copper not
        smaller than No. 14 American Wire Gauge.
              For each assembled control panel, all outgoing wire, No. 8 AWG or smaller, shall be connected to
        terminal blocks installed at the sides of the cabinet. The control panels shall also provide sufficient extra
        terminals to allow connection of all wires coming from limit switches and other devices that go on to the
        bridge control desk and other locations as required, even though these wires do not connect to apparatus
        on the control panels. Spare terminals totaling at least 10 percent of those actually used shall be
        provided. Each terminal shall be identified per wire number shown on the Contractor's schematic wiring
        diagrams. All spare conductors entering any cabinet, terminal box shall be terminated on a terminal
        block.
              All panel wiring shall be arranged systematically so that circuits can be readily traced. The internal
        cabinet wiring shall be installed in a network of troughs consisting of horizontal and vertical sections
        securely bolted to the panels. The troughs shall be fabricated from heavy-duty plastic shaped into a
        channel cross-section. After installation of the wiring, an insulated, flanged cover shall be snapped over
        the open side of each trough section. Each floor-mounted cabinet/panel shall be provided with 1/8 inch
        neoprene gasket between the cabinet and floor.
              Control cabinets 48”x48”x12” for temporary system using integral motor/brake/clutch assembly to
        be located in the Southwest and Northeast rooms shall be as manufactured by Hoffmann or approved
        equal to NJDOT MBEG.
    AA. Hardware and Supports. Supports for conduits, cables, boxes, cabinets, disconnect switches, small limit
        switches, and other separately mounted items of electrical equipment shall be fabricated from structural
        steel not less than 3/8-inch thick. Clip angles and other supporting members which are fabricated from
        structural steel plates and shapes, and bolted to the structural members, shall be included with the
        structural steel. All other supporting members shall be included under the electrical work.
              Structural steel brackets, boxes, and other equipment mounted on concrete surfaces shall be
        provided with a full neoprene gasket not less than 1/16-inch thick between the equipment and the surface
        of the concrete.
              Expansion anchors for fastening equipment or brackets to concrete surfaces shall be wedge type
        anchor bolts, which shall be locked in place by an expansion wedge as the nut is tightened. All parts of
        the expansion anchors shall be of Type 316 stainless steel. Holes for the anchors shall be drilled to the
        size and depth recommended by the manufacturer using carbide tipped masonry drills.
              Mounting bolts, nuts, washers, and other detail parts used for fastening boxes, disconnect switches,
        small limit switches, conduit clamps, cable supports, brackets, and other electrical equipment shall be of
        stainless steel conforming to the requirements of ASTM Designation A276, Type 316. Bolt heads and
        nuts shall be hexagonal and shall be provided with medium-series lock washers. Bolts smaller than ½-
        inch in diameter shall not be used, except as may be necessary to fit the mounting holes in small limit
        switches, boxes, and similar standard devices.
              Usage of beam clamps for supporting conduits, boxes, or other equipment shall not be acceptable
        without prior approval of the Engineer and NJDOT MBEG.


Route 35 over Manasquan River Bridge Rehabilitation
Monmouth and Ocean Counties                                                                                 Page 195
                Preformed stainless steel metal framing channels, will be acceptable for mounting or supporting
          electrical equipment, conduits, or boxes. Prior to installation the Contractor shall submit to the Engineer
          and NJDOT MBEG for review, his design, and shall not install the channels without approval.
    BB.   Control of Traffic Devices. On each approach, traffic lights, warning gates, and gongs have been
          previously installed. Barrier gates are provided under the “Barrier Gates” item.
                All equipment for controlling the operation of the “Red Signal Ahead” signs, traffic lights, warning
          gates and gongs, and barrier gates and all conduits, boxes, wiring, cables, and other equipment required to
          extend and connect the necessary circuits from the control house to the sign and signal equipment,
          warning gates, and gongs, and barrier gates on the approaches shall be done under this item "Bridge
          Electrical." The “Red Signal Ahead” sign and traffic signal operation shall be initiated by a two-position
          selector switch on the control desk. Red, amber, and green pilot lights on control desk indicate light
          status. The warning gates and barrier gates shall be controlled via pushbuttons on the control desk.
          Indicating lights on the control desk indicate gate arm status.
    CC.   “Red Signal Ahead” Signs”. “Red Signal Ahead” signs shall be furnished and installed as shown on the
          Plans. The signs shall be furnished with a flasher so that the word “Red” flashes when the sign is
          illuminated. The flasher shall flash the word off and on 30 times per minute.
                The sign shall be turned on when the bridge operator turns the traffic signal selector switch to red, or
          if a warning or barrier gate is not fully raised. The sign shall be manufactured by NJDOT Traffic
          Operations approved manufacturer.
    DD.   Air Horns. Air horns for giving the necessary boat signals have been previously installed on the Bridge.
                Under the item of “Electrical Work” the Contractor shall furnish and install all conduits, wiring,
          boxes, circuit breakers and any other equipment required to extend power to the air horns. Existing
          conduit and wiring shall be removed and new conduit and wires shall be installed.
    EE.   Bascule span and Fender Navigation Lights. Navigation lights have been previously installed on the
          bascule span and fender system. Before start of work under this item, the Contractor shall submit a report
          on condition of span and fender navigation fixtures. If, threads are found to be corroded, then, entire
          fixture assembly/lies will be replaced. Cost of providing and replacing fixtures will be included under this
          item.
                Under the item of “Electrical Work” the Contractor shall furnish and install all conduits, wiring,
          boxes, circuit breakers and any other equipment required to extend power to the existing navigation
          lights. Existing conduit and wiring shall be removed and new conduit and wires shall be installed.
          Interconnection to the center lift bascule span navigation lights shall be through a new cable reel.
                The lenses of all bascule span and fender navigation lights shall be cleaned, and if the lenses are
          cracked or damaged, new lenses shall be furnished and installed at no additional cost to NJDOT. New
          standard medium base cylindrical light emitting diode (LED) lamps, 120 volt, 8 watt power consumption,
          equivalent to 75 watt incandescent, shall be furnished and installed as a direct replacement of the existing
          standard incandescent 120 volt lamps. The LED lamps shall be B&B Roadway PLP-LED120-BG (green)
          or PLP-LED120-R (red) or Engineer approved equal.
                At each fender walkway, the connections to the fender navigation lights shall be made with No. 10
          AWG conductors in ¾-inch PVC-coated rigid metal conduit. A stainless steel NEMA 4X junction box
          shall be provided at each pier light. Conduits shall be securely clamped to the fender with two-hole
          conduit clamps of 3/8-inch thick bent stainless steel plate. The conduit clamps shall be fastened with
          stainless steel lag screws not less than 3/8-inch in diameter. Conduit clamp spacing shall not exceed 5
          feet.
                The connections to the center bascule span navigation lights shall be made with No. 10 AWG
          conductors in ¾-inch PVC-coated rigid metal conduit. One conductor shall ground the bascule span light
          housing.
                The center bascule span navigation lights shall be controlled by the fully open position signal
          generated from the digital resolver, so that the green lights shall show when both ends of the bascule span
          are fully opened to 75 degrees feet or greater, and the red lights shall show when either end is not fully
          open. Loss of PLC output will force lift bascule span lights to red (fail-safe feature).
                The navigation lights shall be controlled by a photoelectric control device mounted on the operator
          house roof. The photoelectric control unit shall be a completely self-contained, weatherproof device
          rated 1,800 VA at 120 volts and shall be provided with a time-delay feature and a deluxe, encapsulated
          lightning arrestor for protection against surges and lightning. The unit shall provide turn-on of the pier
          navigation lighting system at 1 foot-candle nominal. The unit shall be suitable for operation within a


Route 35 over Manasquan River Bridge Rehabilitation
Monmouth and Ocean Counties                                                                                    Page 196
         temperature range of 55 degrees Celsius below zero to 70 degrees Celsius above zero and shall have a
         fail-safe feature so that the lighting load remains energized in the event of component failure. The unit
         shall be suitable for installation in a twist lock receptacle with adapter for mounting on PVC-coated rigid
         metal conduit.
               A three-position selector switch (OFF-PHOTO-ON) is installed on the control desk for operating the
         navigation lights. “red” position being a default position.
     FF. Distribution/Lighting Panelboards. Distribution/Lighting panelboards, if required, shall be furnished and
         installed for distribution of the service lighting circuits. Existing house lighting and receptacles shall be
         reused. Panelboards shall be provided for at the locations as shown on the Plans.
               Each distribution/lighting panelboard shall be of the dead-front type and shall be provided with
         quick-make, quick-break, thermal-trip, branch circuit breakers. Each breaker shall trip free of the
         operating handle, and the handle shall indicate the position of the breaker. Each panelboard shall be
         provided with a circuit breaker or lugs in the mains and with a full-sized neutral bar. All branch circuits
         shall be numbered, and a typewritten directory shall be provided on the inside of each door. Circuit
         breakers shall meet the requirements of UL Standard 489.
               All distribution panelboards shall be 277/480 volts, 3 phase. 4 wire panels surface mounted at
         locations as shown on the plans. All lighting panelboards shall be 120/208 Volt, 3-phase, 4-wire panels
         surface mounted as shown on the Plans. Panelboard enclosures shall be code gauge galvanized steel with
         ANSI 61 light gray enamel finish. Distribution Panelboard shall be approved equal to Square-D Type
         NF. Lighting Panelboards shall be approved equal to Westinghouse Pow-R-Line Series, General Electric
         A Series, or Square-D Type NQOD and shall include a breaker/circuit location sheet.
     GG. Provision for Air Conditioning. Air conditioning units have been previously installed in the operator
house.
               Under the item of "Electrical Work" the Contractor shall furnish and install all conduits, wiring,
         boxes, and other equipment required to extend power to the air conditioning units and connect thereto.
     HH. Electric Heating. Either 3.6 KW or 5.0 KW Electric heaters have been previously installed in Near and
         Far Machinery Rooms and all four Tower Houses. The Contractor must confirm that a local three-pole
         disconnect switch has been installed near each heater. If not installed, the Contractor must install a local
         disconnect switch, in a NEMA 12 enclosure.
               Under the item of "Electrical Work" the Contractor shall furnish and install all conduits, wiring,
         boxes, and other equipment required to extend power to the electrical heating units.
     II. Provision For Outside Telephone. For telephone service in the operator and machinery houses, the
         Contractor shall furnish and install a 12-pair, shielded, 24 AWG telephone cable in the existing 1½-inch
         diameter conduit embedded in the southwest approach sidewalk. The cable shall be Anixter or Belden or
         Engineer and NJDOT MBEG approved equal. The existing pull box covers leading to the service point
         shall be removed and replaced with water-proof covers. The wire shall be terminated in the operator
         house. The installation shall be subject to the requirements of the Telephone Company and shall meet
         with its approval.
               Conduit terminations shall be made in accordance with the Telephone Company‟s requirements. A
         fish tape shall be furnished and installed in the conduit to facilitate pulling in the telephone cables. The
         minimum radius of conduit bends shall be 21 inches.
               The Contractor shall arrange the pulling of telephone cables, and a total of twelve pair cables shall
         be installed. Five (5) pairs of wire shall be for functions indicated below. The remaining eight pair shall
         be for future use. The five outside phone lines required are:
              1. Regular phone service
              2. Dedicated PLC communication line
              3. Dedicated SLC communication line
              4. Fax machine
              5. Fire Alarm Panel Line
               The incoming telephone lines shall be terminated on an approved telephone terminal blocks. Each
         incoming line shall be protected from voltage spikes and surges utilizing spike preventive devices as
         recommended by the Telephone Company.
               The Contractor shall extend the telephone lines to the phone in the operator‟s room and machinery
         room, the data logging equipment, the fire alarm panel, and the fax machine unit. Each line shall
         terminate near the proposed phone system utilizing an approved telephone jack.



Route 35 over Manasquan River Bridge Rehabilitation
Monmouth and Ocean Counties                                                                                  Page 197
    JJ. Provision for Channel Floodlights. Two weatherproof floodlight fixtures shall be furnished and installed
        on the exterior of each pier wall as shown on the Plans. It shall be aimed to illuminate the navigable
        channel at the bascule span.
              Each floodlight shall be super-rough-service, halogen floodlight with multiplane lamp isolation
        diaphragm to absorb shock and vibration. The fixture shall accept PAR 56, sealed-beam, mogul end
        prong, 120-volt 500-watt lamps. The floodlight shall meet Standard 595 - Marine Outside Type ("Salt
        Water") Electric Fixture and Standard 844 - Electric Fixture for Hazardous Locations, Class 1, Division 2
        (suitable for wet locations). The floodlight shall be furnished with copper-free, cast-aluminum housing
        with gray, baked-acrylic-enamel finish, heavy-duty, copper-free, aluminum mounting bracket, stainless
        steel exterior hardware, heat-resistant, tempered cover lens and a 500-watt, PAR 56, wide halogen
        floodlight. Floodlights shall be turned on/off from a light switch on the control desk manually or be
        controlled (on/off) through the use of a photo electric control unit. The photo control electric unit shall be
        the same as indicated in the Navigation Lights section hereinbefore.
    KK. Provision for Water and Sewer Heat Trace. On the Southeast approach water and sewer lines have been
        installed with heat trace tapes and insulation.
              Under the item of “Electrical Work” the Contractor shall furnish and install all conduits, wiring,
        boxes, circuit breakers and any other equipment required to extend power to the heat trace tape and
        control circuitry. Circuit breakers shall be GFCI. It shall be the responsibility of the Contractor to
        maintain power on the Heat Trace Lines. Temporary power, if required, shall be furnished and connected
        without additional cost to NJDOT.
    LL. Painting. The requirements for painting machinery shall also apply to painting electrical equipment,
        unless otherwise specified.
             1. Shop Painting: Electrical equipment such as conduits, boxes, supports, and other devices which
                  have a galvanized finish and equipment such as motors, brakes, control desk, and control panel
                  frames and enclosures which normally are given a factory finish need not be shop painted. All
                  other electrical equipment shall be given one shop coat.
             2. Field Painting: Electrical equipment which is normally given a factory painted finish suitable to
                  the Engineer need not be field painted. All other electrical equipment, such as conduits, boxes,
                  device enclosures, supporting clips and brackets, and other devices, shall be given two field
                  coats of paint as specified under the requirements for painting machinery in Section 525.
                  Before applying the two field coats, galvanized surfaces shall be cleaned free of all grease, oil,
                  dirt, and foreign material and shall be etched with copper sulphate solution, after which the
                  solution shall be applied. In lieu of etching and a coat of shop paint, the Contractor may use
                  galvanizing primer as a first coat for galvanized surfaces. The final field coat on electrical
                  equipment in the control house shall be of a color and type of paint to match the house interior.
    MM. Spare Parts. The Contractor shall furnish the following spare parts:
             1. Two packages of six fuses of each kind and size installed.
             2. A full set of contacts and contact fingers for each type of limit switch. For rotary limit switches,
                  furnish a total of eight contact assemblies. For lever actuated limit switches, furnish 1 spare
                  complete assembly, and one lever arm and roller.
             3. A set of contacts and contact fingers for each unit or fractional unit of five or less of each kind
                  or size installed, including contactors and starters. Note: For units that do not incorporate
                  replaceable contacts, furnish a complete unit with coil.
             4. One coil for every five or less of each size relay/contactor, and motor starter installed.
             5. One complete relay, timer, contactor, and starter for each unit or fractional unit of five or less of
                  each kind and size installed.
             6. Two heaters for overload relays of each size.
             7. One complete vector duty squirrel cage bascule span motor identical to installed motor with
                  encoders and overspeed switch installed. Spare motor and associated equipment shall be
                  weather and dust-tight and shall be properly stored in the machinery room.
             8. For the bascule span brakes:
                         a. 1 spare thrustor complete with heater and motor.
                         b.    1 limit switch for hand-release mechanism.
                         c. 1 limit switch for brake released.
                         d. 1 limit switch for brake set.
                         e. One (1) gallon of thrustor oil.


Route 35 over Manasquan River Bridge Rehabilitation
Monmouth and Ocean Counties                                                                                  Page 198
                 9. For the control desk:
                            a. 12 indicating lamps for each type and voltage
                            b. 1 package of 6 lamps for meters of each kind installed
                            c. 10 lens caps of each color
                            d. 1 lens for each desk unit
                            e. 4 selector switches of each type
                            f. 4 push buttons
                            g. 2 toggle switches
                            h. 1 bypass switches
                 10. For the PLC and SLC system:
                            a. 1 each type of input card and output card
                            b. 4 discrete input cards and 4 relay contact output cards (additional)
                            c. 1 PLC chassis power supply module
                            d. 1 Remote communication module
                            e. 1 CPU card
                 11. One single-turn digisolver
                 12. Any other spare-part listed in these specifications shall be included.
                 The Contractor shall arrange the spare parts in uniform size cartons of substantial construction, with
           typed and clearly varnished labels to indicate their contents, and store them where directed by the
           Engineer and NJDOT MBEG. Large spare parts shall be provided with moisture-proof wrapping. The
           Contractor shall also provide a directory of permanent type describing the parts. The directory shall state
           the name of each part, the manufacturer's number thereof, and the rating of the device for which the part
           is a spare. The spare parts shall also be marked to correspond with their respective item numbers as
           indicated on the elementary wiring diagram.

                                                 COMPENSATION
707.05 Method of Measurement.
     Measurement will be on a lump sum basis.

707.06 Basis of Payment.
     Payment will be made under:
         Pay Item                                                                                    Pay Unit
         ELECTRICAL WORK                                                                             LUMP SUM

       SECTION 708 RACEWAY, CONDUCTORS, TERMINATIONS AND BOXES
708.01 Description.
      The work shall consist of furnishing, installing, and placing in proper operating condition, acceptable to
NJDOT and the Engineer, raceway, conductors, terminations and boxes, complete with all appurtenances, required
for proper operation.
      All conduits, boxes, wiring, cables, and other equipment required to extend the necessary circuits to and from
electrical equipment and cabinets shall be furnished and installed under the item of "Raceway, Conductors,
Terminations and Boxes." All internal equipment wiring shall be paid for under its respective Section, and shall
conform to the requirements in this section.
      It is the intent and purpose of these Specifications to cover and include all apparatus, appliances, material,
plant and labor necessary to properly install, wire, connect, equip, test, adjust, and put in approved working order the
respective portions of the work herein specified.
      As shown on the Plans, the existing raceway, conductors, terminations, and boxes shall be abandoned or shall
be disconnected, removed and salvaged in accordance with Section 539 “Demolition and Removal”.

                                                    MATERIALS

708.02 Materials and Equipment.
     A. Conformance. All equipment and its installation shall conform to the requirements of the latest revision
        of the Standard Specifications for Movable Highway Bridges of the American Association of State
        Highway and Transportation Officials, except as may be otherwise provided herein.



Route 35 over Manasquan River Bridge Rehabilitation
Monmouth and Ocean Counties                                                                                    Page 199
                 Materials and construction shall conform to the requirements of the current National Electrical Code
          and to any applicable local rules and ordinances. The Contractor shall obtain any required permits and
          approvals of all Departments or Agencies having jurisdiction.
     B.   Equipment and Material Provisions. The conduit, wireway, conductors, terminations and boxes and all
          associated equipment and materials shall be new. All equipment, materials, and workmanship shall be
          first rate in every aspect of this project and shall be manufactured and erected to the satisfaction of the
          Engineer, and NJDOT MBEG and Maintenance Department. See Section 707, “Electrical Work” for
          Control System Vendor Requirements. The Contractor shall warrantee the in-service working of the
          raceway, conductors, terminations and boxes for one year following the date of project acceptance. If the
          Contractor has any objection to any feature of the equipment as designed and laid out, he must state his
          objection at once, in writing, to the Engineer and NJDOT MBEG; otherwise, his objection will be not be
          valid as an excuse for operational malfunctioning of the equipment or for defective or broken apparatus.
                 Each piece of electrical equipment and apparatus shall have a corrosion-resisting non-rusting metal
          nameplate, on which is stamped the name of the manufacturer, the rating or capacity, and all other
          relevant information of the equipment and/or apparatus.
                 All mounting hardware and all wire and cable terminals shall be vibration-proof and weather-proof.
                 If any changes from the Plans or these Specifications are deemed necessary by the Contractor,
          details of such departures and the reasons therefore shall be submitted for approval as soon as practicable
          before construction. No such changes shall be made without approval of the Engineer and NJDOT
          MBEG.
                 The raceway system and equipment drawings, operation, and maintenance procedures shall be
          included in the electrical Instruction Books and Drawing Books as described in Section 707, “Electrical
          Work”.
                 Material requirements for apparatus, equipment, and materials will be found in the articles under
          "Construction" in this item.

                                               CONSTRUCTION
708.03 Construction.
     A. Raceway/Wireways/Trough.
            1. Conduits. All wiring shall be installed in conduit or wireways. See Section 707, “Electrical
                  Work”, for telephone conduit and wire Specifications.
                   The PVC coated rigid metal conduit must be UL listed. The PVC coating must have been
             investigated by UL as providing the primary corrosion protection for the rigid metal conduit.
             Ferrous fittings for general service locations must be UL listed with PVC as the primary corrosion
             protection. Hazardous location fittings, prior to plastic coating must be UL listed. All conduit and
             fittings must be new, unused material. Applicable UL standards may include: UL 6 Standard for
             Safety, Fittings for Conduit and Outlet Boxes.
                   The conduit shall be hot dip galvanized inside and out with a clear urethane coating over hot
             galvanized threads.
                   A PVC sleeve extending one pipe diameter or two inches, whichever is less, shall be formed at
             every female fitting opening except unions. The inside sleeve diameter shall be matched to the
             outside diameter of the conduit.
                   The PVC coating on the outside of the conduit couplings shall have a series of longitudinal ribs
             40 mils in thickness to protect the coating from tool damage during installation.
                   Form 8 condulets shall be supplied with plastic encapsulated stainless steel cover screws.
                   A green urethane coating shall be uniformly and consistently applied to the interior of all
             conduit and fittings. This internal coating shall be a nominal 2 mil thickness. Conduit or fittings
             having areas with thin or no coating shall be unacceptable.
                   The PVC exterior and urethane interior coatings applied to the conduit shall afford sufficient
             flexibility to permit field bending without cracking or flaking at temperatures above 30F (-1C).
                   All male threads on conduit, elbows, and nipples shall be protected by application of a
             urethane coating,
                   All female threads on fittings or conduit couplings shall be protected by application of a
             urethane coating.
                   Independent certified test results shall be available to confirm coating adhesion.



Route 35 over Manasquan River Bridge Rehabilitation
Monmouth and Ocean Counties                                                                                 Page 200
                   All conduits shall be standard weight, threaded, rigid steel conduit conforming to the
             requirements of ANSI Standard C80.1. All conduits shall be hot-dip galvanized, inside and out, to
             meet the requirements of the above standard for protective coating. Conduit couplings and fittings
             shall be made of malleable iron or steel, hot-dip galvanized.
                   All conduits to be installed in outdoor locations shall be plastic coated. Conduit fittings,
             including couplings, unions, elbows, expansion and deflection fittings, and other items, shall also be
             plastic coated. Conduits and fittings, which are to be plastic coated, shall be provided with a factory
             applied polyvinyl-chloride (PVC) coating. This internal coating shall be sufficiently flexible so as to
             permit field bending without cracking or flaking. The PVC coated, hot-dip galvanized steel conduit
             shall be UL labeled and listed. Conduits that meet above requirements are manufactured by Perma-
             Cote or Robroy, or the Engineer and NJDOT MBEG approved equal.
                   All hollow conduit and fittings that serve as part of the outdoor raceway shall be coated with
             the same exterior PVC coating and interior urethane coating. The plastic interior coating and the
             interior urethane coating shall be factory applied by the same manufacturer who produces the hot-
             dip galvanized conduit. PVC coated conduit shall be installed in accordance with the manufacturer's
             installation manual and shall be certified by the manufacturer or their certified representative.
                   Unions to connect sections of conduit that cannot be joined to each other or to boxes in the
             regular manner shall be of malleable iron or steel, hot-dip galvanized, PVC coated.
                   Conduits shall not be less than 3/4 inch in diameter. The interior surfaces shall have a smooth
             finish and be free of burrs or projections, which might cause injury to the cables. All conduits shall
             be free from blisters, cracks, or injurious defects and shall be reamed at each end after being
             threaded. Sections shall be connected to each other with screw couplings made up so that the ends
             of both conduits will butt squarely against each other inside of the coupling. Conduits shall be
             installed so as to be continuous and watertight between boxes or equipment. Conduits shall be
             protected at all times from the entrance of water or other foreign matter by being well-plugged
             overnight or when the work is temporarily suspended.
                   Conduit bends and offsets shall be made by cold bending using approved methods and
             equipment. The use of a pipe tee or vise for bending conduit will not be permitted. Conduit that has
             been crushed, or in any way deformed, shall be discarded. All bends shall be long sweep, free from
             kinks, and of such easy curvatures as to permit the drawing of conductors without injury. Conduit
             runs shall be made with as few couplings as standard lengths will permit, and the total angle of all
             bends between any two boxes or cabinets shall not exceed two quarter bends, unless otherwise
             approved by the Engineer and NJDOT MBEG. The radius of curvature of pipe bends shall not be
             less than eight times the inside diameter of said conduit. Long running threads will not be
             permitted. Pull boxes shall be used whenever necessary to facilitate the installation of the wire.
                   Except for installation indoors in the control house or where specifically permitted by the
             Engineer and NJDOT MBEG, condulets shall not be used for pulling conductors or for making turns
             in conduit runs or for branching conductors. Condulets, where permitted, shall consist of malleable
             iron castings with gasketed covers of the same material and fastened with brass cover screws. The
             bodies shall be hot-dip galvanized.
                   All new conduits shall, wherever practicable, be concealed in the walls, ceilings, or floors.
             Where conduits pass through the floors or walls of the houses, they shall be cast-in-place, or they
             shall be provided with galvanized pipe sleeves for free passage of the conduits. After the conduits
             are installed, the openings shall be caulked with an elastic compound and escutcheon plates
             provided on the interior walls, ceilings, and floors.
                   Conduits shall be securely clamped and supported at intervals not exceeding 5 feet in length, or
             other supporting lengths approved by the Engineer and NJDOT MBEG.
                   Conduit runs exposed on the steel structure shall be securely clamped to the steel work. The
             clamps, in general, shall consist of PVC coated U-bolts attached to structural steel supports bolted to
             the members. The minimum thickness of the structural supports shall be 3/8 inch. Supports shall be
             arranged so that conduits rest on top of the support and U-bolts rest on top of the conduits. The use
             of J-bolts to fasten structural supports or to clamp conduits will not be permitted.
                   All U-bolts shall be provided with medium-series lock washers and hexagonal nuts. The bolts,
             nuts, and washers shall be of stainless steel conforming to the requirements of the Standard
             Specification for Stainless and Heat-Resisting Steel Bars and Shapes, ASTM Designation A276,



Route 35 over Manasquan River Bridge Rehabilitation
Monmouth and Ocean Counties                                                                                Page 201
             Type 316. U-bolts used for securing PVC coated conduits shall be manufactured from stainless
             steel with PVC coating.
                   Where conduits are to be mounted exposed on non-steel surfaces, they shall be securely
             clamped to the surface using bent plate pipe supports with back spacers held by not less than two
             bolts. The stock size for the bent steel plate supports shall be 1/4 inch thick by 2 inches wide. Back
             plates shall be of 3/8-inch thick steel. Supports and spacers shall be hot-dip galvanized. Bolts shall
             be not less than 1/2 inch in diameter and shall be of stainless steel conforming to the requirements
             specified for U-bolts.
                   At any point where a conduit crosses an expansion joint longitudinally or where movement
             between adjacent sections of conduit can be expected, conduit expansion fittings shall be installed.
             The fittings shall be bronze expansion fittings and shall be provided with flexible bonding jumpers
             to maintain the electrical continuity across the joints. The fittings shall permit a total conduit
             movement of 8 inches and shall be approved equal to the O.Z./Gedney Type AX, Spring City Type
             EF, or the Engineer and NJDOT MBEG approved equal.
                   At any point where a conduit crosses a joint laterally or where an offsetting type movement
             between adjacent sections of conduit can be expected, expansion and deflection fittings shall be
             installed. The fittings shall permit a movement of 3/4 inch from the normal in any direction. The
             fittings shall be the O.Z./Gedney Type DX, Spring City Type EDF, or the engineer and NJDOT
             MBEG approved equal.
                   Flexible conduits for the connections between the rigid conduit system, all motors, and limit
             switches shall be made with sections of PVC coated, flexible, metallic, liquidtight conduit. Each
             section shall not exceed 18 inches without prior approval of the Engineer and NJDOT MBEG.
                   All conduit embedded in concrete, insofar as possible, shall be completely encased by concrete
             of not less than 3 inches, measured in any direction, and shall be securely held in place during
             pouring and construction operations. A group of conduits terminating together shall be held in place
             by a template.
                   All conduit and fittings shall be carefully examined before being installed, and all pieces
             having defects shall be set aside and removed from the site. All bends shall be made with standard
             size conduit elbows. Bends and offsets can be made with a power bender or hickey without kinking
             or destroying the plastic surface or smooth bore of the conduit when approved by the Engineer and
             NJDOT MBEG. Conduit shall be assembled hand and tight and then using strap wrenches tightened
             two more turns. Wrench marks or chuck marks shall be touched up with the appropriate touch-up
             compound. All cuttings and threading shall be performed as recommended by the conduit
             manufacturer. All conduit, enclosures, and fittings shall be mechanically joined together to form a
             continuous electrical conductor to provide effective electrical continuity.
                   Ends of abandoned conduits, spare conduits, and empty conduits and stubs shall be capped
             during and after construction, and care shall be taken to ensure that no moisture or other matter is in
             or enters the conduits.
                   All conduits shall be pitched not less than 1 inch in 10 feet (except by special permission).
             Where conduits cannot be drained to pull boxes, a drain "T" with drain fitting shall be installed at
             the low point and drained to a 1-cubic foot dry well of broken stone. Drain fittings shall be of
             stainless steel and shall be capable of passing 25 cc of water per minute.
                   The ends of all conduits projecting into boxes and equipment enclosures shall be provided with
             bronze insulated grounding bushings. The insulated portion shall be of molded phenolic compound,
             and each fitting shall have a screw type combination lug for bonding. Insulated bushings shall be
             the O.Z./Gedney Type RBLG, or Engineer and NJDOT MBEG approved equal. All bushing in any
             box or enclosure shall be bonded together with No. 8 AWG bare copper wire.
                   All conduits shall be carefully cleaned both before and after installation. Upon completion of
             the conduit and box installation, the Contractor shall clear each conduit by snaking with a steel
             band, to which shall be attached an approved tube cleaner equipped with a mandrel of a diameter not
             less than 85% of the nominal inside diameter of the conduit and with a wire brush of the same
             diameter as the conduit, and shall then draw in the cables.
                   Both ends of each conduit run shall be provided with a brass tag having the same number
             stamped thereon in accordance with the conduit diagrams, and these tags shall be securely fastened
             to the conduit ends with No. 20 AWG brass wire.



Route 35 over Manasquan River Bridge Rehabilitation
Monmouth and Ocean Counties                                                                                Page 202
                     For traffic devices and utility power conduit buried in the earth on the bridge approaches, UL
               listed PVC Schedule 80 conduit shall be used.
         2. Wireways/Troughs. A wireway/trough shall be furnished and installed where shown on the Plans to
               provide for termination of conduits and to distribute the wiring to the various sections of the tower
               houses power and control cabinets.
                     A drawing showing the assembly and complete construction details of each trough shall be
               prepared and submitted for approval before each trough is fabricated. The Contractor shall follow
               the assembly and details of the trough as shown on the Plans.
                     The wiring trough shall be NEMA 12, constructed of No. 12 gauge sheet steel with No. 10
               Gauge Flanges suitably reinforced with structural steel angels, and welded continuously at all seams
               and joints. It shall have a gasketed removable cover to provide access to the interior. Covers shall
               be secured by stainless steel screw clamps spaced no more than 8 inches apart. Wireways/troughs
               shall be supported every 5 feet. Details for hanging units shall be as shown on the Plans.
                     The wiring trough shall be painted inside and out with one coat of primer followed by one coat
               of white enamel on the inside surfaces and two coats of gray enamel on the outside. The finish coat
               shall be ANSI 61 Light Gray. Wireways shall be supported from adjacent ceilings using S.S.
               Hanger Rods and Angles or as shown on the Plans.
                     All sections of each wireway/trough shall be electrically connected to form an electrical bond
               and shall be tied to the Bridge Grounding System.
    B.   Hardware and Supports. Supports for conduits, cables, boxes, cabinets, disconnect switches, small limit
         switches, and other separately mounted items of electrical equipment shall be fabricated from structural
         steel not less than 3/8-inch thick. Clip angles and other supporting members which are fabricated from
         structural steel plates and shapes, and bolted to the structural members, shall be included with the
         structural steel. All other supporting members shall be included under the electrical work.
               Structural steel brackets, boxes, and other equipment mounted on concrete surfaces shall be
         provided with a full neoprene gasket not less than 1/16-inch thick between the equipment and the surface
         of the concrete.
               Expansion anchors for fastening equipment or brackets to concrete surfaces shall be wedge type
         anchor bolts, which shall be locked in place by an expansion wedge as the nut is tightened. All parts of
         the expansion anchors shall be of Type 304 stainless steel. Holes for the anchors shall be drilled to the
         size and depth recommended by the manufacturer using carbide tipped masonry drills.
               Mounting bolts, nuts, washers, and other detail parts used for fastening boxes, disconnect switches,
         small limit switches, conduit clamps, cable supports, brackets, and other electrical equipment shall be of
         stainless steel conforming to the requirements of ASTM Designation A276, Type 316. Bolt heads and
         nuts shall be hexagonal and shall be provided with medium-series lock washers. Bolts smaller than ½-
         inch in diameter shall not be used, except as may be necessary to fit the mounting holes in small limit
         switches, boxes, and similar standard devices.
               Usage of beam clamps for supporting conduits, boxes, or other equipment shall not be acceptable
         without prior approval of the Engineer and NJDOT MBEG and NJDOT Maintenance Department
               Preformed stainless steel metal framing channels, will be acceptable for mounting or supporting
         electrical equipment, conduits, or boxes. Prior to installation the Contractor shall submit to the Engineer
         and NJDOT MBEG for review, his/her design, and shall not install the channels without approval.
    C.   Wiring and Cables. Except where otherwise noted, wiring in conduits shall be single-conductor.
               All wires and their insulation and covering shall be of a nationally recognized brand, acceptable to
         the Engineer and NJDOT MBEG, and shall have marks always used on the particular brand for
         identifying it.
               All wiring and cables shall conform to the requirements of NEMA Publication No. WC70, latest
         publication. Before wire and cable orders are placed with any manufacturer, the Contractor shall submit
         for approval typical published test data for the type of insulation proposed, showing that it meets the
         requirements of NEMA Publication No. WC70. All materials used to fabricate insulated wiring and
         cables shall be certified to be from stock not more than 1 year old.
               All conductors shall be of stranded copper large enough to carry safely the maximum currents
         required without injurious heating or serious voltage drop. Conductors for all motors and power circuits
         shall not be smaller than No. 12 AWG, except as approved for control panel and desk wiring or for
         lighting fixtures. All conductors shall be soft-annealed copper wire conforming to the requirements of



Route 35 over Manasquan River Bridge Rehabilitation
Monmouth and Ocean Counties                                                                                Page 203
         NEMA Publication No. WC70. All conductors shall have Class B concentric stranding, except for
         conductors in flexible cables.
               The insulation shall be a chemically cross-linked, polyethylene compound conforming to the
         requirements of Part 3.6 of NEMA Publication No. WC70. The thickness of insulation shall be that
         required for 600 volts rated circuit voltage listed under the third Column of Table 3-3. The conductors
         shall be of the XHHW type.
               Equipment ground conductors shall be bare, stranded, coated copper conforming to the requirements
         of NEMA Publication No. WC70, Part 2.
               The conductor sizes and number of wires shown on the Plans are the minimum permissible. The
         Contractor shall provide wiring and cables of sufficient size and number as may be required for the
         installation in accordance with the wiring diagrams or his approved working drawings. In each conduit
         containing four or more conductors, at least one spare wire for each 4 conductors shall be provided.
         Conduits containing conductors No. 8 AWG or larger do not require spare conductors.
               Wiring shall not be installed in any conduit before all joints are made up tightly and the conduits
         rigidly secured in place. The drawing of cables into conduits shall be done without any damage to the
         wires or their insulation or covering. No lubricant of any kind shall be used for the pulling of wires,
         unless specifically authorized by the Engineer and NJDOT MBEG. Sufficient slack shall be left in all
         cables to permit proper connections in boxes, cabinets, and enclosures.
               Both ends of every single length of conductor shall be permanently and clearly tagged in accordance
         with the same numbers or designations appearing on the approved wiring diagrams.
               Conductors inside terminal boxes, the control desk, and control panels shall be neatly formed into
         cables and laced with approved cable ties, with the individual conductors leaving the cable at their
         respective terminal points. These conductors shall be looped to allow not less than 3 inches of free
         conductor when disconnected. The formed cables shall be held securely away from the terminals and
         from contact with the enclosure by means of approved insulating supports.
               All outgoing wires, No. 8 AWG or smaller, in the control desk and control panels and in terminal
         boxes shall be connected to terminal blocks of molded phenolic compound. Terminals shall be of screw
         type suitable for use with solderless, ring tongue, wire connectors. Connectors, which extend beyond the
         ends of terminal block barriers, shall be furnished with an insulating sleeve covering the metal part of the
         connector. Taping of extended terminals will not be permitted. Each block shall contain environmental
         contacts for Conductors No. 8 AWG or smaller and shall be the one piece terminal block series 200 as
         manufactured by Buchanan.
               Each terminal of all terminal blocks shall be permanently marked to show the same number or
         designation as appears on the wire connected thereto.
               Splicing of wires will not be permitted, except for wiring to service lighting fixtures and receptacles.
         Wherever it becomes necessary to joint or branch conductors, terminal blocks shall be used, and wires
         shall be clearly tagged.
    D.   Boxes. All boxes shall be sized, at a minimum, as per NEC Article 314. All boxes that contain both
         power and control conductors shall be provided with dividers. All outside location boxes not buried shall
         be stainless steel, NEMA 4X, 14-gauge, Type 316, and all buried boxes shall be precast polymer concrete
         UL tier 10 listed.
              1. Precast Polymer Concrete. All approach pull and junction boxes mounted underground in the
                    earth shall be precast polymer concrete with the cover flush with the ground at each location,
                    and shall be provided with heavy-duty covers held with stainless steel hardware. The boxes
                    shall be UL Tier 10 Listed, ANSI/SCTE 77 Tier 15 compliant, stackable PG box with heavy-
                    duty HA covers and shall be manufactured by Quazite or Engineer and NJDOT MBEG
                    approved equal.
                     All components of assembly (box and cover) shall be manufactured using matched surface
               tooling. All covers are required to have a minimum coefficient of friction of 0.50 in accordance
               with ASTM C1028. Independent third party verification or test reports stamped by a registered
               Professional Engineer certifying that all test provisions of this specification have been met are
               required with each submittal.
                     No box shall be provided with openings for more conduits or cables than actually enter it. The
               box and conduit entries shall be water and dirt tight. All boxes shall meet NJDOT requirements and
               shall be similar to NJDOT Approval Number EE-1236-94



Route 35 over Manasquan River Bridge Rehabilitation
Monmouth and Ocean Counties                                                                                   Page 204
                2.   Stainless Steel. Junction and terminal boxes and cabinets not indicated on the Plans as Polymer
                     Concrete shall be NEMA 4X, 14-gauge, Type 316 stainless steel enclosures with hinged, 14-
                     gauge stainless steel doors supported by a continuous stainless steel hinge with removable pin.
                     Seams shall be continuously welded and ground smooth. Each enclosure shall be provided with
                     stainless steel fast operating door clamp assemblies and oil-resistant gasket to insure a
                     liquidtight seal. Boxes and cabinets shall be Bulletin A51S and A4S with clamp assemblies A-
                     L23SS as manufactured by Hoffman Engineering Company, or equivalent as manufactured by
                     Henessey or Weigmann or Engineer and NJDOT MBEG approved equal. Additional stainless
                     steel box construction and sizes shall be as indicated on the Plans.
                       Surface mounted interior and exterior boxes shall be provided with external mounting lugs.
                No box shall be drilled for more conduits or cables than actually enter it. Exterior boxes shall be
                provided with inch combination drain and breather fittings.
                       Terminal boxes shall be of sufficient size to provide ample room for the terminal blocks and
                interior wiring, and for the installation of conduit terminations. Interior mounting buttons with
                tapped holes shall be provided for mounting the terminal blocks. Terminal blocks shall be provided
                in each terminal box for the connection of all conductors including spare conductors entering the
                box plus at least ten percent spare terminals. All terminal blocks and boards shall be mounted on
                suitable straps or structural steel brackets in such a manner as to permit routing the conductors
                behind the terminal blocks. Terminal blocks shall be one-piece blocks suitable for use in highly
                corrosive atmospheres and shall conform to the requirements hereinbefore specified.
                       Power terminal blocks for wires No. 8 AWG and larger shall be included in each terminal box
                as required for such conductors. Each terminal shall be a one-piece power distribution block of
                molded phenolic compound and shall conform to the requirements hereinbefore specified. A safety
                cover of insulating material shall be provided for each block.
     E.    Testing and Installation Guidelines. All testing and installation for the “Raceway, Conductors,
           Terminations and Boxes” and all associated equipment shall be paid for under this Section. The
           Contractor shall follow the testing and installation guidelines in paragraphs A through I in Section 707,
           “Electrical Work”.

                                                 COMPENSATION
708.04 Method of Measurement.
     Measurement will be on a lump sum basis.

708.05 Basis of Payment.
     Payment will be made under.
         Pay Item                                                                                    Pay Unit
         RACEWAY, CONDUCTORS, TERMINATIONS AND BOXES                                                 LUMP SUM


                     SECTION 709 - GROUNDING AND BONDING SYSTEM
709.01 Description.
      The work shall consist of furnishing, installing, and placing in proper operating condition, acceptable to
NJDOT and the Engineer, the grounding and bonding system, complete with all appurtenances, required for proper
operation.
      All conduits, boxes, wiring, cables, and other equipment required to extend the necessary circuits to and from
the grounding and bonding system shall be furnished and installed under the item of "Raceway, Conductors,
Terminations and Boxes." All grounding and bonding system wiring shall be paid for under this Section, and shall
conform to the requirements in "Raceway, Conductors, Terminations, and Boxes.”
      It is the intent and purpose of these Specifications to cover and include all apparatus, appliances, material,
plant and labor necessary to properly install, wire, connect, equip, test, adjust, and put in approved working order the
respective portions of the work herein specified.

                                                    MATERIALS
709.02 Materials and Equipment.




Route 35 over Manasquan River Bridge Rehabilitation
Monmouth and Ocean Counties                                                                                    Page 205
     A.   Conformance. All equipment and its installation shall conform to the requirements of the latest revision
          of the Standard Specifications for Movable Highway Bridges of the American Association of State
          Highway and Transportation Officials, except as may be otherwise provided herein.
                Materials and construction shall conform to the requirements of the current National Electrical Code
          and to any applicable local rules and ordinances. The Contractor shall obtain any required permits and
          approvals of all Departments or Agencies having jurisdiction.
     B.   Equipment and Material Provisions. The grounding and bonding system, and all associated equipment
          and materials shall be new. All equipment, materials, and workmanship shall be first-rate in every aspect
          of this project and shall be manufactured and erected to the satisfaction of the Engineer, and NJDOT
          MBEG and Maintenance Department. See Section 707, “Electrical Work” for Control System Vendor
          Requirements. The Contractor shall warrantee the in-service working of the lightning protection and
          grounding and bonding systems, and associated equipment for one year following the date of project
          acceptance. If the Contractor has any objection to any feature of the equipment as designed and laid out,
          he must state his objection at once, in writing, to the Engineer and NJDOT MBEG; otherwise, his
          objection will be not be valid as an excuse for operational malfunctioning of the equipment or for
          defective or broken apparatus.
                Each piece of electrical equipment and apparatus shall have a corrosion-resisting non-rusting metal
          nameplate, on which is stamped the name of the manufacturer, the rating or capacity, and all other
          relevant information of the equipment and/or apparatus.
                All mounting hardware and all wire and cable terminals shall be vibration-proof and weather-proof.
                If any changes from the Plans or these Specifications are deemed necessary by the Contractor,
          details of such departures and the reasons therefore shall be submitted for approval as soon as practicable
          before construction. No such changes shall be made without approval of the Engineer and NJDOT
          MBEG.
                The grounding and bonding system and equipment drawings, operation, and maintenance
          procedures shall be included in the electrical Instruction Books and Drawing Books as described in
          Section 707, “Electrical Work”.
                Material requirements for apparatus, equipment, and materials will be found in the articles under
          "Construction" in this item.

                                              CONSTRUCTION
709.03 Construction.
     A. Grounding and Bonding. The bridge steel work on each side of the channel and the towers shall be
        solidly bonded and grounded to ground rods installed in the piers and at the towers, using No. 4/0 AWG
        bare, stranded, tinned copper cable.
              Exothermical welds shall be used to connect ground conductors to ground rods and ground bus bars
        The resistance to ground shall be no less than 5 ohms. Exothermic welds shall be molded fusion, type as
        required, as manufactured by Cadweld, Thermoweld, Metalweld, or approved equal.
              Traffic signal poles, warning gates, barrier gates, standby generator neutral conductor and engine
        block, grounding conductors in conduits, navigation lighting units, all metal framing, cases, and
        enclosures of the electrical equipment, such as motors, control desk, control cabinets, boxes, and all other
        metal parts in the proximity of current carrying conductors or equipment shall be bonded together and
        solidly connected to a ground bus in the switchboard room, and another ground bus in the generator
        room. All electrical equipment ground busswork shall be connected to the closest main ground bus.
              The utility service neutral conductor, the bridge grounding conductor and grounding electrode
        conductors shall all be exothermically welded together.
              Grounding system terminals shall be solderless lugs and shall be secured by means of hexagonal-
        head, copper plated, steel machine bolts with lock washers or lock nuts. Ground system conductors shall
        be continuous non-spliced connections between terminal lugs. Paint, rust, and scale shall be removed
        over the contact area. All connections shall be made up as tightly as possible, and any bare metal or paint
        undercoat remaining exposed shall be spot painted to restore the surface with the same coating and
        number of coats as applied to the adjacent metal. Bolted connections shall be restricted to removable
        items (e.g., motors).
              Equipment ground conductors shall be seven-strand, soft-drawn, bare, tinned copper wire
        conforming to ASTM B33 and not smaller than No. 8 AWG.



Route 35 over Manasquan River Bridge Rehabilitation
Monmouth and Ocean Counties                                                                                 Page 206
                 Ground rods shall be made of copper or copper-clad steel and shall not be less than 1 inch in
           diameter and 10-feet in length unless otherwise specified. A permanent, exothermic weld connection to
           the permanent steel sheet piling at the bridge towers is an acceptable grounding means at the indicated
           locations. If the steel sheet piling is not accessible, ground rods shall be used as grounding electrodes.
           Insulated green ground conductor shall be used when exposed to wet environment.
                 A minimum of two ground rods per pier, west towers and east towers shall be installed to establish
           the bridge grounding system. The utility service neutral conductor shall be grounded in accordance with
           the utility company‟s standard requirements.
                 Upon completion of installation of electrical grounding and bonding system‟s test ground resistance
           with ground resistance tester. Where tests show resistance-to-ground is over five (5) ohms, reduce
           resistance to five (5) ohms or less, by driving additional grounding electrodes. The test shall be repeated
           to demonstrate compliance.
     B.    Testing and Installation Guidelines. All testing and installation for the “Grounding Systems” and all
           associated equipment shall be paid for under this Section. The Contractor shall follow the testing and
           installation guidelines in paragraphs A through I in Section 707, “Electrical Work”, and all applicable
           paragraphs under this Section.

                                                 COMPENSATION
709.04 Method of Measurement.
     Measurement will be on a lump sum basis.

709.05 Basis of Payment.
     Payment will be made under.
         Pay Item                                                                                    Pay Unit
         GROUNDING AND BONDING SYSTEM                                                                LUMP SUM


            SECTION 710 - POWER DISTRIBUTION AND CONTROL CABINET
710.01 Description.
      The work shall consist of furnishing, installing, and placing in proper operating condition, acceptable to
NJDOT MBEG and the Engineer, the power distribution and control cabinet, complete with all appurtenances,
required for proper operation.
      All conduits, boxes, wiring, cables, and other equipment required to extend the necessary circuits to and from
the power distribution and control cabinet shall be furnished and installed under the item of "Raceway, Conductors,
Terminations and Boxes." All internal control desk wiring shall be paid for under this Section, and shall conform to
the requirements in "Raceway, Conductors, Terminations, and Boxes.
      It is the intent and purpose of these Specifications to cover and include all apparatus, appliances, material,
plant and labor necessary to properly install, wire, connect, equip, test, adjust, and put in approved working order the
respective portions of the work herein specified.
      Existing power distribution and control cabinets shall be disconnected, removed, and salvaged in accordance
with Section 539 “Electrical Demolition and Removal”.

                                                 MATERIALS
710.02 Materials and Equipment.
     A. Conformance. All equipment and its installation shall conform to the requirements of the latest revision
        of the Standard Specifications for Movable Highway Bridges of the American Association of State
        Highway and Transportation Officials, except as may be otherwise provided herein.
              Materials and construction shall conform to the requirements of the current National Electrical Code
        and to any applicable local rules and ordinances. The Contractor shall obtain any required permits and
        approvals of all Departments or Agencies having jurisdiction.
     B. Equipment and Material Provisions. All power distribution and control cabinet equipment and materials
        shall be new. All equipment, materials, and workmanship shall be first-rate in every aspect of this project
        and shall be manufactured and installed to the satisfaction of the Engineer, and NJDOT MBEG and
        Maintenance Department. See Section 707, “Electrical Work” for Control System Vendor Requirements.
        The Contractor shall warrantee the in-service working of the power distribution and control cabinet for



Route 35 over Manasquan River Bridge Rehabilitation
Monmouth and Ocean Counties                                                                                    Page 207
          one year following the date of project acceptance. If the Contractor has any objection to any feature of
          the equipment as designed and laid out, the Contractor must state the objection at once, in writing, to the
          Engineer and NJDOT MBEG; otherwise, the Contractor‟s objection will be not be valid as an excuse for
          operational malfunctioning of the equipment or for defective or broken apparatus.
                Each piece of electrical equipment and apparatus shall have a corrosion-resisting non-rusting metal
          nameplate, on which is stamped the name of the manufacturer, the rating or capacity, and all other
          relevant information of the equipment and/or apparatus.
                All mounting hardware and all wire and cable terminals shall be vibration-proof and weather-proof.
                If any changes from the Plans or these Specifications are deemed necessary by the Contractor,
          details of such departures and the reasons therefore shall be submitted for approval as soon as practicable
          before construction. No such changes shall be made without approval of the Engineer and NJDOT
          MBEG.
                The power distribution and control cabinet equipment drawings, operation, and maintenance
          procedures shall be included in the electrical Instruction Books and Drawing Books as described in
          Section 707, “Electrical Work”.
                Material requirements for apparatus, equipment, and materials will be found in the articles under
          "Construction" in this item.

                                                  CONSTRUCTION
710.03 Construction.
     A. The Contractor shall field verify all dimensions of equipment and cabinets to be installed. If relocation is
         necessary, it will be at no cost to the State.
     B. Cabinet. Control panels enclosed in free-standing cabinets shall be furnished and installed where shown
         on the Plans. All circuit breakers, switches, contactors, starters, relays, regulating equipment, and other
         apparatus for control of the bascule span and its auxiliaries shall be mounted on these enclosed panels.
         The arrangement and line-up of the power distribution and control cabinet shall be as shown on the Plans.
               All equipment in the cabinet shall be mounted on painted sheet-steel bases, and each device shall be
         front-connected, front-wired, and removable from the front. The equipment in the cabinet shall be
         arranged for ease of access and for safety and convenience of operation. Special care shall be taken to
         obtain a systematic and neat arrangement of the equipment. Each device shall be suitably named and
         plainly marked by a laminated nameplate mounted near the device on the panel. Each nameplate shall
         show an approved descriptive title for the apparatus, together with the device designation appearing on
         the schematic wiring diagrams.
               The cabinet shall be a NEMA Type 12 enclosure constructed of No. 12 gauge sheet-steel and shall
         be reinforced with steel angles or channels so as to provide a rigid, free-standing structure. The cabinet
         shall be provided with stainless steel continuous hinged doors on the front of each panel section. Door
         panels shall be gasketed and shall be provided with three-point, vault-type latches. For this cabinet with
         two (2) doors, the center support shall be removable. Ventilating louvers shall be provided at the front of
         each enclosure. All hardware shall be corrosion resistant. Thermostatically controlled strip heaters shall
         be provided in each cabinet to prevent build-up of excess moisture. Each panel shall be provided with
         suitable interior fluorescent light fixtures operated from a door operated switch and a duplex receptacle.
               The cabinet shall permit mounting in the available space along the railing in the switchboard room
         of the SE house or wall mount type in the SW and NE houses. If the final cabinet dimensions, as
         established by the manufacturer, should necessitate rearrangement or modification of the equipment in
         order to fit in the available space, such rearrangement or modifications shall be made and at no extra cost.
         The final arrangement of all equipment in all houses shall be subject to the approval of the Engineer and
         NJDOT MBEG.
               The enclosure and all metal reinforcing shall be painted inside with two coats and outside with three
         coats, consisting of one coat of primer followed by one coat of white enamel on the inside surfaces and
         two coats of gray enamel outside. The finish coat shall be ANSI 61 light gray enamel.
               All contactors, relays, and other devices shall be of required current-carrying and interrupting
         capacity. All apparatus shall be of substantial construction and shall conform to the requirements of
         NEMA Standards Publications ICS 1 and 2, 1978, for industrial control devices.
               All internal wiring between devices and/or terminal blocks shall be flame-retardant, ethylene-
         propylene insulated, switchboard wire, Type SIS. Control conductors shall be stranded copper not
         smaller than No. 12 American Wire Gauge.


Route 35 over Manasquan River Bridge Rehabilitation
Monmouth and Ocean Counties                                                                                 Page 208
                For the assembled control panel, all outgoing wire, No. 8 AWG or smaller, shall be connected to
          terminal blocks installed at the sides of the cabinet. The control panels shall also provide sufficient extra
          terminals to allow connection of all wires coming from limit switches and other devices that connect to
          the bridge control desk and other locations as required, even though these wires may not connect to
          apparatus on the control panels. Spare terminals totaling at least 10 percent of those actually used shall
          be provided. Each terminal shall be identified per wire number shown on the Contractor's schematic
          wiring diagrams. All spare conductors entering any cabinet, terminal box shall be terminated on a
          terminal block.
                All panel wiring shall be arranged systematically so that circuits can be readily traced. The internal
          cabinet wiring shall be installed in a network of troughs consisting of horizontal and vertical sections
          securely bolted to the panels. The troughs shall be fabricated from heavy-duty Noryl plastic shaped into a
          channel cross-section. After installation of the wiring, an insulated, flanged cover shall be snapped over
          the open side of each trough section. Each floor-mounted cabinet/panel shall be provided with 1/8 inch
          neoprene, Fabreeka type gasket between the cabinet and floor.
     C.   Equipment Labels. All cabinets shall have a label affixed to each unit. The label shall be similar in
          construction to the nameplates. Each label shall be of suitable size and letter characteristics. Text shall
          indicate name/function of each item. Labels shall be securely attached using stainless steel screws. The
          Contractor shall submit to the Engineer and NJDOT MBEG for review, all signs, with sizes, location and
          text.
     D.   Power and Control Apparatus. Control apparatus shall conform to the applicable requirements of NEMA
          Publication No. ICS, latest revision, Industrial Control and Systems, rated as shown on the Plans and/or
          as specified in Section 707 – “ELECTRICAL WORK” – subsection W – “CONTROL APPARATUS
          AND MISCELLANEOUS EQUIPMENT”.
     E.   Power Distribution / Automatic Transfer Switch. The feeders from the utility power and standby power
          source shall be connected to a power distribution system through main circuit breakers and an automatic
          transfer switch. The utility power supply is to be the preferred source of bridge power. In the event of
          failure of the preferred source, the automatic transfer switch shall operate automatically to start and
          connect the standby engine-generator to the power distribution system. Sub-feeders protected by circuit
          breakers shall distribute power from the main breaker to all motors and controls for operation of the
          bridge, auxiliaries, climate control systems, and lighting systems.
     F.   Testing and Installation Guidelines. All testing and installation for the “Power Distribution and Control
          Cabinet” and all associated equipment shall be paid for under this Section. The Contractor shall follow
          the testing and installation guidelines in paragraphs A through I in Section 707, “Electrical Work”.

                                                COMPENSATION
710.04 Method of Measurement.
     Measurement will be on a lump sum basis.

710.05 Basis of Payment.
     Payment will be made under:
         Pay Item                                                                                   Pay Unit
         POWER DISTRIBUTION AND CONTROL CABINET                                                     LUMP SUM


           SECTION 711 - TRAFFIC WARNING GATES AND BARRIER GATES
711.01 Description.
      The work shall consist of furnishing, installing, and placing in proper operating condition, acceptable to
NJDOT and consultant, the Traffic Warning Gates and Barrier Gates, complete with all appurtenances, including
anchor bolts, required for proper operation. The Traffic Warning gates shall be VW-5 as manufactured by B&B
Roadway or equal if, acceptable to NJDOT MBEG, the Engineer, and NJDOT Maintenance Department. The
Barrier Gates shall be VR-7 as manufactured by B&B Roadway or equal if, acceptable to NJDOT MBEG, the
Engineer and NJDOT Maintenance Department.
      All apparatus for controlling the operation of the Traffic Warning and Barrier Gates and all conduits, boxes,
wiring, cables, and other equipment required to extend the necessary circuits from the operator‟s house to the gates
shall be furnished and installed under the item of "Electrical Work." Platforms, brackets, and foundations for


Route 35 over Manasquan River Bridge Rehabilitation
Monmouth and Ocean Counties                                                                                   Page 209
mounting the Traffic Warning and Barrier Gates are as shown on the structure plans and shall be paid for under the
Pay Item “PLATFORMS FOR BARRIER GATES AND WARNING GATES”.
      It is the intent and purpose of these Specifications to cover and include all apparatus, appliances, material,
plant and labor necessary to properly install, wire, connect, equip, test, adjust, and put in approved working order the
respective portions of the work herein specified.
      Existing Traffic Warning and Barrier Gates shall be disconnected, removed, and salvaged in accordance with
Section 539 - “Demolition and Removal”.
      The existing Barrier Gates shall remain in service until replacement items have been installed. The existing
Traffic Warning Gates shall remain in service until replacement items have been installed and are operational.
Traffic Warning gate arm lengths shall be different during construction stages. The arm lengths shall be as shown
on the Traffic Warning and Barrier Gates drawings.

                                                 MATERIALS
711.02 Materials.
     A. Conformance. All equipment and its installation shall conform to the requirements of the latest revision
        of the Standard Specifications for Movable Highway Bridges of the American Association of State
        Highway and Transportation Officials, except as may be otherwise provided herein.
              Materials and construction shall conform to the requirements of the current National Electrical Code
        and to any applicable local rules and ordinances. The Contractor shall obtain any required permits and
        approvals of all Departments or Agencies having jurisdiction.
     B. Equipment and Material Provisions. All Traffic Warning and Barrier Gates equipment and materials
        shall be new. All equipment, materials, and workmanship shall be first rate in every particular aspect and
        shall be manufactured and installed to the satisfaction of the Engineer, NJDOT MBEG and Maintenance
        Department. The Contractor shall warrantee the in-service working of the Traffic Warning and Barrier
        Gates for one year following the date of project acceptance. If the Contractor has any objection to any
        feature of the equipment as designed and laid out, he must state his objection at once, in writing, to the
        Engineer and NJDOT MBEG; otherwise, his objection will be not be valid as an excuse for operational
        malfunctioning of the equipment or for defective or broken apparatus.
              Each piece of electrical equipment and apparatus shall have a corrosion-resisting non-rusting metal
        nameplate, on which is stamped the name of the manufacturer, the rating or capacity, and all other
        relevant information of the equipment and/or apparatus.
              All metal parts of the installation shall be of corrosion-resisting, non-rusting material such as
        aluminum, bronze, or stainless steel. Proposed material shall be approved by the Engineer and NJDOT
        MBEG prior to construction. Malleable iron, or steel with a hot-dip galvanized finish, shall be used
        where specified herein or permitted by the Engineer and NJDOT MBEG. Structural steel shall conform
        to the requirements given under this Contract.
              All mounting hardware and all wire and cable terminals shall be vibration-proof and weather-proof.
              If any changes from the Plans or these Specifications are deemed necessary by the Contractor,
        details of such departures and the reasons therefore shall be submitted for approval as soon as practicable
        before construction. No such changes shall be made without approval of the Engineer and NJDOT
        MBEG.
              Material requirements for apparatus, equipment, and materials will be found in the articles under
        "Construction" in this item.

                                           CONSTRUCTION
711.03 Construction.
     A. Working Drawings and Samples. The Contractor shall prepare and submit for review, within 30 days
        after the award of the Contract, the following working drawings executed in accordance with the
        provisions of the Contract:
             1. Assembly drawings of the barrier gate stands locating and identifying all apparatus and
                 equipment inside.
             2. Arrangement and complete construction details of the Traffic Warning and Barrier Gates
                 operating machinery.
             3. Detail drawings showing the construction of gate arms, including provisions for guying and
                 bracing.
             4. Traffic Warning and Barrier Gates construction details.


Route 35 over Manasquan River Bridge Rehabilitation
Monmouth and Ocean Counties                                                                                    Page 210
              5.    Wiring diagrams of all Traffic Warning and Barrier Gates electrical equipment, including
                    development diagrams for the gate limit switches. All wires shall be suitably numbered.
              6. Certified dimension prints of apparatus shall state in the certification the name of the job, the
                    application of the apparatus, device designation, number required, right-hand or left-hand
                    assembly, electrical rating, number of poles or contacts, material, finish, and any other pertinent
                    data to show that the apparatus meets the specified requirements.
               The preparation and submission of the electrical working drawings shall meet the provisions for
         Shop Drawings given in Section 105.04 of the New Jersey Standard Specifications.
               The Contractor shall also furnish eight copies of complete operation and maintenance and servicing
         data for the Traffic Warning and Barrier Gates. The first copy shall be submitted for approval by NJDOT
         MBEG before all copies are made. This data shall be incorporated in the instruction books provided
         under the item of Section 707, “Electrical Work”.
    B.   Inspection and Testing. The Contractor shall arrange for and provide all necessary field tests, as directed
         by the Engineer and NJDOT MBEG, to demonstrate that the Traffic Warning and Barrier Gates are in
         proper working order and in accordance with the Plans and Specifications. Should the tests show that any
         piece of equipment or apparatus, in the judgment of the Engineer and NJDOT MBEG, is defective or
         functions improperly, such adjustments or replacements shall be made by the Contractor as to make the
         installation satisfactory to the Engineer and NJDOT MBEG and at no extra cost to the State of New
         Jersey.
               During the field/acceptance testing period, the Contractor shall arrange to have at the site the barrier
         gate manufacturer representative. This representative shall be capable of supervising all adjustments to
         the equipment; of locating faults or defects and correcting them if possible; and of obtaining from the
         manufacturer, without delay, new parts or replacements for apparatus, which, in the opinion of the
         Engineer and NJDOT MBEG, does not perform satisfactorily.
               Field operational testing of the gates shall demonstrate the balance condition of the gate arms such
         that a stationery arm remains in the same position when the brake is released, proper manual operation
         and operational features specified herein.
    C.   Traffic Warning Gates. Two (2) motor operated Traffic Warning Gates shall be furnished and installed on
         the approaches where shown on the plans. The Traffic Warning Gates shall be B&B Roadway VW-5 or
         Engineer and NJDOT MBEG approved equal.
               Each gate shall have an arm of the length shown on the Plans, which shall open through an angle of
         90 degrees from the horizontal to the vertical. Each gate shall have a welded steel stand arranged to
         provide a weathertight housing for the motor, disconnect switch, gear train, limit switch, and fuses for
         warning lights. The gate stands shall be hot-dip galvanized after fabrication. The transmission gearing
         for each gate shall be enclosed. Weathertight, gasketed doors shall be provided for access to the
         operating equipment. A hand crank shall be provided for manual operation of each gate and stored inside
         the gate housing.
               The gate arms shall be made of double rail, 4” square, 6005-T5 aluminum extruded tubing. Each
         gate arm shall be adequately braced transverse to its motion to resist wind loads and to reduce whipping
         and shall be guyed to prevent sagging. Each assembled gate arm shall be designed for a 75 miles-per-
         hour wind load. Stainless steel truss cables and a damping type bumper rod with compression spring
         shall be provided near the end of each gate arm to stop the travel at the closed position without undue
         shock. Gate arms shall be equipped with guy wires configured in such a way that they do not project
         beyond the gate housing into the sidewalk when the gate is in the vertical position.
               All bolts, screws, or other fastenings used in the gate arm assembly and for connection to the gate
         stand shall be of stainless steel.
               The number of warning lights on the gate arms shall be as shown on the wiring diagrams. Each
         warning light shall be a weatherproof, two-way, cast-aluminum unit with red Fresnel lenses, front and
         back. The lights shall be interconnected and grounded with four-conductor portable cord using watertight
         connectors at the fixtures. A 12 volt, clear traffic LED signal lamp shall be installed in each fixture. The
         lights shall be connected so that adjacent units will flash alternately. Fuses for the warning lights shall be
         5-ampere midget cartridge fuses installed in molded rubber connection kits. Each gate housing shall
         include a 120/12V solid state flasher.
               An 8-circuit limit switch shall be provided in each gate operated by the gate mechanism. Each limit
         switch shall be a rotary, cam-type, switch; and it shall be gear driven from the transmission. The contacts
         shall be quick-break with silver alloy buttons. The limit switch shaft shall be stainless steel, and cams


Route 35 over Manasquan River Bridge Rehabilitation
Monmouth and Ocean Counties                                                                                   Page 211
         shall be secured thereto with set screws. A hand crank limit switch with 2 NO and 2 NC contacts shall be
         provided to prevent electrical operation of gates while hand cranking.
               The motor for each warning gate shall be sized as shown on the Plans and furnished as part of the
         gate by the gate manufacturer. Each motor shall be a totally-enclosed, 460-volt, three-phase, 60-cycle,
         ball-bearing induction motor and shall be capable of withstanding instant reversal when running at full
         speed. Each motor and gear train shall be capable of opening and closing the gate in about 13 seconds. A
         motor-mounted, spring-set, magnetically-released, disc brake shall be provided for stopping and holding
         the mechanism. A watertight disconnect switch shall be provided to permit disconnecting the motor and
         brake from the incoming power.
               All internal wiring for each gate shall be brought to numbered terminal blocks inside the housing for
         the connection of external circuits.
               Each gate arm shall be striped on both faces with alternate red and white reflectorized stripes 6
         inches wide measured parallel to the edge of the gate arm. The stripes shall slope downward at an angle
         of 45 degrees toward the center line of the roadway. The gate stands shall be painted in accordance with
         the requirements hereinbefore specified under the item of "Bridge Electrical" - Painting. Gate arm
         channels and supports shall be galvanized or painted in accordance with the requirements specified herein
         for painting structural steel.
               Each warning gate shall be bolted to its concrete base as indicated on the Plans. In erecting the
         gates, the arms shall be carefully attached to the supporting members so as to make a rigid connection.
         The arms shall be counterbalanced and the limit switches and crank arms adjusted so that the arms are
         stopped in a truly vertical or horizontal position, within 1 degree. All gate anchor bolts and mounting
         templates shall be furnished by the gate manufacturer.
               All components of the gate operating mechanism shall be housed in a welded steel housing, hot-dip
         galvanized inside and out after fabrication. Doors shall be provided on the roadway and sidewalk side of
         the housing, large enough for convenient removal of the largest component of the operating mechanism.
         Doors shall be provided with neoprene gaskets, stainless steel swing bolts and catches, and safety
         interlock switches.
               Each gate housing shall be equipped with a thermostatically controlled heater; switched service
         light; and duplex, 15-ampere, 120-volt, Specification Grade GFI receptacle. A 15-ampere circuit breaker
         shall protect the above units and be mounted in the gate housing. Provisions for hand cranking, including
         crank, and limit switch, shall be furnished.
               Each warning gate shall be furnished with lockable doors and chain-attached bronze padlocks. All
         locks shall be keyed alike, identical to the barrier gate housing locks.
    D.   Positive Resistance Barrier Gates. Four (4) motor operated, positive resistance (vertical) Barrier Gates
         shall be furnished and installed on the approaches where shown on the Plans. The Barrier Gates shall be
         B&B Roadway VR-7 or Engineer and NJDOT MBEG approved equal. The double arms shall be
         arranged to lock together at the tips of the arms to provide a resistance barrier to traffic. Location of the
         male-female end locking device shall be as shown on the Plans.
               The operating mechanism shall move the gate arm through 90 degrees of travel in about 16 seconds
         against a wind load of 15 PSF. The motor for each barrier gate arm shall be a 460-volt, 60-cycle, three-
         phase, high-slip, NEMA Design C, ball-bearing, totally enclosed, non-ventilated (TENV), weatherproof,
         squirrel-cage type rated for not less than 2-horsepower. The barrier gate arm shall be held at each end of
         travel by a mechanically set, electrically released, motor mounted brake. The drive mechanism and
         motor brake shall be capable of holding the gate arm vertical against a wind load of 30 PSF.
               Gear reducers for driving the arms shall be totally enclosed in oil-tight steel housings and shall be
         automatically lubricated. Oil sight gauges shall be provided. All driving components shall be
         proportioned so that the maximum stress in any part does not exceed 50 percent of the yield point of the
         material at the stalled torque of the motor.
               The transmission shall be a fully enclosed, all gear, direct drive unit running in an oil bath. The
         drive train shall not use belts or chains and shall be connected to the arm shaft with an adjustable
         connecting rod having self-aligning ball ends. The connecting rod material shall be ASTM A311 Class B
         high strength, fatigue resistant steel.
               A 10-circuit rotary cam limit switch with adjustable cams, driven by the gear train, shall be provided
         for control of the barrier gate and for interlocking. A motor disconnect switch shall be installed in the
         barrier gate housing. Reversing contactors shall be mounted on the bridge control panels under the item
         of “Electrical Work”.


Route 35 over Manasquan River Bridge Rehabilitation
Monmouth and Ocean Counties                                                                                  Page 212
               Provisions shall be made for hand operation, and a hand crank shall be furnished for each barrier
         gate. Insertion of the crank shall release the brake and make the electrical components inoperative. The
         hand crank limit switch shall contain two N.O. contacts.
               All conductors shall be brought to numbered terminal blocks for connection of incoming wiring.
               For each barrier gate, all components of the operating mechanism shall be housed in a welded steel
         housing having a minimum plate thickness of .375 inches. The entire housing shall be hot-dip
         galvanized, inside and out, after fabrication. All external fasteners 0.5” and above shall be stainless steel.
         Arm shaft openings shall incorporate “O” rings.
               Doors shall be provided in the roadway side and back side of the housing, large enough for
         convenient removal of the largest component of the operating mechanism. Doors shall be equipped with
         neoprene gaskets, silicon bronze hinges with stainless steel pins, stainless steel catches and bolts, safety
         interlock switches with two normally open and two normally closed contacts, and chain-attached bronze
         padlocks with common keys. The doors shall be equipped with a DPDT door safety switch. Opening of
         a housing door shall disable the electrical motor and controls, and cancel any barrier gate operation and
         group operation, as described in the “Electrical Work” item.
               An opening shall be provided for inserting the hand crank. There shall be a minimum of three (3)
         feet around the hand crank to provide an adequate operation area. Insertion of the crank shall release the
         brake and make the electrical controls inoperative. Safety interlock switches with two normally open and
         two normally closed contacts shall be provided. An easily accessible, but secure hand crank insertion
         shall automatically cancel any group operation.
               Arm supports and counterweights shall be carried on a horizontal trunnion supported on trunnion
         bearings mounted on the housing.
               Each barrier gate housing shall be equipped with a thermostatically controlled heater, switched
         service light, duplex, 15-ampere, 120-volt, specification grade GFCI receptacle. A 175-watt, 15-ampere,
         120-volt circuit breaker shall be installed to protect the above units.
               The barrier gate arm design shall be double rail aluminum tube. The double rail barrier gate arms
         shall be fabricated of extruded, round aluminum tube, manufactured from high-strength, 6061-T6,
         aluminum tubes as shown on the Plans. Length of the barrier gate arms shall be as shown on the Plans
         and shall be fabricated in accordance with requirements of the American Welding Society Structural
         Welding Code – Aluminum D1.2. The arms shall be so fabricated that the out-of-straight of any tube
         from end to end shall not exceed ¾ inch. A bumper rod with compression spring shall be provided to
         stop the travel at the lowered position without undue shock. The bumper shall be of a heavy-duty design.
               The Barrier Gates shall be capable of absorbing the energy of a 5,000-pound vehicle traveling up to
         50 mph. The barrier gate shall utilize energy absorption cables to assist in diffusing the kinetic energy of
         an impacting vehicle. The barrier gate arms shall have three ½ inch diameter minimum energy
         absorption cables, one inside each tube and a third hung along the centerline of the arm. Cables shall be
         6x25 300-series stainless steel, annealed. The rope shall be kept straight in the annealing furnace and
         shall not be coiled before installation in the gate arms.
               In the event of a collision, the energy absorption cables shall be anchored at both ends of the bascule
         span in the closed to traffic position. The cables shall engage end anchorages in front of each housing
         and connect to each other through a jaw and toggle at the ends of the arms. The cables shall be strung
         with the minimum amount of tension required to hold the cables in position without excessive sag. The
         end lock assembly shall facilitate locking the barrier to another barrier.
               The number of warning lights on the gate arms shall be as shown on the wiring diagrams on the
         Plans. Each warning light shall be a weatherproof, two-way, molded plastic unit with 7 inch red plastic
         lenses, front and back. The lights shall be interconnected with three-conductor portable cord using
         watertight connectors at the fixtures. A 12 Volt, 21 candle power LED traffic signal lamp shall be
         installed in each fixture. The lights shall be connected so that adjacent units shall flash alternately. Fuses
         for the warning lights shall be 10-ampere midget cartridge fuses installed in molded rubber connection
         kits. In each gate shall include a 120/12 volt flasher. Gate lights will be connected to flash alternate 0.5
         seconds on and 0.5 seconds off with light at tip to burn constantly. Wiring for warning light shall be
         wired in such a way as to not affect pedestrian traffic. It must be in a safe and secured position.
               Barrier gate delineators shall be mounted on brackets on the barrier gate arms as shown on the
         Plans. Two delineators shall be provided for each gate arm.
               The barrier gate housings shall be set first. The Barrier shall be fixed to a suitable foundation, by
         using, eight, minimum 1” diameter anchor bolts. Before the anchor bolts are tightened and the housings


Route 35 over Manasquan River Bridge Rehabilitation
Monmouth and Ocean Counties                                                                                   Page 213
          permanently set, their position shall be verified by checking that the axis of rotation is parallel to the
          bridge centerline, that the housings of the gate is on the same centerline, and that the support arms are
          correctly spaced apart for mounting the gate arms. Each barrier gate shall be bolted to its concrete
          foundation as indicated on the Plans.
                After the housings are set, the gate arms shall be attached using the nominal shim thickness at the
          support arms and the center jaw and toggle. The shims at the support arms and the backstays shall be
          adjusted so that the arms are truly horizontal in the down position and meet the end lock on the exact
          centerline. The center jaw and toggle shall then be shimmed so that the toggle is exactly centered in the
          jaw at 69 degrees Fahrenheit ambient temperature. The counterweights shall then be adjusted so that the
          arms are exactly balanced in all positions.
                After completion of the gates, the end anchorages for the restrainer cables shall be set to provide the
          clearances shown on the Plans for engaging the end toggles, and the ring nuts at the center jaw. Toggle
          shall be set to provide the clearances shown on the Plans. A limit switch at the end of one gate in each
          pair shall be furnished to indicate when both gate arms are down and locked.
                To detect locking of the Barrier Gates, a magnetic proximity switch is to be attached to the two
          female end lock assemblies, and a flexible cable shall be run between the proximity switch and the
          terminal blocks in the barrier gate housing. An adjustable target assembly shall be attached to the two
          male end lock assemblies.
                When the gates are electrically operable, they shall be operated as in normal use and the limit
          switches adjusted so that each arm is stopped within 1 degree of the vertical or horizontal position. The
          manufacturer of the gate shall provide all required anchor bolts and templates for gate and dog units.
                Each gate arm shall be striped on both faces with alternate red and white reflectorized stripes 6
          inches wide, measured parallel to the edge of the gate arm. The stripes shall slope downward at an angle
          of 45 degrees toward the centerline of the roadway. The galvanized gate stands shall be left unpainted so
          that the galvanized surfaces can weather. Gate arms, channels, and supports shall be painted in
          accordance with the requirements specified for painting structural steel and moving parts, except the arms
          shall be painted red as required under “Mechanical Work”.
                Each barrier gate shall be operated from individual momentary pushbuttons on the control desk. In
          addition, the group of four Barrier Gates shall be provided with a group raising pushbutton. After a
          momentary contact of the pushbutton, all Barrier Gates shall travel to their fully raised limits. The group
          shall stop immediately upon momentary contact of the group‟s stop pushbutton.
     D.   Grounding. All metallic conduits, equipment enclosures, frames, housing, and all other metal parts of
          electrical systems installed or connected under this item, in the proximity of current-carrying conductors
          or equipment shall be bonded to the bridge ground system. Grounding and bonding shall conform to the
          requirements given under the item of “Lightning Protection and Grounding Systems”.
     E.   Spare Parts. The following Traffic Warning and Barrier Gates spare parts shall be furnished and packed
          in suitable cartons for storage at the bridge:
               1. 2 barrier gate arms (one male locking type, one female locking type), complete with restrainer
                    cables, jaws, toggles, and fittings, but without lights and wiring. Gate arms shall be suitably
                    crated, labeled, and delivered as hereinafter indicated.
               2. 6 warning light fixtures, complete
               3. 12, 21 candle power, 12-volt, signal lamps
               4. 3 limit switch contacts
                The Contractor shall arrange the spare parts in uniform-size cartons of substantial construction, with
          typed and clearly varnished labels to indicate their contents. All spare parts shall be furnished and
          delivered where directed by the Engineer and NJDOT MBEG at no additional cost.

711.04 NJDOT Acceptance.
     The Contractor shall not deviate from the Engineer‟s design, in any way, without written authorization from
the Engineer and NJDOT MBEG. All aspects of the Traffic Warning and Barrier Gates and warning light
assemblies installation must be approved by the Engineer and NJDOT MBEG prior to construction. All aspects of
Traffic Warning and Barrier Gates and warning light assemblies must be completely and fully operational and
accepted by NJDOT MBEG and Maintenance. Payment to the Contractor will only be warranted when complete
acceptance has been given in writing by NJDOT MBEG and Maintenance.

                                                COMPENSATION


Route 35 over Manasquan River Bridge Rehabilitation
Monmouth and Ocean Counties                                                                                   Page 214
711.05 Method of Measurement.
     Measurement will be on a lump sum basis.

711.06 Basis of Payment.
     Payment will be made under.
         Pay Item                                                                                    Pay Unit
         TRAFFIC WARNING AND BARRIER GATES                                                           LUMP SUM


                       SECTION 712 - CONTROL DESK MODIFICATIONS
712.01 Description.
      The work shall consist of furnishing, installing, and placing in proper operating condition, acceptable to
NJDOT MBEG and the Engineer, on the existing control desk, two resolver selector switches and red flasher fault
reset pushbutton complete with all appurtenances, required for proper operation.
      All conduits, boxes, wiring, cables, and other equipment required to extend the necessary circuits to and from
the control desk shall be furnished and installed under the item of "Raceway, Conductors, Terminations, and
Boxes." All internal control desk wiring shall be paid for under this Section, and shall conform to the requirements
in "Raceway, Conductors, Terminations, and Boxes.
      It is the intent and purpose of these Specifications to cover and include all apparatus, appliances, material,
plant and labor necessary to properly install, wire, connect, equip, test, adjust, and put in approved working order the
respective portions of the work herein specified.

                                                  MATERIALS
712.02 Materials and Equipment.
     A. Conformance. All equipment and its installation shall conform to the requirements of the latest revision
        of the Standard Specifications for Movable Highway Bridges of the American Association of State
        Highway and Transportation Officials, except as may be otherwise provided herein.
              Materials and construction shall conform to the requirements of the current National Electrical Code
        and to any applicable local rules and ordinances. The Contractor shall obtain any required permits and
        approvals of all Departments or Agencies having jurisdiction.
     B. Equipment and Material Provisions. The existing control desk additional equipment and materials shall
        be new. All workmanship shall be first-class in every aspect of this project and shall be manufactured
        and erected to the satisfaction of the Engineer, and NJDOT MBEG and Maintenance Department. See
        Section 707, “Electrical Work” for Control System Vendor Requirements. The Contractor shall
        warrantee the in-service working of the modified control desk for one year following the date of project
        acceptance. If the Contractor has any objection to any feature of the equipment as designed and laid out,
        the Contractor must state the objection at once, in writing, to the Engineer and NJDOT MBEG;
        otherwise, the Contractor‟s objection will be not be valid as an excuse for operational malfunctioning of
        the equipment or for defective or broken apparatus.
              New piece of electrical equipment and apparatus, to be installed under this section, shall have a
        corrosion-resisting non-rusting metal nameplate, on which is stamped the name of the manufacturer, the
        rating or capacity, and all other relevant information of the equipment and/or apparatus.
              All mounting hardware and all wire and cable terminals shall be vibration-proof and weather-proof.
              If any changes from the Plans or these Specifications are deemed necessary by the Contractor,
        details of such departures and the reasons therefore shall be submitted for approval as soon as practicable
        before construction. No such changes shall be made without approval of the Engineer and NJDOT
        MBEG.
              The control desk and equipment drawings, operation, and maintenance procedures shall be included
        in the electrical Instruction Books and Drawing Books as described in Section 707, “Electrical Work”.
              Material requirements for apparatus, equipment, and materials will be found in the articles under
        "Construction" in this item.

                                                 CONSTRUCTION
712.03 Construction.




Route 35 over Manasquan River Bridge Rehabilitation
Monmouth and Ocean Counties                                                                                    Page 215
    A.   Control Desk. The existing control desk shall be modified by furnishing and installing additional selector
         switches, pushbuttons etc. in the operator's room of the Southeast house. On the desk shall be mounted
         additional devices for controlling operation of the bascule span and its auxiliaries. The modified desk
         shall be of neat, substantial construction. All metal hardware shall be of substantial construction and
         shall have a satin-chrome plate finish. All equipment mounting screws and bolts shall be stainless steel.
               Special care shall be taken throughout the construction to insure that the existing control desk
         equipment mounted thereon are completely protected from damage or defacement at all times while the
         control desk modification is being carried on.
               Existing two fluorescent desk interior service lights, 15 amp duplex receptacle and thermostatically
         controlled strip heater installed in the desk interior may have to be located while new PLC drop and
         required terminal strips are being installed. It is the responsibility of the Contractor that the Contractor
         minimizes the relocation of the existing reusable equipment.
               Digital Meters.
                     1. The existing digital meters are:
                                a. Main Power Bus – Volts, Amps & Kilowatts
                                b. Lighting Power Bus – Volts, Amps & Kilowatts
                                c. Bascule span Motor – RPM
               All meters are powered at 120 VAC. – Each meter shall provide a separate 4-20 mA output to allow
         interconnection to the new PLC. The vendor shall provide connection cables and plugs of sufficient
         length to interconnect the meters and the adjacent new I/O drop in the desk.
               A new two? InView panel mount two line display unit, Allen Bradley Catalog Number 2706-P22R
         shall be installed in the vicinity of the existing control desk. Proposed location of the InView unit shall
         be to the left of the existing digital clock mounted on the top of the desk pinnacle, after field verification
         by the Contractor/control system vendor.
               A12-key sealed numeric keypad shall be mounted semi-flush on the control desk top. The keypad
         and message display unit shall permit the bridge operator and maintenance personnel to inquire about and
         verify various parameters of the bridge control system. The message display unit shall also annunciate
         faults and malfunctions such as blown input fuses, causes of bascule span drive permissive faults and
         other abnormal events. Various codes shall be entered by the user via the keypad and the appropriate
         information shall be displayed on the message display unit and/or sent to the printer for a hard copy as
         desired. The codes and their functions shall be documented in the Operation and Maintenance Manual.
               Message Display Unit:
               The InView message display unit to be furnished shall be a two-line, 20 characters per line, LED
         matrix Window based programmable unit. The characters are to be 0.7 inch high requiring 24 V dc
         power supply. The InView unit shall be in a NEMA 4X, 316 L stainless steel enclosure.
               The unit shall be capable of displaying up to two hundred fifty (250) 20-character messages or 150
         40-character messages. Single or multiple messages may be displayed simultaneously, scrolled, chained,
         blinked, or overlaid. Menu driven program shall allow viewing of messages on the display screen during
         programming. An external printer port shall be provided to allow interconnection of the printer.
         Connection of the printer cable to the display unit's printer port shall be made external to the PLC user
         console via a semi-flush mounted socket furnished on the interior of the desk The data liner message
         display shall be as indicated on the plan sheets and any additional messages required by the Engineer and
         NJDOT MBEG. The message display shall be powered from the UPS to prevent the loss of clock time.
               The Vendor shall furnish and deliver to the MBEG office, all required computer hardware, InView
         P22R windows-based software, and interconnect cables to provide programming of the “Programmable
         Message Unit”.
               Keyboard Unit:
               A sealed numeric keyboard unit shall be furnished and installed on the control desk. The NEMA 13
         keyboard shall contain 12 jam-proof keys wired so there will be one output per key plus one common.
         Plastic buttons with 0.190-inch high, engraved legend are to be covered with black neoprene. Contacts
         shall be rated 6-20 MA at 4-12 VDC, and operating force shall be 16 oz. nominal. Buttons shall be gray,
         with black legends having the marking 0-9, E and CE. Wiring to the terminals shall be of the quick-
         connect type. RFI shielding shall be incorporated into the keyboard. The keyboard shall be approved
         equal to PN No. PX1P12K10A2A-013 as manufactured by Micro Switch.
               The message display unit and keypad shall be interconnected with the PLC via I/O cards in the
         remote rack located inside the bridge control desk. The Contractor shall provide all conduits, conductors


Route 35 over Manasquan River Bridge Rehabilitation
Monmouth and Ocean Counties                                                                                   Page 216
           and multiconductor cables necessary to render the PLC user console operable. In addition, the Contractor
           shall furnish and install all wiring plugs, connectors and power supplies to allow the keyboard unit and
           message display to be functional.
                 Sockets for testing lamps used in meters and in the position indicator shall be installed inside the
           control desk. The desk interior shall be suitably lighted and controlled by a switch mounted near the front
           doors. One duplex receptacle shall be mounted in the desk's interior.
                 All contact blocks for control switches, pushbuttons, and other control devices shall be mounted
           within the body of the desk. The operators for these devices shall protrude through the desk top. The
           indicating lights for each operation shall be incorporated with the control device governing that operation.
                 The escutcheon plates of all new control switches, pushbuttons, tumbler switches and bypass
           switches shall be made of a hot-polished, laminated phenolic compound no less than 3/16-inch thick. The
           compound shall have a white surface 1/32-inch thick, an intermediate black layer 1/32-inch thick, and a
           white back 1/8 inch thick. All corners shall be rounded, and the edges of the plates shall be chamfered.
           All engraving shall be upper case, standard gothic characters, cut through the surface into the
           intermediate layer. All plates shall be securely fastened to the desk top with stainless steel screws.
                 The existing wiring within the control desk shall be replaced with new insulated switchboard wire
           Type SIS. Wire shall not be smaller than #14 AWG except all power wiring for lights, heaters and major
           power feeds shall not be smaller than 12 gauge. The wiring shall be arranged systematically so that all
           circuits can be readily traced. All conductors shall be terminated on easily accessible terminal blocks
           mounted inside the desk at the rear. Spare terminals totaling at least 10 percent of those actually used
           shall be provided. Wiring shall be identified at equipment terminals by marking the adjacent area with
           bright yellow painted numbers to correspond to conductor designations appearing on the Contractor's
           wiring diagrams.
                 Indicating lamps shall be replaced with new in-kind type and shall be mounted on the control desk
           to show that the various steps in the sequence of operation have taken place so that the operator may
           proceed to subsequent steps at the proper time. The functions to be indicated and the color of the lenses
           shall be as shown on the Plans.
                 A remote PLC I/O rack and all associated equipment shall be mounted within the desk to
           incorporate the selector switches, pushbuttons, indicating lights, relays, and desk meters with the PLC.
     B.    Testing and Installation Guidelines. All testing and installation for the “Control Desk” and all associated
           equipment shall be paid for under this Section. The Contractor shall follow the testing and installation
           guidelines in paragraphs A through I in Section 707, “Electrical Work”.

                                                 COMPENSATION
712.04 Method of Measurement.
     Measurement will be on a lump sum basis.

712.05 Basis of Payment.
     Payment will be made under.
         Pay Item                                                                                    Pay Unit
         CONTROL DESK MODIFICATIONS                                                                  LUMP SUM


                     SECTION 713 - FLUX VECTOR DRIVE AND CABINET
713.01 Description.
      The work under this section shall include furnishing, installing, and placing in proper operating condition,
acceptable to NJDOT MBEG and the Engineer, four flux vector drives and four cabinets, dynamic braking modules,
resistors, and bascule span motor assemblies, complete with all required appurtenances.
      All conduits, boxes, wiring, cables, and other equipment required to extend the necessary circuits to and from
the flux vector drive cabinets shall be furnished and installed under the item of "Raceway, Conductors,
Terminations, and Boxes." All modified internal control desk wiring shall be paid for under this Section, and shall
conform to the requirements in "Raceway, Conductors, Terminations, and Boxes.
      It is the intent and purpose of these Specifications to cover and include all apparatus, appliances, material,
plant and labor necessary to properly install, wire, connect, equip, test, adjust, and put in approved working order the
respective portions of the work herein specified.


Route 35 over Manasquan River Bridge Rehabilitation
Monmouth and Ocean Counties                                                                                    Page 217
     Existing thyristor drive cabinets and bascule span motors shall be disconnected, removed, and salvaged in
accordance with Section 540 “Demolition and Removal”.

                                                 MATERIALS
713.02 Materials.
     A. Conformance. All equipment and its installation shall conform to the requirements of the latest revision
        of the Standard Specifications for Movable Highway Bridges of the American Association of State
        Highway and Transportation Officials, except as may be otherwise provided herein.
              Materials and construction shall conform to the requirements of the current National Electrical Code
        and to any applicable local rules and ordinances. The Contractor shall obtain any required permits and
        approvals of all Departments or Agencies having jurisdiction.
     B. Equipment and Material Provisions. All flux vector drive cabinets equipment and materials shall be new.
        All equipment shall be UL approved, materials, and workmanship shall be first-class in every aspect of
        this project and shall be manufactured and erected to the satisfaction of the Engineer, and NJDOT MBEG
        and Maintenance Department. See Section 707, “Electrical Work” for Control System Vendor
        Requirements. The Contractor shall warrantee the in-service working of the flux vector drives and
        associated equipment for one year following the date of project acceptance. If the Contractor has an
        objection to any feature of the equipment as designed and laid out, he must state his objection, in writing,
        to the Engineer and NJDOT MBEG; otherwise, his objection will not be valid as an excuse for
        operational malfunctioning of the equipment or for defective or broken apparatus.
              Each piece of electrical equipment and apparatus shall have a corrosion-resisting non-rusting 316 L,
        stainless steel nameplate, on which is stamped the name of the manufacturer, the rating or capacity, and
        all other relevant information of the equipment and/or apparatus.
              All mounting hardware and all wire and cable terminals shall be vibration-proof and weather-proof.
              If any changes from the Plans or these Specifications are deemed necessary by the Contractor,
        details of such departures and the reasons therefore shall be submitted for approval as soon as practicable
        before construction. No such changes shall be made without approval of the Engineer and NJDOT
        MBEG.
              The flux vector drive cabinets and equipment drawings, operation, and maintenance procedures
        shall be included in the electrical Instruction Books and Drawing Books as described in Section 707,
        “Electrical Work”.
              Material requirements for apparatus and equipment, will be found in the articles under
        "Construction" in this item.

                                              CONSTRUCTION
713.03 Construction.
     A. Cabinets. Flux Vector Drive panels enclosed in free-standing floor cabinets shall be furnished and
        installed where shown on the Plans. All circuit breakers, switches, contactors, flux vector drives,
        regulating equipment, and other apparatus for control of the bascule span shall be mounted on these
        enclosed panels. The arrangement and line-up of the flux vector drive cabinets shall be as shown on the
        Plans.
              All equipment in the cabinet shall be mounted on painted sheet-steel bases, and each device shall be
        front-connected, front-wired, and removable from the front. The equipment in the cabinet shall be
        arranged for ease of access and for safety and convenience of operation. Special care shall be taken to
        obtain a systematic and neat arrangement of the equipment. Each device shall be suitably named and
        plainly marked by a laminated nameplate mounted near the device on the panel. Each nameplate shall
        show an approved descriptive title for the apparatus, together with the device designation appearing on
        the schematic wiring diagrams.
              The cabinets shall be NEMA Type 12 enclosures constructed of No. 12 gauge sheet-steel and shall
        be reinforced with steel angles or channels so as to provide a rigid, free-standing structure. The cabinets
        shall be provided with stainless steel continuous hinged doors on the front of each panel section. Door
        panels shall be gasketed and shall be provided with three-point, vault-type latches. Ventilating louvers
        shall be provided at the front of each enclosure. All hardware shall be corrosion resistant.
        Thermostatically controlled strip heaters shall be provided in each cabinet to prevent build-up of excess
        moisture. Each panel shall be provided with suitable interior fluorescent light fixtures operated by a door
        operated switch and a duplex receptacle.


Route 35 over Manasquan River Bridge Rehabilitation
Monmouth and Ocean Counties                                                                                Page 218
               The cabinets shall permit mounting in the available space along the walls of the switchboard room If
         the final cabinet dimensions (84”x30”x20”), as established by the manufacturer, should necessitate
         rearrangement or modification of the equipment in order to fit in the available space, such rearrangement
         or modifications shall be made and at no extra cost to NJDOT. The final arrangement of all equipment in
         the control house shall be subject to the approval of the Engineer and NJDOT MBEG.
               The enclosures and all metal reinforcing shall be painted inside with two coats and outside with
         three coats, consisting of one coat of primer followed by one coat of white enamel on the inside surfaces
         and two coats of gray enamel outside. The finish coat shall be ANSI 61 light gray enamel.
               All contactors, relays, and other devices shall be of required current-carrying and interrupting
         capacity. All apparatus shall be of substantial construction and shall conform to the requirements of latest
         NEMA Standards Publications ICS 1 and 2, for industrial control devices.
               All internal wiring between devices and/or terminal blocks shall be flame-retardant, ethylene-
         propylene insulated, switchboard wire, Type SIS. Control conductors shall be stranded copper not
         smaller than No. 14 American Wire Gauge.
               For the assembled panel, all outgoing wire, No. 8 AWG or smaller, shall be connected to terminal
         blocks installed at the sides of the cabinet. The panels shall also provide sufficient extra terminals to
         allow connection of all wires coming from limit switches and other devices that go on to the bridge
         control desk and other locations as required, even though these wires do not connect to apparatus on the
         control panels. Spare terminals totaling at least 10 percent of those actually used shall be provided. Each
         terminal shall be identified per wire number shown on the Contractor's schematic wiring diagrams. All
         spare conductors entering any cabinet, terminal box shall be terminated on a terminal block.
               All panel wiring shall be arranged systematically so that circuits can be readily traced. The internal
         cabinet wiring shall be installed in a network of troughs consisting of horizontal and vertical sections
         securely bolted to the panels. The troughs shall be fabricated from heavy-duty Noryl plastic shaped into a
         channel cross-section. After installation of the wiring, an insulated, flanged cover shall be snapped over
         the open side of each trough section. Each floor-mounted cabinet/panel shall be provided with 1/8 inch
         neoprene gasket with switchboard matting between the cabinet and floor platform.
    B.   Equipment Labels. All electrical devices and cabinet equipment shall have a label affixed to each unit.
         The label shall be similar in construction to the nameplates. Each label shall be of suitable size and letter
         characteristics. Text shall indicate name/function of each item. Labels shall be securely attached using
         stainless steel screws. The Contractor shall submit to the Engineer and NJDOT MBEG for review, all
         signs, with sizes, location and text.
    C.   Power and Control Apparatus. Power and control apparatus required for the flux vector drive assemblies
         shall meet the requirements stated in Section 527, “Power Distribution and Control Cabinet”.
    D.   Bascule Span Motor Control System. The Contractor shall furnish four (4) Flux Vector-Controlled
         Variable Frequency Drives (VFD‟s) with operating voltages and current ratings as shown on the Plans.
         VFD Systems shall be UL508 listed. The complete VFD system shall be manufactured and warranted by
         the VFD manufacturer. Third party assemblers will require prior approval, in writing, of the engineer and
         NJDOT MBEG.
               It is the intent of this specification to describe the minimum performance requirements of the VFD
         system. Any deviation shall be detailed in writing and submitted to the Engineer and NJDOT MBEG for
         approval at least two (2) weeks prior to bid time. The drive manufacturer shall visit the installation site
         prior to bid.
               The VFD System shall be compatible with the vector duty, squirrel-cage type, induction motor and
         shall be sized to ensure the motor full load amps (FLA) do not exceed the VFD's continuous current
         rating, with an overload capability of 180% of full load torque for 20 seconds and 150% for 60 seconds.
         The continuous output current rating of the drive shall be 112 Amps. The VFD drive shall be capable of
         providing 180% starting torque capability. If the VFD manufacturer's standard product is current rated at
         8 khz carrier frequency or below, a de-rating factor of 20% minimum shall be used to derive the
         maximum continuous current rating of the VFD. The VFD shall maintain full performance without de-
         rating for up to 300 feet long motor feeders. The drive manufacturer shall also include output load
         reactors to minimize insulation stress on the bascule span motors.
               The VFD's shall be IEEE 519 compliant for allowable harmonic distortion at the power distribution
         point of service, including line notching and transients. In the event that the VFD's produce Total
         Harmonic Distortion (THD) in excess of the prescribed limits of the utility company, the Contractor shall
         take all necessary steps at no additional expense to NJDOT to reduce such harmonics to the allowable


Route 35 over Manasquan River Bridge Rehabilitation
Monmouth and Ocean Counties                                                                                  Page 219
         limits. Total Current Harmonic Distortion (THD) measured at the power input terminals of VFD shall be
         20% or less at 50% or higher load. The Contractor shall also include voltage and current THD
         calculations at the point of service for the particular drive system when submitting the VFD System for
         approval.
               To minimize the impact during construction and make optimum use of training and spare parts
         resources, vendor responsibilities shall be as follows:
               1. Specified VFD's shall be supplied by one manufacturer.
               2. Like components of all VFD Systems, although for different services, sha